diff options
Diffstat (limited to '18571-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 18571-0.txt | 17895 |
1 files changed, 17895 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/18571-0.txt b/18571-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..42cb34e --- /dev/null +++ b/18571-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17895 @@ +Project Gutenberg's The Northmen, Columbus and Cabot, 985-1503, by Various + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Northmen, Columbus and Cabot, 985-1503 + +Author: Various + +Editor: Julius E. Olson and Edward Gaylord Bourne + +Release Date: June 13, 2006 [EBook #18571] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE NORTHMEN *** + + + + +Produced by Jason Isbell, Julia Miller, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +Transcriber's Note: A number of typographical errors in the original +text have been maintained in the current version of this book. A +complete list is found at the end of the text. + + + + + ORIGINAL NARRATIVES + OF EARLY AMERICAN HISTORY + + + REPRODUCED UNDER THE AUSPICES OF THE + AMERICAN HISTORICAL ASSOCIATION + + + + GENERAL EDITOR, J. FRANKLIN JAMESON, PH.D., LL.D. +DIRECTOR OF THE DEPARTMENT OF HISTORICAL RESEARCH IN THE + CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON + + + THE NORTHMEN, COLUMBUS, AND CABOT + 985-1503 + + + + + _ORIGINAL NARRATIVES + OF EARLY AMERICAN HISTORY_ + + + THE NORTHMEN + COLUMBUS AND CABOT + 985-1503 + + + THE VOYAGES OF THE NORTHMEN + EDITED BY + JULIUS E. OLSON + PROFESSOR OF THE SCANDINAVIAN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES + IN THE UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN + + + THE VOYAGES OF COLUMBUS + AND OF JOHN CABOT + EDITED BY + EDWARD GAYLORD BOURNE, PH.D. + PROFESSOR OF HISTORY IN YALE UNIVERSITY + + + _WITH MAPS AND A FACSIMILE + REPRODUCTION_ + + + CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS + NEW YORK + + + + +COPYRIGHT, 1906, BY +CHARLES SCRIBNER'S SONS + +Printed in the United States of America + +_All rights reserved. No part of this book +may be reproduced in any form without +the permission of Charles Scribner's Sons_ + + + + +GENERAL PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL NARRATIVES OF EARLY AMERICAN HISTORY + + +At its annual meeting in December, 1902, the American Historical +Association approved and adopted the plan of the present series, and the +undersigned was chosen as its general editor. The purpose of the series +was to provide individual readers of history, and the libraries of +schools and colleges, with a comprehensive and well-rounded collection of +those classical narratives on which the early history of the United +States is founded, or of those narratives which, if not precisely +classical, hold the most important place as sources of American history +anterior to 1700. The reasons for undertaking such a project are for the +most part obvious. No modern history, however excellent, can give the +reader all that he can get from the _ipsissima verba_ of the first +narrators, Argonauts or eyewitnesses, vivacious explorers or captains +courageous. There are many cases in which secondary narrators have quite +hidden from view these first authorities, whom it is therefore a duty to +restore to their rightful position. In a still greater number of +instances, the primitive narrations have become so scarce and expensive +that no ordinary library can hope to possess anything like a complete set +of the classics of early American history. + +The series is to consist of such volumes as will illustrate the early +history of all the chief parts of the country, with an additional volume +of general index. The plan contemplates, not a body of extracts, but in +general the publication or republication of whole works or distinct parts +of works. In the case of narratives originally issued in some other +language than English, the best available translations will be used, or +fresh versions made. In a few instances, important narratives hitherto +unprinted will be inserted. The English texts will be taken from the +earliest editions, or those having the highest historical value, and will +be reproduced with literal exactness. The maps will be such as will give +real help toward understanding the events narrated in the volume. The +special editors of the individual works will supply introductions, +setting forth briefly the author's career and opportunities, when known, +the status of the work in the literature of American history, and its +value as a source, and indicating previous editions; and they will +furnish such annotations, scholarly but simple, as will enable the +intelligent reader to understand and to estimate rightly the statements +of the text. The effort has been made to secure for each text the most +competent editor. + +The results of all these endeavors will be laid before the public in the +confident hope that they will be widely useful in making more real and +more vivid the apprehension of early American history. The general editor +would not have undertaken the serious labors of preparation and +supervision if he had not felt sure that it was a genuine benefit to +American historical knowledge and American patriotism to make accessible, +in one collection, so large a body of pioneer narrative. No subsequent +sources can have quite the intellectual interest, none quite the +sentimental value, which attaches to these early narrations, springing +direct from the brains and hearts of the nation's founders. + +_Sacra recognosces annalibus eruta priscis._ + +J. FRANKLIN JAMESON. + +CARNEGIE INSTITUTION, WASHINGTON, D.C. + + + + +NOTE + + +Special acknowledgments and thanks are due to the representatives of the +late Arthur Middleton Reeves, who have kindly permitted the use of his +translations of the Vinland sagas, originally printed in his _Finding of +Wineland the Good_, published in London by the Clarendon Press in 1890; +to the President and Council of the Hakluyt Society, for permission to +use Sir Clements Markham's translation of the Journal of Columbus's first +voyage, printed in Vol. LXXXVI. of the publications of that Society +(London, 1893), and that of Dr. Chanca's letter and of the letter of +Columbus respecting his fourth voyage, by the late Mr. R.H. Major, in +their second and forty-third volumes, _Select Letters of Columbus_ +(London, 1847, 1870); to the Honorable John Boyd Thacher, of Albany, for +permission to use his version of Las Casas's narrative of the third +voyage, as printed by him in his _Christopher Columbus_ (New York, 1904), +published by Messrs. G.P. Putnam's Sons; to Messrs. Houghton, Mifflin and +Company for permission to use, out of the third volume of Winsor's +_Narrative and Critical History of America_, the late Dr. Charles Deane's +translation, revised by Professor Bennet H. Nash, of the second letter of +Raimondo de Soncino respecting John Cabot's expedition; and to George +Philip and Son, Limited, of London, for permission to use the map in +Markham's _Life of Christopher Columbus_ as the basis for the map in the +present volume, showing the routes of Columbus's four voyages. + + + + +CONTENTS + +ORIGINAL NARRATIVES OF THE VOYAGES OF THE NORTHMEN + EDITED BY PROFESSOR JULIUS E. OLSON + + PAGE +INTRODUCTION 3 + +THE SAGA OF ERIC THE RED 14 + The Ancestry of Gudrid 14 + The Colonization of Greenland 15 + Gudrid's Father emigrates to Greenland 20 + The Sibyl and the Famine in Greenland 21 + Leif the Lucky and the Discovery of Vinland 23 + Thorstein's Attempt to find Vinland 26 + The Marriage of Gudrid to Thorstein 27 + The Ancestry of Thorfinn Karlsefni; his Marriage with Gudrid 30 + Karlsefni's Voyage to Vinland 31 + The First Winter in Vinland 34 + Description of Vinland and the Natives 36 + The Uniped; Snorri; the Captured Natives 40 + Biarni Grimolfson's Self-sacrifice 42 + Karlsefni and Gudrid's Issue 43 + +THE VINLAND HISTORY OF THE FLAT ISLAND BOOK 45 + Eric the Red and the Colonization of Greenland 45 + Leif Ericson's Baptism in Norway 47 + Biarni Herjulfson sights New Land 48 + Biarni's visit to Norway 50 + Leif's Voyage of Exploration 50 + The Discovery of Grapes 52 + Thorvald's Expedition to Vinland 54 + Thorfinn Karlsefni's Expedition to Vinland 59 + The Expedition of Freydis and her Companions 62 + Karlsefni and Gudrid return to Iceland 65 + +FROM ADAM OF BREMEN'S DESCRIPTIO INSULARUM AQUILONIS 67 + +FROM THE ICELANDIC ANNALS 69 + Annales Regii 69 + From the Elder Skálholt Annals 69 + +PAPAL LETTERS CONCERNING THE BISHOPRIC OF GARDAR IN GREENLAND +DURING THE FIFTEENTH CENTURY 70 + Letter of Nicholas V. 70 + Letter of Alexander VI. 73 + + +ORIGINAL NARRATIVES OF THE VOYAGES OF COLUMBUS + EDITED BY PROFESSOR EDWARD G. BOURNE + +ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE LORDS, THE CATHOLIC SOVEREIGNS, +AND CHRISTÓBAL COLON 77 + Columbus appointed Admiral and Viceroy of such Mainland and + Islands as he should Discover 77 + +TITLE GRANTED BY THE CATHOLIC SOVEREIGNS TO CHRISTÓBAL COLON +OF ADMIRAL, VICEROY, AND GOVERNOR OF THE ISLANDS AND MAINLAND +THAT MAY BE DISCOVERED 81 + The Powers and Privileges of the Office of Admiral 82 + +JOURNAL OF THE FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS 85 + +INTRODUCTION 87 + The Voyage to the Canaries; repairs on the _Pinta_ 91 + The Double Reckoning of the Distances 94 + Traces of the Nearness of Land 96 + The Fears of the Sailors 99 + The Chart 100 + The Declination of the Compass 103 + The Course changed from West to West-southwest 107 + The Light on Shore 109 + The Island of Guanahani 110 + The Natives 111 + The Islands of Santa Maria and Fernandina 115 + Description of the Natives of Fernandina 121 + The Island of Isabella 123 + Reports of the Island of Cuba; Columbus takes it to be Cipango 126 + Products of the Islands 127 + Arrival at Cuba 130 + Columbus thinks it to be Cathay 134 + He sends an Embassy to the Gran Can 137 + Return of the Messengers; their Report 140 + Products of Cuba 144 + Planting the Cross 149 + Martin Alonso Pinzón sails away with the _Pinta_ 152 + Columbus returns to Cuba 153 + Signs of Gold 154 + Rumors of a Monstrous People 156 + The Eastern End of Cuba 158 + Columbus outlines a Colonial Policy 159 + The Natives. A Large Canoe 162 + An Interview with the Natives 163 + Discovery of Hayti 167 + First View of Hayti 168 + Further Description of the Island 171 + Columbus names it Española 173 + The Products of the Island 174 + Visit to a Native Village 176 + The Life of the People 177 + Another Village Visited 180 + Description of an Indian Cacique 183 + The Cacique visits the Ship of Columbus 185 + Columbus anchors in the Bay of Acul 188 + Description of Native Life 190 + Trading with the Natives 194 + A Large Village 196 + Character of the Natives 198 + Wreck of the _Santa Maria_ 199 + Helpfulness of the Indians 201 + The Cacique dines on Shipboard 202 + Columbus plans to have a Garrison 204 + Inquiries after the Source of the Gold 206 + Preparations to return to Spain 208 + Spices and Pepper 209 + The Garrison left at Navidad 210 + The Return Voyage Begun 211 + Columbus concludes that Cipango is in Española 212 + News of the _Pinta_ 213 + Return of Martin Pinzon with the _Pinta_ 214 + Comment on the Pinzons 216 + The Harbor where Pinzon had Tarried 219 + Samana Bay Discovered 221 + The Caribs. Indians with Long Hair 223 + Matinino, an Island inhabited by Women Only 226 + Columbus takes the Direct Course for Spain 228 + Varieties of Sea Life 230 + Continued Fine Weather 234 + Finding their Position 235 + A Terrible Storm 238 + Columbus's Reflections 240 + Prepares a Brief Report which is fastened in a Barrel 241 + The Storm Abates 242 + Arrival at Santa Maria in the Azores 244 + Suspicions and Hostility of the Governor 245 + Columbus hampered by the Detention of Part of his Crew 247 + The Sailors are Restored 249 + Violent Gale off Portugal 251 + Columbus at Lisbon 252 + Interview with the King of Portugal 254 + Columbus leaves Lisbon 257 + Arrival at Palos 257 + +LETTER FROM COLUMBUS TO LUIS DE SANTANGEL 259 + +INTRODUCTION 261 + The New Islands Discovered 263 + Description of their People and Products 265 + Description of Española 268 + Value of the Discoveries to Spain 268 + A Fort built and Garrisoned 269 + The Customs of the Inhabitants 270 + +LETTER FROM COLUMBUS TO FERDINAND AND ISABELLA CONCERNING +THE COLONIZATION AND COMMERCE OF ESPAÑOLA 273 + The Regulations proposed for Settlements 274 + The Regulations for Mining 275 + The Regulations for Commerce 276 + +LETTER OF DR. CHANCA ON THE SECOND VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS 279 + +INTRODUCTION 281 + The Outward Voyage. Stopping at the Canary Islands 283 + First Impressions of the Lesser Antilles 285 + Intercourse with the Inhabitants 285 + Their Cabins; their Arts 286 + The Caribbees 287 + Indications of Cannibalism 288 + Customs of the Caribbees. They Eat their Captives 289 + Return of Diego Marquez who had been Lost 291 + A Clash with the Caribbees 293 + Discovery and Description of Porto Rico 294 + Arrival at Española 295 + Following the Coast 297 + Suspicious Circumstances; Fears for the Spaniards left at + Navidad 298 + Navidad in Ruins and the Garrison All Dead 300 + Vestiges of the Settlement 301 + Fixing upon the Site for a New Settlement 302 + Columbus visits the Cacique Guacamari 304 + Examining Guacamari's Wound 305 + Guacamari's Amazement at seeing Horses 305 + The Site selected for the New Settlement named Isabella 307 + The Food and Clothing of the Natives 308 + The Products of the Country 310 + Columbus sends out Exploring Parties to Cibao and Niti 312 + Conclusion 313 + +NARRATIVE OF THE THIRD VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS AS CONTAINED IN +LAS CASAS'S HISTORY 315 + +INTRODUCTION 317 + The Start. Arrival at Madeira 319 + Three Ships despatched direct to Española 320 + Columbus goes to the Canary Islands 323 + The Lepers' Colony on the Island of Boavista, one of the Cape + Verde Islands 324 + Columbus at the Island of Santiago 325 + He sails Southwest from the Cape Verdes. Intense Heat 327 + Signs of Land 327 + The Course is changed to the West 328 + Discovery of Trinidad 331 + August 1, 1498, the Mainland of South America Sighted 332 + The Dangers of the Serpent's Mouth 334 + Intercourse with Indians of the Mainland 335 + Their Appearance and Arms 336 + Fauna and Flora 338 + Exploring the Gulf of Paria 340 + Trading with the Indians 343 + Columbus retains Six Indians as Captives 343 + Nuggets and Ornaments of Gold 345 + Indian Cabins 346 + Exploring the Western End of the Gulf 347 + Columbus's Reflections upon his Discoveries 348 + The Terrors and Perils of the Boca del Drago 354 + The Northern Coast of Paria 355 + Columbus suffers from Inflammation of the Eyes 357 + Columbus begins to believe the Land is Mainland 358 + His Reasons for not Exploring It 360 + Observations of the Declination of the Needle 363 + The Products of the Country 364 + Arrival at Santo Domingo, August 31, 1498 366 + +LETTER OF COLUMBUS TO THE NURSE OF PRINCE JOHN 367 + +INTRODUCTION 369 + The Injustice of the Treatment accorded to Columbus 371 + Conditions in Española upon his Arrival 373 + The Rebellion of Adrian de Muxica 374 + The Conduct of the Commander Bobadilla 375 + His Unwise Concessions to the Colonists 376 + Bad Character of Some of the Colonists 378 + Bobadilla's Seizure of the Gold set apart by Columbus 380 + The Proper Standards by which Columbus should be Judged 381 + Richness of the Mines in Española 382 + Seizure of Columbus's Papers 383 + +LETTERS OF COLUMBUS ON THE FOURTH VOYAGE 385 + +INTRODUCTION 387 + Voyage to Española 389 + A Terrible Storm 390 + Storms on the Coast of Central America 391 + Anxieties and Misfortunes of Columbus 392 + Arrival at Veragua 394 + Evidence that Columbus had reached the Extremity of Asia 395 + Marinus's Views of the Extent of the Earth Confirmed 396 + Exploring the Coast of Veragua 398 + Recurrences of Storms 399 + Excursion into the Interior of Veragua 401 + Difficulties with the Natives 402 + Columbus's Vision 403 + Decides to return to Spain 405 + Columbus arrives at Jamaica 406 + No one else knows where to find Veragua 407 + Some Features of the Country 408 + The Arts of the Natives 409 + The Gold brought to Solomon from the Far East 412 + The Recovery of Jerusalem 413 + Retrospect. Columbus's Justification 415 + His Distressing Plight in Jamaica 418 + + +ORIGINAL NARRATIVES OF THE VOYAGES OF JOHN CABOT + EDITED BY PROFESSOR EDWARD G. BOURNE + +INTRODUCTION 421 + +LETTER OF LORENZO PASQUALIGO TO HIS BROTHERS ALVISE AND + FRANCESCO, MERCHANTS IN VENICE 423 + +THE FIRST LETTER OF RAIMONDO DE SONCINO, AGENT OF THE DUKE + OF MILAN, TO THE DUKE 424 + +THE SECOND LETTER OF RAIMONDO DE SONCINO TO THE DUKE OF MILAN 425 + +DESPATCH TO FERDINAND AND ISABELLA FROM PEDRO DE AYALA, + JUNIOR AMBASSADOR AT THE COURT OF ENGLAND, JULY 25, 1498 429 + + + + +MAPS AND FACSIMILE REPRODUCTION + + + PAGE +1. MAP SHOWING THE ROUTES, OUTWARD AND RETURN, OF THE FOUR +VOYAGES OF COLUMBUS 88 + +2. FACSIMILE OF THE FIRST PAGE OF THE FOLIO (FIRST) EDITION OF +THE SPANISH TEXT OF COLUMBUS'S LETTER, DATED FEBRUARY 15, 1493, +TO SANTANGEL, DESCRIBING HIS FIRST VOYAGE. From the original +(unique) in the New York Public Library (Lenox Building) 262 + +3. THE NEW WORLD IN THE CANTINO CHART OF 1502, SHOWING THE +STATE OF GEOGRAPHICAL KNOWLEDGE AT THE TIME OF THE DEATH OF +COLUMBUS 418 + + + + +ORIGINAL NARRATIVES OF THE VOYAGES OF THE NORTHMEN + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +The important documents from Norse sources that may be classed as +"Original Narratives of Early American History" are the Icelandic sagas +(prose narratives) that tell of the voyages of Northmen to Vinland. There +are two sagas that deal mainly with these voyages, while in other +Icelandic sagas and annals there are a number of references to Vinland +and adjacent regions. These two sagas are the "Saga of Eric the Red" and +another, which, for the lack of a better name, we may call the "Vinland +History of the Flat Island Book," but which might well bear the same name +as the other. This last history is composed of two disjointed accounts +found in a fine vellum manuscript known as the Flat Island Book +(Flateyjar-bok), so-called because it was long owned by a family that +lived on Flat Island in Broad Firth, on the northwestern coast of +Iceland. Bishop Brynjolf, an enthusiastic collector, got possession of +this vellum, "the most extensive and most perfect of Icelandic +manuscripts," and sent it, in 1662, with other vellums, as a gift to King +Frederick III. of Denmark, where it still is one of the great treasures +of the Royal Library. + +On account of the beauty of the Flat Island vellum, and the number of +sagas that it contained (when printed it made 1700 octavo pages), it +early attracted the attention of Old Norse collectors and scholars, and +hence the narrative relating to Vinland that it contained came to be +better known than the vellum called Hauk's Book, containing the "Saga of +Eric the Red," and was the only account of Vinland that received any +particular attention from the scholars of the seventeenth and eighteenth +centuries The Flat Island Book narrative was also given first place in +Rafn's _Antiquitates Americanæ_ (Copenhagen, 1837). This ponderous volume +contained all the original sources, but it has given rise to much +needless controversy on the Norse voyages, for many of the author's +conclusions were soon found to be untenable. He failed to winnow the +sound historical material from that which was unsubstantiated or +improbable. And so far as the original sources are concerned, it was +particularly unfortunate that he followed in the footsteps of seventeenth +and eighteenth century scholars and gave precedence to the Flat Island +Book narrative. In various important respects this saga does not agree +with the account given in the "Saga of Eric the Red," which modern +scholarship has pronounced the better and more reliable version, for +reasons that we shall consider later. + +The Flat Island Book consists of transcripts of various sagas made by the +Icelandic priests Jon Thordsson and Magnus Thorhallsson. Very little of +their lives is known, but there is evidence to show that the most +important portion of the copying was completed about 1380. There is, +however, no information concerning the original from which the +transcripts were made. From internal evidence, however, Dr. Storm of the +University of Christiania thinks that this original account was a late +production, possibly of the fourteenth century.[4-1] It is, moreover, +evident that this original account was quite different from the one from +which the existing "Saga of Eric the Red" was made, so that we have two +distinct accounts of the same set of events, both separately derived from +oral tradition, a fact which, on account of the lack of harmony in +details, has been the source of much confusion, but which nevertheless +gives strong testimony concerning the verity of the Vinland tradition in +its general outlines. + +The saga which has best stood the test of modern criticism, namely the +"Saga of Eric the Red," has beyond this fact the additional advantage of +having come down to us in two different vellums. The one is found in +Hauk's Book, No. 544 of the Arne-Magnæan Collection in Copenhagen, and +the other is in No. 557 of the same collection. These two narratives (in +vellums 544 and 557) tell the same story. They are so closely allied that +the translation which appears in this volume has been made from a +collation of both texts, that of Hauk's Book (544) having been more +closely followed.[5-1] The Hauk's Book text is clearly legible; No. 557 +is not in such good condition. + +Many facts in the life of Hauk Erlendsson, who with the assistance of two +secretaries made Hauk's Book, are known. He was in 1294 made a "lawman" +in Iceland, and died in Norway in 1334. There are reasons for believing +that the vellum bearing his name was written a number of years before his +death, probably during the period 1310-1320. Hauk was particularly +interested in the "Saga of Eric the Red," as he was descended from +Thorfinn Karlsefni, the principal character of the saga, a fact that +perhaps lends a certain authority to this version as against that of the +Flat Island Book. Hauk brings the genealogical data of the saga down to +his own time, which is not done in No. 557, one fact among others which +shows that 557 is not a copy of 544. + +The early history of AM. 557 is not known. The orthography and hand +indicate that it was made later than Hauk's Book, probably in the early +part of the fifteenth century. Vigfusson considered it a better text than +the Hauk's Book version, though rougher and less carefully written.[5-2] +Other critics (Jonsson and Gering) consider 544 the safer text. + +In regard to the date of composition of the archetype, it may be remarked +that both 544 and 557 speak of Bishop Brand "the Elder," which +presupposes a knowledge of the second Bishop Brand, whose accession +occurred in 1263. Before this date, therefore, the originals used in +making 544 and 557 could not have been written. But this mention of +Bishop Brand "the Elder" does not, we think, give an adequate basis for +fixing the date of the _composition_ of the saga, as Dr. Storm believes, +who places it somewhere between 1263 and 1300, with an inclination toward +the earlier date. Dr. Finnur Jonsson,[6-1] who accepts Dr. Storm's +opinion in other respects, says on this point: "The classic form of the +saga and its vivid and excellent tradition surely carry it back to about +1200.... To assume that the saga was first written down about 1270 or +after, I consider to be almost an impossibility." Nor does this +conservative opinion by Dr. Jonsson preclude the possibility, or even +probability, that written accounts of the Vinland voyages existed before +this date. John Fiske's[6-2] well-considered opinion of this same saga +(544 and 557) has weight: "Its general accuracy in the statement and +grouping of so many remote details is proof that its statements were +controlled by an exceedingly strong and steady tradition,--altogether too +strong and steady, in my opinion, to have been maintained simply by word +of mouth." And Vigfusson,[6-3] in speaking of the sagas in general, says: +"We believe that when once the first saga was written down, the others +were in quick succession committed to parchment, some still keeping their +original form through a succession of copies, others changed. The saga +time was short and transitory, as has been the case with the highest +literary periods of every nation, whether we look at the age of Pericles +in Athens, or of our own Elizabeth in England, and that which was not +written down quickly, in due time, was lost and forgotten forever." + +The absence of contemporary record has caused some American historians +to view the narratives of the Vinland voyages as ordinary hearsay. But it +is important to remember that before the age of writing in Iceland there +was a saga-telling age, a most remarkable period of intellectual +activity, by means of which the deeds and events of the seething life of +the heroic age were carried over into the age of writing.[7-1] The +general trustworthiness of this saga-telling period has been attested in +numerous ways from foreign records. Thus Snorri Sturlason's "The Sagas of +the Kings of Norway," one of the great history books of the world, +written in Iceland in the thirteenth century, was based primarily on +early tradition, brought over the sea to Iceland. Yet the exactness of +its descriptions and the reliability of its statements have been verified +in countless cases by modern Norwegian historians.[7-2] + +With reference to the Vinland voyages, there is proof of an unusually +strong tradition in the fact that it has come down from two sources, the +only case of such a phenomenon among the Icelandic sagas proper. It does +not invalidate the general truth of the tradition that these two sources +clash in various matters. These disagreements are not so serious but that +fair-minded American scholars have found it "easy to believe that the +narratives contained in the sagas are true in their general outlines and +important features." It lies within the province of Old Norse scholarship +to determine which of the two Vinland sagas has the better literary and +historical antecedents. After this point has been established, the +truthfulness and credibility of the selected narrative in its details +must be maintained on the internal evidence in conjunction with the +geographical and other data of early America. And here American +scholarship may legitimately speak. + +These sagas have in recent years been subjected, especially by Dr. Gustav +Storm of Christiania,[8-1] to most searching textual and historical +criticism, and the result has been that the simpler narrative of Hauk's +Book and AM. 557 is pronounced the more reliable account.[8-2] In respect +to literary quality, it has the characteristics of the Icelandic sagas +proper, as distinguished from the later sagas by well-known literary men +like Snorri. Where it grazes facts of Northern history it is equally +strong. Thus, there is serious question as to the first sighting of land +by Biarni Herjulfson, who is mentioned only in the Flat Island narrative, +and nowhere else in the rich genealogical literature of Iceland, although +his alleged father was an important man, of whom there are reliable +accounts. On the other hand, the record of the "Saga of Eric the Red," +giving the priority of discovery to Leif Ericson, can be collaterally +confirmed.[8-3] The whole account of Biarni seems suspicious, and the +main facts, viewed with reference to Leif's discovery, run counter to +Northern chronology and history. There are, however, two incidental +touches in the Flat Island Book narrative, which are absent from the +other saga, namely, the observation concerning the length of the day in +Vinland, and the reference to finding "three skin-canoes, with three men +under each." The improbabilities of the Flat Island Book saga are easily +detected, if one uses as a guide the simpler narrative of the "Saga of +Eric the Red," the only doubtful part of which is the "uniped" episode, a +touch of mediaeval superstition so palpable as not to be deceptive. + +Aside from such things as picking grapes in the spring, sipping sweet dew +from the grass, and the presence of an apparition, the Flat Island Book +account, when read by itself, with no attempt to make it harmonize with +the statements of the "Saga of Eric the Red" or other facts of +Scandinavian history, is a sufficiently straightforward narrative. The +difficulty begins when it is placed in juxtaposition to these facts and +statements. It should not be and need not be discarded, but in giving an +account of the Vinland voyages it must be used with circumspection. From +an historical standpoint it must occupy a subordinate place. If Rafn in +his _Antiquitates Americanæ_ had given emphatic precedence to the saga as +found in Hauk's Book and AM. 557, had left to American scholars the +Dighton Rock and the Newport Tower, and had not been so confident in the +matter of identifying the exact localities that the explorers visited, he +might have carried conviction, instead of bringing confusion, to American +scholars. + +The general results of the work of the Norwegian scholar Dr. Storm, +together with a unique presentation of the original narratives, are +accessible in _The Finding of Wineland_ (London, 1890 and 1895), by an +American scholar, the late Arthur Middleton Reeves. This work contains a +lucid account of the important investigations on the subject, photographs +of all the vellum pages that give the various narratives, a printed text +accompanying these, page by page and line by line, and also translations +into English. There is one phase of the subject that this work does not +discuss: the identifications of the regions visited by the Northmen. Dr. +Storm, however, has gone into this subject, and is convinced that +Helluland, Markland, and Vinland of the sagas, are Labrador, +Newfoundland, and Nova Scotia.[10-1] The sailing directions in the "Saga +of Eric the Red" are given with surprising detail. These, with other +observations, seem to fit Nova Scotia remarkably well. Only one thing +appears to speak against Storm's view, and that is the _abundance_ of +grapes to which the Flat Island Book account testifies. But coupled with +this testimony are statements (to say nothing of the unreliability of +this saga in other respects) that indicate that the Icelandic narrators +had come to believe that grapes were gathered in the spring, thus +invalidating the testimony as to abundance. + +Whether the savages that the sagas describe were Indians or Eskimos is a +question of some interest. John Fiske[10-2] believes that the explorers +came in contact with American Indians; Vigfusson, on the other hand, +believes that the sagas describe Eskimos. Here, however, the American has +the better right to an opinion. + +On this point, it is of importance to call attention to the fact that the +Norse colonists in Greenland found no natives there, only vestiges of +them. They were at that time farther north in Greenland; the colonists +came in contact with them much later,--too late to admit of descriptions +of them in any of the classical Icelandic sagas, in which the Greenland +colonists play no inconspicuous part. Ari, the great authority on early +Norse history, speaking of the Greenland colonists, says in his +_Libellus Islandorum_:[11-1] "They found there men's habitations both +east and west in the land [_i.e._, in both the Eastern and Western +settlements] both broken cayaks and stone-smithery, whereby it may be +seen that the same kind of folk had been there as they which inhabited +Vinland, and whom the men of Greenland [_i.e._, the explorers] called +Skrellings." + +A sort of negative corroboration of this is offered by a work of high +rank, the famous _Speculum Regale_, written in Old Norse in Norway in the +middle of the thirteenth century. It contains much trustworthy +information on Greenland; it tells, "with bald common sense," of such +characteristic things as glaciers and northern lights, discusses the +question as to whether Greenland is an island or a peninsula, tells of +exports and imports, the climate, the means of subsistence, and +especially the fauna, _but not one word concerning any natives_. Moreover +Ivar Bardsen's account[11-2] of Greenland, which is entirely trustworthy, +gives a distinct impression that the colonists did not come into conflict +with the Eskimos until the fourteenth century. + +There is consequently no valid reason for doubting that the savages +described in the sagas were natives of Vinland and Markland. But whether +it can ever be satisfactorily demonstrated that the Norse explorers came +in contact with Algonquin, Micmac, or Beothuk Indians, and just where +they landed, are not matters of essential importance. The +incontrovertible facts of the various Norse expeditions are that Leif +Ericson and Thorfinn Karlsefni are as surely historical characters as +Christopher Columbus, that they visited, in the early part of the +eleventh century, some part of North America where the grape grew, and +that in that region the colonists found savages, whose hostility upset +their plans of permanent settlement. + +According to the usually accepted chronology, Leif's voyage from Norway +to Greenland (during which voyage he found Vinland) was made in the year +1000, and Karlsefni's attempt at colonization within the decade +following. On the basis of genealogical records (so often treacherous) +some doubt has recently been cast on this chronology by Vigfusson, in +_Origines Islandicae_[12-1] (1905). Vigfusson died in 1889, sixteen years +before the publication of this work. He had no opportunity to consider +the investigations of Dr. Storm, who accepts without question the first +decade of the eleventh century for the Vinland voyages. Nor do Storm's +evidences and arguments on this point appear in the work as published. +Therefore we are obliged to say of Vigfusson's observations on the +chronology of the Vinland voyages, that they stand as question-marks +which call for confirmation. + +We are surprised, moreover, to find that _Origines Islandicae_ prints the +Flat Island Book story first, apparently on account of the belief that +this story contains the "truer account of the first sighting of the +American continent" by Biarni Herjulfson.[12-2] It is impossible to +believe that this would have been done, if the editors (Vigfusson and +Powell) had known the results of Dr. Storm's work, which is not +mentioned. There is, furthermore, no attempt in the _Origines Islandicae_ +to refute or explain away an opinion on AM. 557 expressed by the same +authorities, in 1879,[12-3] to the effect that "it is free from grave +errors of fact which disfigure the latter [the Flat Island Book saga]." +We are almost forced to the conclusion that a hand less cunning than +Vigfusson's has had to do with the unfinished section of the work. + +In regard to the extract from Adam of Bremen, which we print, it should +be observed that its only importance lies in the fact that it +corroborates the Icelandic tradition of a land called Vinland, where +there were grapes and "unsown grain," and thus serves to strengthen faith +in the trustworthiness of the saga narrative. The annals and papal +letters that follow need no further discussion, we think, than that +contained in the annotations. + +Besides the texts in Icelandic, already described, by Rafn, Reeves, +Vigfusson and Powell, and Storm, it may be mentioned that the Flat Island +text is given in Vol. I. of _Flateyjar-bok_, ed. Vigfusson and Unger, +Christiania, 1860. There are translations of both texts in Beamish, +_Discovery of North America by the Northmen_ (London, 1841), in Slafter, +_Voyages of the Northmen_ (Boston, 1877), and in De Costa, _Pre-Columbian +Discovery of America by the Northmen_ (Albany, 1901). But most of these +are confused in arrangement, and the best is that by the late Mr. Reeves, +which by the kind consent of his representatives we are permitted to use +in this volume. + +JULIUS E. OLSON. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[4-1] _Eiriks Saga Raudha_ (Copenhagen, 1891), p. xv. + +[5-1] A translation, with the title "The Story of Thorfinn Carlsemne," +based on AM. 557, may be found in _Origines Islandicae_, II. 610. + +[5-2] _Origines Islandicae_, II. 590. + +[6-1] _Den oldnorske og oldislandske Litteraturs Historie_ (Copenhagen, +1901), II. 648. + +[6-2] _The Discovery of America_, p. 212. + +[6-3] Prolegomena, _Sturlunga Saga_, p. lxix. + +[7-1] Snorri, the Icelandic historian, says that "it was more than 240 +years from the settlement of Iceland (about 870) before sagas began to be +written" and that "Ari (1067-1148) was the first man who wrote in the +vernacular stories of things old and new." + +[7-2] "Among the mediaeval literatures of Europe, that of Iceland is +unrivalled in the profusion of detail with which the facts of ordinary +life are recorded, and the clearness with which the individual character +of numberless real persons stands out from the historic background.... +The Icelanders of the Saga-age were not a secluded self-centred race; +they were untiring in their desire to learn all that could be known of +the lands round about them, and it is to their zeal for this knowledge, +their sound historical sense, and their trained memories, that we owe +much information regarding the British Isles themselves from the ninth to +the thirteenth century. The contact of the Scandinavian peoples with the +English race on the one hand, and the Gaelic on the other, has been an +important factor in the subsequent history of Britain; and this is +naturally a subject on which the Icelandic evidence is of the highest +value." Prefatory Note to _Origines Islandicae_. + +[8-1] _Studies on the Vinland Voyages_ (Copenhagen, 1889) and _Eiriks +Saga Raudha_ (Copenhagen, 1891). + +[8-2] Of the same opinion are Professor Hugo Gering of Kiel, _Zeitschrift +für deutsche Philologie_, XXIV. (1892), and Professor Finnur Jonsson of +Copenhagen, _Den oldnorske og oldislandske Litteraturs Historie_, II. +646. + +[8-3] The Kristni-Saga, which tells of the conversion of Iceland, says: +"That summer [1000] King Olaf [of Norway] went out of the country to +Wendland in the south, and he sent Leif Eric's son to Greenland to preach +the faith there. It was then that Leif discovered Vinland the Good. He +also discovered a crew on the wreck of a ship out in the deep sea, and so +he got the name of Leif the Lucky." For passages from other sagas that +corroborate Leif's discovery on his voyage from Norway to Greenland +(_i.e._, in the year that Olaf Tryggvason fell, namely, 1000), see +Reeves, _The Finding of Wineland the Good_ (London, 1895), pp. 7-18. + +[10-1] See, in support of Storm, Juul Dieserud's paper, "Norse +Discoveries in America," _Bulletin of the American Geographical Society_, +Feb., 1901. + +[10-2] _Discovery of America_, p. 182. + +[11-1] See _Origines Islandicae_, I. 294. + +[11-2] See notes 6 and 8 to Papal Letters, p. 71 of this volume. + +[12-1] See note 1, p. 43. + +[12-2] In other respects the editors speak highly of the saga as found in +Hauk's Book and AM. 557: "This saga has never been so well known as the +other, though it is probably of even higher value. Unlike the other, it +has the form and style of one of the 'Islendinga Sogor' [the Icelandic +sagas proper]; its phrasing is broken, its dialogue is excellent, it +contains situations of great pathos, such as the beautiful incident at +the end of Bearne's self-sacrifice, and scenes of high interest, such as +that of the Sibyl's prophesying in Greenland...." II. 591. + +[12-3] _Icelandic Prose Reader_ (where AM. 557 is printed), notes, p. +377. + + + + +THE SAGA OF ERIC THE RED + +ALSO CALLED THE SAGA OF THORFINN KARLSEFNI[14-1] + + +_The Saga of Eric the Red, also called the Saga of Thorfinn Karlsefni and +Snorri Thorbrandsson._[14-2]--Olaf was the name of a warrior-king, who +was called Olaf the White. He was the son of King Ingiald, Helgi's son, +the son of Olaf, Gudraud's son, son of Halfdan Whiteleg, king of the +Uplands-men.[14-3] Olaf engaged in a Western freebooting expedition and +captured Dublin in Ireland and the Shire of Dublin, over which he became +king.[14-4] He married Aud the Wealthy, daughter of Ketil Flatnose, son +of Biorn Buna, a famous man of Norway. Their son was called Thorstein the +Red. Olaf was killed in battle in Ireland, and Aud and Thorstein went +then to the Hebrides; there Thorstein married Thurid, daughter of Eyvind +Easterling, sister of Helgi the Lean; they had many children. Thorstein +became a warrior-king, and entered into fellowship with Earl Sigurd the +Mighty, son of Eystein the Rattler. They conquered Caithness and +Sutherland, Ross and Moray, and more than the half of Scotland. Over +these Thorstein became king, ere he was betrayed by the Scots, and was +slain there in battle. Aud was at Caithness when she heard of Thorstein's +death; she thereupon caused a ship to be secretly built in the forest, +and when she was ready, she sailed out to the Orkneys. There she bestowed +Groa, Thorstein the Red's daughter, in marriage; she was the mother of +Grelad, whom Earl Thorfinn, Skull-cleaver, married. After this Aud set +out to seek Iceland, and had on board her ship twenty freemen. Aud +arrived in Iceland, and passed the first winter at Biarnarhöfn with her +brother, Biorn. And afterwards took possession of all the Dale country +between Dögurdar river and Skraumuhlaups river. She lived at Hvamm, and +held her orisons at Krossholar, where she caused crosses to be erected, +for she had been baptized and was a devout believer. With her there came +out [to Iceland] many distinguished men, who had been captured in the +Western freebooting expedition, and were called slaves. Vifil was the +name of one of these: he was a highborn man, who had been taken captive +in the Western sea, and was called a slave, before Aud freed him; now +when Aud gave homesteads to the members of her crew, Vifil asked +wherefore she gave him no homestead as to the other men. Aud replied, +that this should make no difference to him, saying, that he would be +regarded as a distinguished man wherever he was. She gave him Vifilsdal, +and there he dwelt. He married a woman whose name was...;[15-1] their +sons were Thorbiorn and Thorgeir. They were men of promise, and grew up +with their father.[15-2] + +_Eric the Red finds Greenland._--There was a man named Thorvald; he was a +son of Asvald, Ulf's son, Eyxna-Thori's son. His son's name was Eric. He +and his father went from Jaederen[15-3] to Iceland, on account of +manslaughter, and settled on Hornstrandir, and dwelt at Drangar. There +Thorvald died, and Eric then married Thorhild, a daughter of Jorund, +Atli's son, and Thorbiorg the Ship-chested, who had been married before +to Thorbiorn of the Haukadal family. Eric then removed from the North, +and cleared land in Haukadal, and dwelt at Ericsstadir by Vatnshorn. Then +Eric's thralls caused a land-slide on Valthiof's farm, Valthiofsstadir. +Eyiolf the Foul, Valthiof's kinsman, slew the thralls near Skeidsbrekkur +above Vatnshorn. For this Eric killed Eyiolf the Foul, and he also killed +Duelling-Hrafn, at Leikskalar. Geirstein and Odd of Jorva, Eyiolf's +kinsmen, conducted the prosecution for the slaying of their kinsmen, and +Eric was, in consequence, banished from Haukadal. He then took possession +of Brokey and Eyxney, and dwelt at Tradir on Sudrey, the first winter. It +was at this time that he loaned Thorgest his outer daïs-boards;[16-1] +Eric afterwards went to Eyxney, and dwelt at Ericsstad. He then demanded +his outer daïs-boards, but did not obtain them. Eric then carried the +outer daïs-boards away from Breidabolstad, and Thorgest gave chase. They +came to blows a short distance from the farm of Drangar. There two of +Thorgest's sons were killed and certain other men besides. After this +each of them retained a considerable body of men with him at his home. +Styr gave Eric his support, as did also Eyiolf of Sviney, Thorbiorn, +Vifil's son, and the sons of Thorbrand of Alptafirth; while Thorgest was +backed by the sons of Thord the Yeller, and Thorgeir of Hitardal, Aslak +of Langadal and his son, Illugi. Eric and his people were condemned to +outlawry at Thorsness-thing. He equipped his ship for a voyage, in +Ericsvag; while Eyiolf concealed him in Dimunarvag, when Thorgest and his +people were searching for him among the islands. He said to them, that it +was his intention to go in search of that land which Gunnbiorn, son of +Ulf the Crow, saw when he was driven out of his course, westward across +the main, and discovered Gunnbiorns-skerries.[16-2] He told them that he +would return again to his friends, if he should succeed in finding that +country. Thorbiorn, and Eyiolf, and Styr accompanied Eric out beyond the +islands, and they parted with the greatest friendliness; Eric said to +them that he would render them similar aid, so far as it might lie within +his power, if they should ever stand in need of his help. Eric sailed +out to sea from Snaefells-iokul, and arrived at that ice-mountain which +is called Blacksark. Thence he sailed to the southward, that he might +ascertain whether there was habitable country in that direction. He +passed the first winter at Ericsey, near the middle of the Western +Settlement.[17-1] In the following spring he proceeded to Ericsfirth, and +selected a site there for his homestead. That summer he explored the +western uninhabited region, remaining there for a long time, and +assigning many local names there. The second winter he spent at +Ericsholms beyond Hvarfsgnipa. But the third summer he sailed northward +to Snaefell,[17-2] and into Hrafnsfirth. He believed then that he had +reached the head of Ericsfirth; he turned back then, and remained the +third winter at Ericsey at the mouth of Ericsfirth. The following summer +he sailed to Iceland, and landed in Breidafirth. He remained that winter +with Ingolf at Holmlatr. In the spring he and Thorgest fought together, +and Eric was defeated; after this a reconciliation was effected between +them. That summer Eric set out to colonize the land which he had +discovered, and which he called Greenland, because, he said, men would be +the more readily persuaded thither if the land had a good name.[17-3] + +_Concerning Thorbiorn._--Thorgeir, Vifil's son, married, and took to wife +Arnora, daughter of Einar of Laugarbrekka, Sigmund's son, son of Ketil +Thistil, who settled Thistilsfirth. Einar had another daughter named +Hallveig; she was married to Thorbiorn, Vifil's son, who got with her +Laugarbrekkaland on Hellisvellir. Thorbiorn moved thither, and became a +very distinguished man. He was an excellent husbandman, and had a great +estate. Gudrid was the name of Thorbiorn's daughter. She was the most +beautiful of her sex, and in every respect a very superior woman. There +dwelt at Arnarstapi a man named Orm, whose wife's name was Halldis. Orm +was a good husbandman, and a great friend of Thorbiorn, and Gudrid lived +with him for a long time as a foster-daughter. There was a man named +Thorgeir, who lived at Thorgeirsfell; he was very wealthy and had been +manumitted; he had a son named Einar, who was a handsome, well-bred man, +and very showy in his dress. Einar was engaged in trading-voyages from +one country to the other, and had prospered in this. He always spent his +winters alternately either in Iceland or in Norway. + +Now it is to be told, that one autumn, when Einar was in Iceland, he went +with his wares out along Snaefellsness, with the intention of selling +them. He came to Arnarstapi, and Orm invited him to remain with him, and +Einar accepted this invitation, for there was a strong friendship +[between Orm and himself]. Einar's wares were carried into a store-house, +where he unpacked them, and displayed them to Orm and the men of his +household, and asked Orm to take such of them as he liked. Orm accepted +this offer, and said that Einar was a good merchant, and was greatly +favored by fortune. Now, while they were busied about the wares, a woman +passed before the door of the store-house. Einar inquired of Orm: "Who +was that handsome woman who passed before the door? I have never seen her +here before." Orm replies: "That, is Gudrid, my foster-child, the +daughter of Thorbiorn of Laugarbrekka." "She must be a good match," said +Einar; "has she had any suitors?" Orm replies: "In good sooth she has +been courted, friend, nor is she easily to be won, for it is believed +that both she and her father will be very particular in their choice of a +husband." "Be that as it may," quoth Einar, "she is a woman to whom I +mean to pay my addresses, and I would have thee present this matter to +her father in my behalf, and use every exertion to bring it to a +favorable issue, and I shall reward thee to the full of my friendship, if +I am successful. It may be that Thorbiorn will regard the connection as +being to our mutual advantage, for [while] he is a most honorable man and +has a goodly home, his personal effects, I am told, are somewhat on the +wane; but neither I nor my father are lacking in lands or chattels, and +Thorbiorn would be greatly aided thereby, if this match should be brought +about." "Surely I believe myself to be thy friend," replies Orm, "and yet +I am by no means disposed to act in this matter, for Thorbiorn hath a +very haughty spirit, and is moreover a most ambitious man." Einar replied +that he wished for nought else than that his suit should be broached; Orm +replied, that he should have his will. Einar fared again to the South +until he reached his home. Sometime after this, Thorbiorn had an autumn +feast, as was his custom, for he was a man of high position. Hither came +Orm of Arnarstapi, and many other of Thorbiorn's friends. Orm came to +speech with Thorbiorn, and said, that Einar of Thorgeirsfell had visited +him not long before, and that he was become a very promising man. Orm now +makes known the proposal of marriage in Einar's behalf, and added that +for some persons and for some reasons it might be regarded as a very +appropriate match: "thou mayest greatly strengthen thyself thereby, +master, by reason of the property." Thorbiorn answers: "Little did I +expect to hear such words from thee, that I should marry my daughter to +the son of a thrall; and that, because it seems to thee that my means are +diminishing, wherefore she shall not remain longer with thee since thou +deemest so mean a match as this suitable for her." Orm afterward returned +to his home, and all of the invited guests to their respective +households, while Gudrid remained behind with her father, and tarried at +home that winter. But in the spring Thorbiorn gave an entertainment to +his friends, to which many came, and it was a noble feast, and at the +banquet Thorbiorn called for silence, and spoke: "Here have I passed a +goodly lifetime, and have experienced the good-will of men toward me, and +their affection; and, methinks, our relations together have been +pleasant; but now I begin to find myself in straitened circumstances, +although my estate has hitherto been accounted a respectable one. Now +will I rather abandon my farming, than lose my honor, and rather leave +the country, than bring disgrace upon my family; wherefore I have now +concluded to put that promise to the test, which my friend Eric the Red +made, when we parted company in Breidafirth. It is my present design to +go to Greenland this summer, if matters fare as I wish." The folk were +greatly astonished at this plan of Thorbiorn's, for he was blessed with +many friends, but they were convinced that he was so firmly fixed in his +purpose, that it would not avail to endeavor to dissuade him from it. +Thorbiorn bestowed gifts upon his guests, after which the feast came to +an end, and the folk returned to their homes. Thorbiorn sells his lands +and buys a ship, which was laid up at the mouth of Hraunhöfn. Thirty +persons joined him in the voyage; among these were Orm of Arnarstapi, and +his wife, and other of Thorbiorn's friends, who would not part from him. +Then they put to sea. When they sailed the weather was favorable, but +after they came out upon the high-seas the fair wind failed, and there +came great gales, and they lost their way, and had a very tedious voyage +that summer. Then illness appeared among their people, and Orm and his +wife Halldis died, and the half of their company. The sea began to run +high, and they had a very wearisome and wretched voyage in many ways, but +arrived, nevertheless, at Heriolfsness in Greenland, on the very eve of +winter.[20-1] At Heriolfsness lived a man named Thorkel. He was a man of +ability and an excellent husbandman. He received Thorbiorn and all of his +ship's company, and entertained them well during the winter. At that time +there was a season of great dearth in Greenland; those who had been at +the fisheries had had poor hauls, and some had not returned. There was a +certain woman there in the settlement, whose name was Thorbiorg. She was +a prophetess, and was called Little Sibyl. She had had nine sisters, all +of whom were prophetesses, but she was the only one left alive. It was +Thorbiorg's custom in the winters, to go to entertainments, and she was +especially sought after at the homes of those who were curious to know +their fate, or what manner of season might be in store for them; and +inasmuch as Thorkel was the chief yeoman in the neighborhood, it was +thought to devolve upon him to find out when the evil time, which was +upon them, would cease. Thorkel invited the prophetess to his home, and +careful preparations were made for her reception, according to the custom +which prevailed, when women of her kind were to be entertained. A high +seat was prepared for her, in which a cushion filled with poultry +feathers was placed. When she came in the evening, with the man who had +been sent to meet her, she was clad in a dark-blue cloak, fastened with a +strap, and set with stones quite down to the hem. She wore glass beads +around her neck, and upon her head a black lamb-skin hood, lined with +white cat-skin. In her hands she carried a staff, upon which there was a +knob, which was ornamented with brass, and set with stones up about the +knob. Circling her waist she wore a girdle of touch-wood, and attached to +it a great skin pouch, in which she kept the charms which she used when +she was practising her sorcery. She wore upon her feet shaggy calf-skin +shoes, with long, tough latchets, upon the ends of which there were large +brass buttons. She had cat-skin gloves upon her hands, which were white +inside and lined with fur. When she entered, all of the folk felt it to +be their duty to offer her becoming greetings. She received the +salutations of each individual according as he pleased her. Yeoman +Thorkel took the sibyl by the hand, and led her to the seat which had +been made ready for her. Thorkel bade her run her eyes over man and beast +and home. She had little to say concerning all these. The tables were +brought forth in the evening, and it remains to be told what manner of +food was prepared for the prophetess. A porridge of goat's beestings was +made for her, and for meat there were dressed the hearts of every kind of +beast, which could be obtained there. She had a brass spoon, and a knife +with a handle of walrus tusk, with a double hasp of brass around the +haft, and from this the point was broken. And when the tables were +removed, Yeoman Thorkel approaches Thorbiorg, and asks how she is pleased +with the home, and the character of the folk, and how speedily she would +be likely to become aware of that concerning which he had questioned her, +and which the people were anxious to know. She replied that she could not +give an opinion in this matter before the morrow, after that she had +slept there through the night. And on the morrow, when the day was far +spent, such preparations were made as were necessary to enable her to +accomplish her soothsaying. She bade them bring her those women, who knew +the incantation, which she required to work her spells, and which she +called Warlocks; but such women were not to be found. Thereupon a search +was made throughout the house, to see whether any one knew this +[incantation]. Then says Gudrid: "Although I am neither skilled in the +black art nor a sibyl, yet my foster-mother, Halldis, taught me in +Iceland that spell-song, which she called Warlocks." Thorbiorg answered: +"Then art thou wise in season!" Gudrid replies: "This is an incantation +and ceremony of such a kind, that I do not mean to lend it any aid, for +that I am a Christian woman." Thorbiorg answers: "It might so be that +thou couldst give thy help to the company here, and still be no worse +woman than before; however I leave it with Thorkel to provide for my +needs." Thorkel now so urged Gudrid, that she said she must needs comply +with his wishes. The women then made a ring round about, while Thorbiorg +sat up on the spell-daïs. Gudrid then sang the song, so sweet and well, +that no one remembered ever before to have heard the melody sung with so +fair a voice as this. The sorceress thanked her for the song, and said: +"She has indeed lured many spirits hither, who think it pleasant to hear +this song, those who were wont to forsake us hitherto and refuse to +submit themselves to us. Many things are now revealed to me, which +hitherto have been hidden, both from me and from others. And I am able to +announce that this period of famine will not endure longer, but the +season will mend as spring approaches. The visitation of disease, which +has been so long upon you, will disappear sooner than expected. And thee, +Gudrid, I shall reward out of hand, for the assistance, which thou hast +vouchsafed us, since the fate in store for thee is now all made manifest +to me. Thou shalt make a most worthy match here in Greenland, but it +shall not be of long duration for thee, for thy future path leads out to +Iceland, and a lineage both great and goodly shall spring from thee, and +above thy line brighter rays of light shall shine, than I have power +clearly to unfold. And now fare well and health to thee, my daughter!" +After this the folk advanced to the sibyl, and each besought information +concerning that about which he was most curious. She was very ready in +her responses, and little of that which she foretold failed of +fulfilment. After this they came for her from a neighboring farmstead, +and she thereupon set out thither. Thorbiorn was then sent for, since he +had not been willing to remain at home while such heathen rites were +practising. The weather improved speedily, when the spring opened, even +as Thorbiorg had prophesied. Thorbiorn equipped his ship and sailed away, +until he arrived at Brattahlid.[23-1] Eric received him with open arms, +and said that it was well that he had come thither. Thorbiorn and his +household remained with him during the winter, while quarters were +provided for the crew among the farmers. And the following spring Eric +gave Thorbiorn land on Stokkaness, where a goodly farmstead was founded, +and there he lived thenceforward. + +_Concerning Leif the Lucky and the Introduction of Christianity into +Greenland._--Eric was married to a woman named Thorhild, and had two sons; +one of these was named Thorstein, and the other Leif. They were both +promising men. Thorstein lived at home with his father, and there was not +at that time a man in Greenland who was accounted of so great promise as +he. Leif had sailed to Norway,[24-1] where he was at the court of King +Olaf Tryggvason. When Leif sailed from Greenland, in the summer, they were +driven out of their course to the Hebrides. It was late before they got +fair winds thence, and they remained there far into the summer. Leif +became enamored of a certain woman, whose name was Thorgunna. She was a +woman of fine family, and Leif observed that she was possessed of rare +intelligence. When Leif was preparing for his departure Thorgunna asked to +be permitted to accompany him. Leif inquired whether she had in this the +approval of her kinsmen. She replied that she did not care for it. Leif +responded that he did not deem it the part of wisdom to abduct so +high-born a woman in a strange country, "and we so few in number." "It is +by no means certain that thou shalt find this to be the better decision," +said Thorgunna. "I shall put it to the proof, notwithstanding," said Leif. +"Then I tell thee," said Thorgunna, "that I am no longer a lone woman, for +I am pregnant, and upon thee I charge it. I foresee that I shall give +birth to a male child. And though thou give this no heed, yet will I rear +the boy, and send him to thee in Greenland, when he shall be fit to take +his place with other men. And I foresee that thou wilt get as much profit +of this son as is thy due from this our parting; moreover, I mean to come +to Greenland myself before the end comes." Leif gave her a gold +finger-ring, a Greenland wadmal mantle, and a belt of walrus-tusk. This +boy came to Greenland, and was called Thorgils. Leif acknowledged his +paternity, and some men will have it that this Thorgils came to Iceland in +the summer before the Froda-wonder.[24-2] However, this Thorgils was +afterwards in Greenland, and there seemed to be something not altogether +natural about him before the end came. Leif and his companions sailed +away from the Hebrides, and arrived in Norway in the autumn.[25-1] Leif +went to the court of King Olaf Tryggvason.[25-2] He was well received by +the king, who felt that he could see that Leif was a man of great +accomplishments. Upon one occasion the king came to speech with Leif, and +asks him, "Is it thy purpose to sail to Greenland in the summer?" "It is +my purpose," said Leif, "if it be your will." "I believe it will be well," +answers the king, "and thither thou shalt go upon my errand, to proclaim +Christianity there." Leif replied that the king should decide, but gave it +as his belief that it would be difficult to carry this mission to a +successful issue in Greenland. The king replied that he knew of no man who +would be better fitted for this undertaking, "and in thy hands the cause +will surely prosper." "This can only be," said Leif, "if I enjoy the grace +of your protection." Leif put to sea when his ship was ready for the +voyage. For a long time he was tossed about upon the ocean, and came upon +lands of which he had previously had no knowledge. There were self-sown +wheat[25-3] fields and vines growing there. There were also those trees +there which are called "mausur,"[25-4] and of all these they took +specimens. Some of the timbers were so large that they were used in +building. Leif found men upon a wreck, and took them home with him, and +procured quarters for them all during the winter. In this wise he showed +his nobleness and goodness, since he introduced Christianity into the +country, and saved the men from the wreck; and he was called Leif the +Lucky ever after. Leif landed in Ericsfirth, and then went home to +Brattahlid; he was well received by every one. He soon proclaimed +Christianity throughout the land, and the Catholic faith, and announced +King Olaf Tryggvason's messages to the people, telling them how much +excellence and how great glory accompanied this faith. Eric was slow in +forming the determination to forsake his old belief, but Thiodhild[26-1] +embraced the faith promptly, and caused a church to be built at some +distance from the house. This building was called Thiodhild's Church, and +there she and those persons who had accepted Christianity, and they were +many, were wont to offer their prayers. Thiodhild would not have +intercourse with Eric after that she had received the faith, whereat he +was sorely vexed. + +At this time there began to be much talk about a voyage of exploration to +that country which Leif had discovered. The leader of this expedition was +Thorstein Ericsson, who was a good man and an intelligent, and blessed +with many friends. Eric was likewise invited to join them, for the men +believed that his luck and foresight would be of great furtherance. He +was slow in deciding, but did not say nay, when his friends besought him +to go. They thereupon equipped that ship in which Thorbiorn had come out, +and twenty men were selected for the expedition. They took little cargo +with them, nought else save their weapons and provisions. On that morning +when Eric set out from his home he took with him a little chest +containing gold and silver; he hid this treasure, and then went his way. +He had proceeded but a short distance, however, when he fell from his +horse and broke his ribs and dislocated his shoulder, whereat he cried +"Ai, ai!" By reason of this accident he sent his wife word that she +should procure the treasure which he had concealed, for to the hiding of +the treasure he attributed his misfortune. Thereafter they sailed +cheerily out of Ericsfirth in high spirits over their plan. They were +long tossed about upon the ocean, and could not lay the course they +wished. They came in sight of Iceland, and likewise saw birds from the +Irish coast.[27-1] Their ship was, in sooth, driven hither and thither +over the sea. In the autumn they turned back, worn out by toil, and +exposure to the elements, and exhausted by their labors, and arrived at +Ericsfirth at the very beginning of winter. Then said Eric, "More +cheerful were we in the summer, when we put out of the firth, but we +still live, and it might have been much worse." Thorstein answers, "It +will be a princely deed to endeavor to look well after the wants of all +these men who are now in need, and to make provision for them during the +winter." Eric answers, "It is ever true, as it is said, that 'it is never +clear ere the answer comes,' and so it must be here. We will act now upon +thy counsel in this matter." All of the men, who were not otherwise +provided for, accompanied the father and son. They landed thereupon, and +went home to Brattahlid, where they remained throughout the winter. + +_Thorstein Ericsson weds Gudrid; Apparitions._--Now it is to be told that +Thorstein Ericsson sought Gudrid, Thorbiorn's daughter, in wedlock. His +suit was favorably received both by herself and by her father, and it was +decided that Thorstein should marry Gudrid, and the wedding was held at +Brattahlid in the autumn. The entertainment sped well, and was very +numerously attended. Thorstein had a home in the Western Settlement at a +certain farmstead, which is called Lysufirth. A half interest in this +property belonged to a man named Thorstein, whose wife's name was Sigrid. +Thorstein went to Lysufirth, in the autumn, to his namesake, and Gudrid +bore him company. They were well received, and remained there during the +winter. It came to pass that sickness appeared in their home early in the +winter. Gard was the name of the overseer there; he had few friends; he +fell sick first, and died. It was not long before one after another fell +sick and died. Then Thorstein, Eric's son, fell sick, and Sigrid, the +wife of Thorstein, his namesake; and one evening Sigrid wished to go to +the house, which stood over against the outer-door, and Gudrid +accompanied her; they were facing the outer-door when Sigrid uttered a +loud cry. "We have acted thoughtlessly," exclaimed Gudrid, "yet thou +needest not cry, though the cold strikes thee; let us go in again as +speedily as possible." Sigrid answers, "This may not be in this present +plight. All of the dead folk are drawn up here before the door now; among +them I see thy husband, Thorstein, and I can see myself there, and it is +distressful to look upon." But directly this had passed she exclaimed, +"Let us go now, Gudrid; I no longer see the band!" The overseer had +vanished from her sight, whereas it had seemed to her before that he +stood with a whip in his hand and made as if he would scourge the flock. +So they went in, and ere the morning came she was dead, and a coffin was +made ready for the corpse; and that same day the men planned to row out +to fish, and Thorstein accompanied them to the landing-place, and in the +twilight he went down to see their catch. Thorstein, Eric's son, then +sent word to his namesake that he should come to him, saying that all was +not as it should be there, for the housewife was endeavoring to rise to +her feet, and wished to get in under the clothes beside him, and when he +entered the room she was come up on the edge of the bed. He thereupon +seized her hands and held a pole-axe[28-1] before her breast. Thorstein, +Eric's son, died before night-fall. Thorstein, the master of the house, +bade Gudrid lie down and sleep, saying that he would keep watch over the +bodies during the night; thus she did, and early in the night, Thorstein, +Eric's son, sat up and spoke saying that he desired Gudrid to be called +thither, for that it was his wish to speak to her: "It is God's will that +this hour be given me for my own and for the betterment of my condition." +Thorstein, the master, went in search of Gudrid, and waked her, and bade +her cross herself, and pray God to help her; "Thorstein, Eric's son, has +said to me that he wishes to see thee; thou must take counsel with +thyself now, what thou wilt do, for I have no advice to give thee." She +replies, "It may be that this is intended to be one of those incidents +which shall afterward be held in remembrance, this strange event, and it +is my trust that God will keep watch over me; wherefore, under God's +mercy, I shall venture to him and learn what it is that he would say, for +I may not escape this if it be designed to bring me harm. I will do this, +lest he go further, for it is my belief that the matter is a grave one." +So Gudrid went and drew near to Thorstein, and he seemed to her to be +weeping. He spoke a few words in her ear, in a low tone, so that she +alone could hear them; but this he said so that all could hear, that +those persons would be blessed who kept well the faith, and that it +carried with it all help and consolation, and yet many there were, said +he, who kept it but ill. "This is no proper usage which has obtained here +in Greenland since Christianity was introduced here, to inter men in +unconsecrated earth, with nought but a brief funeral service. It is my +wish that I be conveyed to the church, together with the others who have +died here; Gard, however, I would have you burn upon a pyre, as speedily +as possible, since he has been the cause of all of the apparitions which +have been seen here during the winter." He spoke to her also of her own +destiny, and said that she had a notable future in store for her, but he +bade her beware of marrying any Greenlander; he directed her also to give +their property to the church and to the poor, and then sank down again a +second time. It had been the custom in Greenland, after Christianity was +introduced there, to bury persons on the farmsteads where they died, in +unconsecrated earth; a pole was erected in the ground, touching the +breast of the dead, and subsequently, when the priests came thither, the +pole was withdrawn and holy water poured in [the orifice], and the +funeral service held there, although it might be long thereafter. The +bodies of the dead were conveyed to the church at Ericsfirth, and the +funeral services held there by the clergy. Thorbiorn died soon after +this, and all of his property then passed into Gudrid's possession. Eric +took her to his home and carefully looked after her affairs. + +_Concerning Thord of Höfdi._--There was a man named Thord, who lived at +Höfdi on Höfdi-strands. He married Fridgerd, daughter of Thori the +Loiterer and Fridgerd, daughter of Kiarval the King of the Irish. Thord +was a son of Biorn Chestbutter, son of Thorvald Spine, Asleik's son, the +son of Biorn Iron-side, the son of Ragnar Shaggy-breeks. They had a son +named Snorri. He married Thorhild Ptarmigan, daughter of Thord the +Yeller. Their son was Thord Horse-head. Thorfinn Karlsefni[30-1] was the +name of Thord's son. Thorfinn's mother's name was Thorunn. Thorfinn was +engaged in trading voyages, and was reputed to be a successful merchant. +One summer Karlsefni equipped his ship, with the intention of sailing to +Greenland. Snorri, Thorbrand's son, of Alptafirth accompanied him, and +there were forty men on board the ship with them. There was a man named +Biarni, Grimolf's son, a man from Breidafirth, and another named +Thorhall, Gamli's son, an East-firth man. They equipped their ship, the +same summer as Karlsefni, with the intention of making a voyage to +Greenland; they had also forty men in their ship. When they were ready to +sail, the two ships put to sea together. It has not been recorded how +long a voyage they had; but it is to be told, that both of the ships +arrived at Ericsfirth in the autumn. Eric and other of the inhabitants of +the country rode to the ships, and a goodly trade was soon established +between them. Gudrid was requested by the skippers to take such of their +wares as she wished, while Eric, on his part, showed great munificence in +return, in that he extended an invitation to both crews to accompany him +home for winter quarters at Brattahlid. The merchants accepted this +invitation, and went with Eric. Their wares were then conveyed to +Brattahlid; nor was there lack there of good and commodious store-houses, +in which to keep them; nor was there wanting much of that, which they +needed, and the merchants were well pleased with their entertainment at +Eric's home during that winter. Now as it drew toward Yule, Eric became +very taciturn, and less cheerful than had been his wont. On one occasion +Karlsefni entered into conversation with Eric, and said: "Hast thou aught +weighing upon thee, Eric? The folk have remarked, that thou art somewhat +more silent than thou hast been hitherto. Thou hast entertained us with +great liberality, and it behooves us to make such return as may lie +within our power. Do thou now but make known the cause of thy +melancholy." Eric answers: "Ye accept hospitality gracefully, and in +manly wise, and I am not pleased that ye should be the sufferers by +reason of our intercourse; rather am I troubled at the thought, that it +should be given out elsewhere, that ye have never passed a worse Yule +than this, now drawing nigh, when Eric the Red was your host at +Brattahlid in Greenland." "There shall be no cause for that," replies +Karlsefni, "we have malt, and meal, and corn in our ships, and you are +welcome to take of these whatsoever you wish, and to provide as liberal +an entertainment as seems fitting to you." Eric accepts this offer, and +preparations were made for the Yule feast, and it was so sumptuous, that +it seemed to the people they had scarcely ever seen so grand an +entertainment before. And after Yule, Karlsefni broached the subject of a +marriage with Gudrid to Eric, for he assumed that with him rested the +right to bestow her hand in marriage. Eric answers favorably, and says, +that she would accomplish the fate in store for her, adding that he had +heard only good reports of him. And, not to prolong this, the result was, +that Thorfinn was betrothed to Thurid,[31-1] and the banquet was +augmented, and their wedding was celebrated; and this befell at +Brattahlid during the winter. + +_Beginning of the Wineland Voyages._--About this time there began to be +much talk at Brattahlid, to the effect that Wineland the Good should be +explored, for, it was said, that country must be possessed of many goodly +qualities. And so it came to pass, that Karlsefni and Snorri fitted out +their ship, for the purpose of going in search of that country in the +spring. Biarni and Thorhall joined the expedition with their ship, and +the men who had borne them company. There was a man named Thorvard; he +was wedded to Freydis, a natural daughter of Eric the Red. He also +accompanied them, together with Thorvald, Eric's son, and Thorhall, who +was called the Huntsman. He had been for a long time with Eric as his +hunter and fisherman during the summer, and as his steward during the +winter. Thorhall was stout and swarthy, and of giant stature; he was a +man of few words, though given to abusive language, when he did speak, +and he ever incited Eric to evil. He was a poor Christian; he had a wide +knowledge of the unsettled regions. He was on the same ship with Thorvard +and Thorvald. They had that ship which Thorbiorn had brought out. They +had in all one hundred and sixty men, when they sailed to the Western +Settlement,[32-1] and thence to Bear Island. Thence they bore away to the +southward two "dœgr."[32-2] Then they saw land, and launched a boat, and +explored the land, and found there large flat stones [_hellur_], and +many of these were twelve ells wide; there were many Arctic foxes there. +They gave a name to the country, and called it Helluland [the land of +flat stones]. Then they sailed with northerly winds two "dœgr," and land +then lay before them, and upon it was a great wood and many wild beasts; +an island lay off the land to the south-east, and there they found a +bear, and they called this Biarney [Bear Island], while the land where +the wood was they called Markland [Forest-land]. Thence they sailed +southward along the land for a long time, and came to a cape; the land +lay upon the starboard; there were long strands and sandy banks there. +They rowed to the land and found upon the cape there the keel of a +ship, and they called it there Kialarnes [Keelness]; they also called +the strands Furdustrandir [Wonder-strands], because they were so long to +sail by.[33-1] Then the country became indented with bays, and they +steered their ships into a bay. It was when Leif was with King Olaf +Tryggvason, and he bade him proclaim Christianity to Greenland, that the +king gave him two Gaels; the man's name was Haki, and the woman's +Haekia. The king advised Leif to have recourse to these people, if he +should stand in need of fleetness, for they were swifter than deer. Eric +and Leif had tendered Karlsefni the services of this couple. Now when +they had sailed past Wonder-strands, they put the Gaels ashore, and +directed them to run to the southward, and investigate the nature of the +country, and return again before the end of the third half-day. They +were each clad in a garment, which they called "kiafal,"[33-2] which was +so fashioned, that it had a hood at the top, was open at the sides, was +sleeveless, and was fastened between the legs with buttons and loops, +while elsewhere they were naked. Karlsefni and his companions cast +anchor, and lay there during their absence; and when they came again, +one of them carried a bunch of grapes, and the other an ear of new-sown +wheat. They went on board the ship, whereupon Karlsefni and his +followers held on their way, until they came to where the coast was +indented with bays. They stood into a bay with their ships. There was an +island out at the mouth of the bay, about which there were strong +currents, wherefore they called it Straumey [Stream Isle]. There were so +many birds[33-3] there, that it was scarcely possible to step between +the eggs. They sailed through the firth, and called it Straumfiord +[Streamfirth], and carried their cargoes ashore from the ships, and +established themselves there. They had brought with them all kinds of +live-stock. It was a fine country there. There were mountains +thereabouts. They occupied themselves exclusively with the exploration +of the country. They remained there during the winter, and they had +taken no thought for this during the summer. The fishing began to fail, +and they began to fall short of food. Then Thorhall the Huntsman +disappeared. They had already prayed to God for food, but it did not +come as promptly as their necessities seemed to demand. They searched +for Thorhall for three half-days, and found him on a projecting crag. He +was lying there, and looking up at the sky, with mouth and nostrils +agape, and mumbling something. They asked him why he had gone thither; +he replied, that this did not concern any one. They asked him then to go +home with them, and he did so. Soon after this a whale appeared there, +and they captured it, and flensed it, and no one could tell what manner +of whale it was; and when the cooks had prepared it, they ate of it, and +were all made ill by it. Then Thorhall, approaching them, says: "Did not +the Red-beard[34-1] prove more helpful than your Christ? This is my +reward for the verses which I composed to Thor, the Trustworthy; seldom +has he failed me." When the people heard this, they cast the whale down +into the sea, and made their appeals to God. The weather then improved, +and they could now row out to fish, and thenceforward they had no lack +of provisions, for they could hunt game on the land, gather eggs on the +island, and catch fish from the sea. + +_Concerning Karlsefni and Thorhall._--It is said, that Thorhall wished to +sail to the northward beyond Wonder-strands, in search of Wineland, while +Karlsefni desired to proceed to the southward, off the coast. Thorhall +prepared for his voyage out below the island, having only nine men in his +party, for all of the remainder of the company went with Karlsefni. And +one day when Thorhall was carrying water aboard his ship, and was +drinking, he recited this ditty:[35-1] + + When I came, these brave men told me, + Here the best of drink I'd get, + Now with water-pail behold me,-- + Wine and I are strangers yet. + Stooping at the spring, I've tested + All the wine this land affords; + Of its vaunted charms divested, + Poor indeed are its rewards. + +And when they were ready, they hoisted sail; whereupon Thorhall recited +this ditty:[35-2] + + Comrades, let us now be faring + Homeward to our own again! + Let us try the sea-steed's daring, + Give the chafing courser rein. + Those who will may bide in quiet, + Let them praise their chosen land, + Feasting on a whale-steak diet, + In their home by Wonder-strand. + +Then they sailed away to the northward past Wonder-strands and Keelness, +intending to cruise to the westward around the cape. They encountered +westerly gales, and were driven ashore in Ireland,[35-3] where they were +grievously maltreated and thrown into slavery. There Thorhall lost his +life, according to that which traders have related. + +It is now to be told of Karlsefni, that he cruised southward off the +coast, with Snorri and Biarni, and their people. They sailed for a long +time, and until they came at last to a river, which flowed down from the +land into a lake, and so into the sea. There were great bars at the mouth +of the river, so that it could only be entered at the height of the +flood-tide. Karlsefni and his men sailed into the mouth of the river, and +called it there Hop [a small land-locked bay]. They found self-sown +wheat-fields on the land there, wherever there were hollows, and wherever +there was hilly ground, there were vines.[36-1] Every brook there was +full of fish. They dug pits, on the shore where the tide rose highest, +and when the tide fell, there were halibut in the pits. There were great +numbers of wild animals of all kinds in the woods. They remained there +half a month, and enjoyed themselves, and kept no watch. They had their +live-stock with them. Now one morning early, when they looked about them, +they saw a great number of skin-canoes,[36-2] and staves were brandished +from the boats, with a noise like flails, and they were revolved in the +same direction in which the sun moves. Then said Karlsefni: "What may +this betoken?" Snorri, Thorbrand's son, answers him: "It may be, that +this is a signal of peace, wherefore let us take a white shield and +display it." And thus they did. Thereupon the strangers rowed toward +them, and went upon the land, marvelling at those whom they saw before +them. They were swarthy men,[36-3] and ill-looking, and the hair of their +heads was ugly. They had great eyes,[36-4] and were broad of cheek. They +tarried there for a time looking curiously at the people they saw before +them, and then rowed away, and to the southward around the point. + +Karlsefni and his followers had built their huts above the lake, some of +their dwellings being near the lake, and others farther away. Now they +remained there that winter. No snow came there, and all of their +live-stock lived by grazing.[37-1] And when spring opened, they +discovered, early one morning, a great number of skin-canoes, rowing from +the south past the cape, so numerous, that it looked as if coals had been +scattered broadcast out before the bay; and on every boat staves were +waved. Thereupon Karlsefni and his people displayed their shields, and +when they came together, they began to barter with each other. Especially +did the strangers wish to buy red cloth, for which they offered in +exchange peltries and quite gray skins. They also desired to buy swords +and spears, but Karlsefni and Snorri forbade this. In exchange for +perfect unsullied skins, the Skrellings would take red stuff a span in +length, which they would bind around their heads. So their trade went on +for a time, until Karlsefni and his people began to grow short of cloth, +when they divided it into such narrow pieces, that it was not more than a +finger's breadth wide, but the Skrellings still continued to give just as +much for this as before, or more. + +It so happened, that a bull,[37-2] which belonged to Karlsefni and his +people, ran out from the woods, bellowing loudly. This so terrified the +Skrellings, that they sped out to their canoes, and then rowed away to +the southward along the coast. For three entire weeks nothing more was +seen of them. At the end of this time, however, a great multitude of +Skrelling boats was discovered approaching from the south, as if a stream +were pouring down, and all of their staves were waved in a direction +contrary to the course of the sun, and the Skrellings were all uttering +loud cries. Thereupon Karlsefni and his men took red shields and +displayed them. The Skrellings sprang from their boats, and they met +then, and fought together. There was a fierce shower of missiles, for the +Skrellings had war-slings. Karlsefni and Snorri observed, that the +Skrellings raised up on a pole a great ball-shaped body, almost the size +of a sheep's belly, and nearly black in color, and this they hurled from +the pole up on the land above Karlsefni's followers, and it made a +frightful noise, where it fell. Whereat a great fear seized upon +Karlsefni, and all his men, so that they could think of nought but +flight, and of making their escape up along the river bank, for it seemed +to them, that the troop of the Skrellings was rushing towards them from +every side, and they did not pause, until they came to certain jutting +crags, where they offered a stout resistance. Freydis came out, and +seeing that Karlsefni and his men were fleeing, she cried: "Why do ye +flee from these wretches, such worthy men as ye, when, meseems, ye might +slaughter them like cattle. Had I but a weapon, methinks, I would fight +better than any one of you!" They gave no heed to her words. Freydis +sought to join them, but lagged behind, for she was not hale;[38-1] she +followed them, however, into the forest, while the Skrellings pursued +her; she found a dead man in front of her; this was Thorbrand, Snorri's +son, his skull cleft by a flat stone; his naked sword lay beside him; she +took it up, and prepared to defend herself with it. The Skrellings then +approached her, whereupon she stripped down her shift, and slapped her +breast with the naked sword. At this the Skrellings were terrified and +ran down to their boats, and rowed away. Karlsefni and his companions, +however, joined her and praised her valor. Two of Karlsefni's men had +fallen, and a great number of the Skrellings. Karlsefni's party had been +overpowered by dint of superior numbers. They now returned to their +dwellings, and bound up their wounds, and weighed carefully what throng +of men that could have been, which had seemed to descend upon them from +the land; it now seemed to them, that there could have been but the one +party, that which came from the boats, and that the other troop must have +been an ocular delusion. The Skrellings, moreover, found a dead man, and +an axe lay beside him. One of their number picked up the axe, and struck +at a tree with it, and one after another [they tested it], and it seemed +to them to be a treasure, and to cut well; then one of their number +seized it, and hewed at a stone with it, so that the axe broke, whereat +they concluded that it could be of no use, since it would not withstand +stone, and they cast it away. + +It now seemed clear to Karlsefni and his people, that although the +country thereabouts was attractive, their life would be one of constant +dread and turmoil by reason of the [hostility of the] inhabitants of the +country, so they forthwith prepared to leave, and determined to return to +their own country. They sailed to the northward off the coast, and found +five Skrellings, clad in skin-doublets, lying asleep near the sea. There +were vessels beside them, containing animal marrow, mixed with blood. +Karlsefni and his company concluded that they must have been banished +from their own land. They put them to death. They afterwards found a +cape, upon which there was a great number of animals, and this cape +looked as if it were one cake of dung, by reason of the animals which lay +there at night. They now arrived again at Streamfirth, where they found +great abundance of all those things of which they stood in need. Some men +say, that Biarni and Freydis remained behind here with a hundred men, and +went no further; while Karlsefni and Snorri proceeded to the southward +with forty men, tarrying at Hop barely two months, and returning again +the same summer. Karlsefni then set out with one ship, in search of +Thorhall the Huntsman, but the greater part of the company remained +behind. They sailed to the northward around Keelness, and then bore to +the westward, having land to the larboard.[40-1] The country there was a +wooded wilderness, as far as they could see, with scarcely an open space; +and when they had journeyed a considerable distance, a river flowed down +from the east toward the west. They sailed into the mouth of the river, +and lay to by the southern bank. + +_The Slaying of Thorvald, Eric's son._--It happened one morning, that +Karlsefni and his companions discovered in an open space in the woods +above them, a speck, which seemed to shine toward them, and they shouted +at it: it stirred, and it was a Uniped,[40-2] who skipped down to the +bank of the river by which they were lying. Thorvald, a son of Eric the +Red, was sitting at the helm, and the Uniped shot an arrow into his +inwards. Thorvald drew out the arrow, and exclaimed: "There is fat around +my paunch; we have hit upon a fruitful country, and yet we are not like +to get much profit of it." Thorvald died soon after from this wound. Then +the Uniped ran away back toward the north. Karlsefni and his men pursued +him, and saw him from time to time. The last they saw of him, he ran down +into a creek. Then they turned back; whereupon one of the men recited +this ditty:[40-3] + + Eager, our men, up hill down dell, + Hunted a Uniped; + Hearken, Karlsefni, while they tell + How swift the quarry fled! + +Then they sailed away back toward the north, and believed they had got +sight of the land of the Unipeds; nor were they disposed to risk the +lives of their men any longer. They concluded that the mountains of Hop, +and those which they had now found, formed one chain, and this appeared +to be so because they were about an equal distance removed from +Streamfirth, in either direction.[41-1] They sailed back, and passed the +third winter at Streamfirth. Then the men began to divide into factions, +of which the women were the cause; and those who were without wives, +endeavored to seize upon the wives of those who were married, whence the +greatest trouble arose. Snorri, Karlsefni's son, was born the first +autumn, and he was three winters old when they took their departure. When +they sailed away from Wineland, they had a southerly wind, and so came +upon Markland, where they found five Skrellings,[41-2] of whom one was +bearded, two were women, and two were children. Karlsefni and his people +took the boys, but the others escaped, and these Skrellings sank down +into the earth. They bore the lads away with them, and taught them to +speak, and they were baptized. They said, that their mother's name was +Vætilldi, and their father's Uvægi. They said, that kings governed the +Skrellings, one of whom was called Avalldamon, and the other +Valldidida.[41-3] They stated, that there were no houses there, and that +the people lived in caves or holes. They said, that there was a land on +the other side over against their country, which was inhabited by people +who wore white garments, and yelled loudly, and carried poles before +them, to which rags were attached;[42-1] and people believe that this +must have been Hvitramanna-land [White-men's-land], or Ireland the +Great.[42-2] Now they arrived in Greenland, and remained during the +winter with Eric the Red. + +Biarni, Grimolf's son, and his companions were driven out into the +Atlantic,[42-3] and came into a sea, which was filled with worms, and +their ship began to sink beneath them. They had a boat, which had been +coated with seal-tar; this the sea-worm does not penetrate. They took +their places in this boat, and then discovered that it would not hold +them all. Then said Biarni: "Since the boat will not hold more than half +of our men, it is my advice, that the men who are to go in the boat, be +chosen by lot, for this selection must not be made according to rank." +This seemed to them all such a manly offer, that no one opposed it. So +they adopted this plan, the men casting lots; and it fell to Biarni to go +in the boat, and half of the men with him, for it would not hold more. +But when the men were come into the boat, an Icelander, who was in the +ship, and who had accompanied Biarni from Iceland, said: "Dost thou +intend, Biarni, to forsake me here?" "It must be even so," answers +Biarni. "Not such was the promise thou gavest my father," he answers, +"when I left Iceland with thee, that thou wouldst thus part with me, when +thou saidst, that we should both share the same fate." "So be it, it +shall not rest thus," answers Biarni; "do thou come hither, and I will go +to the ship, for I see that thou art eager for life." Biarni thereupon +boarded the ship, and this man entered the boat, and they went their way, +until they came to Dublin in Ireland, and there they told this tale; now +it is the belief of most people, that Biarni and his companions perished +in the maggot-sea, for they were never heard of afterward. + +_Karlsefni and his Wife Thurid's Issue._--The following summer Karlsefni +sailed to Iceland and Gudrid with him, and he went home to Reyniness. His +mother believed that he had made a poor match, and she was not at home +the first winter. However, when she became convinced that Gudrid was a +very superior woman, she returned to her home, and they lived happily +together. Hallfrid was a daughter of Snorri, Karlsefni's son, she was the +mother of Bishop Thorlak,[43-1] Runolf's son. They had a son named +Thorbiorn, whose daughter's name was Thorunn, [she was] Bishop +Biorn's[43-2] mother. Thorgeir was the name of a son of Snorri, +Karlsefni's son, [he was] the father of Ingveld, mother of Bishop Brand +the Elder. Steinunn was a daughter of Snorri, Karlsefni's son, who +married Einar, a son of Grundar-Ketil, a son of Thorvald Crook, a son of +Thori of Espihol. Their son was Thorstein the Unjust, he was the father +of Gudrun, who married Jorund of Keldur. Their daughter was Halla, the +mother of Flosi, the father of Valgerd, the mother of Herra Erlend the +Stout, the father of Herra Hauk the Lawman. Another daughter of Flosi was +Thordis, the mother of Fru Ingigerd the Mighty. Her daughter was Fru +Hallbera, Abbess of Reyniness at Stad. Many other great people in Iceland +are descended from Karlsefni and Thurid, who are not mentioned here. God +be with us, Amen! + +FOOTNOTES: + +[14-1] The translation that follows, by Arthur Middleton Reeves, is based +on the text of Hauk's Book, No. 544 of the Arna-Magnæan Collection, +collated with No. 557 of the same collection. In _Origines Islandicae_, +II. 610, this saga is called "The Story of Thorfinn Carlsemne." + +[14-2] The rubrics here given in italics are found in the original +manuscript. + +[14-3] In eastern Norway. + +[14-4] From 853 to 871. + +[15-1] A blank in the original manuscript. + +[15-2] This introductory paragraph, giving at the end the ancestry of +Gudrid, the daughter of Thorbiorn Vifilson and a prominent figure in the +Vinland voyages, seems to come first on account of the earlier historical +allusions that it contains. The account of Gudrid is continued in the +third paragraph. + +[15-3] In southwestern Norway. + +[16-1] Movable planks used in constructing the lock-beds of the sleeping +apartment. They were often beautifully carved, and hence valuable. + +[16-2] An island midway between Iceland and Greenland, discovered in the +latter part of the ninth century. Gunnbiorn was a Norwegian. This island +is no longer above the surface. See Fiske, _The Discovery of America_, p. +242. + +[17-1] This should read _Eastern_ Settlement, evidently a clerical error +in an original manuscript, as both Hauk's Book and AM. 557 reproduce it. +There were two settlements in Greenland, the Eastern and Western, both, +however, to the westward of Cape Farewell, and between that cape on the +south and Disco Island on the north. Ericsey (_i.e._, Eric's Island) was +at the mouth of Ericsfirth, near the present Julianshaab. For further +details on the geography of these settlements, see Reeves, _The Finding +of Wineland the Good_, p. 166, (25), and Fiske, _The Discovery of +America_, I. 158, note. + +[17-2] On the western coast of Greenland, about 70° N. Lat. + +[17-3] The saga up to this point is taken from Landnama-bok, the great +Icelandic authority on early genealogy and history. It might well have +included one more paragraph (the succeeding one), which gives an +approximate date to the colonization of Greenland: "Ari, Thorgil's son, +says that that summer twenty-five ships sailed to Greenland out of +Borgfirth and Broadfirth; but fourteen only reached their destination; +some were driven back, and some were lost. This was sixteen [S: fifteen] +winters before Christianity was legally adopted in Iceland." That is, in +about 985, as Christianity was accepted in 1000 (or 1001). There is a +possible variation of a year in the usually accepted date. See _Origines +Islandicae_, I. 369. + +[20-1] "Winter-night-tide" was about the middle of October. + +[23-1] The home of Eric the Red, in the Eastern Settlement. + +[24-1] This was evidently the first time that the voyage from Greenland +to Norway was accomplished without going by way of Iceland, and was a +remarkable achievement. The aim was evidently to avoid the dangerous +passage between Greenland and Iceland. + +[24-2] A reference to some strange happenings in the winter of 1000-1001 +at the Icelandic farmstead Froda, as related in the Eyrbyggja Saga. + +[25-1] Of the year 999. See next note. + +[25-2] King Olaf ruled from 995 to 1000. He fell at the battle of Svolder +(in the Baltic) in September, 1000. It was in the same year that Leif +started out as the King's missionary to Greenland. See p. 43, note 1. + +[25-3] A wild cereal of some sort. Fiske is convinced that it was Indian +corn, while Storm thinks it was wild rice, contending with much force +that Indian corn was a product entirely unknown to the explorers, and +that they could not by any possibility have confused it with wheat, even +if they had found it. There is, moreover, no indication in this saga that +they found cultivated fields. Storm cites Sir William Alexander, +_Encouragement to Colonies_ (1624), who, in speaking of the products of +Nova Scotia, refers, among other things, to "some eares of wheate, barly +and rie growing there wild." He also cites Jacques Cartier, who, in 1534, +found in New Brunswick "wild grain like rye, which looked as though it +had been sowed and cultivated." See Reeves, p. 174, (50). + +[25-4] Supposed to be maple. + +[26-1] Also called Thorhild. + +[27-1] That is, were near Ireland. + +[28-1] The display of an axe seems to have been thought efficacious in +laying fetches. See Reeves, p. 171, (39), citing a passage from another +saga. + +[30-1] Thorfinn Karlsefni, the explorer of the Vinland expeditions, was +of excellent family. His lineage is given at greater length in the +_Landnama-bok_ (Book of Settlements). + +[31-1] Usually called Gudrid. + +[32-1] There is doubt as to why the expedition sailed northwest to the +Western Settlement. Possibly Thorfinn desired to make a different start +than Thorstein, whose expedition was a failure. See Reeves, p. 172, (45). + +[32-2] _Dœgr_ was a period of twelve hours. Reeves quotes the following +from an old Icelandic work: "In the day there are two _dœgr_; in the +_dœgr_ twelve hours." A _dœgr's_ sailing is estimated to have been about +one hundred miles. There is evidently a clerical error in this passage +after the number of days' sailing. The words for "two" and "seven" are +very similar in old Norse. + +[33-1] The language of the vellum AM. 557 is somewhat different in this +and the previous sentence. It does not say that "they sailed southward +along the land for a long time, and came to a cape," but, "when two +_dœgr_ had elapsed, they descried land, and they sailed off this land; +there was a cape to which they came. They beat into the wind along this +coast, having the land upon the starboard side. This was a bleak coast, +with long and sandy shores. They went ashore in boats, and found the +keel of a ship, so they called it Keelness there; they likewise gave a +name to the strands and called them Wonderstrands, because they were +long to sail by." + +[33-2] AM. 557 says _biafal_. Neither word has been identified. + +[33-3] Hauk's Book says "eider-ducks." + +[34-1] The god Thor. + +[35-1] The prose sense is: "Men promised me, when I came hither, that I +should have the best of drink; it behooves me before all to blame the +land. See, oh, man! how I must raise the pail; instead of drinking wine, +I have to stoop to the spring" (Reeves). + +[35-2] The prose sense is: "Let us return to our countrymen, leaving +those who like the country here, to cook their whale on Wonder-strand." +From an archaic form in these lines it is apparent that they are older +than either of the vellums, and must have been composed at least a +century before Hauk's Book was written; they may well be much older than +the beginning of the thirteenth century (Reeves). The antiquity of the +verses of the saga is also attested by a certain metrical irregularity, +as in poetry of the tenth and beginning of the eleventh centuries +(Storm). + +[35-3] In the next sentence the authority for this doubtful statement +seems to be placed upon "traders." + +[36-1] Note the word "hollows" with reference to the contention that +"wild wheat" is "wild rice." See p. 25, note 3. + +[36-2] "Skin-canoes," or kayaks, lead one to think of Eskimos. Both Storm +and Fiske think that the authorities of the saga-writer may have failed +to distinguish between bark-canoes and skin-canoes. + +[36-3] The vellum AM. 557 says "small men" instead of "swarthy men." The +explorers called them _Skrælingar_, a disparaging epithet, meaning +inferior people, _i.e._, savages. The name is applied, in saga +literature, to the natives of Greenland as well as to the natives of +Vinland. Storm thinks the latter were the Micmac Indians of Nova Scotia. + +[36-4] "Lescarbot, in his minute and elaborate description of the Micmacs +of Acadia, speaks with some emphasis of their large eyes. Dr. Storm quite +reasonably suggests that the Norse expression may refer to the size not +of the eyeball but of the eye-socket, which in the Indian face is apt to +be large." Fiske, _The Discovery of America_, p. 190. + +[37-1] This would seem to place Vinland farther south than Nova Scotia, +but not necessarily. Storm cites the Frenchman Denys, who as colonist and +governor of Nova Scotia passed a number of years there, and in a work +published in 1672 says of the inner tracts of the land east of Port Royal +that "there is very little snow in the country, and very little winter." +He adds: "It is certain that the country produces the vine +naturally,--that it bears a grape that ripens perfectly, the berry as +large as the muscat." + +[37-2] An animal unknown to the natives. As Fiske suggests, "It is the +unknown that frightens." + +[38-1] A euphemism for pregnant; the original is _eigi heil_. + +[40-1] Thus reaching the western coast of Cape Breton Island and Nova +Scotia, according to Storm. + +[40-2] The Norse word is _Ein-fœtingr_, one-footer. The mediaeval belief +in a country in which there lived a race of unipeds was not unknown in +Iceland. It has been suggested by Vigfusson that Thorvald being an +important personage, his death must be adorned in some way. It is a +singular fact that Jacques Cartier brought back from his Canadian +explorations reports of a land peopled by a race of one-legged folk. See +Reeves, _The Finding of Wineland_, p. 177, (56). + +[40-3] The literal translation is: "The men drove, it is quite true, a +one-footer down to the shore. The strange man ran hard over the banks. +Hearken, Karlsefni!" + +[41-1] As skilled mariners the explorers were undoubtedly competent to +make such a deduction as this. If Storm and Dieserud are correct, the +explorers saw from the north coast of Nova Scotia the same mountains that +they had seen from the south coast. + +[41-2] The Beothuk Indians of Newfoundland, according to Storm. + +[41-3] Nothing can with certainty be extracted from these names. The +chances that they were incorrectly recorded are of course great. Storm +contends that they cannot be Eskimo. Captain Holm of the Danish navy, an +authority on the Eskimos, says, "It is not _impossible_ that the names +may have been derived from Eskimo originals." Fiske says, p. 189, note: +"There is not the slightest reason for supposing that there were any +Eskimos south of Labrador so late as nine hundred years ago." In this +connection Captain Holm says: "It appears to me not sufficiently proven +that the now extinct race on America's east coast, the Beothuk, were +Indians. I wish to direct attention to the possibility that in the +Beothuk we may perhaps have one of the transition links between the +Indians and the Eskimo." See Reeves, p. 177, (57). + +[42-1] The description is clearly suggestive of processions of Christian +priests, in white vestments, with banners, and singing (Storm). + +[42-2] Vellum AM. 557 has not the words "Ireland the Great." As to +"White-men's-land" (mentioned also once in the _Landnama-bok_), Storm +traces its quasi-historical origin to the Irish visitation of Iceland +prior to the Norse settlement. See _Studies on the Vineland Voyages_, p. +61. The explanation is, however, hardly convincing. See _Origines +Islandicae_, Vol. II., p. 625. + +[42-3] AM. 557 says "Iceland's sea" (_i.e._, between Iceland and +Markland), and Hauk's Book, "Greenland's sea" (_i.e._, between Iceland +and Greenland). + +[43-1] Thorlak was born in 1085, consecrated bishop in 1118, and died +Feb. 1, 1133. These dates are definitely known, and are important. "The +bishop's birth-year being certainly known, one can reckon back, and +according to the regular allowances, we shall have Hallfrid born about +1060, and her father about 1030, in Vinland, and Karlsefni as far back as +1000." Vigfusson in _Origines Islandicae_, Vol. II., p. 592. Vigfusson +seeks to corroborate the above by other allied lineages. If his +deductions are correct, they are revolutionary with reference to the +generally accepted chronology of the Vinland voyages. He is convinced +that Leif belongs to an older generation than Karlsefni and his wife, and +that Leif's declining years coincide with Karlsefni's appearance on the +scene. The expeditions would then stand in the year 1025-1035, or +1030-1040, while Leif may have headed the first expedition, say in 1025. +And he thinks that various things outside of the genealogies point to +this. See Introduction, p. 12, of this volume. + +[43-2] Biorn was consecrated bishop in 1147, and died in 1162. His +successor was Bishop Brand "the Elder," who died in 1201. Both Hauk's +Book and AM. 557 refer to him as "the Elder"; hence the originals could +not have been written before the accession of the second bishop Brand, +which was in 1263. He died the following year. AM. 557 concludes with the +words "Bishop Brand the Elder." But in Hauk's Book the genealogical +information is carried down to Hauk's own time. He was a descendant of +Karlsefni and Gudrid, through Snorri, born in Vinland. + + + + +THE VINLAND HISTORY OF THE FLAT ISLAND BOOK[45-1] + + +_A Brief History of Eric the Red._[45-2]--There was a man named Thorvald, +a son of Osvald, Ulf's son, Eyxna-Thori's son. Thorvald and Eric the Red, +his son, left Jaederen [in Norway], on account of manslaughter, and went +to Iceland. At that time Iceland was extensively colonized. They first +lived at Drangar on Horn-strands, and there Thorvald died. Eric then +married Thorhild, the daughter of Jorund and Thorbiorg the Ship-chested, +who was then married to Thorbiorn of the Haukadal family. Eric then +removed from the north, and made his home at Ericsstadir by Vatnshorn. +Eric and Thorhild's son was called Leif. + +After the killing of Eyiulf the Foul, and Duelling-Hrafn, Eric was +banished from Haukadal, and betook himself westward to Breidafirth, +settling in Eyxney at Ericsstadir. He loaned his outer daïs-boards to +Thorgest, and could not get these again when he demanded them. This gave +rise to broils and battles between himself and Thorgest, as Eric's Saga +relates. Eric was backed in the dispute by Styr Thorgrimsson, Eyiulf of +Sviney, the sons of Brand of Alptafirth and Thorbiorn Vifilsson, while +the Thorgesters were upheld by the sons of Thord the Yeller and Thorgeir +of Hitardal. Eric was declared an outlaw at Thorsnessthing. He thereupon +equipped his ship for a voyage, in Ericsvag, and when he was ready to +sail, Styr and the others accompanied him out beyond the islands. Eric +told them, that it was his purpose to go in search of that country which +Gunnbiorn, son of Ulf the Crow, had seen, when he was driven westward +across the main, at the time when he discovered Gunnbiorns-skerries; he +added, that he would return to his friends, if he should succeed in +finding this country. Eric sailed out from Snæfellsiokul, and found the +land. He gave the name of Midiokul to his landfall; this is now called +Blacksark. From thence he proceeded southward along the coast, in search +of habitable land. He passed the first winter at Ericsey, near the middle +of the Eastern Settlement, and the following spring he went to +Ericsfirth, where he selected a dwelling-place. In the summer he visited +the western uninhabited country, and assigned names to many of the +localities. The second winter he remained at Holmar by Hrafnsgnipa, and +the third summer he sailed northward to Snæfell, and all the way into +Hrafnsfirth; then he said he had reached the head of Ericsfirth. He then +returned and passed the third winter in Ericsey at the mouth of +Ericsfirth. The next summer he sailed to Iceland, landing in Breidafirth. +He called the country, which he had discovered, Greenland, because, he +said, people would be attracted thither, if the country had a good name. +Eric spent the winter in Iceland, and the following summer set out to +colonize the country. He settled at Brattahlid in Ericsfirth, and learned +men say, that in this same summer, in which Eric set out to settle +Greenland, thirty-five ships sailed out of Breidafirth and Borgarfirth; +fourteen of these arrived there safely, some were driven back and some +were lost. This was fifteen years before Christianity was legally adopted +in Iceland.[46-1] During the same summer Bishop Frederick[46-2] and +Thorvald Kodransson went abroad [from Iceland]. Of those men, who +accompanied Eric to Greenland, the following took possession of land +there: Heriulf, Heriulfsfirth, he dwelt at Heriulfsness; Ketil, +Ketilsfirth; Hrafn, Hrafnsfirth; Solvi, Solvadal; Helgi Thorbrandsson, +Alptafirth; Thorbiorn Gleamer, Siglufirth; Einar, Einarsfirth; Hafgrim, +Hafgrimsfirth and Vatnahverfi; Arnlaug, Arnlaugsfirth; while some went to +the Western Settlement. + +_Leif the Lucky Baptized._--After that sixteen winters had lapsed, from +the time when Eric the Red went to colonize Greenland, Leif, Eric's son, +sailed out from Greenland to Norway. He arrived in Drontheim in the +autumn, when King Olaf Tryggvason was come down from the north, out of +Halagoland. Leif put in to Nidaros with his ship, and set out at once to +visit the king. King Olaf expounded the faith to him, as he did to other +heathen men who came to visit him. It proved easy for the king to +persuade Leif, and he was accordingly baptized, together with all of his +shipmates. Leif remained throughout the winter with the king, by whom he +was well entertained. + +_Biarni goes in Quest of Greenland._--Heriulf was a son of Bard +Heriulfsson. He was a kinsman of Ingolf, the first colonist. Ingolf +allotted land to Heriulf between Vag and Reykianess, and he dwelt at +first at Drepstokk. Heriulf's wife's name was Thorgerd, and their son, +whose name was Biarni, was a most promising man. He formed an inclination +for voyaging while he was still young, and he prospered both in property +and public esteem. It was his custom to pass his winters alternately +abroad and with his father. Biarni soon became the owner of a +trading-ship, and during the last winter that he spent in Norway, [his +father] Heriulf determined to accompany Eric on his voyage to Greenland, +and made his preparations to give up his farm. Upon the ship with Heriulf +was a Christian man from the Hebrides, he it was who composed the +Sea-Rollers' Song, which contains this stave:[47-1] + + Mine adventure to the Meek One, + Monk-heart-searcher, I commit now; + He, who heaven's halls doth govern, + Hold the hawk's-seat ever o'er me! + +Heriulf settled at Heriulfsness, and was a most distinguished man. Eric +the Red dwelt at Brattahlid, where he was held in the highest esteem, and +all men paid him homage. These were Eric's children: Leif, Thorvald, and +Thorstein, and a daughter whose name was Freydis; she was wedded to a man +named Thorvard, and they dwelt at Gardar, where the episcopal seat now +is. She was a very haughty woman, while Thorvard was a man of little +force of character, and Freydis had been wedded to him chiefly because of +his wealth. At that time the people of Greenland were heathen. + +Biarni arrived with his ship at Eyrar [in Iceland] in the summer of the +same year, in the spring of which his father had sailed away. Biarni was +much surprised when he heard this news, and would not discharge his +cargo. His shipmates inquired of him what he intended to do, and he +replied that it was his purpose to keep to his custom, and make his home +for the winter with his father; "and I will take the ship to Greenland, +if you will bear me company." They all replied that they would abide by +his decision. Then said Biarni, "Our voyage must be regarded as +foolhardy, seeing that no one of us has ever been in the Greenland Sea." +Nevertheless they put out to sea when they were equipped for the voyage, +and sailed for three days, until the land was hidden by the water, and +then the fair wind died out, and north winds arose, and fogs, and they +knew not whither they were drifting, and thus it lasted for many "dœgr." +Then they saw the sun again, and were able to determine the quarters of +the heavens; they hoisted sail, and sailed that "dœgr" through before +they saw land. They discussed among themselves what land it could be, +and Biarni said that he did not believe that it could be Greenland. They +asked whether he wished to sail to this land or not. "It is my counsel" +[said he], "to sail close to the land." They did so, and soon saw that +the land was level, and covered with woods, and that there were small +hillocks upon it. They left the land on their larboard, and let the +sheet turn toward the land. They sailed for two "dœgr" before they saw +another land. They asked whether Biarni thought this was Greenland yet. +He replied that he did not think this any more like Greenland than the +former, "because in Greenland there are said to be many great +ice-mountains." They soon approached this land, and saw that it was a +flat and wooded country. The fair wind failed them then, and the crew +took counsel together, and concluded that it would be wise to land +there, but Biarni would not consent to this. They alleged that they were +in need of both wood and water. "Ye have no lack of either of these," +says Biarni--a course, forsooth, which won him blame among his +shipmates. He bade them hoist sail, which they did, and turning the prow +from the land they sailed out upon the high seas, with southwesterly +gales, for three "dœgr," when they saw the third land; this land was +high and mountainous, with ice-mountains upon it. They asked Biarni then +whether he would land there, and he replied that he was not disposed to +do so, "because this land does not appear to me to offer any +attractions." Nor did they lower their sail, but held their course off +the land, and saw that it was an island. They left this land astern, and +held out to sea with the same fair wind. The wind waxed amain, and +Biarni directed them to reef, and not to sail at a speed unbefitting +their ship and rigging. They sailed now for four "dœgr," when they saw +the fourth land. Again they asked Biarni whether he thought this could +be Greenland or not. Biarni answers, "This is likest Greenland, +according to that which has been reported to me concerning it, and here +we will steer to the land." They directed their course thither, and +landed in the evening, below a cape upon which there was a boat, and +there, upon this cape, dwelt Heriulf,[49-1] Biarni's father, whence the +cape took its name, and was afterwards called Heriulfsness. Biarni now +went to his father, gave up his voyaging, and remained with his father +while Heriulf lived, and continued to live there after his father. + +_Here begins the Brief History of the Greenlanders._--Next to this is now +to be told how Biarni Heriulfsson came out from Greenland on a visit to +Earl Eric,[50-1] by whom he was well received. Biarni gave an account of +his travels [upon the occasion] when he saw the lands, and the people +thought that he had been lacking in enterprise, since he had no report to +give concerning these countries, and the fact brought him reproach. +Biarni was appointed one of the Earl's men, and went out to Greenland the +following summer. There was now much talk about voyages of discovery. +Leif, the son of Eric the Red, of Brattahlid, visited Biarni Heriulfsson +and bought a ship of him, and collected a crew, until they formed +altogether a company of thirty-five men. Leif invited his father, Eric, +to become the leader of the expedition, but Eric declined, saying that he +was then stricken in years, and adding that he was less able to endure +the exposure of sea-life than he had been. Leif replied that he would +nevertheless be the one who would be most apt to bring good luck, and +Eric yielded to Leif's solicitation, and rode from home when they were +ready to sail. When he was but a short distance from the ship, the horse +which Eric was riding stumbled, and he was thrown from his back and +wounded his foot, whereupon he exclaimed, "It is not designed for me to +discover more lands than the one in which we are now living, nor can we +now continue longer together." Eric returned home to Brattahlid, and Leif +pursued his way to the ship with his companions, thirty-five men; one of +the company was a German named Tyrker. They put the ship in order, and +when they were ready, they sailed out to sea, and found first that land +which Biarni and his ship-mates found last. They sailed up to the land +and cast anchor, and launched a boat and went ashore, and saw no grass +there; great ice mountains lay inland back from the sea, and it was as a +[tableland of] flat rock all the way from the sea to the ice mountains, +and the country seemed to them to be entirely devoid of good qualities. +Then said Leif, "It has not come to pass with us in regard to this land +as with Biarni, that we have not gone upon it. To this country I will now +give a name, and call it Helluland." They returned to the ship, put out +to sea, and found a second land. They sailed again to the land, and came +to anchor, and launched the boat, and went ashore. This was a level +wooded land, and there were broad stretches of white sand, where they +went, and the land was level by the sea. Then said Leif, "This land shall +have a name after its nature, and we will call it Markland." They +returned to the ship forthwith, and sailed away upon the main with +north-east winds, and were out two "dœgr" before they sighted land. They +sailed toward this land, and came to an island which lay to the +northward off the land. There they went ashore and looked about them, +the weather being fine, and they observed that there was dew upon the +grass, and it so happened that they touched the dew with their hands, +and touched their hands to their mouths, and it seemed to them that they +had never before tasted anything so sweet as this. They went aboard +their ship again and sailed into a certain sound, which lay between the +island and a cape, which jutted out from the land on the north, and they +stood in westering past the cape. At ebb-tide there were broad reaches +of shallow water there, and they ran their ship aground there, and it +was a long distance from the ship to the ocean; yet were they so anxious +to go ashore that they could not wait until the tide should rise under +their ship, but hastened to the land, where a certain river flows out +from a lake. As soon as the tide rose beneath their ship, however, they +took the boat and rowed to the ship, which they conveyed up the river, +and so into the lake, where they cast anchor and carried their hammocks +ashore from the ship, and built themselves booths there. They afterwards +determined to establish themselves there for the winter, and they +accordingly built a large house. There was no lack of salmon there +either in the river or in the lake, and larger salmon than they had ever +seen before. The country thereabouts seemed to be possessed of such +good qualities that cattle would need no fodder there during the +winters. There was no frost there in the winters, and the grass withered +but little. The days and nights there were of more nearly equal length +than in Greenland or Iceland. On the shortest day of winter the sun was +up between "eyktarstad" and "dagmalastad."[52-1] When they had completed +their house Leif said to his companions, "I propose now to divide our +company into two groups, and to set about an exploration of the country; +one half of our party shall remain at home at the house, while the other +half shall investigate the land, and they must not go beyond a point +from which they can return home the same evening, and are not to +separate [from each other.]" Thus they did for a time; Leif himself, by +turns, joined the exploring party or remained behind at the house. Leif +was a large and powerful man, and of a most imposing bearing, a man of +sagacity, and a very just man in all things. + +_Leif the Lucky finds Men upon a Skerry at Sea._--It was discovered one +evening that one of their company was missing, and this proved to be +Tyrker, the German. Leif was sorely troubled by this, for Tyrker had +lived with Leif and his father for a long time, and had been very devoted +to Leif, when he was a child. Leif severely reprimanded his companions, +and prepared to go in search of him, taking twelve men with him. They had +proceeded but a short distance from the house, when they were met by +Tyrker, whom they received most cordially. Leif observed at once that his +foster-father was in lively spirits. Tyrker had a prominent forehead, +restless eyes, small features, was diminutive in stature, and rather a +sorry-looking individual withal, but was, nevertheless, a most capable +handicraftsman. Leif addressed him, and asked: "Wherefore art thou so +belated foster-father mine, and astray from the others?" In the beginning +Tyrker spoke for some time in German, rolling his eyes and grinning, and +they could not understand him; but after a time he addressed them in the +Northern tongue: "I did not go much further [_than you_], and yet I have +something of novelty to relate. I have found vines and grapes." "Is this +indeed true, foster-father?" said Leif. "Of a certainty it is true," +quoth he, "for I was born where there is no lack of either grapes or +vines." They slept the night through, and on the morrow Leif said to his +shipmates: "We will now divide our labors, and each day will either +gather grapes or cut vines and fell trees, so as to obtain a cargo of +these for my ship." They acted upon this advice, and it is said, that +their after-boat was filled with grapes. A cargo sufficient for the ship +was cut, and when the spring came, they made their ship ready, and sailed +away; and from its products Leif gave the land a name, and called it +Wineland. They sailed out to sea, and had fair winds until they sighted +Greenland, and the fells below the glaciers; then one of the men spoke +up, and said, "Why do you steer the ship so much into the wind?" Leif +answers: "I have my mind upon my steering, but on other matters as well. +Do ye not see anything out of the common?" They replied, that they saw +nothing strange. "I do not know," says Leif, "whether it is a ship or a +skerry that I see." Now they saw it, and said, that it must be a skerry; +but he was so much keener of sight than they, that he was able to discern +men upon the skerry. "I think it best to tack," says Leif, "so that we +may draw near to them, that we may be able to render them assistance, if +they should stand in need of it; and if they should not be peaceably +disposed, we shall still have better command of the situation than they." +They approached the skerry, and lowering their sail, cast anchor, and +launched a second small boat, which they had brought with them. Tyrker +inquired who was the leader of the party. He replied that his name was +Thori, and that he was a Norseman; "but what is thy name?" Leif gave his +name. "Art thou a son of Eric the Red of Brattahlid?" says he. Leif +responded that he was. "It is now my wish," says Leif, "to take you all +into my ship, and likewise so much of your possessions as the ship will +hold." This offer was accepted, and [with their ship] thus laden, they +held away to Ericsfirth, and sailed until they arrived at Brattahlid. +Having discharged the cargo, Leif invited Thori, with his wife, Gudrid, +and three others, to make their home with him, and procured quarters for +the other members of the crew, both for his own and Thori's men. Leif +rescued fifteen persons from the skerry. He was afterward called Leif the +Lucky. Leif had now goodly store both of property and honor. There was +serious illness that winter in Thori's party, and Thori and a great +number of his people died. Eric the Red also died that winter. There was +now much talk about Leif's Wineland journey, and his brother, Thorvald, +held that the country had not been sufficiently explored. Thereupon Leif +said to Thorvald: "If it be thy will, brother, thou mayest go to Wineland +with my ship, but I wish the ship first to fetch the wood, which Thori +had upon the skerry." And so it was done. + +_Thorvald goes to Wineland._--Now Thorvald, with the advice of his +brother, Leif, prepared to make this voyage with thirty men. They put +their ship in order, and sailed out to sea; and there is no account of +their voyage before their arrival at Leif's-booths in Wineland. They laid +up their ship there, and remained there quietly during the winter, +supplying themselves with food by fishing. In the spring, however, +Thorvald said that they should put their ship in order, and that a few +men should take the after-boat, and proceed along the western coast, and +explore [the region] thereabouts during the summer. They found it a fair, +well-wooded country; it was but a short distance from the woods to the +sea, and [there were] white sands, as well as great numbers of islands +and shallows. They found neither dwelling of man nor lair of beast; but +in one of the westerly islands, they found a wooden building for the +shelter of grain. They found no other trace of human handiwork, and they +turned back, and arrived at Leif's-booths in the autumn. The following +summer Thorvald set out toward the east with the ship, and along the +northern coast. They were met by a high wind off a certain promontory, +and were driven ashore there, and damaged the keel of their ship, and +were compelled to remain there for a long time and repair the injury to +their vessel. Then said Thorvald to his companions: "I propose that we +raise the keel upon this cape, and call it Keelness," and so they did. +Then they sailed away, to the eastward off the land, and into the mouth +of the adjoining firth, and to a headland, which projected into the sea +there, and which was entirely covered with woods. They found an anchorage +for their ship, and put out the gangway to the land, and Thorvald and all +of his companions went ashore. "It is a fair region here," said he, "and +here I should like to make my home." They then returned to the ship, and +discovered on the sands, in beyond the headland, three mounds; they went +up to these, and saw that they were three skin-canoes, with three men +under each. They thereupon divided their party, and succeeded in seizing +all of the men but one, who escaped with his canoe. They killed the eight +men, and then ascended the headland again, and looked about them, and +discovered within the firth certain hillocks, which they concluded must +be habitations. They were then so overpowered with sleep that they could +not keep awake, and all fell into a [heavy] slumber, from which they were +awakened by the sound of a cry uttered above them; and the words of the +cry were these: "Awake, Thorvald, thou and all thy company, if thou +wouldst save thy life; and board thy ship with all thy men, and sail with +all speed from the land!" A countless number of skin-canoes then advanced +toward them from the inner part of the firth, whereupon Thorvald +exclaimed: "We must put out the war-boards, on both sides of the ship, +and defend ourselves to the best of our ability, but offer little +attack." This they did, and the Skrellings, after they had shot at them +for a time, fled precipitately, each as best he could. Thorvald then +inquired of his men, whether any of them had been wounded, and they +informed him that no one of them had received a wound. "I have been +wounded in my arm-pit," says he; "an arrow flew in between the gunwale +and the shield, below my arm. Here is the shaft, and it will bring me to +my end! I counsel you now to retrace your way with the utmost speed. But +me ye shall convey to that headland which seemed to me to offer so +pleasant a dwelling-place; thus it may be fulfilled, that the truth +sprang to my lips, when I expressed the wish to abide there for a time. +Ye shall bury me there, and place a cross at my head, and another at my +feet, and call it Crossness for ever after." At that time Christianity +had obtained in Greenland; Eric the Red died, however, before [the +introduction of] Christianity. + +Thorvald died, and when they had carried out his injunctions, they took +their departure, and rejoined their companions, and they told each other +of the experiences which had befallen them. They remained there during +the winter, and gathered grapes and wood with which to freight the ship. +In the following spring they returned to Greenland, and arrived with +their ship in Ericsfirth, where they were able to recount great tidings +to Leif. + +_Thorstein Ericsson dies in the Western Settlement._--In the meantime it +had come to pass in Greenland, that Thorstein of Ericsfirth had married, +and taken to wife Gudrid, Thorbiorn's daughter, [she] who had been the +spouse of Thori Eastman,[56-1] as has been already related. Now Thorstein +Ericsson, being minded to make the voyage to Wineland after the body of +his brother, Thorvald, equipped the same ship, and selected a crew of +twenty-five men of good size and strength, and taking with him his wife, +Gudrid, when all was in readiness, they sailed out into the open ocean, +and out of sight of land. They were driven hither and thither over the +sea all that summer, and lost all reckoning, and at the end of the first +week of winter they made the land at Lysufirth in Greenland, in the +Western Settlement. Thorstein set out in search of quarters for his crew, +and succeeded in procuring homes for all of his shipmates; but he and his +wife were unprovided for, and remained together upon the ship for two or +more days. At this time Christianity was still in its infancy in +Greenland. It befell early one morning, that men came to their tent, and +the leader inquired who the people were within the tent. Thorstein +replies: "We are twain," says he; "but who is it who asks?" "My name is +Thorstein, and I am known as Thorstein the Swarthy, and my errand hither +is to offer you two, husband and wife, a home with me." Thorstein +replied, that he would consult with his wife, and she bidding him decide, +he accepted the invitation. "I will come after you on the morrow with a +sumpter-horse, for I am not lacking in means wherewith to provide for you +both, although it will be lonely living with me, since there are but two +of us, my wife and myself, for I, forsooth, am a very hard man to get on +with; moreover, my faith is not the same as yours, albeit methinks that +is the better to which you hold." He returned for them on the morrow, +with the beast, and they took up their home with Thorstein the Swarthy, +and were well treated by him. Gudrid was a woman of fine presence, and a +clever woman, and very happy in adapting herself to strangers. + +Early in the winter Thorstein Ericsson's party was visited by sickness, +and many of his companions died. He caused coffins to be made for the +bodies of the dead, and had them conveyed to the ship, and bestowed +there; "for it is my purpose to have all the bodies taken to Ericsfirth +in the summer." It was not long before illness appeared in Thorstein's +home, and his wife, whose name was Grimhild, was first taken sick. She +was a very vigorous woman, and as strong as a man, but the sickness +mastered her; and soon thereafter Thorstein Ericsson was seized with the +illness, and they both lay ill at the same time, and Grimhild, Thorstein +the Swarthy's wife, died, and when she was dead Thorstein went out of the +room to procure a deal, upon which to lay the corpse. Thereupon Gudrid +spoke. "Do not be absent long, Thorstein mine!" says she. He replied, +that so it should be. Thorstein Ericsson then exclaimed: "Our house-wife +is acting now in a marvellous fashion, for she is raising herself up on +her elbow, and stretching out her feet from the side of the bed, and +groping after her shoes." At that moment Thorstein, the master of the +house, entered, and Grimhild laid herself down, wherewithal every timber +in the room creaked. Thorstein now fashioned a coffin for Grimhild's +body, and bore it away, and cared for it. He was a big man, and strong, +but it called for all [his strength], to enable him to remove the corpse +from the house. The illness grew upon Thorstein Ericsson, and he died, +whereat his wife, Gudrid, was sorely grieved. They were all in the room +at the time, and Gudrid was seated upon a chair before the bench, upon +which her husband, Thorstein, was lying. Thorstein, the master of the +house, then taking Gudrid in his arms [carried her] from the chair, and +seated himself, with her, upon another bench, over against her husband's +body, and exerted himself in divers ways to console her, and endeavored +to reassure her, and promised her that he would accompany her to +Ericsfirth with the body of her husband, Thorstein, and those of his +companions: "I will likewise summon other persons hither," says he, "to +attend upon thee, and entertain thee." She thanked him. Then Thorstein +Ericsson sat up, and exclaimed: "Where is Gudrid?" Thrice he repeated the +question, but Gudrid made no response. She then asked Thorstein, the +master, "Shall I give answer to his question, or not?" Thorstein, the +master, bade her make no reply, and he then crossed the floor, and seated +himself upon the chair, with Gudrid in his lap, and spoke, saying: "What +dost thou wish, namesake?" After a little while, Thorstein replies: "I +desire to tell Gudrid of the fate which is in store for her, to the end +that she may be better reconciled to my death, for I am indeed come to a +goodly resting-place. This I have to tell thee, Gudrid, that thou art to +marry an Icelander, and that ye are to have a long wedded life together, +and a numerous and noble progeny, illustrious, and famous, of good odor +and sweet virtues. Ye shall go from Greenland to Norway, and thence to +Iceland, where ye shall build your home. There ye shall dwell together +for a long time, but thou shalt outlive him, and shalt then go abroad and +to the South, and shalt return to Iceland again, to thy home, and there a +church shall then be raised, and thou shalt abide there and take the +veil, and there thou shalt die." When he had thus spoken, Thorstein sank +back again, and his body was laid out for burial, and borne to the ship. +Thorstein, the master, faithfully performed all his promises to Gudrid. +He sold his lands and live-stock in the spring, and accompanied Gudrid to +the ship, with all his possessions. He put the ship in order, procured a +crew, and then sailed to Ericsfirth. The bodies of the dead were now +buried at the church, and Gudrid then went home to Leif at Brattahlid, +while Thorstein the Swarthy made a home for himself on Ericsfirth, and +remained there as long as he lived, and was looked upon as a very +superior man. + +_Of the Wineland Voyages of Thorfinn and his Companions._--That same +summer a ship came from Norway to Greenland. The skipper's name was +Thorfinn Karlsefni; he was a son of Thord Horsehead, and a grandson of +Snorri, the son of Thord of Höfdi. Thorfinn Karlsefni, who was a very +wealthy man, passed the winter at Brattahlid with Leif Ericsson. He very +soon set his heart upon Gudrid, and sought her hand in marriage; she +referred him to Leif for her answer, and was subsequently betrothed to +him, and their marriage was celebrated that same winter. A renewed +discussion arose concerning a Wineland voyage, and the folk urged +Karlsefni to make the venture, Gudrid joining with the others. He +determined to undertake the voyage, and assembled a company of sixty men +and five women, and entered into an agreement with his shipmates that +they should each share equally in all the spoils of the enterprise. They +took with them all kinds of cattle, as it was their intention to settle +the country, if they could. Karlsefni asked Leif for the house in +Wineland, and he replied, that he would lend it but not give it. They +sailed out to sea with the ship, and arrived safe and sound at +Leif's-booths, and carried their hammocks ashore there. They were soon +provided with an abundant and goodly supply of food, for a whale of good +size and quality was driven ashore there, and they secured it, and +flensed it, and had then no lack of provisions. The cattle were turned +out upon the land, and the males soon became very restless and vicious; +they had brought a bull with them. Karlsefni caused trees to be felled, +and to be hewed into timbers, wherewith to load his ship, and the wood +was placed upon a cliff to dry. They gathered somewhat of all of the +valuable products of the land, grapes, and all kinds of game and fish, +and other good things. In the summer succeeding the first winter, +Skrellings were discovered. A great troop of men came forth from out the +woods. The cattle were hard by, and the bull began to bellow and roar +with a great noise, whereat the Skrellings were frightened, and ran away, +with their packs wherein were gray furs, sables, and all kinds of +peltries. They fled towards Karlsefni's dwelling, and sought to effect an +entrance into the house, but Karlsefni caused the doors to be defended +[against them]. Neither [people] could understand the other's language. +The Skrellings put down their bundles then, and loosed them, and offered +their wares [for barter], and were especially anxious to exchange these +for weapons, but Karlsefni forbade his men to sell their weapons, and +taking counsel with himself, he bade the women carry out milk to the +Skrellings, which they no sooner saw, than they wanted to buy it, and +nothing else. Now the outcome of the Skrellings' trading was, that they +carried their wares away in their stomachs, while they left their packs +and peltries behind with Karlsefni and his companions, and having +accomplished this [exchange] they went away. Now it is to be told, that +Karlsefni caused a strong wooden palisade to be constructed and set up +around the house. It was at this time that Gudrid, Karlsefni's wife, gave +birth to a male child, and the boy was called Snorri. In the early part +of the second winter the Skrellings came to them again, and these were +now much more numerous than before, and brought with them the same wares +as at first. Then said Karlsefni to the women: "Do ye carry out now the +same food, which proved so profitable before, and nought else." When they +saw this they cast their packs in over the palisade. Gudrid was sitting +within, in the doorway, beside the cradle of her infant son, Snorri, when +a shadow fell upon the door, and a woman in a black namkirtle entered. +She was short in stature, and wore a fillet about her head; her hair was +of a light chestnut color, and she was pale of hue, and so big-eyed, that +never before had eyes so large been seen in a human skull. She went up to +where Gudrid was seated, and said: "What is thy name?" "My name is +Gudrid; but what is thy name?" "My name is Gudrid," says she. The +housewife, Gudrid, motioned her with her hand to a seat beside her; but +it so happened, that at that very instant Gudrid heard a great crash, +whereupon the woman vanished, and at that same moment one of the +Skrellings, who had tried to seize their weapons, was killed by one of +Karlsefni's followers. At this the Skrellings fled precipitately, leaving +their garments and wares behind them; and not a soul, save Gudrid alone, +beheld this woman. "Now we must needs take counsel together," says +Karlsefni, "for that I believe they will visit us a third time, in great +numbers, and attack us. Let us now adopt this plan: ten of our number +shall go out upon the cape, and show themselves there, while the +remainder of our company shall go into the woods and hew a clearing for +our cattle, when the troop approaches from the forest. We will also take +our bull, and let him go in advance of us." The lie of the land was such +that the proposed meeting-place had the lake upon the one side, and the +forest upon the other. Karlsefni's advice was now carried into execution. +The Skrellings advanced to the spot which Karlsefni had selected for the +encounter, and a battle was fought there, in which great numbers of the +band of the Skrellings were slain. There was one man among the +Skrellings, of large size and fine bearing, whom Karlsefni concluded must +be their chief. One of the Skrellings picked up an axe, and having looked +at it for a time, he brandished it about one of his companions, and +hewed at him, and on the instant the man fell dead. Thereupon the big man +seized the axe, and after examining it for a moment, he hurled it as far +as he could, out into the sea; then they fled helter-skelter into the +woods, and thus their intercourse came to an end. Karlsefni and his party +remained there throughout the winter, but in the spring Karlsefni +announces, that he is not minded to remain there longer, but will return +to Greenland. They now made ready for the voyage, and carried away with +them much booty in vines and grapes, and peltries. They sailed out upon +the high seas, and brought their ship safely to Ericsfirth, where they +remained during the winter. + +_Freydis causes the Brothers to be put to Death._--There was now much +talk anew, about a Wineland-voyage, for this was reckoned both a +profitable and an honorable enterprise. The same summer that Karlsefni +arrived from Wineland, a ship from Norway arrived in Greenland. This ship +was commanded by two brothers, Helgi and Finnbogi, who passed the winter +in Greenland. They were descended from an Icelandic family of the +East-firths. It is now to be added, that Freydis,[62-1] Eric's daughter, +set out from her home at Gardar, and waited upon the brothers, Helgi and +Finnbogi, and invited them to sail with their vessel to Wineland, and to +share with her equally all of the good things which they might succeed in +obtaining there. To this they agreed, and she departed thence to visit +her brother, Leif, and ask him to give her the house which he had caused +to be erected in Wineland, but he made her the same answer [as that which +he had given Karlsefni], saying, that he would lend the house, but not +give it. It was stipulated between Karlsefni and Freydis, that each +should have on shipboard thirty able-bodied men, besides the women; but +Freydis immediately violated this compact, by concealing five men more +[than this number], and this the brothers did not discover before they +arrived in Wineland. They now put out to sea, having agreed beforehand, +that they would sail in company, if possible, and although they were not +far apart from each other, the brothers arrived somewhat in advance, and +carried their belongings up to Leif's house. Now when Freydis arrived, +her ship was discharged, and the baggage carried up to the house, +whereupon Freydis exclaimed: "Why did you carry your baggage in here?" +"Since we believed," said they, "that all promises made to us would be +kept." "It was to me that Leif loaned the house," says she, "and not to +you." Whereupon Helgi exclaimed: "We brothers cannot hope to rival thee +in wrong-dealing." They thereupon carried their baggage forth, and built +a hut, above the sea, on the bank of the lake, and put all in order about +it; while Freydis caused wood to be felled, with which to load her ship. +The winter now set in, and the brothers suggested, that they should amuse +themselves by playing games. This they did for a time, until the folk +began to disagree, when dissensions arose between them, and the games +came to an end, and the visits between the houses ceased; and thus it +continued far into the winter. One morning early, Freydis arose from her +bed, and dressed herself, but did not put on her shoes and stockings. A +heavy dew had fallen, and she took her husband's cloak, and wrapped it +about her, and then walked to the brothers' house, and up to the door, +which had been only partly closed by one of the men, who had gone out a +short time before. She pushed the door open, and stood, silently, in the +doorway for a time. Finnbogi, who was lying on the innermost side of the +room, was awake, and said: "What dost thou wish here, Freydis?" She +answers: "I wish thee to rise, and go out with me, for I would speak with +thee." He did so, and they walked to a tree, which lay close by the wall +of the house, and seated themselves upon it. "How art thou pleased here?" +says she. He answers: "I am well pleased with the fruitfulness of the +land, but I am ill-content with the breach which has come between us, +for, methinks, there has been no cause for it." "It is even as thou +sayest," says she, "and so it seems to me; but my errand to thee is, that +I wish to exchange ships with you brothers, for that ye have a larger +ship than I, and I wish to depart from here." "To this I must accede," +says he; "if it is thy pleasure." Therewith they parted, and she returned +home, and Finnbogi to his bed. She climbed up into bed, and awakened +Thorvard with her cold feet, and he asked her why she was so cold and +wet. She answered, with great passion: "I have been to the brothers," +says she, "to try to buy their ship, for I wished to have a larger +vessel, but they received my overtures so ill, that they struck me, and +handled me very roughly; what time thou, poor wretch, wilt neither avenge +my shame nor thy own, and I find, perforce, that I am no longer in +Greenland, moreover I shall part from thee unless thou wreakest vengeance +for this." And now he could stand her taunts no longer, and ordered the +men to rise at once, and take their weapons, and this they did, and they +then proceeded directly to the house of the brothers, and entered it, +while the folk were asleep, and seized and bound them, and led each one +out, when he was bound; and as they came out, Freydis caused each one to +be slain. In this wise all of the men were put to death, and only the +women were left, and these no one would kill. At this Freydis exclaimed: +"Hand me an axe!" This was done, and she fell upon the five women, and +left them dead. They returned home, after this dreadful deed, and it was +very evident that Freydis was well content with her work. She addressed +her companions, saying: "If it be ordained for us, to come again to +Greenland, I shall contrive the death of any man who shall speak of these +events. We must give it out, that we left them living here, when we came +away." Early in the spring, they equipped the ship, which had belonged to +the brothers, and freighted it with all of the products of the land, +which they could obtain, and which the ship would carry. Then they put +out to sea, and, after a prosperous voyage, arrived with their ship in +Ericsfirth early in the summer. Karlsefni was there, with his ship all +ready to sail, and was awaiting a fair wind; and people say, that a ship +richer laden, than that which he commanded, never left Greenland. + +_Concerning Freydis._--Freydis now went to her home, since it had +remained unharmed during her absence. She bestowed liberal gifts upon all +of her companions, for she was anxious to screen her guilt. She now +established herself at her home; but her companions were not all so +close-mouthed, concerning their misdeeds and wickedness, that rumors did +not get abroad at last. These finally reached her brother, Leif, and he +thought it a most shameful story. He thereupon took three of the men, who +had been of Freydis's party, and forced them all at the same time to a +confession of the affair, and their stories entirely agreed. "I have no +heart," says Leif, "to punish my sister, Freydis, as she deserves, but +this I predict of them, that there is little prosperity in store for +their offspring." Hence it came to pass, that no one from that time +forward thought them worthy of aught but evil. It now remains to take up +the story from the time when Karlsefni made his ship ready, and sailed +out to sea. He had a successful voyage, and arrived in Norway safe and +sound. He remained there during the winter, and sold his wares, and both +he and his wife were received with great favor by the most distinguished +men of Norway. The following spring he put his ship in order for the +voyage to Iceland; and when all his preparations had been made, and his +ship lying at the wharf, awaiting favorable winds, there came to him a +Southerner, a native of Bremen in the Saxonland, who wished to buy his +"house-neat."[65-1] "I do not wish to sell it," said he. "I will give +thee half a 'mörk' in gold for it," says the Southerner. This Karlsefni +thought a good offer, and accordingly closed the bargain. The Southerner +went his way, with the "house-neat," and Karlsefni knew not what wood it +was, but it was "mösur," come from Wineland. + +Karlsefni sailed away, and arrived with his ship in the north of Iceland, +in Skagafirth. His vessel was beached there during the winter, and in the +spring he bought Glaumbœiar-land, and made his home there, and dwelt +there as long as he lived, and was a man of the greatest prominence. +From him and his wife, Gudrid, a numerous and goodly lineage is +descended. After Karlsefni's death, Gudrid, together with her son, +Snorri, who was born in Wineland, took charge of the farmstead; and when +Snorri was married, Gudrid went abroad, and made a pilgrimage to the +South, after which she returned again to the home of her son, Snorri, +who had caused a church to be built at Glaumbœr. Gudrid then took the +veil and became an anchorite, and lived there the rest of her days. +Snorri had a son, named Thorgeir, who was the father of Ingveld, the +mother of Bishop Brand. Hallfrid was the name of the daughter of Snorri, +Karlsefni's son; she was the mother of Runolf, Bishop Thorlak's father. +Biorn was the name of [another] son of Karlsefni and Gudrid; he was the +father of Thorunn, the mother of Bishop Biorn. Many men are descended +from Karlsefni, and he has been blessed with a numerous and famous +posterity; and of all men Karlsefni has given the most exact accounts of +all these voyages, of which something has now been recounted. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[45-1] Reeves's translation. In _Origines Islandicae_, Vol. II., p. 598, +this saga is called "The Story of the Wineland Voyages, commonly called +The Story of Eric the Red." + +[45-2] The original word for "Brief History" also means "section," +"episode," "little story," _i.e._, extract or abbreviated account. + +[46-1] About 985 (983-986). One vellum of the _Landnama-bok_ (Book of +Settlements) says sixteen, the other fifteen years. + +[46-2] Bishop Frederick was from "Saxland" (Saxony). According to the +Kristni-Saga he came to Iceland "in the summer when the land had been +settled one-hundred-and-seven winters," _i.e._, in 981. He made but +little headway in preaching Christianity. + +[47-1] _Hafgerdingar_ (sea-rollers) are supposed to have been earthquake +waves, and the lines evidently refer to such tidal-waves caused by an +unusually severe earthquake in the year 986. See Reeves, p. 180, (63). +The prose sense of the stave is: "I beg the blessed friend of the monks +to further our voyage. May the Lord of the heavens hold his hand over +me." + +[49-1] "Certainly a marvellous coincidence, but it is quite in character +with the no less surprising accuracy with which the explorers of this +history [_i.e._, the Flat Island Book narrative] succeeded in finding +'Leif's-booths' in a country which was as strange to them as Greenland to +Biarni." (Reeves.) + +[50-1] Earl Eric ruled in Norway from 1000 to 1015. + +[52-1] These two words designate positions of the sun at two points of +time. Early commentators got much more definite results from this +observation than later ones, with scientific assistance, have succeeded +in getting. Largely on the basis of it, Rafn (in _Antiquitates +Americanæ_), concluded that Vinland was in Rhode Island. Both Storm and +Reeves, after detailed investigation, declare that it cannot be shown +from this passage how far to the south Vinland was located. Captain +Phythian, U.S.N., who has given the question careful consideration, says: +"The data furnished are not sufficiently definite to warrant a more +positive assertion than that the explorers could not have been, when the +record was made, farther north than Lat. [say] 49°." See Reeves, p. 181, +(66). + +[56-1] Evidently an incorrect statement. _Landnama-bok_, the authority on +genealogical matters, says: "His son was Thorbiorn, father of Gudrid who +married Thorstein, son of Eric the Red, and afterwards Thorfinn +Karlsefni." Thori Eastman (the Norwegian) is not mentioned in the +_Landnama-bok_. + +[62-1] This cruel virago plays a much less conspicuous part in the +version of Hauk's Book and AM. 557. + +[65-1] "A weather-vane, or other ornament at the point of the gable of a +house or upon a ship." (Fritzner.) + + + + +FROM ADAM OF BREMEN'S[67-1] DESCRIPTIO INSULARUM AQUILONIS + + +Moreover he[67-2] spoke of an island in that ocean[67-3] discovered by +many, which is called Vinland, for the reason that vines grow wild there, +which yield the best of wine. Moreover that grain unsown[67-4] grows +there abundantly, is not a fabulous fancy, but, from the accounts of the +Danes, we know to be a fact. Beyond this island, it is said, that there +is no habitable land in that ocean, but all those regions which are +beyond are filled with insupportable ice and boundless gloom, to which +Martian thus refers: "One day's sail beyond Thile the sea is frozen." +This was essayed not long since by that very enterprising Northmen's +prince, Harold,[68-1] who explored the extent of the northern ocean with +his ship, but was scarcely able by retreating to escape in safety from +the gulf's enormous abyss, where before his eyes the vanishing bounds of +earth were hidden in gloom. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[67-1] Adam of Bremen was a prebendary and writer on ecclesiastical +history. The _Descriptio Insularum Aquilonis_ is an appendix to his +_Gesta Hammaburgensis Ecclesiae Pontificum_. For the preparation of his +work on the "Northern Islands," Adam spent some time at the Danish court, +where he obtained much information from the king, Svend Estridson +(1047-1076), an unusually well informed monarch. Adam's work was +undoubtedly completed before the king's death, which occurred in 1076. +The _Descriptio_ was first printed in Lindenbrog's edition of Adam's +work, published in 1595, which thus contains the first printed allusions +to Vinland. Rafn gives a facsimile of one of the manuscripts, for part of +the passage. + +[67-2] Svend Estridson, king of Denmark. + +[67-3] Immediately before this extract, the author describes the islands +in the northern seas--among them Iceland--and then proceeds to speak of +newer lands "deeper in the ocean," first of all Greenland, "far up +towards the Swedish or Riphaean mountains," distant five or seven days' +sailing from Norway, then Halagland, somewhat nearer, where the sun is +above the horizon fourteen days in summer, and lastly Vinland. That is, +according to Adam, Vinland was in a northern region. + +[67-4] The reference to the "unsown grain," and vines in the preceding +sentence, are sufficiently characteristic to have enabled any one +familiar with the "Saga of Eric the Red" to identify the new land as +Vinland, even though it had not been named. It is interesting to note +that the reference to "unsown grain" does not appear in the Flat Island +Book saga. + +[68-1] Evidently a reference to Harold the Stern-ruler (Haardraade). He +was a contemporary of Svend Estridson, and ruler in Norway from 1047 to +1066. The saga of Harold Haardraade in Snorri Sturlason's "Saga of the +Kings of Norway" contains no reference to any such expedition. Yet it +would be quite in keeping with the other adventures of this +much-travelled king to have undertaken such an expedition. It is to be +noted that he did not, according to Adam, go in search of Vinland. + + + + +FROM THE ICELANDIC ANNALS[69-1] + + +ANNALES REGII + +A.D. 1121. Bishop Eric[69-2] of Greenland went in search of Vinland. + + +FROM THE ELDER SKALHOLT[69-3] ANNALS + +A.D. 1347. There came also a ship from Greenland, less in size than small +Icelandic trading vessels. It came into the outer Stream-firth.[69-4] It +was without an anchor. There were seventeen men on board, and they had +sailed to Markland,[69-5] but had afterwards been driven hither by storms +at sea. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[69-1] Besides the Annales Regii, which are the most important, there are +several other Icelandic annals. All have, under the year 1121, the entry +given here, (facsimile in Rafn). It is the only information that they +give concerning Vinland, and is the last surviving mention of Vinland in +the older Icelandic records. It must be remarked, however, that there +were no contemporary annals as early as 1121; the earliest entries on +Scandinavian events are gleaned from various sources, especially the +early historians. + +[69-2] According to the _Landnama-bok_ he was an Icelander, his full name +being Eric Gnupson. He is also known as Eric Uppsi. He was, according to +some accounts, the first bishop of Greenland. The exact date of his +consecration is not known; but the Lawman's Annals have, under date of +1112, these words: "Bishop Eric's expedition," referring no doubt to his +departure from Iceland. There is no record of his consecration at Lund +(Sweden), the seat of the primate at that time, as in the case of his +successor, Bishop Arnold. In regard to Bishop Eric's seeking Vinland, +there is no indication anywhere why he went, or whether he ever returned. +At any rate, the Greenlanders applied for a new bishop, and, according to +the annals, one was consecrated in 1124; this was Bishop Arnold, and he +reached Greenland the following year. See "The Tale of the Greenlanders," +in _Origines Islandicae_, II. 748. + +[69-3] So called because the manuscript was found at Skalholt, in +southern Iceland. This entry (facsimile in Rafn) is corroborated, in +abbreviated form, by the Annals of Gottskalk, in these words: "A ship +came then from Greenland, which had sailed to Markland, and there were +eighteen men on board." + +[69-4] Stream-firth is on the western coast of Iceland. + +[69-5] One of the new lands mentioned in the sagas of the Vinland +voyages. + + + + +PAPAL LETTERS CONCERNING THE BISHOPRIC OF GARDAR IN GREENLAND DURING THE +FIFTEENTH CENTURY[70-1] + + +LETTER OF NICHOLAS V., _September_ 20, 1448 + +Called by a command from on high to preside over all the churches in the +exercise of our apostolic duty, with the Lord's help we employ all our +solicitude in laboring for the salvation of souls redeemed by the +precious blood of Christ, and we strive earnestly to restore to a state +of peace and tranquillity, not only those who are frequently tossed about +by the storms of impiety and error, but also those who are involved in +the hardships and whirlwinds of persecution. Profoundly impressed +therefore with the responsibility of our position, it is not difficult to +understand how our mind was filled with bitterness by the tearful +lamentations[71-1] which have reached our ears from our beloved children, +the native and other inhabitants of the island of Greenland, a region +situated at the uttermost end of the earth. The island, belonging[71-2] +to the kingdom of Norway, and under the ecclesiastical jurisdiction of +the Archbishop of Drontheim,[71-3] received the faith of Christ almost +six[71-4] centuries ago, through the piety of blessed King Olaf, and +preserved it steadfastly and inviolably in accordance with the tradition +of the Roman Church, and the Apostolic See. After their conversion, the +people of this island, with untiring and characteristic devotion, erected +many temples[71-5] to the worship of God and his saints, as well as a +magnificent cathedral,[71-6] in which divine worship was diligently +celebrated, until about thirty[71-7] years ago, when God permitting it, a +barbarous and pagan fleet from neighboring shores[71-8] invaded the +island, laying waste the land with fire and sword, and destroying the +sacred temples. Just nine parish churches were left standing. To these +are attached, it is said, parishes of very great extent. These churches +are left intact, because being situated in the mountain fastnesses, they +were inaccessible to the barbarian hordes, who, after completing their +work of destruction, led captive to their shores the unfortunate +inhabitants of both sexes, and more particularly those who seemed best +able to bear the hardships of servitude and tyranny. But as the same +complaint sets forth, many of these captives, after a time, returned to +their native land. They set to work to rebuild their ruined homes, and +were particularly desirous of restoring divine worship to its former +splendor. Because, however, of their past calamities, as well as the +added trials of famine and want, they had not wherewith to support +priests or bishop. They have been consequently during these thirty years +past without the comfort and ministry of bishop or priest, unless some +one of a very zealous disposition, and at long intervals, and in spite of +danger from the raging sea, ventured to visit the island and minister to +them in those churches which the barbarians had left standing. Having +acquainted us with this deplorable state of affairs, and knowing our +paternal solicitude, they have supplicated us to come to their rescue in +this their hour of spiritual need. Our hearts have been moved by the +prayers of the people of Greenland, but not being sufficiently acquainted +with the circumstances, we direct and command you, or either of +you,[73-1] beloved brothers, who as we understand are the bishops living +nearest to that island, to institute a diligent inquiry as to whether +things are as they have been reported to us, and if you should find them +so, and the number of people warrant it, and if they are in a condition +to provide sufficiently, we command you or either of you, to send worthy +priests who will minister to them, erect churches, govern parishes, and +administer the sacraments. + +Moreover, if you or either of you should deem it expedient, and in this +you will consult, of course, the metropolitan,[73-2] if his residence be +not too far away from you, we empower you to select and consecrate a +bishop, having first required him to take the usual oath to us and the +Roman See. Be mindful, however, that we burden your conscience with this +work, and we grant you, or either of you, full authority to carry it out, +even if there should exist any constitution of the Apostolic See, general +councils, canonical or other statutes to the contrary. + +Given at Rome as dated above in the second year of our pontificate. + + +LETTER OF ALEXANDER VI.; WRITTEN IN THE FIRST YEARS OF HIS +PONTIFICATE[73-3] + +It has been reported to us that in the diocese of Gardar in Greenland, +situated at the confines of the known world, the inhabitants, because of +the scarcity of bread, wine and oil, live for the most part on dried fish +and milk products. Wherefore because of the difficulty of passing through +such immense quantities of ice, and likewise because of the poverty of +the land, and the scant means of living, ships rarely visit its shores. +We have learned in fact that no vessel has touched there during the past +eighty years, and if a voyage be made at all, it must be in the month of +August, when the ice has broken up. On this account, during eighty years +no bishop or priest has resided personally among those people, and by +reason of this, we are informed that many who were formerly Catholics +have forgotten the faith of their baptism, and that no memory of the +Christian religion is found, except a corporal, which is shown to the +people once a year, and on which it is said the last priest who +officiated there consecrated the body of Christ a hundred years +ago.[74-1] In consideration of these things, Innocent the VIII., our +predecessor of happy memory, wishing to provide a proper pastor for those +forlorn people, conferred with his brethren, of whom we were one, and +elected Matthias, our venerable brother, a member of the Order of St. +Benedict, as well as professed monk, at our suggestion, and while we were +still in minor orders, to be Bishop of Gardar. This good man, fired with +great zeal to recall those people from the way of error to the practice +of their faith, is about to undertake this perilous voyage and laborious +duty.[74-2] We, on our part, accordingly, recognizing the pious and +praiseworthy purpose of the same elect, and wishing to succor in some +manner his poverty, which is very great indeed, command the officials of +our chancery, as well as those of our palace, under pain of +excommunication _ipso facto_ to be incurred, that all apostolic letters +destined for the church of Gardar, be written gratis for the glory of God +alone, without exacting or charging any stipend; and we command the +clergy and notaries of our palace to forward all letters to the above +mentioned bishop, without demanding any payment whatsoever for services +rendered. + +To him everything must be free, other things to the contrary +notwithstanding. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[70-1] In 1893 an American in Rome, Mr. J.C. Heywood, one of the papal +chamberlains, brought out, in a very small edition (twenty-five copies), +a book of photographic facsimiles of documents in the Vatican relating to +Greenland and the discovery of America, _Documenta Selecta e Tabulario +Secreto Vaticano_. The Latin text of those here presented may be found in +Fischer, _Discoveries of the Northmen_, pp. 49-51. A translation of all +was made for the Tennessee Historical Society by Rev. John B. Morris and +printed in Vol. IX. of the society's organ, the _American Historical +Magazine_. Using this translation, we have printed Letters IX. and X. as +the only ones that contain anything of particular interest concerning the +Gardar bishopric in Greenland, excepting, possibly, the following +sentence from Letter II. (December 4, 1276), to the Archbishop of +Drontheim: "Your Fraternity having been explicitly directed by letters +apostolic to visit personally all parts of the kingdom of Norway, for the +purpose of collecting the tithes due the Holy Land, has informed us that +this seems almost impossible, when it is taken into consideration that +the diocese of Gardar in Greenland is so remote from your metropolitan +see and kingdom, that five years or more would be consumed in going +thither and returning." It has been inferred, on account of the length of +this time, that the Vinland colony was included. There is no documentary +evidence of this. The papal letters contain no reference to Vinland. + +[71-1] No record of these reports from Greenland has been found. + +[71-2] Both Iceland and Greenland came under Norwegian rule in 1261, +during the reign of Haakon Haakonson (1217-1263). + +[71-3] In Norway. + +[71-4] Only four and a half centuries before this time. Olaf Tryggvason, +who reigned from 995 to 1000, sent Leif Ericson as a missionary to +Greenland in the year 1000. + +[71-5] According to Northern chorography, the Eastern Settlement had one +hundred and ninety farmsteads, twelve churches, and two monasteries; the +Western Settlement had ninety farmsteads and three churches. + +[71-6] The cathedral (hardly magnificent) was in the Eastern Settlement +(_i.e._, in southern Greenland), no doubt the present Kakortok. The +village of Gardar, which gave its name to the bishopric, was at the +present Kaksiarsuk. The authority which makes this identification +possible, is Ivar Bardsen's description of Greenland written in that +country in the fourteenth century. He was for many years steward to the +Gardar bishopric. An English version of Bardsen's description is printed +in Major's _The Voyages of the Venetian Brothers Zeno_ (London, 1873). +See also Fiske, _The Discovery of America_, pp. 239 and 242. + +[71-7] That is, about 1418. The last notice of Greenland based on +Northern tradition is from the year 1409, telling of a marriage ceremony +performed by Endride Andreson, the last bishop. See Laing's _The Sagas of +the Norse Kings_ (London, 1889), p. 177. + +[71-8] From Ivar Bardsen's description of Greenland it is known that the +Greenlanders first came in conflict with the Eskimos during the +fourteenth century. He was appointed to lead an expedition from the +Eastern Settlement against the Skrellings (Eskimos), who had taken +possession of the Western Settlement. When he arrived there the +Skrellings had departed, and they found nothing but ruins and some cattle +running wild. See _Antiquitates Americanæ_, p. 316. + +The letter of Nicholas V. refers to an attack on the Western Settlement, +of which there is no other recorded evidence. It is not likely that it +will ever be possible to determine whether the settlement owed its final +destruction to the irruptions of the Eskimos, "to the ravages of +pestilence, to the enforced neglect of the mother country--itself during +the fifteenth century too often in sore straits--to the iniquitous +restrictions in commerce imposed by the home government, or to a +combination of several of these evils." There was a regular succession of +bishops from 1124 to the end of the fourteenth, or perhaps the beginning +of the fifteenth century. + +[73-1] Addressed to the two bishops of Skalholt and Holar, in Iceland. + +[73-2] The Archbishop of Drontheim in Norway. + +[73-3] Alexander VI. was pope from 1492 to 1503. + +[74-1] Evidently this is only an approximate statement. + +[74-2] There are no records that this man ever reached either Greenland +or Iceland. The Greenland colony was not entirely forgotten by the home +government (Denmark-Norway). In the beginning of the sixteenth century, +Archbishop Valkendorf of Drontheim had agitated the question of searching +for the Greenland colony. During the reign of Frederick II. of +Denmark-Norway, Mogens Heinesen was in 1579 sent out, but he did not +reach the island. The Englishman John Davis, in 1585, visited the western +coast of Greenland, but found no Europeans. + + + + +ORIGINAL NARRATIVES OF THE VOYAGES OF COLUMBUS + + + + +ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE LORDS THE CATHOLIC SOVEREIGNS AND +CRISTÓBAL COLON[77-1] + + +The things prayed for, and which Your Highnesses give and grant to Don +Cristóbal Colon[77-2] as some recompense for what he is to discover in +the Oceans, and for the voyage which now, with the help of God, he has +engaged to make therein in the service of Your Highnesses, are the +following: + +Firstly, that Your Highnesses, as actual Lords of the said Oceans, +appoint from this date the said Don Cristóbal Colon to be your Admiral in +all those islands and mainlands which by his activity and industry shall +be discovered or acquired in the said oceans, during his lifetime, and +likewise, after his death, his heirs and successors one after another in +perpetuity, with all the pre-eminences and prerogatives appertaining to +the said office, and in the same manner as Don Alfonso Enriques, your +High Admiral of Castile,[78-1] and his predecessors in the said office +held it in their districts.--It so pleases their Highnesses. Juan de +Coloma. + +Likewise, that Your Highnesses appoint the said Don Cristóbal Colon to be +your Viceroy and Governor General in all the said islands and mainlands +and in the islands which, as aforesaid, he may discover and acquire[78-2] +in the said seas; and that for the government of each and any of them he +may make choice of three persons for each office, and that Your +Highnesses may select and choose the one who shall be most serviceable to +you; and thus the lands which our Lord shall permit him to discover and +acquire for the service of Your Highnesses, will be the better +governed.--It so pleases their Highnesses. Juan de Coloma. + +Item, that of all and every kind of merchandise, whether pearls, precious +stones, gold, silver, spices, and other objects and merchandise +whatsoever, of whatever kind, name and sort, which may be bought, +bartered, discovered, acquired and obtained within the limits of the said +Admiralty, Your Highnesses grant from now henceforth to the said Don +Cristóbal, and will that he may have and take for himself, the tenth part +of the whole, after deducting all the expenses which may be incurred +therein, so that of what shall remain clear and free he may have and take +the tenth part for himself, and may do therewith as he pleases, the other +nine parts being reserved for Your Highnesses.--It so pleases their +Highnesses. Juan de Coloma. + +Likewise, that if on account of the merchandise which he might bring from +the said islands and lands which thus, as aforesaid, may be acquired or +discovered, or of that which may be taken in exchange for the same from +other merchants here, any suit should arise in the place where the said +commerce and traffic shall be held and conducted; and if by the +pre-eminence of his office of Admiral it appertains to him to take +cognizance of such suit; it may please Your Highnesses that he or his +deputy, and not another judge, shall take cognizance thereof and give +judgment in the same from henceforth.--It so pleases their Highnesses, if +it appertains to the said office of Admiral, according as it was held by +Admiral Don Alfonso Enriques, and others his successors in their +districts, and if it be just. Juan de Coloma. + +Item, that in all the vessels which may be equipped for the said traffic +and business, each time and whenever and as often as they may be +equipped, the said Don Cristóbal Colon may, if he chooses, contribute and +pay the eighth part of all that may be spent in the equipment, and that +likewise he may have and take the eighth part of the profits that may +result from such equipment.--It so pleases their Highnesses. Juan de +Coloma. + +These are granted and despatched, with the replies of Your Highnesses at +the end of each article, in the town of Santa Fe de la Vega of Granada, +on the seventeenth day of April in the year of the nativity of our +Saviour Jesus Christ, one thousand four hundred and ninety-two. I the +King. I the Queen. By command of the King and of the Queen. Juan de +Coloma. Registered, Calcena. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[77-1] The Spanish text is that printed by Navarrete in his _Coleccion de +los Viages y Descubrimientos_, etc. (Madrid, 1825), II. 7-8, and taken +from the Archives of the Duke of Veragua. The translation is that of +George F. Barwick printed by Benjamin Franklin Stevens in his +_Christopher Columbus His Own Book of Privileges_, 1502, etc. (London, +1893), pp. 42-45, with such slight changes (chiefly of tenses) as were +necessary to bring it into conformity with the text of Navarrete. This +document is also given in English translation in _Memorials of Columbus_ +(London, 1823), pp. 40-43. That volume is a translation of G.B. Spotorno, +_Codice Diplomatico Colombo-Americano_ (Genoa, 1823). + +[77-2] In this edition of the Narratives of the Voyages of Columbus his +name in the translation of the original documents will be given in the +form used in the originals. During his earlier years in Spain Columbus +was known as Colomo, the natural Spanish form corresponding to the +Italian Colombo. At some time prior to 1492 he adopted the form Colon, +apparently to make more probable his claim to be descended from a Roman +general, Colonius, and to be related to the French admiral, Coullon, +called in contemporary Italian sources Colombo, and Columbus in Latin. In +modern texts of Tacitus the Roman general's name is Cilonius, and modern +research has shown that the French admiral's real name was Caseneuve and +that Coullon was a sobriquet added for some unknown reason. On the two +French naval commanders known as Colombo or Coullon and the baselessness +of Columbus's alleged relationship see Vignaud, _Études Critiques sur la +Vie de Colomb_ pp. 131 ff. + +[78-1] In 1497 Columbus at his own request was supplied with a copy of +the ordinances establishing the admiralty of Castile so that he might +have a documentary enumeration of his prerogatives in the Indies. This +official copy he preserved in the collection of his papers known as the +_Book of Privileges_, and the translation of the documents relating to +the Admiralty of Castile is given in Stevens's edition of the _Book of +Privileges_, pp. 14 ff. This dignity of Admiral comprised supreme or +vice-regal authority on the sea and the general range of legal +jurisdiction in determining suits of law that is enjoyed by modern courts +of admiralty. A translation of Columbus's exposition of his rights +derived from his admiralty of the islands in the Ocean may be found in +P.L. Ford, _Writings of Columbus_ (New York, 1892), pp. 177-198, taken +from _Memorials of Columbus_ (London, 1823), pp. 205-223. For a summary +of these powers _cf._ the _Titulo_ that follows. + +[78-2] It is a remarkable fact that nothing is said in this patent of +discovering a route to the Indies. It is often said that the sole purpose +of Columbus was to discover such a route, yet it is clear that he +expected to make some new discoveries, and that if he did not, the +sovereigns were under no specified obligations to him. Patents are +usually drawn on the lines indicated by the petitioner. Can we conclude +that the complete silence of the articles as to the Indies means that +Ferdinand and Isabella refused to make any promises if Columbus only +succeeded in reaching the known East Indies and could gain for them no +new possessions? + + + + +TITLE GRANTED BY THE CATHOLIC SOVEREIGNS TO CRISTÓBAL COLON OF ADMIRAL, +VICEROY AND GOVERNOR OF THE ISLANDS AND MAINLAND THAT MAY BE +DISCOVERED[81-1] + + +Don Ferdinand and Donna Isabella, by the grace of God King and Queen of +Castile, Leon, Aragon, Sicily, Granada, Toledo, Valencia, Galicia, +Majorca, Seville, Sardinia, Cordova, Corsica, Murcia, Jaen, Algarbe, +Algeciras, Gibraltar, and the Canary Islands; Count and Countess of +Barcelona; Lords of Biscay and Molina; Dukes of Athens and Neopatria; +Counts of Roussillon and Cerdagne, Marquises of Oristano and Goziano; +Forasmuch as you, Cristóbal Colon, are going by our command, with some of +our ships and with our subjects, to discover and acquire certain islands +and mainland in the ocean, and it is hoped that, by the help of God, some +of the said islands and mainland in the said ocean will be discovered and +acquired by your pains and industry; and as it is a just and reasonable +thing that since you incur the said danger for our service you should be +rewarded for it, and since we desire to honor and favor you on account of +what is aforesaid, it is our will and pleasure that you, the said +Cristóbal Colon, after you have discovered and acquired the said islands +and mainland in the said ocean, or any of them whatsoever, shall be our +Admiral of the said islands and mainland which you may thus discover and +acquire, and shall be our Admiral and Viceroy and Governor therein, and +shall be empowered from that time forward to call and entitle yourself +Don Cristóbal Colon, and that your sons and successors in the said office +and charge may likewise entitle and call themselves Don, and Admiral and +Viceroy and Governor thereof; and that you may have power to use and +exercise the said office of Admiral, together with the said office of +Viceroy and Governor of the said islands and mainland which you may thus +discover and acquire, by yourself or by your lieutenants, and to hear and +determine all the suits and causes civil and criminal appertaining to the +said office of Admiralty, Viceroy, and Governor according as you shall +find by law, and as the Admirals of our kingdoms are accustomed to use +and exercise it; and may have power to punish and chastise delinquents, +and exercise the said offices of Admiralty, Viceroy, and Governor, you +and your said lieutenants, in all that concerns and appertains to the +said offices and to each of them; and that you shall have and levy the +fees and salaries annexed, belonging and appertaining to the said offices +and to each of them, according as our High Admiral in the Admiralty of +our kingdoms levies and is accustomed to levy them. And by this our +patent, or by the transcript thereof signed by a public scrivener, we +command Prince Don Juan, our very dear and well beloved son, and the +Infantes, dukes, prelates, marquises, counts, masters of orders, priors, +commanders, and members of our council, and auditors of our audiencia, +alcaldes, and other justices whomsoever of our household, court, and +chancery, and sub-commanders, alcaldes of castles and fortified and +unfortified houses, and all councillors, assistants, regidores, alcaldes, +bailiffs, judges, veinticuatros, jurats, knights, esquires, officers, and +liege men[82-1] of all the cities, towns, and places of our kingdoms and +dominions, and of those which you may conquer and acquire, and the +captains, masters, mates, officers, mariners, and seamen, our natural +subjects who now are or hereafter shall be, and each and any of them, +that upon the said islands and mainland in the said ocean being +discovered and acquired by you, and the oath and formality requisite in +such case having been made and done by you or by him who may have your +procuration,[83-1] they shall have and hold you from thenceforth for the +whole of your life, and your son and successor after you, and successor +after successor for ever and ever, as our Admiral of the said ocean, and +as Viceroy and Governor of the said islands and mainland, which you, the +said Don Cristóbal Colon, may discover and acquire; and they shall treat +with you, and with your said lieutenants whom you may place in the said +offices of Admiral, Viceroy, and Governor, about everything appertaining +thereto, and shall pay and cause to be paid to you the salary, dues and +other things annexed and appertaining to the said offices, and shall +observe and cause to be observed toward you all the honors, graces, +favors, liberties, pre-eminences, prerogatives, exemptions, immunities, +and all other things, and each of them, which in virtue of the said +offices of Admiral, Viceroy, and Governor you shall be entitled to have +and enjoy, and which ought to be observed towards you in every respect +fully and completely so that nothing may be diminished therefrom; and +that neither therein nor in any part thereof shall they place or consent +to place hindrance or obstacle against you; for we by this our patent +from now henceforth grant to you the said offices of Admiralty, Viceroy, +and Governor, by right of inheritance for ever and ever, and we give you +actual and prospective possession thereof, and of each of them, and power +and authority to use and exercise it, and to collect the dues and +salaries annexed and appertaining to them and to each of them, according +to what is aforesaid. Concerning all that is aforesaid, if it should be +necessary and you should require it of them, we command our chancellor +and notaries and the other officers who are at the board of our seals to +give, deliver, pass, and seal for you our patent of privilege with the +circle of signatures, in the strongest, firmest, and most sufficient +manner that you may request and may find needful, and neither one nor the +other of you or them shall do contrary hereto in any manner, under +penalty of our displeasure and of ten thousand maravedis[84-1] to our +chamber, upon every one who shall do to the contrary. And further we +command the man who shall show them this our patent, to cite them to +appear before us in our court, wheresoever we may be, within fifteen days +from the day of citation, under the said penalty, under which we command +every public scrivener who may be summoned for this purpose, to give to +the person who shall show it to him a certificate thereof signed with his +signature, whereby we may know in what manner our command is executed. +Given in our city of Granada, on the thirtieth day of the month of April, +in the year of the nativity of our Lord Jesus Christ one thousand four +hundred and ninety-two. I the King. I the Queen. I, Juan de Coloma, +Secretary of the King and of the Queen, our Lords, caused this to be +written by their command. Granted in form, Roderick, Doctor. Registered, +Sebastian de Olano. Francisco de Madrid, Chancellor. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[81-1] Spanish text in Navarrete, II. 9-11. We omit the long preamble. +Spanish text and facsimile of Paris Codex in Stevens, _Christopher +Columbus His Own Book of Privileges_, pp. 49 ff. The translation is that +of George F. Barwick. This document is also to be found in English in +_Memorials of Columbus_ (London, 1823), pp. 52-57. + +[82-1] Audiencia means the king's court of justice; regidores are roughly +equivalent to members of a town council. The Navarrete text has +_corregidores_, town governors appointed by the king. Veinticuatros were +town councillors, so called because commonly 24 in number. Jurats were +municipal executive officers in Aragon. The original which is translated +"liege men" is _Homes-Buenos_. Further explanations of these offices may +be found in Hume, _Spain, Its Greatness and Decay_, pp. 18 ff., and in +_The Cambridge Modern History_, I. 348 ff. + +[83-1] Procuration=power of attorney. + +[84-1] The maravedi at this time was equal in coin value to about +two-thirds of a cent. + + + + +JOURNAL OF THE FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +The contents of Columbus's Journal of his first voyage were first made +known to the public in the epitome incorporated in Ferdinand Columbus's +life of the Admiral, which has come down to us only in the Italian +translation of Alfonso Ulloa, the _Historie del S.D. Fernando Colombo +nelle quali s'ha particolare e vera relazione della vita e de' fatti +dell' Ammiraglio D. Christoforo Colombo suo padre_, etc. (Venice, 1571). +This account is accessible in English in Churchill's _Voyages_, Vol. II., +and in Pinkerton's _Voyages_, Vol. XII. + +Another epitome was prepared by Bartolomé de Las Casas and inserted in +his _Historia de las Indias_. This account was embodied in the main by +Antonio de Herrera in his _Historia General de las Indias Occidentales_ +(Madrid, 1601). It is accessible in English in John Stevens's translation +of Herrera (London, 1725-1726). + +These independent epitomes of the original were supplemented in 1825 by +the publication by the Spanish archivist Martin Fernandez de Navarrete +in his _Coleccion de los Viages y Descubrimientos que hicieron por mar +los Españoles desde fines del siglo XV._ of a considerably more detailed +narrative (likewise independently abridged from the original) which +existed in two copies in the archives of the Duke del Infantado. +Navarrete says that the handwriting of the older copy is that of Las +Casas and that Las Casas had written some explanatory notes in the +margin. This longer narrative, here reprinted, was first translated by +Samuel Kettell of Boston and published in 1827 under the title _Personal +Narrative of the First Voyage of Columbus_. The next translation was +that of Clements R. Markham for the Hakluyt Society in 1893. A third and +very exact rendering appeared in 1903 in John Boyd Thacher's +_Christopher Columbus_, Vol. I. + +The translation given here is that of Sir Clements R. Markham with some +slight revisions. When we recall the very scanty and fragmentary +knowledge which we have of the Cabot voyages, and how few in fact of the +great discoverers of this era left personal narratives of their +achievements, we realize our singular good fortune in possessing so full +a daily record from the hand of Columbus himself which admits us as it +were "into the very presence of the Admiral to share his thoughts and +impressions as the strange panorama of his experiences unfolded before +him."[88-1] Sir Clements R. Markham declares the Journal "the most +important document in the whole range of the history of geographical +discovery, because it is a record of the enterprise which changed the +whole face, not only of that history, but of the history of +mankind."[88-2] + +EDWARD G. BOURNE. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[88-1] Bourne, _Spain in America_, p. 22. + +[88-2] _Journal of Christopher Columbus_, p. viii. + +[Illustration: The Four Voyages of Columbus 1492-1503.] + + + + +JOURNAL OF THE FIRST VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS + + +_This is the first voyage and the routes and direction taken by the +Admiral Don Cristóbal Colon when he discovered the Indies, summarized; +except the prologue made for the Sovereigns, which is given word for word +and commences in this manner_ + +In the name of our Lord Jesus Christ + +Because, O most Christian, and very high, very excellent, and puissant +Princes, King and Queen of the Spains and of the islands of the Sea, our +Lords, in this present year of 1492, after your Highnesses had given an +end to the war with the Moors who reigned in Europe, and had finished it +in the very great city of Granada, where in this present year, on the +second day of the month of January, by force of arms, I saw the royal +banners of your Highnesses placed on the towers of Alfambra,[89-1] which +is the fortress of that city, and I saw the Moorish King come forth from +the gates of the city and kiss the royal hands of your Highnesses, and of +the Prince my Lord, and presently in that same month, acting on the +information that I had given to your Highnesses touching the lands of +India, and respecting a Prince who is called Gran Can, which means in our +language King of Kings, how he and his ancestors had sent to Rome many +times to ask for learned men[89-2] of our holy faith to teach him, and +how the Holy Father had never complied, insomuch that many people +believing in idolatries were lost by receiving doctrine of perdition: +YOUR HIGHNESSES, as Catholic Christians and Princes who love the holy +Christian faith, and the propagation of it, and who are enemies to the +sect of Mahoma and to all idolatries and heresies, resolved to send me, +Cristóbal Colon, to the said parts of India to see the said princes, and +the cities and lands, and their disposition, with a view that they might +be converted to our holy faith;[90-1] and ordered that I should not go by +land to the eastward, as had been customary, but that I should go by way +of the west, whither up to this day, we do not know for certain that any +one has gone. + +Thus, after having turned out all the Jews from all your kingdoms and +lordships, in the same month of January,[90-2] your Highnesses gave +orders to me that with a sufficient fleet I should go to the said parts +of India, and for this they made great concessions to me, and ennobled +me, so that henceforward I should be called Don, and should be Chief +Admiral of the Ocean Sea, perpetual Viceroy and Governor of all the +islands and continents that I should discover and gain, and that I might +hereafter discover and gain in the Ocean Sea, and that my eldest son +should succeed, and so on from generation to generation for ever. + +I left the city of Granada on the 12th day of May, in the same year of +1492, being Saturday, and came to the town of Palos, which is a seaport; +where I equipped three vessels well suited for such service; and departed +from that port, well supplied with provisions and with many sailors, on +the 3d day of August of the same year, being Friday, half an hour before +sunrise, taking the route to the islands of Canaria, belonging to your +Highnesses, which are in the said Ocean Sea, that I might thence take my +departure for navigating until I should arrive at the Indies, and give +the letters of your Highnesses to those princes, so as to comply with my +orders. As part of my duty I thought it well to write an account of all +the voyage very punctually, noting from day to day all that I should do +and see, and that should happen, as will be seen further on. Also, Lords +Princes, I resolved to describe each night what passed in the day, and to +note each day how I navigated at night. I propose to construct a new +chart for navigating, on which I shall delineate all the sea and lands of +the Ocean in their proper positions under their bearings; and further, I +propose to prepare a book, and to put down all as it were in a picture, +by latitude from the equator, and western longitude. Above all, I shall +have accomplished much, for I shall forget sleep, and shall work at the +business of navigation, that so the service may be performed; all which +will entail great labor. + + +_Friday, 3d of August_ + +We departed on Friday, the 3d of August, in the year 1492, from the bar +of Saltes, at 8 o'clock, and proceeded with a strong sea breeze until +sunset, towards the south, for 60 miles, equal to 15 leagues;[91-1] +afterwards S.W. and W.S.W., which was the course for the Canaries. + + +_Saturday, 4th of August_ + +They steered S.W. 1/4 S. + + +_Sunday, 5th of August_ + +They continued their course day and night more than 40 leagues. + + +_Monday, 6th of August_ + +The rudder of the caravel _Pinta_ became unshipped, and Martin Alonso +Pinzon, who was in command, believed or suspected that it was by +contrivance of Gomes Rascon and Cristóbal Quintero, to whom the caravel +belonged, for they dreaded to go on that voyage. The Admiral says that, +before they sailed, these men had been displaying a certain backwardness, +so to speak. The Admiral was much disturbed at not being able to help the +said caravel without danger, and he says that he was eased of some +anxiety when he reflected that Martin Alonso Pinzon was a man of energy +and ingenuity. They made, during the day and night, 29 leagues. + + +_Tuesday, 7th of August_ + +The rudder of the _Pinta_ was shipped and secured, and they proceeded on +a course for the island of Lanzarote, one of the Canaries. They made, +during the day and night, 25 leagues. + + +_Wednesday, 8th of August_ + +Opinions respecting their position varied among the pilots of the three +caravels; but that of the Admiral proved to be nearer the truth. He +wished to go to Gran Canaria, to leave the caravel _Pinta_, because she +was disabled by the faulty hanging of her rudder, and was making water. +He intended to obtain another there if one could be found. They could not +reach the place that day. + + +_Thursday, 9th of August_ + +The Admiral was not able to reach Gomera until the night of Sunday, while +Martin Alonso remained on that coast of Gran Canaria by order of the +Admiral, because his vessel could not be navigated. Afterwards the +Admiral took her to Canaria, and they repaired the _Pinta_ very +thoroughly through the pains and labor of the Admiral, of Martin Alonso, +and of the rest. Finally they came to Gomera. They saw a great fire issue +from the mountain of the island of Tenerife, which is of great height. +They rigged the _Pinta_ with square sails, for she was lateen rigged; and +the Admiral reached Gomera on Sunday, the 2nd of September, with the +_Pinta_ repaired. + +The Admiral says that many honorable Spanish gentlemen who were at Gomera +with Doña Ines Peraza, mother of Guillen Peraza (who was afterwards the +first Count of Gomera), and who were natives of the island of Hierro, +declared that every year they saw land to the west of the Canaries; and +others, natives of Gomera, affirmed the same on oath. The Admiral here +says that he remembers, when in Portugal in the year 1484, a man came to +the King from the island of Madeira, to beg for a caravel to go to this +land that was seen, who swore that it could be seen every year, and +always in the same way.[93-1] He also says that he recollects the same +thing being affirmed in the islands of the Azores; and all these lands +were described as in the same direction, and as being like each other, +and of the same size. Having taken in water, wood, and meat, and all else +that the men had who were left at Gomera by the Admiral when he went to +the island of Canaria to repair the caravel _Pinta_, he finally made sail +from the said island of Gomera, with his three caravels, on Thursday, the +6th day of September. + + +_Thursday, 6th of September_ + +He departed on that day from the port of Gomera in the morning, and +shaped a course to go on his voyage; having received tidings from a +caravel that came from the island of Hierro that three Portuguese +caravels were off that island with the object of taking him. (This must +have been the result of the King's annoyance that Colon should have gone +to Castile.) There was a calm all that day and night, and in the morning +he found himself between Gomera and Tenerife. + + +_Friday, 7th of September_ + +The calm continued all Friday and Saturday, until the third hour of the +night. + + +_Saturday, 8th of September_ + +At the third hour of Saturday night[94-1] it began to blow from the N.E., +and the Admiral shaped a course to the west. He took in much sea over the +bows, which retarded progress, and 9 leagues were made in that day and +night. + + +_Sunday, 9th of September_ + +This day the Admiral made 19 leagues, and he arranged to reckon less than +the number run, because if the voyage was of long duration, the people +would not be so terrified and disheartened. In the night he made 120 +miles, at the rate of 12 miles an hour, which are 30 leagues. The sailors +steered badly, letting the ship fall off to N.E., and even more, +respecting which the Admiral complained many times.[94-2] + + +_Monday, 10th of September_ + +In this day and night he made 60 leagues, at the rate of 10 miles an +hour, which are 2-1/2 leagues; but he only counted 48 leagues, that the +people might not be alarmed if the voyage should be long. + + +_Tuesday, 11th of September_ + +That day they sailed on their course, which was west, and made 20 leagues +and more. They saw a large piece of the mast of a ship of 120 tons, but +were unable to get it. In the night they made nearly 20 leagues, but only +counted 16, for the reason already given. + + +_Wednesday, 12th of September_ + +That day, steering their course, they made 33 leagues during the day and +night, counting less. + + +_Thursday, 13th of September_ + +That day and night, steering their course, which was west, they made 33 +leagues, counting 3 or 4 less. The currents were against them. On this +day, at the commencement of the night, the needles turned a half point to +north-west, and in the morning they turned somewhat more +north-west.[95-1] + + +_Friday, 14th of September_ + +That day they navigated, on their westerly course, day and night, 20 +leagues, counting a little less. Here those of the caravel _Niña_ +reported that they had seen a tern[96-1] and a boatswain bird,[96-2] and +these birds never go more than 25 leagues from the land.[96-3] + + +_Saturday, 15th of September_ + +That day and night they made 27 leagues and rather more on their west +course; and in the early part of the night there fell from heaven into +the sea a marvellous flame of fire, at a distance of about 4 or 5 leagues +from them. + + +_Sunday, 16th of September_ + +That day and night they steered their course west, making 39 leagues, but +the Admiral only counted 36. There were some clouds and small rain. The +Admiral says that on that day, and ever afterwards, they met with very +temperate breezes, so that there was great pleasure in enjoying the +mornings, nothing being wanted but the song of nightingales. He says that +the weather was like April in Andalusia. Here they began to see many +tufts of grass which were very green, and appeared to have been quite +recently torn from the land. From this they judged that they were near +some island, but not the main land, according to the Admiral, "because," +as he says, "I make the main land to be more distant." + + +_Monday, 17th of September_ + +They proceeded on their west course, and made over 50 leagues in the day +and night, but the Admiral only counted 47. They were aided by the +current. They saw much very fine grass and herbs from rocks, which came +from the west. They, therefore, considered that they were near land. The +pilots observed the north point, and found that the needles turned a full +point to the west of north. So the mariners were alarmed and dejected, +and did not give their reason. But the Admiral knew, and ordered that the +north should be again observed at dawn. They then found that the needles +were true. The cause was that the star makes the movement, and not the +needles. At dawn, on that Monday, they saw much more weed appearing, like +herbs from rivers, in which they found a live crab, which the Admiral +kept. He says that these crabs are certain signs of land. The sea-water +was found to be less salt than it had been since leaving the Canaries. +The breezes were always soft. Every one was pleased, and the best sailors +went ahead to sight the first land. They saw many tunny-fish, and the +crew of the _Niña_ killed one. The Admiral here says that these signs of +land came from the west, "in which direction I trust in that high God in +whose hands are all victories that very soon we shall sight land." In +that morning he says that a white bird was seen which has not the habit +of sleeping on the sea, called _rabo de junco_ (boatswain-bird).[97-1] + + +_Tuesday, 18th of September_ + +This day and night they made over 55 leagues, the Admiral only counting +48. In all these days the sea was very smooth, like the river at Seville. +This day Martin Alonso, with the _Pinta_ which was a fast sailer, did not +wait, for he said to the Admiral, from his caravel, that he had seen a +great multitude of birds flying westward, that he hoped to see land that +night, and that he therefore pressed onward. A great cloud appeared in +the north, which is a sign of the proximity of land. + + +_Wednesday, 19th of September_ + +The Admiral continued on his course, and during the day and night he made +but 25 leagues because it was calm. He counted 22. This day, at 10 +o'clock, a booby[98-1] came to the ship, and in the afternoon another +arrived, these birds not generally going more than 20 leagues from the +land. There was also some drizzling rain without wind, which is a sure +sign of land. The Admiral did not wish to cause delay by beating to +windward to ascertain whether land was near, but he considered it certain +that there were islands both to the north and south of his position, (as +indeed there were, and he was passing through the middle of them). For +his desire was to press onwards to the Indies, the weather being fine. +For on his return, God willing, he could see all. These are his own +words. Here the pilots found their positions. He of the _Niña_ made the +Canaries 440 leagues distant, the _Pinta_ 420. The pilot of the Admiral's +ship made the distance exactly 400 leagues. + + +_Thursday, 20th of September_ + +This day the course was W. b. N., and as her head was all round the +compass owing to the calm that prevailed,[98-2] the ship made only 7 or 8 +leagues. Two boobies came to the ship, and afterwards another, a sign of +the proximity of land. They saw much weed, although none was seen on the +previous day. They caught a bird with the hand, which was like a tern. +But it was a river-bird, not a sea-bird, the feet being like those of a +gull. At dawn two or three land-birds came singing to the ship, and they +disappeared before sunset. Afterwards a booby came from W.N.W., and flew +to the S.W., which was a sign that it left land in the W.N.W.; for these +birds sleep on shore, and go to sea in the mornings in search of food, +not extending their flight more than 20 leagues from the land. + + +_Friday, 21st September_ + +Most of the day it was calm, and later there was a little wind. During +the day and night they did not make good more than 13 leagues. At dawn +they saw so much weed that the sea appeared to be covered with it, and it +came from the west. A booby was seen. The sea was very smooth, like a +river, and the air the best in the world. They saw a whale, which is a +sign that they were near land, because they always keep near the shore. + + +_Saturday, 22nd of September_ + +They shaped a course W.N.W. more or less, her head turning from one to +the other point, and made 30 leagues. Scarcely any weed was seen. They +saw some sandpipers and another bird. Here the Admiral says: "This +contrary wind was very necessary for me, because my people were much +excited at the thought that in these seas no wind ever blew in the +direction of Spain." Part of the day there was no weed, and later it was +very thick. + + +_Sunday, 23rd of September_ + +They shaped a course N.W., and at times more northerly; occasionally they +were on their course, which was west, and they made about 22 leagues. +They saw a dove and a booby, another river-bird, and some white birds. +There was a great deal of weed, and they found crabs in it. The sea, +being smooth and calm, the crew began to murmur, saying that here there +was no great sea, and that the wind would never blow so that they could +return to Spain. Afterwards the sea rose very much, without wind, which +astonished them. The Admiral here says: "Thus the high sea was very +necessary to me, such as had not appeared but in the time of the Jews +when they went out of Egypt and murmured against Moses who delivered them +out of captivity."[100-1] + + +_Monday, 24th of September_ + +The Admiral went on his west course all day and night, making 14 leagues. +He counted 12. A booby came to the ship, and many sandpipers.[100-2] + + +_Tuesday, 25th of September_ + +This day began with a calm, and afterwards there was wind. They were on +their west course until night. The Admiral conversed with Martin Alonso +Pinzon, captain of the other caravel _Pinta_, respecting a chart which he +had sent to the caravel three days before, on which, as it would appear, +the Admiral had certainis lands[TN-1] depicted in that sea.[101-1] Martin +Alonso said that the ships were in the position on which the islands were +placed, and the Admiral replied that so it appeared to him: but it might +be that they had not fallen in with them, owing to the currents which had +always set the ships to the N.E., and that they had not made so much as +the pilots reported. The Admiral then asked for the chart to be returned, +and it was sent back on a line.[101-2] The Admiral then began to plot +the position on it, with the pilot and mariners. At sunset Martin Alonso +went up on the poop of his ship, and with much joy called to the Admiral, +claiming the reward as he had sighted land. When the Admiral heard this +positively declared, he says that he gave thanks to the Lord on his knees +while Martin Alonso said the _Gloria in excelsis_ with his people. The +Admiral's crew did the same. Those of the _Niña_ all went up on the mast +and into the rigging, and declared that it was land. It so seemed to the +Admiral, and that it was distant 25 leagues. They all continued to +declare it was land until night. The Admiral ordered the course to be +altered from W. to S.W., in which direction the land had appeared. That +day they made 4 leagues on a west course, and 17 S.W. during the night, +in all 21; but the people were told that 13 was the distance made good: +for it was always feigned to them that the distances were less, so that +the voyage might not appear so long. Thus two reckonings were kept on +this voyage, the shorter being feigned, and the longer being the true +one. The sea was very smooth, so that many sailors bathed alongside. They +saw many _dorados_[102-1] and other fish. + + +_Wednesday, 26th of September_ + +The Admiral continued on the west course until afternoon. Then he altered +course to S.W., until he made out that what had been said to be land was +only clouds. Day and night they made 31 leagues, counting 24 for the +people. The sea was like a river, the air pleasant and very mild. + + +_Thursday, 27th of September_ + +The course west, and distance made good during day and night 24 leagues, +20 being counted for the people. Many _dorados_ came. One was killed. A +boatswain-bird came. + + +_Friday, 28th of September_ + +The course was west, and the distance, owing to calms, only 14 leagues in +day and night, 13 leagues being counted. They met with little weed; but +caught two _dorados_, and more in the other ships. + + +_Saturday, 29th of September_ + +The course was west, and they made 24 leagues, counting 21 for the +people. Owing to calms, the distance made good during day and night was +not much. They saw a bird called _rabiforcado_[103-1] (man-o'-war bird), +which makes the boobies vomit what they have swallowed, and eats it, +maintaining itself on nothing else. It is a sea-bird, but does not sleep +on the sea, and does not go more than 20 leagues from the land. There are +many of them at the Cape Verde Islands. Afterwards they saw two boobies. +The air was very mild and agreeable, and the Admiral says that nothing +was wanting but to hear the nightingale. The sea smooth as a river. +Later, three boobies and a man-o'-war bird were seen three times. There +was much weed. + + +_Sunday, 30th of September_ + +The western course was steered, and during the day and night, owing to +calms, only 14 leagues were made, 11 being counted. Four boatswain-birds +came to the ship, which is a great sign of land, for so many birds of +this kind together is a sign that they are not straying or lost. They +also twice saw four boobies. There was much weed. _Note_ that the stars +which are called _Las Guardias_ (the Pointers[103-2]), when night comes +on, are near the western point, and when dawn breaks they are near the +N.E. point; so that, during the whole night, they do not appear to move +more than three lines or 9 hours, and this on each night. The Admiral +says this, and also that at nightfall the needles vary a point westerly, +while at dawn they agree exactly with the star. From this it would appear +that the north star has a movement like the other stars, while the +needles always point correctly. + + +_Monday, 1st of October_ + +Course west, and 25 leagues made good, counted for the crew as 20 +leagues. There was a heavy shower of rain. At dawn the Admiral's pilot +made the distance from Hierro 578 leagues to the west. The reduced +reckoning which the Admiral showed to the crew made it 584 leagues; but +the truth which the Admiral observed and kept secret was 707. + + +_Tuesday, 2nd of October_ + +Course west, and during the day and night 39 leagues were made good, +counted for the crew as 30. The sea always smooth. Many thanks be given +to God, says the Admiral, that the weed is coming from east to west, +contrary to its usual course. Many fish were seen, and one was killed. A +white bird was also seen that appeared to be a gull. + + +_Wednesday, 3rd of October_ + +They navigated on the usual course, and made good 47 leagues, counted as +40. Sandpipers appeared, and much weed, some of it very old and some +quite fresh and having fruit. They saw no birds. The Admiral, therefore, +thought that they had left the islands behind them which were depicted +on the charts. The Admiral here says that he did not wish to keep the +ships beating about during the last week, and in the last few days when +there were so many signs of land, although he had information of certain +islands in this region. For he wished to avoid delay, his object being to +reach the Indies. He says that to delay would not be wise.[105-1] + + +_Thursday, 4th of October_ + +Course west, and 63 leagues made good during the day and night, counted +as 46. More than forty sandpipers came to the ship in a flock, and two +boobies, and a ship's boy hit one with a stone. There also came a +man-o'-war bird and a white bird like a gull. + + +_Friday, 5th of October_ + +The Admiral steered his course, going 11 miles an hour, and during the +day and night they made good 57 leagues, as the wind increased somewhat +during the night: 45 were counted. The sea was smooth and quiet. "To +God," he says, "be many thanks given, the air being pleasant and +temperate, with no weed, many sandpipers, and flying-fish coming on the +deck in numbers." + + +_Saturday, 6th of October_ + +The Admiral continued his west course, and during day and night they made +good 40 leagues, 33 being counted. This night Martin Alonso said that it +would be well to steer south of west,[106-1] and it appeared to the +Admiral that Martin Alonso did not say this with respect to the island of +Cipango.[106-2] He saw that if an error was made the land would not be +reached so quickly, and that consequently it would be better to go at +once to the continent and afterwards to the islands. + + +_Sunday, 7th of October_ + +The west course was continued; for two hours they went at the rate of 12 +miles an hour, and afterwards 8 miles an hour. They made good 23 leagues, +counting 18 for the people. This day, at sunrise, the caravel _Niña_, +which went ahead, being the best sailer, and pushed forward as much as +possible to sight the land first, so as to enjoy the reward which the +Sovereigns had promised to whoever should see it first, hoisted a flag at +the mast-head and fired a gun, as a signal that she had sighted land, for +such was the Admiral's order. He had also ordered that, at sunrise and +sunset, all the ships should join him; because those two times are most +proper for seeing the greatest distance, the haze clearing away. No land +was seen during the afternoon, as reported by the caravel _Niña_, and +they passed a great number of birds flying from N. to S.W. This gave rise +to the belief that the birds were either going to sleep on land, or were +flying from the winter which might be supposed to be near in the land +whence they were coming. The Admiral was aware that most of the islands +held by the Portuguese were discovered by the flight of birds. For this +reason he resolved to give up the west course, and to shape a course +W.S.W. for the two following days.[107-1] He began the new course one +hour before sunset. They made good, during the night, about 5 leagues, +and 23 in the day, altogether 28 leagues. + + +_Monday, 8th of October_ + +The course was W.S.W., and 11-1/2 or 12 leagues were made good in the day +and night; and at times it appears that they went at the rate of 15 miles +an hour during the night (if the handwriting is not deceptive).[107-2] +The sea was like the river at Seville. "Thanks be to God," says the +Admiral, "the air is very soft like the April at Seville; and it is a +pleasure to be here, so balmy are the breezes." The weed seemed to be +very fresh. There were many land-birds, and they took one that was flying +to the S.W. Terns,[107-3] ducks, and a booby were also seen. + + +_Tuesday, 9th of October_ + +The course was S.W., and they made 5 leagues. The wind then changed, and +the Admiral steered W. by N. 4 leagues. Altogether, in day and night, +they made 11 leagues by day and 20-1/2 leagues by night; counted as 17 +leagues altogether. Throughout the night birds were heard passing. + + +_Wednesday, 10th of October_ + +The course was W.S.W., and they went at the rate of 10 miles an hour, +occasionally 12 miles, and sometimes 7. During the day and night they +made 59 leagues, counted as no more than 44. Here the people could endure +no longer. They complained of the length of the voyage. But the Admiral +cheered them up in the best way he could, giving them good hopes of the +advantages they might gain from it. He added that, however much they +might complain, he had to go to the Indies, and that he would go on until +he found them, with the help of our Lord.[108-1] + + +_Thursday, 11th of October_ + +The course was W.S.W., and there was more sea than there had been during +the whole of the voyage. They saw sandpipers, and a green reed near the +ship. Those of the caravel _Pinta_ saw a cane and a pole, and they took +up another small pole which appeared to have been worked with iron; also +another bit of cane, a land-plant, and a small board. The crew of the +caravel _Niña_ also saw signs of land, and a small branch covered with +berries.[108-2] Every one breathed afresh and rejoiced at these signs. +The run until sunset was 27 leagues. + +After sunset the Admiral returned to his original west course, and they +went along at the rate of 12 miles an hour. Up to two hours after +midnight they had gone 90 miles, equal to 22-1/2 leagues. As the caravel +_Pinta_ was a better sailer, and went ahead of the Admiral, she found the +land, and made the signals ordered by the Admiral. The land was first +seen by a sailor named Rodrigo de Triana.[109-1] But the Admiral, at ten +o'clock, being on the castle of the poop,[109-2] saw a light, though it +was so uncertain that he could not affirm it was land. He called Pero +Gutierrez, a gentleman of the King's bed-chamber, and said that there +seemed to be a light, and that he should look at it. He did so, and saw +it.[109-3] The Admiral said the same to Rodrigo Sanchez of Segovia, whom +the King and Queen had sent with the fleet as inspector, but he could see +nothing, because he was not in a place whence anything could be seen. +After the Admiral had spoken he saw the light once or twice, and it was +like a wax candle rising and falling. It seemed to few to be an +indication of land; but the Admiral made certain that land was close. +When they said the _Salve_, which all the sailors were accustomed to sing +in their way, the Admiral asked and admonished the men to keep a good +look-out on the forecastle, and to watch well for land; and to him who +should first cry out that he saw land, he would give a silk doublet, +besides the other rewards promised by the Sovereigns, which were 10,000 +maravedis to him who should first see it.[109-4] At two hours after +midnight the land was sighted at a distance of two leagues. They +shortened sail, and lay by under the mainsail without the bonnets. + + +[_Friday, 12th of October_] + +The vessels were hove to, waiting for daylight; and on Friday they +arrived at a small island of the Lucayos, called in the language of the +Indians, Guanahani.[110-1] Presently they saw naked people. The Admiral +went on shore in the armed boat, and Martin Alonso Pinzon, and Vicente +Yañez, his brother, who was captain of the _Niña_. The Admiral took the +royal standard, and the captains went with two banners of the green +cross, which the Admiral took in all the ships as a sign, with an F and a +Y[110-2] and a crown over each letter, one on one side of the cross and +the other on the other. Having landed, they saw trees very green, and +much water, and fruits of diverse kinds. The Admiral called to the two +captains, and to the others who leaped on shore, and to Rodrigo Escovedo, +secretary of the whole fleet, and to Rodrigo Sanchez of Segovia,[110-3] +and said that they should bear faithful testimony that he, in presence of +all, had taken, as he now took, possession of the said island[110-4] for +the King and for the Queen his Lords, making the declarations that are +required, as is now largely set forth in the testimonies which were then +made in writing. + +Presently many inhabitants of the island assembled. What follows is in +the actual words of the Admiral in his book of the first navigation and +discovery of the Indies.[110-5] "I," he says, "that we might form great +friendship, for I knew that they were a people who could be more easily +freed and converted to our holy faith by love than by force, gave to +some of them red caps, and glass beads to put round their necks, and +many other things of little value, which gave them great pleasure, and +made them so much our friends that it was a marvel to see. They +afterwards came to the ship's boats where we were, swimming and bringing +us parrots, cotton threads in skeins, darts, and many other things; and +we exchanged them for other things that we gave them, such as glass beads +and small bells. In fine, they took all, and gave what they had with good +will. It appeared to me to be a race of people very poor in everything. +They go as naked as when their mothers bore them, and so do the women, +although I did not see more than one young girl. All I saw were youths, +none more than thirty years of age. They are very well made, with very +handsome bodies, and very good countenances. Their hair is short and +coarse, almost like the hairs of a horse's tail. They wear the hairs +brought down to the eyebrows, except a few locks behind, which they wear +long and never cut. They paint themselves black, and they are the color +of the Canarians, neither black nor white. Some paint themselves white, +others red, and others of what color they find. Some paint their faces, +others the whole body, some only round the eyes, others only on the nose. +They neither carry nor know anything of arms, for I showed them swords, +and they took them by the blade and cut themselves through ignorance. +They have no iron, their darts being wands without iron, some of them +having a fish's tooth at the end, and others being pointed in various +ways. They are all of fair stature and size, with good faces, and well +made. I saw some with marks of wounds on their bodies, and I made signs +to ask what it was, and they gave me to understand that people from other +adjacent islands came with the intention of seizing them, and that they +defended themselves. I believed, and still believe, that they come here +from the mainland to take them prisoners. They should be good servants +and intelligent, for I observed that they quickly took in what was said +to them, and I believe that they would easily be made Christians, as it +appeared to me that they had no religion. I, our Lord being pleased, +will take hence, at the time of my departure, six natives for your +Highnesses, that they may learn to speak. I saw no beast of any kind +except parrots, on this island." The above is in the words of the +Admiral. + + +_Saturday, 13th of October_ + +"As soon as dawn broke many of these people came to the beach, all +youths, as I have said, and all of good stature, a very handsome people. +Their hair is not curly, but loose and coarse, like horse hair. In all +the forehead is broad, more so than in any other people I have hitherto +seen. Their eyes are very beautiful and not small, and themselves far +from black, but the color of the Canarians. Nor should anything else be +expected, as this island is in a line east and west from the island of +Hierro in the Canaries. Their legs are very straight, all in one line, +and no belly, but very well formed. They came to the ship in small +canoes, made out of the trunk of a tree like a long boat, and all of one +piece, and wonderfully worked, considering the country. They are large, +some of them holding 40 to 45 men, others smaller, and some only large +enough to hold one man. They are propelled with a paddle like a baker's +shovel, and go at a marvellous rate. If the canoe capsizes, they all +promptly begin to swim, and to bale it out with calabashes that they take +with them. They brought skeins of cotton thread, parrots, darts, and +other small things which it would be tedious to recount, and they give +all in exchange for anything that may be given to them. I was attentive, +and took trouble to ascertain if there was gold. I saw that some of them +had a small piece fastened in a hole they have in the nose, and by signs +I was able to make out that to the south, or going from the island to the +south, there was a king who had great cups full, and who possessed a +great quantity. I tried to get them to go there, but afterwards I saw +that they had no inclination. I resolved to wait until to-morrow in the +afternoon and then to depart, shaping a course to the S.W., for, +according to what many of them told me, there was land to the S., to the +S.W., and N.W., and that the natives from the N.W. often came to attack +them, and went on to the S.W. in search of gold and precious stones. + +"This island is rather large and very flat, with bright green trees, much +water, and a very large lake in the centre, without any mountain, and the +whole land so green that it is a pleasure to look on it. The people are +very docile, and for the longing to possess our things, and not having +anything to give in return, they take what they can get, and presently +swim away. Still, they give away all they have got, for whatever may be +given to them, down to broken bits of crockery and glass. I saw one give +16 skeins of cotton for three _ceotis_[113-1] of Portugal, equal to one +_blanca_ of Spain, the skeins being as much as an _arroba_ of cotton +thread. I shall keep it, and shall allow no one to take it, preserving it +all for your Highnesses, for it may be obtained in abundance. It is grown +in this island, though the short time did not admit of my ascertaining +this for a certainty. Here also is found the gold they wear fastened in +their noses. But, in order not to lose time, I intend to go and see if I +can find the island of Cipango.[113-2] Now, as it is night, all the +natives have gone on shore with their canoes." + + +_Sunday, 14th of October_ + +"At dawn I ordered the ship's boat and the boats of the caravels to be +got ready, and I went along the coast of the island and to the N.N.E., to +see the other side, which was on the other side to the east, and also to +see the villages. Presently I saw two or three, and the people all came +to the shore, calling out and giving thanks to God. Some of them brought +us water, others came with food, and when they saw that I did want to +land, they got into the sea, and came swimming to us. We understood that +they asked us if we had come from heaven. One old man came into the boat, +and others cried out, in loud voices, to all the men and women, to come +and see the men who had come from heaven, and to bring them to eat and +drink. Many came, including women, each bringing something, giving thanks +to God, throwing themselves on the ground and shouting to us to come on +shore. But I was afraid to land, seeing an extensive reef of rocks which +surrounded the island, with deep water between it and the shore forming a +port large enough for as many ships as there are in Christendom, but with +a very narrow entrance. It is true that within this reef there are some +sunken rocks, but the sea has no more motion than the water in a well. In +order to see all this I went this morning, that I might be able to give a +full account to your Highnesses, and also where a fortress might be +established. I saw a piece of land which appeared like an island, +although it is not one, and on it there were six houses. It might be +converted into an island in two days, though I do not see that it would +be necessary, for these people are very simple as regards the use of +arms, as your Highnesses will see from the seven that I caused to be +taken, to bring home and learn our language and return; unless your +Highnesses should order them all to be brought to Castile, or to be kept +as captives on the same island; for with fifty men they can all be +subjugated and made to do what is required of them. Close to the above +peninsula there are gardens of the most beautiful trees I ever saw, and +with leaves as green as those of Castile in the month of April and May, +and much water. I examined all that port, and afterwards I returned to +the ship and made sail. I saw so many islands that I hardly knew how to +determine to which I should go first. Those natives I had with me said, +by signs, that there were so many that they could not be numbered, and +they gave the names of more than a hundred. At last I looked out for the +largest, and resolved to shape a course for it, and so I did. It will be +distant five leagues from this of _San Salvador_, and the others some +more, some less. All are very flat, and all are inhabited. The natives +make war on each other, although these are very simple-minded and +handsomely-formed people." + + +_Monday, 15th of October_ + +"I had laid by during the night, with the fear of reaching the land to +anchor before daylight,[115-1] not knowing whether the coast was clear of +rocks, and at dawn I made sail. As the island was more than 5 leagues +distant and nearer 7, and the tide checked my way, it was noon when we +arrived at the said island. I found that side facing towards the island +of San Salvador trended north and south with a length of 5 leagues, and +the other which I followed ran east and west for more than 10 +leagues.[115-2] As from this island I saw another larger one to the west, +I clued up[115-3] the sails, after having run all that day until night, +otherwise I could not have reached the western cape. I gave the name of +Santa Maria de la Concepcion[115-4] to the island, and almost as the sun +set I anchored near the said cape to ascertain if it contained gold. For +the people I had taken from the island of San Salvador told me that here +they wore very large rings of gold on their arms and legs. I really +believed that all they said was nonsense, invented that they might +escape. My desire was not to pass any island without taking possession, +so that, one having been taken, the same may be said of all. I anchored, +and remained until to-day, Tuesday, when I went to the shore with the +boats armed, and landed. The people, who were numerous, went naked, and +were like those of the other island of San Salvador. They let us go over +the island, and gave us what we required. As the wind changed to the +S.E., I did not like to stay, and returned to the ship. A large canoe was +alongside the _Niña_, and one of the men of the island of San Salvador, +who was on board, jumped into the sea and got into the canoe. In the +middle of the night before, another swam away behind the canoe, which +fled, for there never was boat that could have overtaken her, seeing that +in speed they have a great advantage.[116-1] So they reached the land and +left the canoe. Some of my people went on shore in chase of them, but +they all fled like fowls and the canoe they had left was brought +alongside the caravel _Niña_, whither, from another direction, another +small canoe came, with a man who wished to barter with skeins of cotton. +Some sailors jumped into the sea, because he would not come on board the +caravel, and seized him. I was on the poop of my ship, and saw +everything. So I sent for the man, gave him a red cap, some small beads +of green glass, which I put on his arms, and small bells, which I put in +his ears, and ordered his canoe, which was also on board, to be returned +to him. I sent him on shore, and presently made sail to go to the other +large island which was in sight to the westward. I also ordered the other +large canoe, which the caravel _Niña_ was towing astern, to be cast +adrift; and I soon saw that it reached the land at the same time as the +man to whom I had given the above things. I had not wished to take the +skein of cotton that he offered me. All the others came round him and +seemed astonished, for it appeared clear to them that we were good +people. The other man who had fled might do us some harm, because we had +carried him off, and for that reason I ordered this man to be set free +and gave him the above things, that he might think well of us, otherwise, +when your Highnesses again send an expedition, they might not be +friendly. All the presents I gave were not worth four maravedis. At 10 we +departed with the wind S.W., and made for the south, to reach that other +island, which is very large, and respecting which all the men that I +bring from San Salvador make signs that there is much gold, and that they +wear it as bracelets on the arms, on the legs, in the ears and nose, and +round the neck. The distance of this island from that of Santa Maria is +9 leagues on a course east to west. All this part of the island trends +N.W. and S.E., and it appeared that this coast must have length of 28 +leagues. It is very flat, without any mountain, like San Salvador and +Santa Maria, all being beach without rocks, except that there are some +sunken rocks near the land, whence it is necessary to keep a good lookout +when it is desired to anchor, and not to come to very near the land; but +the water is always very clear, and the bottom is visible. At a distance +of two shots of a lombard, there is, off all these islands, such a depth +that the bottom cannot be reached. These islands are very green and +fertile, the climate very mild. They may contain many things of which I +have no knowledge, for I do not wish to stop, in discovering and visiting +many islands, to find gold. These people make signs that it is worn on +the arms and legs; and it must be gold, for they point to some pieces +that I have. I cannot err, with the help of our Lord, in finding out +where this gold has its origin. Being in the middle of the channel +between these two islands, that is to say, that of Santa Maria and this +large one, to which I give the name of Fernandina,[117-1] I came upon a +man alone in a canoe going from Santa Maria to Fernandina. He had a +little of their bread, about the size of a fist, a calabash of water, a +piece of brown earth powdered and then kneaded, and some dried leaves, +which must be a thing highly valued by them,[117-2] for they bartered +with it at San Salvador. He also had with him a native basket with a +string of glass beads, and two _blancas_, by which I knew that he had +come from the island of San Salvador, and had been to Santa Maria, and +thence to Fernandina. He came alongside the ship, and I made him come on +board as he desired, also getting the canoe inboard, after taking care of +all his property. I ordered him to be given to eat bread and treacle, and +also to drink: and so I shall take him on to Fernandina, where I shall +return everything to him, order that he may give a good account of us, +that, our Lord pleasing, when your Highnesses shall send here, those who +come may receive honor, and that the natives may give them all they +require." + + +_Tuesday, 16th of October_ + +"I sailed from the island of Santa Maria de la Concepcion at about noon, +to go to Fernandina Island, which appeared very large to the westward, +and I navigated all that day with light winds. I could not arrive in time +to be able to see the bottom, so as to drop the anchor on a clear place, +for it is necessary to be very careful not to lose the anchors. So I +stood off and on all that night until day, when I came to an inhabited +place where I anchored, and whence that man had come that I found +yesterday in the canoe in mid channel. He had given such a good report of +us that there was no want of canoes alongside the ship all that night, +which brought us water and what they had to offer. I ordered each one to +be given something, such as a few beads, ten or twelve of those made of +glass on a thread, some timbrels made of brass such as are worth a +maravedi in Spain, and some straps, all which they looked upon as most +excellent. I also ordered them to be given treacle to eat when they came +on board. At three o'clock[118-1] I sent the ship's boat on shore for +water, and the natives with good will showed my people where the water +was, and they themselves brought the full casks down to the boat, and did +all they could to please us. + +"This island is very large, and I have determined to sail round it, +because, so far as I can understand, there is a mine in or near it. The +island is eight leagues from Santa Maria, nearly east and west; and this +point I had reached, as well as all the coast, trends N.N.W. and S.S.E. I +saw at least 20 leagues of it, and then it had not ended. Now, as I am +writing this, I made sail with the wind at the south, to sail round the +island, and to navigate until I find Samaot, which is the island or city +where there is gold, as all the natives say who are on board, and as +those of San Salvador and Santa Maria told us. These people resemble +those of the said islands, with the same language and customs, except +that these appear to me a rather more domestic and tractable people, yet +also more subtle. For I observed that those who brought cotton and other +trifles to the ship, knew better than the others how to make a bargain. +In this island I saw cotton cloths made like mantles. The people were +better disposed, and the women wore in front of their bodies a small +piece of cotton which scarcely covered them. + +"It is a very green island, level and very fertile, and I have no doubt +that they sow and gather corn[119-1] all the year round, as well as other +things. I saw many trees very unlike those of our country. Many of them +have their branches growing in different ways and all from one trunk, and +one twig is one form, and another in a different shape, and so unlike +that it is the greatest wonder in the world to see the great diversity; +thus one branch has leaves like those of a cane, and others like those of +a mastick tree: and on a single tree there are five or six different +kinds. Nor are these grafted, for it may be said that grafting is +unknown, the trees being wild, and untended by these people. They do not +know any religion, and I believe they could easily be converted to +Christianity, for they are very intelligent. Here the fish are so unlike +ours that it is wonderful. Some are the shape of dories, and of the +finest colors in the world, blue, yellow, red, and other tints, all +painted in various ways, and the colors are so bright that there is not a +man who would not be astonished, and would not take great delight in +seeing them. There are also whales. I saw no beasts on the land of any +kind, except parrots and lizards. A boy told me that he saw a large +serpent. I saw neither sheep, nor goats, nor any other quadruped. It is +true I have been here a short time, since noon,[120-1] yet I could not +have failed to see some if there had been any. I will write respecting +the circuit of this island after I have been round it." + + +_Wednesday, 17th of October_ + +"At noon I departed from the village off which I was anchored, and where +I took in water, to sail round this island of Fernandina. The wind was +S.W. and South. My wish was to follow the coast of this island to the +S.E., from where I was, the whole coast trending N.N.W. and S.S.E.; +because all the Indians I bring with me, and others, made signs to this +southern quarter, as the direction of the island they call Samoet, where +the gold is. Martin Alonso Pinzon, captain of the caravel _Pinta_, on +board of which I had three of the Indians, came to me and said that one +of them had given him to understand very positively that the island might +be sailed round much quicker by shaping a N.N.W. course. I saw that the +wind would not help me to take the course I desired, and that it was fair +for the other, so I made sail to the N.N.W. When I was two leagues from +the cape of the island, I discovered a very wonderful harbor.[120-2] It +has one mouth, or, rather, it may be said to have two, for there is an +islet in the middle. Both are very narrow, and within it is wide enough +for a hundred ships, if there was depth and a clean bottom, and the +entrance was deep enough. It seemed desirable to explore it and take +soundings, so I anchored outside, and went in with all the ship's boats, +when we saw there was insufficient depth. As I thought, when I first saw +it, that it was the mouth of some river, I ordered the water-casks to be +brought. On shore I found eight or ten men, who presently came to us and +showed us the village, whither I sent the people for water, some with +arms, and others with the casks; and, as it was some little distance, I +waited two hours for them. + +"During that time I walked among the trees, which was the most beautiful +thing I had ever seen, beholding as much verdure as in the month of May +in Andalusia. The trees are unlike ours as night from day, as are the +fruits, the herbs, the stones, and everything. It is true that some of +the trees bore some resemblance to those in Castile, but most of them are +very different, and some were so unlike that no one could compare them to +anything in Castile. The people were all like those already mentioned: +like them naked, and the same size. They give what they possess in +exchange for anything that may be given to them. I here saw some of the +ship's boys bartering broken bits of glass and crockery for darts. The +men who went for water told me that they had been in the houses of the +natives, and that they were very plain and clean inside. Their beds and +bags for holding things[121-1] were like nets of cotton.[121-2] The +houses are like booths, and very high, with good chimneys.[121-3] But, +among many villages that I saw, there was none that consisted of more +than from twelve to fifteen houses. Here they found that the married +women wore clouts of cotton, but not the young girls, except a few who +were over eighteen years of age. They had dogs, mastiffs, and +hounds;[121-4] and here they found a man who had a piece of gold in his +nose, the size of half a _castellano_,[121-5] on which they saw letters. +I quarrelled with these people because they would not exchange or give +what was required; as I wished to see what and whose this money was; and +they replied that they were not accustomed to barter. + +"After the water was taken I returned to the ship, made sail, and shaped +a course N.W., until I had discovered all the part of the coast of the +island which trends east to west. Then all the Indians turned round and +said that this island was smaller than Samoet, and that it would be well +to return back so as to reach it sooner. The wind presently went down and +then sprang up from W.N.W., which was contrary for us to continue on the +previous course. So I turned back, and navigated all that night to +E.S.E., sometimes to east and to S.E. This course was steered to keep me +clear of the land, for there were very heavy clouds and thick weather, +which did not admit of my approaching the land to anchor. On that night +it rained very heavily from midnight until nearly dawn, and even +afterwards the clouds threatened rain. We found ourselves at the S.W. end +of the island, where I hoped to anchor until it cleared up, so as to see +the other island whither I have to go. On all these days, since I arrived +in these Indies, it has rained more or less. Your Highnesses may believe +that this land is the best and most fertile, and with a good climate, +level, and as good as there is in the world." + + +_Thursday, 18th of October_ + +"After it had cleared up I went before the wind, approaching the island +as near as I could, and anchored when it was no longer light enough to +keep under sail. But I did not go on shore, and made sail at dawn...." + + +_Friday, 19th of October_ + +"I weighed the anchors at daylight, sending the caravel _Pinta_ on an +E.S.E. course, the caravel _Niña_ S.S.E., while I shaped a S.E. course, +giving orders that these courses were to be steered until noon, and that +then the two caravels should alter course so as to join company with me. +Before we had sailed for three hours we saw an island to the east, for +which we steered, and all three vessels arrived at the north point before +noon. Here there is an islet, and a reef of rocks to seaward of it, +besides one between the islet and the large island. The men of San +Salvador, whom I bring with me, called it Saomete, and I gave it the name +of Isabella.[123-1] The wind was north and the said islet bore from the +island of Fernandina, whence I had taken my departure, east and west. +Afterwards we ran along the coast of the island, westward from the islet, +and found its length to be 12 leagues as far as a cape, which I named +Cabo Hermoso, at the western end. The island is beautiful, and the coast +very deep, without sunken rocks off it. Outside the shore is rocky, but +further in there is a sandy beach, and here I anchored on that Friday +night until morning. This coast and the part of the island I saw is +almost flat, and the island is very beautiful; for if the other islands +are lovely, this is more so. It has many very green trees, which are very +large. The land is higher than in the other islands, and in it there are +some hills, which cannot be called mountains: and it appears that there +is much water inland. From this point to the N.E. the coast makes a great +angle, and there are many thick and extensive groves. I wanted to go and +anchor there, so as to go on shore and see so much beauty; but the water +was shallow, and we could only anchor at a distance from the land. The +wind also was fair for going to this cape, where I am now anchored, to +which I gave the name of Cabo Hermoso,[123-2] because it is so. Thus it +was that I do not anchor in that angle, but as I saw this cape so green +and so beautiful, like all the other lands of these islands, I scarcely +knew which to visit first; for I can never tire my eyes in looking at +such lovely vegetation, so different from ours. I believe that there are +many herbs and many trees that are worth much in Europe for dyes and for +medicines; but I do not know them, and this causes me great sorrow. +Arriving at this cape, I found the smell of the trees sand flowers so +delicious that it seemed the pleasantest thing in the world. To-morrow, +before I leave this place, I shall go on shore to see what there is at +this cape. There are no people, but there are villages in the interior, +where, the Indians I bring with me say, there is a king who has much +gold. To-morrow I intend to go so far inland as to find the village, and +see and have some speech with this king, who, according to the signs they +make, rules over all the neighboring islands, goes about clothed, and +wears much gold on his person. I do not give much faith to what they say, +as well because I do not understand them well as because they are so poor +in gold that even a little that this king may have would appear much to +them. This cape, to which I have given the name of Cabo Fermoso, is, I +believe, on an island separated from Saometo, and there is another small +islet between them. I did not try to examine them in detail, because it +could not be done in 50 years. For my desire is to see and discover as +much as I can before returning to your Highnesses, our Lord willing, in +April. It is true that in the event of finding places where there is gold +or spices in quantity I should stop until I had collected as much as I +could. I, therefore, proceed in the hope of coming across such places." + + +_Saturday, 20th of October_ + +"To-day, at sunrise, I weighed the anchors from where I was with the +ship, and anchored off the S.W. point of the island of Saometo, to which +I gave the name of Cabo de la Laguna, and to the island Isabella. My +intention was to navigate to the north-east and east from the south-east +and south, where, I understood from the Indians I brought with me, was +the village of the king. I found the sea so shallow that I could not +enter nor navigate in it, and I saw that to follow a route by the +south-east would be a great round. So I determined to return by the route +that I had taken from the N.N.E. to the western part, and to sail round +this island to [reconnoitre it]. + +"I had so little wind that I never could sail along the coast, except +during the night. As it was dangerous to anchor off these islands except +in the day, when one can see where to let the anchor, for the bottom is +all in patches, some clear and some rocky, I lay to all this Sunday +night. The caravels anchored because they found themselves near the +shore, and they thought that, owing to the signals that they were in the +habit of making, I would come to anchor, but I did not wish to do so." + + +_Sunday, 21st of October_ + +"At ten o'clock I arrived here, off this islet, and anchored, as well as +the caravels. After breakfast I went on shore, and found only one house, +in which there was no one, and I supposed they had fled from fear, +because all their property was left in the house. I would not allow +anything to be touched, but set out with the captains and people to +explore the island. If the others already seen are very beautiful, green, +and fertile, this is much more so, with large trees and very green. Here +there are large lagoons with wonderful vegetation on their banks. +Throughout the island all is green, and the herbage like April in +Andalusia. The songs of the birds were so pleasant that it seemed as if a +man could never wish to leave the place. The flocks of parrots concealed +the sun; and the birds were so numerous, and of so many different kinds, +that it was wonderful. There are trees of a thousand sorts, and all have +their several fruits; and I feel the most unhappy man in the world not to +know them, for I am well assured that they are all valuable. I bring home +specimens of them, and also of the land. Thus walking along round one of +the lakes I saw a serpent, which we killed, and I bring home the skin for +your Highnesses. As soon as it saw us it went into the lagoon, and we +followed, as the water was not very deep, until we killed it with lances. +It is 7 spans long, and I believe that there are many like it in these +lagoons.[125-1] Here I came upon some aloes, and I have determined to +take ten quintals on board to-morrow, for they tell me that they are +worth a good deal. Also, while in search of good water, we came to a +village about half a league from our anchorage. The people, as soon as +they heard us, all fled and left their houses, hiding their property in +the wood. I would not allow a thing to be touched, even the value of a +pin. Presently some men among them came to us, and one came quite close. +I gave him some bells and glass beads, which made him very content and +happy. That our friendship might be further increased, I resolved to ask +him for something; I requested him to get some water. After I had gone on +board, the natives came to the beach with calabashes full of water, and +they delighted much in giving it to us. I ordered another string of glass +beads to be presented to them, and they said they would come again +to-morrow. I wished to fill up all the ships with water at this place, +and, if there should be time, I intended to search the island until I had +had speech with the king, and seen whether he had the gold of which I had +heard. I shall then shape a course for another much larger island, which +I believe to be Cipango, judging from the signs made by the Indians I +bring with me. They call it Cuba, and they say that there are ships and +many skilful sailors there. Beyond this island there is another called +Bosio,[126-1] which they also say is very large, and others we shall see +as we pass, lying between. According as I obtain tidings of gold or +spices I shall settle what should be done. I am still resolved to go to +the mainland and the city of Guisay,[126-2] and to deliver the letters of +your Highnesses to the Gran Can, requesting a reply and returning with +it." + + +_Monday, 22nd of October_ + +"All last night and to-day I was here, waiting to see if the king or +other person would bring gold or anything of value. Many of these people +came, like those of the other islands, equally naked, and equally +painted, some white, some red, some black, and others in many ways. They +brought darts and skeins of cotton to barter, which they exchanged with +the sailors for bits of glass, broken crockery, and pieces of +earthenware. Some of them had pieces of gold fastened in their noses, +which they willingly gave for a hawk's bell and glass beads. But there +was so little that it counts for nothing. It is true that they looked +upon any little thing that I gave them as a wonder, and they held our +arrival to be a great marvel, believing that we came from heaven. We got +water for the ships from a lagoon which is near the Cabo del Isleo (Cape +of the Islet), as we named it. In the said lagoon Martin Alonso Pinzon, +captain of the _Pinta_, killed another serpent 7 _spans_ long, like the +one we got yesterday. I made them gather here as much of the aloe as they +could find." + + +_Tuesday, 23rd of October_ + +"I desired to set out to-day for the island of Cuba, which I think must +be Cipango, according to the signs these people make, indicative of its +size and riches, and I did not delay any more here nor [attempt to sail] +...[127-1] round this island to the residence of this king or lord, and +have speech with him, as I had intended. This would cause me much delay, +and I see that there is no gold mine here. To sail round would need +several winds, for it does not blow here as men may wish. It is better to +go where there is great entertainment, so I say that it is not reasonable +to wait, but rather to continue the voyage and inspect much land, until +some very profitable country is reached, my belief being that it will be +rich in spices. That I have no personal knowledge of these products +causes me the greatest sorrow in the world, for I see a thousand kinds of +trees, each one with its own special fruit, all green now as in Spain +during the months of May and June, as well as a thousand kinds of herbs +with their flowers; yet I know none of them except this aloe, of which I +ordered a quantity to be brought on board to bring to your Highnesses. I +have not made sail for Cuba because there is no wind, but a dead calm +with much rain. It rained a great deal yesterday without causing any +cold. On the contrary, the days are hot and the nights cool, like May in +Andalusia." + + +_Wednesday, 24th of October_ + +"At midnight I weighed the anchors and left the anchorage at Cabo del +Isleo, in the island of Isabella.[128-1] From the northern side, where I +was, I intended to go to the island of Cuba, where I heard of the people +who were very great, and had gold, spices, merchandise, and large ships. +They showed me that the course thither would be W.S.W., and so I hold. +For I believe that it is so, as all the Indians of these islands, as well +as those I brought with me in the ships, told me by signs. I cannot +understand their language, but I believe that it is of the island of +Cipango that they recount these wonders.[128-2] On the spheres I saw, and +on the delineations of the map of the world,[128-3] Cipango is in this +region. So I shaped a course W.S.W. until daylight, but at dawn it fell +calm and began to rain, and went on nearly all night. I remained thus, +with little wind, until the afternoon, when it began to blow fresh. I +set all the sails in the ship, the mainsail with two bonnets, the +foresail, spritsail, mizzen, main topsail, and the boat's sail on the +poop. So I proceeded until nightfall, when the Cabo Verde of the island +of Fernandina, which is at the S.W. end, bore N.W. distant 7 leagues. As +it was now blowing hard, and I did not know how far it was to this island +of Cuba, I resolved not to go in search of it during the night; all these +islands being very steep-to, with no bottom round them for a distance of +two shots of a lombard. The bottom is all in patches, one bit of sand and +another of rock, and for this reason it is not safe to anchor without +inspection with the eye. So I determined to take in all the sails except +the foresail, and to go on under that reduced canvas. Soon the wind +increased, while the route was doubtful, and there was very thick +weather, with rain. I ordered the foresail to be furled, and we did not +make two leagues during that night." + + +_Thursday, 25th of October_ + +"I steered W.S.W. from after sunset until 9 o'clock, making 5 leagues. +Afterwards I altered course to west, and went 8 miles an hour until one +in the afternoon; and from that time until three made good 44 miles. Then +land was sighted, consisting of 7 or 8 islands, the group running north +and south, distant from us 5 leagues." + + +_Friday, 26th of October_ + +"The ship was on the south side of the islands, which were all low, +distant 5 or 6 leagues. I anchored there. The Indians[129-1] on board +said that thence to Cuba was a voyage in their canoes of a day and a +half; these being small dug-outs without a sail. Such are their canoes. I +departed thence for Cuba, for by the signs the Indians made of its +greatness, and of its gold and pearls, I thought that it must be +Cipango." + + +_Saturday, 27th of October_ + +"I weighed from these islands at sunrise, and gave them the name of Las +Islas de Arena, owing to the little depth the sea had for a distance of 6 +leagues to the southward of them. We went 8 miles an hour on a S.S.W. +course until one o'clock having made 40 miles. Until night we had run 28 +miles on the same course, and before dark the land was sighted. At night +there was much rain. The vessels, on Saturday until sunset, made 17 +leagues on a S.S.W. course." + + +_Sunday, 28th of October_ + +"I went thence in search of the island of Cuba on a S.S.W. course, making +for the nearest point of it, and entered a very beautiful river without +danger of sunken rocks or other impediments. All the coast was clear of +dangers up to the shore. The mouth of the river was 12 _brazas_ across, +and it is wide enough for a vessel to beat in.[130-1] I anchored about a +lombard-shot inside." The Admiral says that "he never beheld such a +beautiful place, with trees bordering the river, handsome, green, and +different from ours, having fruits and flowers each one according to its +nature. There are many birds, which sing very sweetly. There are a great +number of palm trees of a different kind from those in Guinea and from +ours, of a middling height, the trunks without that covering, and the +leaves very large, with which they thatch their houses. The country is +very level." The Admiral jumped into his boat and went on shore. He came +to two houses, which he believed to belong to fishermen who had fled from +fear. In one of them he found a kind of dog that never barks, and in both +there were nets of palm-fibre and cordage, as well as horn fish-hooks, +bone harpoons, and other apparatus "for fishing, and several hearths. He +believed that many people lived together in one house. He gave orders +that nothing in the houses should be touched, and so it was done." The +herbage was as thick as in Andalusia during April and May. He found much +purslane and wild amaranth.[131-1] He returned to the boat and went up +the river for some distance, and he says it was great pleasure to see the +bright verdure, and the birds, which he could not leave to go back. He +says that this island is the most beautiful that eyes have seen, full of +good harbors and deep rivers, and the sea appeared as if it never rose; +for the herbage on the beach nearly reached the waves, which does not +happen where the sea is rough. (Up to that time they had not experienced +a rough sea among all those islands.) He says that the island is full of +very beautiful mountains, although they are not very extensive as regards +length, but high; and all the country is high like Sicily. It is +abundantly supplied with water, as they gathered from the Indians they +had taken with them from the island of Guanahani. These said by signs +that there are ten great rivers, and that they cannot go round the island +in twenty days. When they came near land with the ships, two canoes came +out; and, when they saw the sailors get into a boat and row about to find +the depth of the river where they could anchor, the canoes fled. The +Indians say that in this island there are gold mines and pearls, and the +Admiral saw a likely place for them and mussel-shells, which are signs of +them. He understood that large ships of the Gran Can came here, and that +from here to the mainland was a voyage of ten days.[131-2] The Admiral +called this river and harbor San Salvador.[131-3] + + +_Monday, 29th of October_ + +The Admiral weighed anchor from this port and sailed to the westward, to +go to the city, where, as it seemed, the Indians said that there was a +king. They doubled a point six leagues to the N.W.,[132-1] and then +another point,[132-2] then east ten leagues. After another league he saw +a river with no very large entrance, to which he gave the name of Rio de +la Luna.[132-3] He went on until the hour of vespers. He saw another +river much larger than the others, as the Indians told him by signs, and +near he saw goodly villages of houses. He called the river Rio de +Mares.[132-4] He sent two boats on shore to a village to communicate, and +one of the Indians he had brought with him, for now they understood a +little, and show themselves content with Christians. All the men, women, +and children fled, abandoning their houses with all they contained. The +Admiral gave orders that nothing should be touched. The houses were +better than those he had seen before, and he believed that the houses +would improve as he approached the mainland. They were made like booths, +very large, and looking like tents in a camp without regular streets, but +one here and another there. Within they were clean and well swept, with +the furniture well made. All are of palm branches beautifully +constructed. They found many images in the shape of women, and many heads +like masks,[132-5] very well carved. It was not known whether these were +used as ornaments, or to be worshipped. They had dogs which never bark, +and wild birds tamed in their houses. There was a wonderful supply of +nets and other fishing implements, but nothing was touched. He believed +that all the people on the coast were fishermen, who took the fish +inland, for this island is very large, and so beautiful, that he is never +tired of praising it. He says that he found trees and fruits of very +marvellous taste; and adds that they must have cows or other cattle, for +he saw skulls which were like those of cows.[133-1] The songs of the +birds and the chirping of crickets throughout the night lulled everyone +to rest, while the air was soft and healthy, and the nights neither hot +nor cold. On the voyage through the other islands there was great heat +but here it is tempered like the month of May. He attributed the heat of +the other islands to their flatness, and to the wind coming from the +east, which is hot. The water of the rivers was salt at the mouth, and +they did not know whence the natives got their drinking-water, though +they have sweet water in their houses. Ships are able to turn in this +river, both entering and coming out, and there are very good +leading-marks. He says that all this sea appears to be constantly smooth, +like the river at Seville, and the water suitable for the growth of +pearls. He found large shells unlike those of Spain. Remarking on the +position of the river and port, to which he gave the name of San +Salvador,[133-2] he describes its mountains as lofty and beautiful, like +the Peña de las Enamoradas,[133-3] and one of them has another little +hill on its summit, like a graceful mosque. The other river and port, in +which he now was,[133-4] has two round mountains to the S.W., and a fine +low cape running out to the W.S.W. + + +_Tuesday, 30th of October_ + +He left the Rio de Mares and steered N.W., seeing a cape covered with +palm trees, to which he gave the name of Cabo de Palmas,[133-5] after +having made good 15 leagues. The Indians on board the caravel _Pinta_ +said that beyond that cape there was a river,[134-1] and that from the +river to Cuba it was four days' journey. The captain of the _Pinta_ +reported that he understood from that, that this Cuba was a city, and +that the land was a great continent trending far to the north. The king +of that country, he gathered, was at war with the Gran Can, whom they +called Cami, and his land or city Fava, with many other names. The +Admiral resolved to proceed to that river, and to send a present, with +the letter of the Sovereigns,[134-2] to the king of that land. For this +service there was a sailor who had been to Guinea, and some of the +Indians of Guanahani wished to go with him, and afterwards to return to +their homes. The Admiral calculated that he was forty-two degrees to the +north of the equinoctial line (but the handwriting is here +illegible).[134-3] He says that he must attempt to reach the Gran Can, +who he thought was here or at the city of Cathay,[134-4] which belongs to +him, and is very grand, as he was informed before leaving Spain. All this +land, he adds, is low and beautiful, and the sea deep. + + +_Wednesday, 31st of October_ + +All Tuesday night he was beating to windward, and he saw a river, but +could not enter it because the entrance was narrow. The Indians fancied +that the ships could enter wherever their canoes could go. Navigating +onwards, he came to a cape running out very far, and surrounded by sunken +rocks,[134-5] and he saw a bay where small vessels might take shelter. +He could not proceed because the wind had come round to the north, and +all the coast runs N.W. and S.E. Another cape further on ran out still +more.[135-1] For these reasons, and because the sky showed signs of a +gale, he had to return to the Rio de Mares. + + +_Thursday, November the 1st_ + +At sunrise the Admiral sent the boats on shore to the houses that were +there, and they found that all the people had fled. After some time a man +made his appearance. The Admiral ordered that he should be left to +himself, and the sailors returned to the boats. After dinner, one of the +Indians on board was sent on shore. He called out from a distance that +there was nothing to fear, because the strangers were good people and +would do no harm to anyone, nor were they people of the Gran Can, but +they had given away their things in many islands where they had been. The +Indian then swam on shore, and two of the natives took him by the arms +and brought him to a house, where they heard what he had to say. When +they were certain that no harm would be done to them they were reassured, +and presently more than sixteen canoes came to the ships with +cotton-thread and other trifles. The Admiral ordered that nothing should +be taken from them, that they might understand that he sought for nothing +but gold, which they call _nucay_.[135-2] Thus they went to and fro +between the ships and the shore all day, and they came to the Christians +on shore with confidence. The Admiral saw no gold whatever among them, +but he says that he saw one of them with a piece of worked silver +fastened to his nose. They said, by signs, that within three days many +merchants from inland would come to buy the things brought by the +Christians, and would give information respecting the king of that land. +So far as could be understood from their signs, he resided at a distance +of four days' journey. They had sent many messengers in all directions, +with news of the arrival of the Admiral. "These people," says the +Admiral, "are of the same appearance and have the same customs as those +of the other islands, without any religion so far as I know, for up to +this day I have never seen the Indians on board say any prayer; though +they repeat the _Salve_ and _Ave Maria_ with their hands raised to +heaven, and they make the sign of the cross. The language is also the +same, and they are all friends; but I believe that all these islands are +at war with the Gran Can, whom they called Cavila, and his province +Bafan. They all go naked like the others." This is what the Admiral says. +"The river," he adds, "is very deep, and the ships can enter the mouth, +going close to the shore. The sweet water does not come within a league +of the mouth. It is certain," says the Admiral, "that this is the +mainland, and that I am in front of Zayto and Guinsay, a hundred leagues, +a little more or less, distant the one from the other.[136-1] It is very +clear that no one before has been so far as this by sea. Yesterday, with +wind from the N.W., I found it cold." + + +_Friday, 2nd of November_ + +The Admiral decided upon sending two Spaniards, one named Rodrigo de +Jerez, who lived in Ayamonte, and the other Luis de Torres, who had +served in the household of the Adelantado of Murcia, and had been a Jew, +knowing Hebrew, Chaldee, and even some Arabic. With these men he sent two +Indians, one from among those he had brought from Guanahani and another a +native of the houses by the river-side. He gave them strings of beads +with which to buy food if they should be in need, and ordered them to +return in six days. He gave them specimens of spices, to see if any were +to be found. Their instructions were to ask for the king of that land, +and they were told what to say on the part of the Sovereigns of Castile, +how they had sent the Admiral with letters and a present, to inquire +after his health and establish friendship, favoring him in what he might +desire from them. They were to collect information respecting certain +provinces, ports, and rivers of which the Admiral had notice, and to +ascertain their distances from where he was. + +This night the Admiral took an altitude with a quadrant, and found that +the distance from the equinoctial line was 42 degrees.[137-1] He says +that, by his reckoning, he finds that he has gone over 1142 leagues from +the island of Hierro.[137-2] He still believes that he has reached the +mainland. + + +_Saturday, 3rd of November_ + +In the morning the Admiral got into the boat, and, as the river is like a +great lake at the mouth, forming a very excellent port, very deep, and +clear of rocks, with a good beach for careening ships, and plenty of +fuel, he explored it until he came to fresh water at a distance of two +leagues from the mouth. He ascended a small mountain to obtain a view of +the surrounding country, but could see nothing, owing to the dense +foliage of the trees, which were very fresh and odoriferous, so that he +felt no doubt that there were aromatic herbs among them. He said that all +he saw was so beautiful that his eyes could never tire of gazing upon +such loveliness, nor his ears of listening to the songs of birds. That +day many canoes came to the ships, to barter with cotton threads and +with the nets in which they sleep, called _hamacas_. + + +_Sunday, 4th of November_ + +At sunrise the Admiral again went away in the boat, and landed to hunt +the birds he had seen the day before. After a time, Martin Alonso Pinzon +came to him with two pieces of cinnamon, and said that a Portuguese, who +was one of his crew, had seen an Indian carrying two very large bundles +of it; but he had not bartered for it, because of the penalty imposed by +the Admiral on any one who bartered. He further said that this Indian +carried some brown things like nutmegs. The master[138-1] of the _Pinta_ +said that he had found the cinnamon trees. The Admiral went to the place, +and found that they were not cinnamon trees. The Admiral showed the +Indians some specimens of cinnamon and pepper he had brought from +Castile, and they knew it, and said, by signs, that there was plenty in +the vicinity, pointing to the S.E. He also showed them gold and pearls, +on which certain old men said that there was an infinite quantity in a +place called _Bohio_,[138-2] and that the people wore it on their necks, +ears, arms, and legs, as well as pearls. He further understood them to +say that there were great ships and much merchandise, all to the S.E. He +also understood that, far away, there were men with one eye, and others +with dogs' noses[138-3] who were cannibals, and that when they captured +an enemy, they beheaded him and drank his blood, and cut off his private +parts. + +The Admiral then determined to return to the ship and wait the return of +the two men he had sent, intending to depart and seek for those lands, if +his envoys brought some good news touching what he desired. The Admiral +further says: "These people are very gentle and timid; they go naked, as +I have said without arms and without law. The country is very fertile. +The people have plenty of _mames_ which are like carrots and have the +flavor of chestnuts; and they have _faxones_ and beans of kinds very +different from ours.[139-1] They also have much cotton, which they do not +sow, as it is wild in the mountains, and I believe they collect it +throughout the year, because I saw pods empty, others full, and flowers +all on one tree. There are a thousand other kinds of fruits, which it is +impossible for me to write about, and all must be profitable." All this +the Admiral says. + + +_Monday, 5th of November_ + +This morning the Admiral ordered the ship to be careened, afterwards the +other vessels, but not all at the same time. Two were always to be at the +anchorage, as a precaution; although he says that these people were very +safe, and that without fear all the vessels might have been careened at +the same time. Things being in this state, the master[139-2] of the +_Niña_ came to claim a reward from the Admiral because he had found +mastic, but he did not bring the specimen, as he had dropped it. The +Admiral promised him a reward, and sent Rodrigo Sanchez and master Diego +to the trees. They collected some, which was kept to present to the +Sovereigns, as well as the tree. The Admiral says that he knew it was +mastic, though it ought to be gathered at the proper season. There is +enough in that district for a yield of 1000 _quintals_ every year. The +Admiral also found here a great deal of the plant called aloe. He further +says that the _Puerto de Mares_ is the best in the world, with the finest +climate and the most gentle people. As it has a high, rocky cape, a +fortress might be built, so that, in the event of the place becoming rich +and important, the merchants would be safe from any other nations. He +adds: "The Lord, in whose hands are all victories, will ordain all things +for his service. An Indian said by signs that the mastic was good for +pains in the stomach." + + +_Tuesday, 6th of November_ + +Yesterday, at night, says the Admiral, the two men came back who had been +sent to explore the interior. They said that after walking 12 leagues +they came to a village of 50 houses, where there were a thousand +inhabitants, for many live in one house. These houses are like very large +booths. They said that they were received with great solemnity, according +to custom, and all, both men and women, came out to see them. They were +lodged in the best houses, and the people touched them, kissing their +hands and feet, marvelling and believing that they came from heaven, and +so they gave them to understand. They gave them to eat of what they had. +When they arrived, the chief people conducted them by the arms to the +principal house, gave them two chairs on which to sit, and all the +natives sat round them on the ground. The Indian who came with them +described the manner of living of the Christians, and said that they were +good people. Presently the men went out, and the women came sitting round +them in the same way, kissing their hands and feet, and looking to see if +they were of flesh and bones like themselves. They begged the Spaniards +to remain with them at least five days. The Spaniards showed the natives +specimens of cinnamon, pepper and other spices which the Admiral had +given them, and they said, by signs, that there was plenty at a short +distance from thence to S.E., but that there they did not know whether +there was any.[141-1] Finding that they had no information respecting +cities, the Spaniards returned; and if they had desired to take those who +wished to accompany them, more than 500 men and women would have come, +because they thought the Spaniards were returning to heaven. There came, +however, a principal man of the village and his son, with a servant. The +Admiral conversed with them, and showed them much honor. They made signs +respecting many lands and islands in those parts. The Admiral thought of +bringing them to the Sovereigns. He says that he knew not what fancy took +them; either from fear, or owing to the dark night, they wanted to land. +The ship was at the time high and dry, but, not wishing to make them +angry, he let them go on their saying that they would return at dawn, but +they never came back. The two Christians met with many people on the road +going home, men and women with a half-burnt weed in their hands, being +the herbs they are accustomed to smoke.[141-2] They did not find +villages on the road of more than five houses all receiving them with the +same reverence. They saw many kinds of trees, herbs, and sweet-smelling +flowers; and birds of many different kinds, unlike those of Spain, except +the partridges, geese, of which there are many, and singing nightingales. +They saw no quadrupeds except the dogs that do not bark.[142-1] The land +is very fertile, and is cultivated with yams and several kinds of beans +different from ours, as well as corn.[142-2] There were great quantities +of cotton gathered, spun, and worked up. In a single house they saw more +than 500 _arrobas_,[142-3] and as much as 4000 _quintals_ could be +yielded every year. The Admiral said that "it did not appear to be +cultivated, and that it bore all the year round. It is very fine, and has +a large boll. All that was possessed by these people they gave at a very +low price, and a great bundle of cotton was exchanged for the point of a +needle or other trifle. They are a people," says the Admiral, "guileless +and unwarlike. Men and women go as naked as when their mothers bore them. +It is true that the women wear a very small piece of cotton-cloth which +covers their private parts and no more, and they are of very good +appearance, not very dark, less so than the Canarians. I hold, most +serene Princes, that if devout religious persons were here, knowing the +language, they would all turn Christians. I trust in our Lord that your +Highnesses will resolve upon this with much diligence, to bring so many +great nations within the Church, and to convert them; as you have +destroyed those who would not confess the Father, the Son, and the Holy +Ghost. And after your days, all of us being mortal, may your kingdoms +remain in peace, and free from heresy and evil, and may you be well +received before the eternal Creator, to whom I pray that you may have +long life and great increase of kingdoms and lordships, with the will and +disposition to increase the holy Christian religion as you have done +hitherto. Amen!" + +"To-day I got the ship afloat, and prepared to depart on Thursday, in the +name of God, and to steer S.E. in search of gold and spices, and to +discover land." + +These are the words of the Admiral, who intended to depart on Thursday, +but, the wind being contrary, he could not go until the 12th of November. + + +_Monday, 12th of November_ + +The Admiral left the port and river of Mares before dawn to visit the +island called Babeque, so much talked of by the Indians on board, where, +according to their signs, the people gather the gold on the beach at +night with candles, and afterwards beat it into bars with hammers.[143-1] +To go thither it was necessary to shape a course E. b. S. After having +made 8 leagues along the coast, a river was sighted, and another 4 +leagues brought them to another river, which appeared to be of great +volume, and larger than any they had yet seen. The Admiral did not wish +to stop nor to enter any of these rivers, for two reasons: the first and +principal one being that wind and weather were favorable for going in +search of the said island of Babeque; the other, that, if there was a +populous and famous city near the sea, it would be visible, while, to go +up the rivers, small vessels are necessary, which those of the expedition +were not. Much time would thus be lost; moreover, exploration of such +rivers is a separate enterprise, that coast was peopled near the river, +to which the name of Rio del Sol was given. + +The Admiral says that, on the previous Sunday, the 11th of November, it +seemed good to take some persons from amongst those at Rio de Mares, to +bring to the Sovereigns, that they might learn our language, so as to be +able to tell us what there is in their lands. Returning, they would be +the mouthpieces of the Christians, and would adopt our customs and the +things of the faith. "I saw and knew" (says the Admiral) "that these +people are without any religion, not idolaters, but very gentle, not +knowing what is evil, nor the sins of murder and theft, being without +arms, and so timid that a hundred would fly before one Spaniard, although +they joke with them.[144-1] They, however, believe and know that there is +a God in heaven and say that we have come from Heaven. At any prayer that +we say, they repeat, and make the sign of the cross. Thus your Highnesses +should resolve to make them Christians, for I believe that, if the work +was begun, in a little time a multitude of nations would be converted to +our faith, with the acquisition of great lordships, peoples, and riches +for Spain. Without doubt, there is in these lands a vast quantity of +gold, and the Indians I have on board do not speak without reason when +they say that in these islands there are places where they dig out gold, +and wear it on their necks, ears, arms, and legs, the rings being very +large. There are also precious stones, pearls, and an infinity of spices. +In this river of Mares, whence we departed to-night, there is undoubtedly +a great quantity of mastic, and much more could be raised, because the +trees may be planted, and will yield abundantly. The leaf and fruit are +like the mastic, but the tree and leaf are larger. As Pliny describes it, +I have seen it on the island of Chios in the Archipelago. I ordered many +of these trees to be tapped, to see if any of them would yield resin; +but, as it rained all the time I was in that river, I could not get any, +except a very little, which I am bringing to your Highnesses. It may not +be the right season for tapping, which is, I believe, when the trees come +forth after winter and begin to flower. But when I was there the fruit +was nearly ripe. Here also there is a great quantity of cotton, and I +believe it would have a good sale here without sending it to Spain, but +to the great cities of the Gran Can,[145-1] which will be discovered +without doubt, and many others ruled over by other lords, who will be +pleased to serve our Highnesses, and whither will be brought other +commodities of Spain and of the Eastern lands; but these are to the west +as regards us. There is also here a great yield of aloes,[145-2] though +this is not a commodity that will yield great profit. The mastic, +however, is important, for it is only obtained from the said island of +Chios, and I believe the harvest is worth 50,000 ducats, if I remember +right.[145-3] There is here, in the mouth of the river, the best port I +have seen up to this time, wide, deep, and clear of rocks. It is an +excellent site for a town and fort, for any ship could come close up to +the walls; the land is high, with a temperate climate, and very good +water. + +"Yesterday a canoe came alongside the ship, with six youths in it. Five +came on board, and I ordered them to be detained. They are now here. I +afterwards sent to a house on the western side of the river, and seized +seven women, old and young, and three children. I did this because the +men would behave better in Spain if they had women of their own land, +than without them. For on many occasions the men of Guinea have been +brought to learn the language in Portugal, and afterwards, when they +returned, and it was expected that they would be useful in their land, +owing to the good company they had enjoyed and the gifts they had +received, they never appeared after arriving. Others may not act thus. +But having women, they have the wish to perform what they are required to +do; besides, the women would teach our people their language, which is +the same in all these islands, so that those who make voyages in their +canoes are understood everywhere. On the other hand, there are a thousand +different languages in Guinea, and one native does not understand +another. + +"The same night the husband of one of the women came alongside in a +canoe, who was father of the three children--one boy and two girls. He +asked me to let him come with them, and besought me much. They are now +all consoled at being with one who is a relation of them all. He is a man +of about 45 years of age." All these are the words of the Admiral. He +also says that he had felt some cold, and that it would not be wise to +continue discoveries in a northerly direction in the winter. On this +Monday, until sunset, he steered a course E. b. S., making 18 leagues, +and reaching a cape, to which he gave the name of Cabo de Cuba. + + +_Tuesday, 13th of November_ + +This night the ships were on a bowline, as the sailors say, beating to +windward without making any progress. At sunset they began to see an +opening in the mountains, where two very high peaks[146-1] were visible. +It appeared that here was the division between the land of Cuba and that +of Bohio, and this was affirmed by signs, by the Indians who were on +board. As soon as the day had dawned, the Admiral made sail toward the +land, passing a point which appeared at night to be distant two leagues. +He then entered a large gulf, 5 leagues to the S.S.E., and there remained +5 more, to arrive at the point where, between two great mountains, there +appeared to be an opening; but it could not be made out whether it was an +inlet of the sea. As he desired to go to the island called Babeque, +where according to the information he had received, there was much gold; +and as it bore east, and as no large town was in sight the wind +freshening more than ever, he resolved to put out to sea, and work to the +east with a northerly wind. The ship made 8 miles an hour, and from ten +in the forenoon, when that course was taken, until sunset, 56 miles, +which is 14 leagues to the eastward from the Cabo de Cuba. The other land +of Bohio was left to leeward. Commencing from the cape of the said gulf, +he discovered, according to his reckoning, 80 miles, equal to 20 leagues, +all that coast running E.S.E. and W.N.W. + + +_Wednesday, 14th of November_ + +All last night the Admiral was beating to windward (he said that it would +be unreasonable to navigate among those islands during the night, until +they had been explored), for the Indians said yesterday that it would +take three days to go from Rio de Mares to the island of Babeque, by +which should be understood days' journeys in their canoes equal to about +7 leagues. The wind fell, and, the course being east, she could not lay +her course nearer than S.E., and, owing to other mischances, he was +detained until the morning. At sunrise he determined to go in search of a +port, because the wind had shifted from north to N.E., and, if a port +could not be found, it would be necessary to go back to the ports in the +island of Cuba, whence they came. The Admiral approached the shore, +having gone over 28 miles E.S.E. that night. He steered south ... miles +to the land, where he saw many islets and openings. As the wind was high +and the sea rough, he did not dare to risk an attempt to enter, but ran +along the coast W.N.W., looking out for a port, and saw many, but none +very clear of rocks. After having proceeded for 64 miles, he found a very +deep opening, a quarter of a mile wide, with a good port and river. He +ran in with her head S.S.W., afterwards south to S.E. The port[147-1] was +spacious and very deep, and he saw so many islands that he could not +count them all, with very high land covered with trees of many kinds, +and an infinite number of palms. He was much astonished to see so many +lofty islands; and assured the Sovereigns that the mountains and isles he +had seen since yesterday seemed to him to be second to none in the world; +so high and clear of clouds and snow, with the sea at their bases so +deep. He believes that these islands are those innumerable ones that are +depicted on the maps of the world in the Far East.[148-1] He believed +that they yielded very great riches in precious stones and spices and +that they extend much further to the south, widening out in all +directions. He gave the name of La Mar de Nuestra Señora, and to the +haven, which is near the mouth of the entrance to these islands, Puerto +del Principe. He did not enter it, but examined it from outside, until +another time, on Saturday of the next week, as will there appear. He +speaks highly of the fertility, beauty, and height of the islands which +he found in this gulf, and he tells the Sovereigns not to wonder at his +praise of them, for that he has not told them the hundredth part. Some of +them seemed to reach to heaven, running up into peaks like diamonds. +Others rising to a great height have a flat top like a table. At their +bases the sea is of a great depth, with enough water for a very large +carrack. All are covered with foliage and without rocks. + + +_Thursday, 15th of November_ + +The Admiral went to examine these islands in the ships' boats, and speaks +marvels of them, how he found mastic, and aloes without end. Some of them +were cultivated with the roots of which the Indians make bread; and he +found that fires had been lighted in several places. He saw no fresh +water. There were some natives, but they fled. In all parts of the sea +where the vessels were navigated he found a depth of 15 or 16 fathoms, +and all _basa_, by which he means that the ground is sand and not rocks; +a thing much desired by sailors, for the rocks cut their anchor cables. + + +_Friday, 16th of November_ + +As in all parts, whether islands or mainlands, that he visited, the +Admiral always left a cross; so, on this occasion, he went in a boat to +the entrance of these havens, and found two very large trees on a point +of land, one longer than the other. One being placed over the other, made +a cross, and he said that a carpenter could not have made it better. He +ordered a very large and high cross to be made out of these timbers. He +found canes on the beach, and did not know where they had grown, but +thought they must have been brought down by some river, and washed up on +the beach (in which opinion he had reason). He went to a creek on the +south-east side of the entrance to the port. Here, under a height of rock +and stone like a cape, there was depth enough for the largest carrack in +the world close in shore, and there was a corner where six ships might +lie without anchors as in a room. It seemed to the Admiral that a +fortress might be built here at small cost, if at any time any famous +trade should arise in that sea of islands. + +Returning to the ship, he found that the Indians who were on board had +fished up very large shells found in those seas. He made the people +examine them, to see if there was mother-o'-pearl, which is in the shells +where pearls grow. They found a great deal, but no pearls, and their +absence was attributed to its not being the season, which is May and +June. The sailors found an animal which seemed to be a _taso_, or +_taxo_.[149-1] They also fished with nets, and, among many others, caught +a fish which was exactly like a pig, not like a tunny, but all covered +with a very hard shell, without a soft place except the tail and the +eyes, and a hole underneath to discharge its superfluities. It was +ordered to be salted, to bring home for the Sovereigns to see.[149-2] + + +_Saturday, 17th of November_ + +The Admiral got into the boat, and went to visit the islands he had not +yet seen to the S.W. He saw many more very fertile and pleasant islands, +with a great depth between them. Some of them had springs of fresh water, +and he believed that the water of those streams came from some sources at +the summits of the mountains. He went on, and found a beach bordering on +very sweet water, which was very cold. There was a beautiful meadow, and +many very tall palms. They found a large nut of the kind belonging to +India, great rats,[150-1] and enormous crabs. He saw many birds, and +there was a strong smell of musk, which made him think it must be there. +This day the two eldest of the six youths brought from the Rio de Mares, +who were on board the caravel _Niña_, made their escape. + + +_Sunday, 18th of November_ + +The Admiral again went away with the boats, accompanied by many of the +sailors, to set up the cross which he had ordered to be made out of the +two large trees at the entrance to the Puerto del Principe, on a fair +site cleared of trees, whence there was an extensive and very beautiful +view. He says that there is a greater rise and fall of the sea there than +in any other port he has seen, and that this is no marvel, considering +the numerous islands. The tide is the reverse of ours, because here, when +the moon is S.S.W., it is low water in the port. He did not get under +way, because it was Sunday. + + +_Monday, 19th of November_ + +The Admiral got under way before sunrise, in a calm. In the afternoon +there was some wind from the east, and he shaped a N.N.E. course. At +sunset the Puerto del Principe bore S.S.W. 7 leagues. He saw the island +of Babeque bearing due east about 60 miles. He steered N.E. all that +night, making 60 miles, and up to ten o'clock of Tuesday another dozen; +altogether 18 leagues N.E. b. W. + + +_Tuesday, 20th of November_ + +They left Babeque, or the islands of Babeque, to the E.S.E., the wind +being contrary; and, seeing that no progress was being made, and the sea +was getting rough, the Admiral determined to return to the Puerto del +Principe, whence he had started, which was 25 leagues distant. He did not +wish to go to the island he had called Isabella, which was twelve leagues +off, and where he might have anchored that night, for two reasons: one +was that he had seen two islands to the south which he wished to explore; +the other, because the Indians he brought with him, whom he had taken at +the island of Guanahani, which he named San Salvador, eight leagues from +Isabella, might get away, and he said that he wanted them to take to +Spain. They thought that, when the Admiral had found gold, he would let +them return to their homes. He came near the Puerto del Principe, but +could not reach it, because it was night, and because the current drifted +them to the N.W. He turned her head to N.E. with a light wind. At three +o'clock in the morning the wind changed, and a course was shaped E.N.E., +the wind being S.S.W., and changing at dawn to south and S.E. At sunset +Puerto del Principe bore nearly S.W. by W. 48 miles, which are 12 +leagues. + + +_Wednesday, 21st of November_ + +At sunrise the Admiral steered east, with a southerly wind, but made +little progress, owing to a contrary sea. At vespers he had gone 24 +miles. Afterwards the wind changed to east and he steered S. b. E., at +sunset having gone 12 miles. Here he found himself forty-two degrees +north of the equinoctial line, as in the port of Mares, but he says that +he kept the result from the quadrant in suspense until he reached the +shore, that it might be adjusted (as it would seem that he thought this +distance was too great, and he had reason, it not being possible, as +these islands are only in ... degrees).[152-1] To believe the quadrant +was right he was led by seeing the north star as high as in Castile ... +Reinforcing this was the great heat which he says he found there.... From +this heat which the Admiral says he endured there he argued that in these +Indies and where he was going there must be much gold.[152-2] + +This day Martin Alonso Pinzon parted company with the caravel _Pinta_, in +disobedience to and against the wish of the Admiral, and out of avarice, +thinking that an Indian who had been put on board his caravel could show +him where there was much gold. So he parted company, not owing to bad +weather, but because he chose. Here the Admiral says: "He had done and +said many other things to me." + + +_Thursday, 22nd of November_ + +On Wednesday night the Admiral steered S.S.E., with the wind east, but it +was nearly calm. At 3 it began to blow from N.N.E.; and he continued to +steer south to see the land he had seen in that quarter. When the sun +rose he was as far off as the day before, owing to adverse currents, the +land being 40 miles off. This night Martin Alonso shaped a course to the +east, to go to the island of Babeque, where the Indians say there is much +gold. He did this in sight of the Admiral, from whom he was distant 16 +miles. The Admiral stood towards the land all night. He shortened sail, +and showed a lantern, because Pinzon would thus have an opportunity of +joining him, the night being very clear, and the wind fair to come, if he +had wished to do so. + + +_Friday, 23rd of November_ + +The Admiral stood towards the land all day, always steering south with +little wind, but the current would never let them reach it, being as far +off at sunset as in the morning. The wind was E.N.E., and they could +shape a southerly course, but there was little of it. Beyond this cape +there stretched out another land or cape, also trending east, which the +Indians on board called Bohio. They said that it was very large, and that +there were people in it who had one eye in their foreheads, and others +who were cannibals, and of whom they were much afraid.[153-1] When they +saw that this course was taken, they said that they could not talk to +these people because they would be eaten, and that they were very well +armed. The Admiral says that he well believes that there were such +people, and that if they are armed they must have some ability. He +thought that they may have captured some of the Indians, and because they +did not return to their homes, the others believed that they had been +eaten. They thought the same of the Christians and of the Admiral when +some of them first saw the strangers. + + +_Saturday, 24th of November_ + +They navigated all night, and at 3[153-2] they reached the level +island[153-3] at the very same point they had come to the week before, +when they started for the island of Babeque. At first the Admiral did not +dare to approach the shore, because it seemed that there would be a great +surf in that mountain-girded bay. Finally he reached the sea of Nuestra +Señora, where there are many islands, and entered a port near the mouth +of the opening to the islands. He says that if he had known of this port +before he need not have occupied himself in exploring the islands, and it +would not have been necessary to go back. He, however, considered that +the time was well spent in examining the islands. On nearing the land he +sent in the boat to sound, finding a good sandy bottom in 6 to 20 +fathoms. He entered the haven, pointing the ship's head S.W. and then +west, the flat island bearing north. This, with another island near it, +forms a harbor which would hold all the ships of Spain safe from all +winds. This entrance on the S.W. side is passed by steering S.S.W., the +outlet being to the west very deep and wide. Thus a vessel can pass +amidst these islands, and he who approaches from the north, with a +knowledge of them can pass along the coast. These islands are at the foot +of a great mountain-chain running east and west, which is longer and +higher than any others on this coast, where there are many. A reef of +rocks outside runs parallel with the said mountains, like a bench, +extending to the entrance. On the side of the flat island, and also to +the S.E., there is another small reef, but between them there is great +width and depth. Within the port, near the S.E. side of the entrance, +they saw a large and very fine river,[154-1] with more volume than any +they had yet met with, and fresh water could be taken from it as far as +the sea. At the entrance there is a bar, but within it is very deep, 19 +fathoms. The banks are lined with palms and many other trees. + + +_Sunday, 25th of November_ + +Before sunrise the Admiral got into the boat, and went to see a cape +or point of land[154-2] to the S.E. of the flat island, about a league +and a half distant, because there appeared to be a good river there. +Presently, near to the S.E. side of the cape, at a distance of two +cross-bow shots, he saw a large stream of beautiful water falling from +the mountains[154-3] above, with a loud noise. He went to it, and saw +some stones shining in its bed like gold.[154-4] He remembered that in +the river Tagus, near its junction with the sea, there was gold; so it +seemed to him that this should contain gold, and he ordered some of +these stones to be collected, to be brought to the Sovereigns. Just +then the sailor boys called out that they had found large pines. The +Admiral looked up the hill, and saw that they were so wonderfully large +that he could not exaggerate their height and straightness, like stout +yet fine spindles. He perceived that here there was material for great +store of planks and masts for the largest ships in Spain. He saw oaks +and arbutus trees,[155-1] with a good river, and the means of making +water-power.[155-2] The climate was temperate, owing to the height of +the mountains. On the beach he saw many other stones of the color of +iron, and others that some said were like silver ore, all brought down +by the river. Here he obtained a new mast and yard for the mizzen of +the caravel _Niña_. He came to the mouth of the river, and entered a +creek which was deep and wide, at the foot of that S.E. part of the +cape, which would accommodate a hundred ships without any anchor or +hawsers. Eyes never beheld a better harbor. The mountains are very +high, whence descend many limpid streams, and all the hills are covered +with pines, and an infinity of diverse and beautiful trees. Two or +three other rivers were not visited. + +The Admiral described all this, in much detail, to the Sovereigns, and +declared that he had derived unspeakable joy and pleasure at seeing it, +more especially the pines, because they enable as many ships as is +desired to be built here, bringing out the rigging, but finding here +abundant supplies of wood and provisions. He affirms that he has not +enumerated a hundredth part of what there is here, and that it pleased +our Lord always to show him one thing better than another, as well on the +ground and among the trees, herbs, fruits, and flowers, as in the people, +and always something different in each place. It had been the same as +regards the havens and the waters. Finally, he says that if it caused +him who saw it so much wonder, how much more will it affect those who +hear about it; yet no one can believe until he sees it. + + +_Monday, 26th of November_ + +At sunrise the Admiral weighed the anchors in the haven of Santa +Catalina, where he was behind the flat island, and steered along the +coast in the direction of Cabo del Pico, which was S.E. He reached the +cape late, because the wind failed and then saw another cape, S.E. b. E. +60 miles, which, when 20 miles off, was named Cabo de Campana, but it +could not be reached that day. They made good 32 miles during the day, +which is 8 leagues. During this time the Admiral noted nine remarkable +ports,[156-1] which all the sailors thought wonderfully good, and five +large rivers; for they sailed close along the land, so as to see +everything. All along the coast there are very high and beautiful +mountains, not arid or rocky, but all accessible, and very lovely. The +valleys, like the mountains, were full of tall and fine trees, so that it +was a glory to look upon them, and there seemed to be many pines. Also, +beyond the said Cabo de Pico to the S.E. there are two islets, each about +two leagues round, and inside them three excellent havens and two large +rivers. Along the whole coast no inhabited places were visible from the +sea. There may have been some, and there were indications of them, for, +when the men landed, they found signs of people and numerous remains of +fires. The Admiral conjectured that the land he saw to-day S.E. of the +Cabo de Campana was the island called by the Indians Bohio:[156-2] it +looked as if this cape was separated from the mainland. The Admiral says +that all the people he has hitherto met with have very great fear of +those of Caniba or Canima. They affirm that they live in the island of +Bohio, which must be very large, according to all accounts. The Admiral +understood that those of Caniba come to take people from their homes, +they being very cowardly, and without knowledge of arms. For this use it +appears that these Indians do not settle on the sea-coast owing to being +near the land of Caniba. When the natives who were on board saw a course +shaped for that land, they feared to speak, thinking they were going to +be eaten; nor could they rid themselves of their fear. They declared that +the Canibas[157-1] had only one eye and dogs' faces. The Admiral thought +they lied, and was inclined to believe that it was people from the +dominions of the Gran Can who took them into captivity. + + +_Tuesday, 27th of November_ + +Yesterday, at sunset, they arrived near a cape named Campana by the +Admiral; and, as the sky was clear and the wind light, he did not wish to +run in close to the land and anchor, although he had five or six +singularly good havens under his lee. The Admiral was attracted on the +one hand by the longing and delight he felt to gaze upon the beauty and +freshness of those lands, and on the other by a desire to complete the +work he had undertaken. For these reasons he remained close hauled, and +stood off and on during the night. But, as the currents had set him more +than 5 or 6 leagues to the S.E. beyond where he had been at nightfall, +passing the land of Campana, he came in sight of a great opening beyond +that cape, which seemed to divide one land from another, leaving an +island between them. He decided to go back, with the wind S.E., steering +to the point where the opening had appeared, where he found that it was +only a large bay,[157-2] and at the end of it, on the S.E. side, there +was a point of land on which was a high and square-cut hill,[157-3] which +had looked like an island. A breeze sprang up from the north, and the +Admiral continued on a S.E. course, to explore the coast and discover all +that was there. Presently he saw, at the foot of the Cabo de Campana, a +wonderfully good port[158-1], and a large river, and, a quarter of a +league on, another river, and a third, and a fourth to a seventh at +similar distances, from the furthest one to Cabo de Campana being 20 +miles S.E. Most of these rivers have wide and deep mouths, with excellent +havens for large ships, without sandbanks or sunken rocks. Proceeding +onwards from the last of these rivers, on a S.E. course, they came to the +largest inhabited place they had yet seen, and a vast concourse of people +came down to the beach with loud shouts, all naked, with their darts in +their hands. The Admiral desired to have speech with them, so he furled +sails and anchored. The boats of the ship and the caravel were sent on +shore, with orders to do no harm whatever to the Indians, but to give +them presents. The Indians made as if they would resist the landing, but, +seeing that the boats of the Spaniards continued to advance without fear, +they retired from the beach. Thinking that they would not be terrified if +only two or three landed, three Christians were put on shore, who told +them not to be afraid, in their own language, for they had been able to +learn a little from the natives who were on board. But all ran away, +neither great nor small remaining. The Christians went to the houses, +which were of straw, and built like the others they had seen, but found +no one in any of them. They returned to the ships, and made sail at noon +in the direction of a fine cape[158-2] to the eastward, about 8 leagues +distant. Having gone about half a league, the Admiral saw, on the south +side of the same bay, a very remarkable harbor[158-3], and to the S.E. +some wonderfully beautiful country like a valley among the mountains, +whence much smoke arose, indicating a large population, with signs of +much cultivation. So he resolved to stop at this port, and see if he +could have any speech or intercourse with the inhabitants. It was so +that, if the Admiral had praised the other havens, he must praise this +still more for its lands, climate, and people. He tells marvels of the +beauty of the country and of the trees, there being palms and pine trees; +and also of the great valley which is not flat, but diversified by hill +and dale, the most lovely scene in the world. Many streams flow from it, +which fall from the mountains. + +As soon as the ship was at anchor the Admiral jumped into the boat, to +get soundings in the port, which is the shape of a hammer. When he was +facing the entrance he found the mouth of a river on the south side of +sufficient width for a galley to enter it, but so concealed that it is +not visible until close to. Entering it for the length of the boat, there +was a depth of from 5 to 8 fathoms. In passing up it the freshness and +beauty of the trees, the clearness of the water, and the birds, made it +all so delightful that he wished never to leave them. He said to the men +who were with him that to give a true relation to the Sovereigns of the +things they had seen, a thousand tongues would not suffice, nor his hand +to write it, for that it was like a scene of enchantment. He desired that +many other prudent and credible witnesses might see it, and he was sure +that they would be as unable to exaggerate the scene as he was. + +The Admiral also says:--"How great the benefit that is to be derived from +this country would be, I cannot say. It is certain that where there are +such lands there must be an infinite number of things that would be +profitable. But I did not remain long in one port, because I wished to +see as much of the country as possible, in order to make a report upon it +to your Highnesses; and besides, I do not know the language, and these +people neither understand me nor any other in my company; while the +Indians I have on board often misunderstand. Moreover, I have not been +able to see much of the natives, because they often take to flight. But +now, if our Lord pleases, I will see as much as possible, and will +proceed by little and little, learning and comprehending; and I will make +some of my followers learn the language. For I have perceived that there +is only one language up to this point. After they understand the +advantages, I shall labor to make all these people Christians. They will +become so readily, because they have no religion nor idolatry, and your +Highnesses will send orders to build a city and fortress, and to convert +the people. I assure your Highnesses that it does not appear to me that +there can be a more fertile country nor a better climate under the sun, +with abundant supplies of water. This is not like the rivers of Guinea, +which are all pestilential. I thank our Lord that, up to this time, there +has not been a person of my company who has had so much as a headache, or +been in bed from illness, except an old man who has suffered from the +stone all his life, and he was well again in two days. I speak of all +three vessels. If it will please God that your Highnesses should send +learned men out here, they will see the truth of all I have said. I have +related already how good a place Rio de Mares would be for a town and +fortress, and this is perfectly true; but it bears no comparison with +this place, nor with the Mar de Nuestra Señora. For here there must be a +large population, and very valuable productions, which I hope to discover +before I return to Castile. I say that if Christendom will find profit +among these people, how much more will Spain, to whom the whole country +should be subject. Your Highnesses ought not to consent that any stranger +should trade here, or put his foot in the country, except Catholic +Christians, for this was the beginning and end of the undertaking; +namely, the increase and glory of the Christian religion, and that no one +should come to these parts who was not a good Christian."[160-1] + +All the above are the Admiral's words. He ascended the river for some +distance, examined some branches of it, and, returning to the mouth, +he found some pleasant groves of trees, like a delightful orchard. +Here he came upon a boat or _canoa_, dug out of one tree as big as a +_fusta_[161-1] of twelve benches, fastened under a boat-house or bower +made of wood, and thatched with palm-leaves, so that it could be +neither injured by sun nor by the water. He says that here would be +the proper site for a town and fort, by reason of the good port, good +water, good land, and abundance of fuel. + + +_Wednesday, 28th of November_ + +The Admiral remained during this day, in consequence of the rain and +thick weather, though he might have run along the coast, the wind being +S.W., but he did not weigh, because he was unacquainted with the coast +beyond, and did not know what danger there might be for the vessels. The +sailors of the two vessels went on shore to wash their clothes, and some +of them walked inland for a short distance. They found indications of a +large population, but the houses were all empty, everyone having fled. +They returned by the banks of another river, larger than that which they +knew of, at the port. + + +_Thursday, 29th of November_ + +The rain and thick weather continuing, the Admiral did not get under way. +Some of the Christians went to another village to the N.W., but found no +one, and nothing in the houses. On the road they met an old man who could +not run away, and caught him. They told him they did not wish to do him +any harm, gave him a few presents, and let him go. The Admiral would have +liked to have had speech with him, for he was exceedingly satisfied with +the delights of that land, and wished that a settlement might be formed +there, judging that it must support a large population. In one house they +found a cake of wax,[161-2] which was taken to the Sovereigns, the +Admiral saying that where there was wax there were also a thousand other +good things. The sailors also found, in one house, the head of a man in a +basket, covered with another basket, and fastened to a post of the house. +They found the same things in another village. The Admiral believed that +they must be the heads of some founder, or principal ancestor of a +lineage, for the houses are built to contain a great number of people in +each; and these should be relations, and descendants of a common +ancestor. + + +_Friday, 30th of November_ + +They could not get under way to-day because the wind was east, and dead +against them. The Admiral sent 8 men well armed, accompanied by two of +the Indians he had on board, to examine the villages inland, and get +speech with the people. They came to many houses, but found no one and +nothing, all having fled. They saw four youths who were digging in +their fields, but, as soon as they saw the Christians, they ran away, +and could not be overtaken. They marched a long distance, and saw many +villages and a most fertile land, with much cultivation and many +streams of water. Near one river they saw a canoe dug out of a single +tree, 95 _palmos_[162-1] long, and capable of carrying 150 persons. + + +_Saturday, 1st of December_ + +They did not depart, because there was still a foul wind, with much rain. +The Admiral set up a cross at the entrance of this port, which he called +Puerto Santo,[162-2] on some bare rocks. The point is that which is on +the S.E. side of the entrance; but he who has to enter should make more +over to the N.W.; for at the foot of both, near the rock, there are 12 +fathoms and a very clean bottom. At the entrance of the port, toward the +S.E. point, there is a reef of rocks above water,[163-1] sufficiently far +from the shore to enable one to pass between if it is necessary, for both +on the side of the rock and the shore there is a depth of 12 to 15 +fathoms; and, on entering, a ship's head should be turned S.W. + + +_Sunday, 2nd of December_ + +The wind was still contrary, and they could not depart. Every night the +wind blows on the land, but no vessel need be alarmed at all the gales in +the world, for they cannot blow home by reason of a reef of rocks at the +opening to the haven, etc. A sailor-boy found, at the mouth of the river, +some stones which looked as if they contained gold; so they were taken to +be shown to the Sovereigns. The Admiral says that there are great rivers +at the distance of a lombard shot.[163-2] + + +_Monday, 3rd of December_ + +By reason of the continuance of an easterly wind the Admiral did not +leave this port. He arranged to visit a very beautiful headland a quarter +of a league to the S.E. of the anchorage. He went with the boats and some +armed men. At the foot of the cape there was the mouth of a fair river, +and on entering it they found the width to be a hundred paces, with a +depth of one fathom. Inside they found 12, 5, 4, and 2 fathoms, so that +it would hold all the ships there are in Spain. Leaving the river, they +came to a cove in which were five very large canoes,[164-1] so well +constructed that it was a pleasure to look at them. They were under +spreading trees, and a path led from them to a very well-built +boat-house, so thatched that neither sun nor rain could do any harm. +Within it there was another canoe made out of a single tree like the +others, like a _fusta_ with 17 benches. It was a pleasant sight to look +upon such goodly work. The Admiral ascended a mountain, and afterwards +found the country level, and cultivated with many things of that land, +including such calabashes, as it was a glory to look upon them.[164-2] In +the middle there was a large village, and they came upon the people +suddenly; but, as soon as they were seen, men and women took to flight. +The Indian from on board, who was with the Admiral, cried out to them +that they need not be afraid, as the strangers were good people. The +Admiral made him give them bells, copper ornaments, and glass beads, +green and yellow, with which they were well content. He saw that they had +no gold nor any other precious thing, and that it would suffice to leave +them in peace. The whole district was well peopled, the rest having fled +from fear. The Admiral assures the Sovereigns that ten thousand of these +men would run from ten, so cowardly and timid are they. No arms are +carried by them, except wands,[164-3] on the point of which a short piece +of wood is fixed, hardened by fire, and these they are very ready to +exchange. Returning to where he had left the boats, he sent back some men +up the hill, because he fancied he had seen a large apiary. Before those +he had sent could return, they were joined by many Indians, and they +went to the boats, where the Admiral was waiting with all his people. One +of the natives advanced into the river near the stern of the boat, and +made a long speech, which the Admiral did not understand. At intervals +the other Indians raised their hands to Heaven, and shouted. The Admiral +thought he was assuring him that he was pleased at his arrival; but he +saw the Indian who came from the ship change the color of his face, and +turn as yellow as wax, trembling much, and letting the Admiral know by +signs that he should leave the river, as they were going to kill him. He +pointed to a cross-bow which one of the Spaniards had, and showed it to +the Indians, and the Admiral let it be understood that they would all be +slain, because that cross-bow carried far and killed people. He also took +a sword and drew it out of the sheath, showing it to them, and saying the +same, which, when they had heard, they all took to flight; while the +Indian from the ship still trembled from cowardice, though he was a tall, +strong man. The Admiral did not want to leave the river, but pulled +towards the place where the natives had assembled in great numbers, all +painted, and as naked as when their mothers bore them. Some had tufts of +feathers on their heads, and all had their bundles of darts. + +The Admiral says: "I came to them, and gave them some mouthfuls of bread, +asking for the darts, for which I gave in exchange copper ornaments, +bells, and glass beads. This made them peaceable, so that they came to +the boats again, and gave us what they had. The sailors had killed a +turtle, and the shell was in the boat in pieces. The sailor-boys gave +them some in exchange for a bundle of darts. These are like the other +people we have seen, and with the same belief that we came from Heaven. +They are ready to give whatever thing they have in exchange for any +trifle without saying it is little; and I believe they would do the same +with gold and spices if they had any. I saw a fine house, not very large, +and with two doors, as all the rest have. On entering, I saw a marvellous +work, there being rooms made in a peculiar way, that I scarcely know how +to describe it. Shells and other things were fastened to the ceiling. I +thought it was a temple, and I called them and asked, by signs, whether +prayers were offered up there. They said that they were not, and one of +them climbed up and offered me all the things that were there, of which I +took some." + + +_Tuesday, 4th of December_ + +The Admiral made sail with little wind, and left that port, which he +called Puerto Santo. After going two leagues, he saw the great +river[166-1] of which he spoke yesterday. Passing along the land, and +beating to windward on S.E. and W.N.W. courses, they reached Cabo +Lindo,[166-2] which is E.S.E. 5 leagues from Cabo del Monte. A league and +a half from Cabo del Monte there is an important but rather narrow river, +which seemed to have a good entrance, and to be deep. Three-quarters of a +league further on, the Admiral saw another very large river, and he +thought it must have its source at a great distance. It had a hundred +paces at its mouth, and no bar, with a depth of 8 fathoms. The Admiral +sent the boat in, to take soundings, and they found the water fresh until +it enters the sea. + +This river had great volume, and must have a large population on its +banks. Beyond Cabo Lindo there is a great bay, which would be open for +navigation to E.N.E. and S.E. and S.S.W. + + +_Wednesday, 5th of December_ + +All this night they were beating to windward off Cape Lindo, to reach the +land to the east, and at sunrise the Admiral sighted another cape,[166-3] +two and a half leagues to the east. Having passed it, he saw that the +land trended S. and S.W., and presently saw a fine high cape in that +direction, 7 leagues distant.[167-1] He would have wished to go there, +but his object was to reach the island of Babeque, which, according to +the Indians, bore N.E.; so he gave up the intention. He could not go to +Babeque either, because the wind was N.E. Looking to the S.E., he saw +land, which was a very large island, according to the information of the +Indians, well peopled, and called by them Bohio.[167-2] The Admiral says +that the inhabitants of Cuba, or Juana,[167-3] and of all the other +islands, are much afraid of the inhabitants of Bohio, because they say +that they eat people. The Indians relate other things, by signs, which +are very wonderful; but the Admiral did not believe them. He only +inferred that those of Bohio must have more cleverness and cunning to be +able to capture the others, who, however, are very poor-spirited. The +wind veered from N.E. to North, so the Admiral determined to leave Cuba, +or Juana, which, up to this time, he had supposed to be the mainland, on +account of its size, having coasted along it for 120 leagues.[167-4] He +shaped a course S.E. b. E., the land he had sighted bearing S.E.; taking +this precaution because the wind always veered from N. to N.E. again, and +thence to east and S.E. The wind increased, and he made all sail, the +current helping them; so that they were making 8 miles an hour from the +morning until one in the afternoon (which is barely 6 hours, for they say +that the nights were nearly 15 hours). Afterwards they went 10 miles an +hour, making good 88 miles by sunset, equal to 22 leagues, all to the +S.E. As night was coming on, the Admiral ordered the caravel _Niña_, +being a good sailer, to proceed ahead, so as to sight a harbor at +daylight. Arriving at the entrance of a port which was like the Bay of +Cadiz, while it was still dark, a boat was sent in to take soundings, +which showed a light from a lantern. Before the Admiral could beat up to +where the caravel was, hoping that the boat would show a leading-mark for +entering the port, the candle in the lantern went out. The caravel, not +seeing the light, showed a light to the Admiral, and, running down to +him, related what had happened. The boat's crew then showed another +light, and the caravel made for it; but the Admiral could not do so, and +was standing off and on all night. + + +_Thursday, 6th of December_ + +When daylight arrived the Admiral found himself four leagues from the +port, to which he gave the name of Puerto Maria,[168-1] and to a fine +cape bearing S.S.W. he gave the name of Cabo de la Estrella.[168-2] It +seemed to be the furthest point of the island towards the south, distant +28 miles. Another point of land, like an island, appeared about 40 miles +to the east. To another fine point, 54 miles to the east, he gave the +name of Cabo del Elefante,[168-3] and he called another, 28 miles to the +S.E., Cabo de Cinquin. There was a great opening or bay, which might be +the mouth of a river,[168-4] distant 20 miles. It seemed that between +Cabo del Elefante and that of Cinquin there was a great opening,[168-5] +and some of the sailors said that it formed an island, to which the name +of Isla de la Tortuga[168-6] was given. The island appeared to be very +high land, not closed in with mountains, but with beautiful valleys, well +cultivated, the crops appearing like the wheat on the plain of Cordova in +May. That night they saw many fires, and much smoke, as if from +workshops,[169-1] in the day time; it appeared to be a signal made by +people who were at war. All the coast of this land trends to the east. + +At the hour of vespers the Admiral reached this port, to which he gave +the name of Puerto de San Nicolas, in honor of St. Nicholas, whose day it +was;[169-2] and on entering it he was astonished at its beauty and +excellence. Although he had given great praise to the ports of Cuba, he +had no doubt that this one not only equalled, but excelled them, and none +of them are like it. At the entrance it is a league and a half wide, and +a vessel's head should be turned S.S.E., though, owing to the great +width, she may be steered on any bearing that is convenient; proceeding +on this course for two leagues.[169-3] On the south side of the entrance +the coast forms a cape, and thence the course is almost the same as far +as a point where there is a fine beach, and a plain covered with +fruit-bearing trees of many kinds; so that the Admiral thought there must +be nutmegs and other spices among them, but he did not know them, and +they were not ripe. There is a river falling into the harbor, near the +middle of the beach. The depth of this port is surprising, for, until +reaching the land, for a distance of ...[169-4] the lead did not reach +the bottom at 40 fathoms; and up to this length there are 15 fathoms with +a very clean bottom. Throughout the port there is a depth of 15 fathoms, +with a clean bottom, at a short distance from the shore; and all along +the coast there are soundings with clean bottom, and not a single sunken +rock. Inside, at the length of a boat's oar from the land, there are 5 +fathoms. Beyond the limit of the port to the S.S.E. a thousand carracks +could beat up. One branch of the port to the N.E. runs into the land for +a long half league, and always the same width, as if it had been measured +with a cord. Being in this creek, which is 25 paces wide, the principal +entrance to the harbor is not in sight, so that it appears +land-locked.[170-1] The depth of this creek is 11 fathoms throughout, all +with clean bottom; and close to the land, where one might put the +gangboards on the grass, there are eight fathoms. + +The whole port is open to the air, and clear of trees. All the island +appeared to be more rocky than any that had been discovered. The trees +are smaller, and many of them of the same kinds as are found in Spain, +such as the ilex, the arbutus and others, and it is the same with the +herbs. It is a very high country, all open and clear, with a very fine +air, and no such cold has been met with elsewhere, though it cannot be +called cold except by comparison. Towards the front of the haven there is +a beautiful valley, watered by a river; and in that district there must +be many inhabitants, judging from the number of large canoes, like +galleys, with 15 benches. All the natives fled as soon as they saw the +ships. The Indians who were on board had such a longing to return to +their homes that the Admiral considered whether he should not take them +back when he should depart from here. They were already suspicious, +because he did not shape a course towards their country; whence he +neither believed what they said, nor could he understand them, nor they +him, properly. The Indians on board had the greatest fear in the world of +the people of this island. In order to get speech of the people it would +be necessary to remain some days in harbor; but the Admiral did not do +so, because he had to continue his discoveries, and because he could not +tell how long he might be detained. He trusted in our Lord that the +Indians he brought with him would understand the language of the people +of this island; and afterwards he would communicate with them, trusting +that it might please God's Majesty that he might find trade in gold +before he returned. + + +_Friday, 7th of December_ + +At daybreak the Admiral got under way, made sail, and left the port +of St. Nicholas. He went on with the wind in the west for two leagues, +until he reached the point which forms the Carenero, when the angle in +the coast bore S.E., and the Cabo de la Estrella was 24 miles to the +S.W. Thence he steered along the coast eastward to Cabo Cinquin about +48 miles, 20 of them being on an E.N.E. coast. All the coast is very +high, with a deep sea. Close in shore there are 20 to 30 fathoms, and +at the distance of a lombard-shot there is no bottom; all which the +Admiral discovered that day, as he sailed along the coast with the +wind S.W., much to his satisfaction. The cape, which runs out in the +port of St. Nicholas the length of a shot from a lombard, could be +made an island by cutting across it, while to sail round it is a +circuit of 3 or 4 miles. All that land is very high, not clothed with +very high trees, but with ilex, arbutus, and others proper to the land +of Castile. Before reaching Cape Cinquin by two leagues, the Admiral +discovered a small roadstead[171-1] like an opening in the mountains, +through which he could see a very large valley, covered with crops +like barley, and he therefore judged that it must sustain a large +population. Behind there was a high range of mountains. On reaching +Cabo Cinquin, the Cabo de la Tortuga bore N.E. 32 miles.[171-2] Off +Cabo Cinquin, at the distance of a lombard-shot, there is a high rock, +which is a good landmark. The Admiral being there, he took the bearing +of Cabo del Elefante, which was E.S.E. about 70 miles,[171-3] the +intervening land being very high. At a distance of 6 leagues there was +a conspicuous cape,[171-4] and he saw many large valleys and plains, +and high mountains inland, all reminding him of Spain. After 8 leagues +he came to a very deep but narrow river, though a carrack might easily +enter it, and the mouth without bar or rocks. After 16 miles there was +a wide and deep harbor,[172-1] with on bottom at the entrance, nor, at +3 paces from the shore, less than 15 fathoms; and it runs inland a +quarter of a league. It being yet very early, only one o'clock in the +afternoon, and the wind being aft and blowing fresh, yet, as the sky +threatened much rain, and it was very thick, which is dangerous even +on a known coast, how much more in an unknown country, the Admiral +resolved to enter the port, which he called Puerto de la Concepcion. +He landed near a small river at the point of the haven, flowing from +valleys and plains, the beauty of which was a marvel to behold. He +took fishing-nets with him; and, before he landed, a mullet, like +those of Spain, jumped into the boat, this being the first time they +had seen fish resembling the fish of Castile. The sailors caught and +killed others and soles and other fish like those of Castile. Walking +a short distance inland, the Admiral found much land under cultivation, +and heard the singing of nightingales and other birds of Castile. Five +men were seen, but they would not stop, running away. The Admiral found +myrtles and other trees and plants, like those of Castile, and so also +were the land and mountains.[172-2] + + +_Saturday, 8th of December_ + +In this port there was heavy rain, with a fresh breeze from the north. +The harbor is protected from all winds except the north; but even this +can do no harm whatever, because there is a great surf outside, which +prevents such a sea within the river as would make a ship work on her +cables. After midnight the wind veered to N.E., and then to east, from +which winds this port is well sheltered by the island of Tortuga, distant +36 miles.[172-3] + + +_Sunday, 9th of December_ + +To-day it rained, and the weather was wintry, like October Castile. No +habitations had been seen except a very beautiful house in the Puerto de +S. Nicolas, which was better built than any that had been in other parts. +"The island is very large" says the Admiral: "it would not be much if it +has a circumference of 200 leagues. All the parts he had seen were well +cultivated. He believed that the villages must be at a distance from the +sea, whither they went when the ships arrived; for they all took to +flight, taking everything with them, and they made smoke-signals, like a +people at war."[TN-2] This port has a width of a thousand paces at its +entrance, equal to a quarter of a league. There is neither bank nor reef +within, and there are scarcely soundings close in shore. Its length, +running inland, is 3000 paces, all clean, and with a sandy bottom; so +that any ship may anchor in it without fear, and enter it without +precaution. At the upper end there are the mouths of two rivers, with the +most beautiful champaign country, almost like the lands of Spain: these +even have the advantage; for which reasons the Admiral gave the name of +the said island Isla Española.[173-1] + + +_Monday, 10th of December_ + +It blew hard from the N.E., which made them drag their anchors half a +cable's length. This surprised the Admiral, who had seen that the +anchors had taken good hold of the ground. As he saw that the wind was +foul for the direction in which he wanted to steer, he sent six men on +shore, well armed to go two or three leagues inland, and endeavor to open +communications with the natives. They came and returned without having +seen either people or houses. But they found some hovels, wide roads, and +some places where many fires had been made. They saw excellent lands, and +many mastic trees, some specimens of which they took; but this is not the +time for collecting it, as it does not coagulate. + + +_Tuesday, 11th of December_ + +The Admiral did not depart, because the wind was still east and S.E. In +front of this port, as has been said, is the island of La Tortuga. It +appears to be a large island, with the coast almost like that of +Española, and the distance between them is about ten leagues.[174-1] It +is well to know that from the Cabo de Cinquin, opposite Tortuga, the +coast trends to the south. The Admiral had a great desire to see that +channel between these two islands, and to examine the island of Española, +which is the most beautiful thing in the world. According to what the +Indians said who were on board, he would have to go to the island of +Babeque. They declared that it was very large, with great mountains, +rivers, and valleys; and that the island of Bohio was larger than Juana, +which they call Cuba, and that it is not surrounded by water. They seem +to imply that there is mainland behind Española, and they call it +Caritaba, and say it is of vast extent. They have reason in saying that +the inhabitants are a clever race, for all the people of these islands +are in great fear of those of Caniba. So the Admiral repeats, what he has +said before, that Caniba is nothing else but the Gran Can, who ought now +to be very near. He sends ships to capture the islanders; and as they do +not return, their countrymen believe that they have been eaten. Each day +we understand better what the Indians say, and they us, so that very +often we are intelligible to each other. The Admiral sent people on +shore, who found a great deal of mastic, but did not gather it. He says +that the rains make it, and that in Chios they collect it in March. In +these lands, being warmer, they might take it in January. They caught +many fish like those of Castile--dace, salmon, hake, dory, gilt heads, +mullets, _corbinas_, shrimps,[175-1] and they saw sardines. They found +many aloes.[175-2] + + +_Wednesday, 12th of December_ + +The Admiral did not leave the port to-day, for the same reason: a +contrary wind. He set up a great cross on the west side of the entrance, +on a very picturesque height, "in sign," he says, "that your Highnesses +hold this land for your own, but chiefly as a sign of our Lord Jesus +Christ." This being done, three sailors strolled into the woods to see +the trees and bushes. Suddenly they came upon a crowd of people, all +naked like the rest. They called to them, and went towards them, but they +ran away. At last they caught a woman; for I had ordered that some should +be caught, that they might be treated well, and made to lose their fear. +This would be a useful event, for it could scarcely be otherwise, +considering the beauty of the country. So they took the woman, who was +very young and beautiful, to the ship, where she talked to the Indians on +board; for they all speak the same language. The Admiral caused her to be +dressed, and gave her glass beads, hawks' bells, and brass ornaments; +then he sent her back to the shore very courteously, according to his +custom. He sent three of the crew with her, and three of the Indians he +had on board, that they might open communications with her people. The +sailors in the boat, who took her on shore, told the Admiral that she did +not want to leave the ship, but would rather remain with the other women +he had seized at the port of Mares, in the island of Juana or Cuba. The +Indians who went to put the woman on shore said that the natives came in +a canoe, which is their caravel, in which they navigate from one place to +another; but when they came to the entrance of the harbor, and saw the +ships, they turned back, left the canoe, and took the road to the +village. The woman pointed out the position of the village. She had a +piece of gold in her nose, which showed that there was gold in that +island. + + +_Thursday, 13th of December_ + +The three men who had been sent by the Admiral with the woman returned at +3 o'clock in the morning, not having gone with her to the village, +because the distance appeared to be long, or because they were afraid. +They said that next day many people would come to the ships, as they +would have been reassured by the news brought them by the woman. The +Admiral, with the desire of ascertaining whether there were any +profitable commodities in that land, being so beautiful and fertile, and +of having some speech with the people, and being desirous of serving the +Sovereigns, determined to send again to the village, trusting in the news +brought by the woman that the Christians were good people. For this +service he selected nine men well armed, and suited for such an +enterprise, with whom an Indian went from those who were on board. They +reached the village, which is 4-1/2 leagues to the S.E., and found that +it was situated in a very large and open valley. As soon as the +inhabitants saw the Christians coming they all fled inland, leaving all +their goods behind them. The village consisted of a thousand houses, with +over three thousand inhabitants. The Indian whom the Christians had +brought with them ran after the fugitives, saying that they should have +no fear, for the Christians did not come from Cariba, but were from +Heaven, and that they gave many beautiful things to all the people they +met. They were so impressed with what he said, that upwards of two +thousand came close up to the Christians, putting their hands on their +heads, which was a sign of great reverence and friendship; and they were +all trembling until they were reassured. The Christians related that, as +soon as the natives had cast off their fear, they all went to the houses, +and each one brought what he had to eat, consisting of yams,[177-1] which +are roots like large radishes, which they sow and cultivate in all their +lands, and is their staple food. They make bread of it, and roast it. The +yam has the smell of a chestnut, and anyone would think he was eating +chestnuts. They gave their guests bread and fish, and all they had. As +the Indians who came in the ship had understood that the Admiral wanted +to have some parrots, one of those who accompanied the Spaniards +mentioned this, and the natives brought out parrots, and gave them as +many as they wanted, without asking anything for them. The natives asked +the Spaniards not to go that night, and that they would give them many +other things that they had in the mountains. While all these people were +with the Spaniards, a great multitude was seen to come, with the husband +of the woman whom the Admiral had honored and sent away. They wore hair +over their shoulders, and came to give thanks to the Christians for the +honor the Admiral had done them, and for the gifts. The Christians +reported to the Admiral that this was a handsomer and finer people than +any that had hitherto been met with. But the Admiral says that he does +not see how they can be a finer people than the others, giving to +understand that all those he had found in the other islands were very +well conditioned. As regards beauty, the Christians said there was no +comparison, both men and women, and that their skins are whiter than the +others. They saw two girls whose skins were as white as any that could be +seen in Spain. They also said, with regard to the beauty of the country +they saw, that the best land in Castile could not be compared with it. +The Admiral also, comparing the lands they had seen before with these, +said that there was no comparison between them, nor did the plain of +Cordova come near them, the difference being as great as between night +and day. They said that all these lands were cultivated, and that a very +wide and large river passed through the centre of the valley, and could +irrigate all the fields. All the trees were green and full of fruit, and +the plants tall and covered with flowers. The roads were broad and good. +The climate was like April in Castile; the nightingale and other birds +sang as they do in Spain during that month, and it was the most pleasant +place in the world. Some birds sing sweetly at night. The crickets and +frogs are heard a good deal. The fish are like those of Spain. They saw +much aloe and mastic, and cotton-fields. Gold was not found, and it is +not wonderful that it should not have been found in so short a time. + +Here the Admiral calculated the number of hours in the day and night, and +from sunrise to sunset. He found that twenty half-hour glasses passed, +though he says that here there may be a mistake, either because they were +not turned with equal quickness, or because some sand may not have +passed. He also observed with a quadrant, and found that he was 34 +degrees from the equinoctial line.[178-1] + + +_Friday, 14th of December_ + +The Admiral left the Puerto de la Concepcion with the land-breeze, but +soon afterwards it fell calm (and this is experienced every day by those +who are on this coast). Later an east wind sprang up, so he steered +N.N.E., and arrived at the island of Tortuga. He sighted a point which he +named Punta Pierna, E.N.E. of the end of the island 12 miles; and from +thence another point was seen and named Punta Lanzada, in the same N.E. +direction 16 miles. Thus from the end of Tortuga to Punta Aguda the +distance is 44 miles, which is 11 leagues E.N.E. Along this route there +are several long stretches of beach. The island of Tortuga is very high, +but not mountainous, and is very beautiful and populous, like Española, +and the land is cultivated, so that it looked like the plain of Cordova. +Seeing that the wind was foul, and that he could not steer for the island +of Baneque,[179-1] he determined to return to the Puerto de la Concepcion +whence he had come; but he could not fetch a river which is two leagues +to the east of that port. + + +_Saturday, 15th of December_ + +Once more the Admiral left the Puerto de la Concepcion, but, on leaving +the port, he was again met by a contrary east wind. He stood over to +Tortuga, and then steered with the object of exploring the river he had +been unable to reach yesterday; nor was he able to fetch the river this +time, but he anchored half a league to leeward of it, where there was +clean and good anchoring ground. As soon as the vessels were secured, he +went with the boats to the river, entering an arm of the sea, which +proved not to be the river. Returning, he found the mouth, there being +only one, and the current very strong. He went in with the boats to find +the villagers that had been seen the day before. He ordered a tow-rope to +be got out and manned by the sailors, who hauled the boats up for a +distance of two lombard-shots. They could not get further owing to the +strength of the current. He saw some houses, and the large valley where +the villages were, and he said that a more beautiful valley he had never +seen, this river flowing through the centre of it. He also saw people at +the entrance, but they all took to flight. He further says that these +people must be much hunted, for they live in such a state of fear. When +the ships arrived at any port, they presently made signals by fires on +heights throughout the country; and this is done more in this island of +Española and in Tortuga, which is also a large island, than in the others +that were visited before. He called this valley Valle del Paraiso,[180-1] +and the river Guadalquivir; because he says that it is the size of the +Guadalquivir at Cordova. The banks consist of shingle, suitable for +walking.[180-2] + + +_Sunday, 16th of December_ + +At midnight the Admiral made sail with the land-breeze to get clear of +that gulf. Passing along the coast of Española on a bowline, for the wind +had veered to the east, he met a canoe in the middle of the gulf, with a +single Indian in it. The Admiral was surprised how he could have kept +afloat with such a gale blowing. Both the Indian and his canoe were taken +on board, and he was given glass beads, bells, and brass trinkets, and +taken in the ship, until she was off a village 17 miles from the former +anchorage, where the Admiral came to again. The village appeared to have +been lately built, for all the houses were new. The Indian then went on +shore in his canoe, bringing the news that the Admiral and his companions +were good people; although the intelligence had already been conveyed to +the village from the place where the natives had their interview with the +six Spaniards. Presently more than five hundred natives with their king +came to the shore opposite the ships, which were anchored very close to +the land. Presently one by one, then many by many, came to the ship +without bringing anything with them, except that some had a few grains of +very fine gold in their ears and noses, which they readily gave away. The +Admiral ordered them all to be well treated; and he says: "for they are +the best people in the world, and the gentlest; and above all I entertain +the hope in our Lord that your Highnesses will make them all Christians, +and that they will be all your subjects, for as yours I hold them." He +also saw that they all treated the king with respect, who was on the +sea-shore. The Admiral sent him a present, which he received in great +state. He was a youth of about 21 years of age, and he had with him an +aged tutor, and other councillors who advised and answered him, but he +uttered very few words. One of the Indians who had come in the Admiral's +ship spoke to him, telling him how the Christians had come from Heaven, +and how they came in search of gold, and wished to find the island of +Baneque. He said that it was well and that there was much gold in the +said island. He explained to the alguazil of the Admiral[181-1] that the +way they were going was the right way, and that in two days they would be +there; adding, that if they wanted anything from the shore he would give +it them with great pleasure. This king, and all the others, go naked as +their mothers bore them, as do the women without any covering, and these +were the most beautiful men and women that had yet been met with. They +are fairly white, and if they were clothed and protected from the sun and +air, they would be almost as fair as people in Spain. This land is cool, +and the best that words can describe. It is very high, yet the top of the +highest mountain could be ploughed with bullocks; and all is diversified +with plains and valleys. In all Castile there is no land that can be +compared with this for beauty and fertility. All this island, as well as +the island of Tortuga, is cultivated like the plain of Cordova. They +raise on these lands crops of yams,[181-2] which are small branches, at +the foot of which grow roots like carrots, which serve as bread. They +powder and knead them, and make them into bread; then they plant the same +branch in another part, which again sends out four or five of the same +roots, which are very nutritious, with the taste of chestnuts. Here they +have the largest the Admiral had seen in any part of the world, for he +says that they have the same plant in Guinea. At this place they were as +thick as a man's leg. All the people were stout and lusty, not thin, like +the natives that had been seen before, and of a very pleasant manner, +without religious belief. The trees were so luxuriant that the leaves +left off being green, and were dark colored with verdure. It was a +wonderful thing to see those valleys, and rivers of sweet water, and the +cultivated fields, and land fit for cattle, though they have none, for +orchards, and for anything in the world that a man could seek for. + +In the afternoon the king came on board the ship, where the Admiral +received him in due form, and caused him to be told that the ships +belonged to the Sovereigns of Castile, who were the greatest princes in +the world. But neither the Indians who were on board, who acted as +interpreters, nor the king, believed a word of it. They maintained that +the Spaniards came from Heaven, and that the Sovereigns of Castile must +be in Heaven, and not in this world. They placed Spanish food before the +king to eat, and he ate a mouthful, and gave the rest to his councillors +and tutor, and to the rest who came with him. + +"Your Highnesses may believe that these lands are so good and fertile, +especially these of the island of Española, that there is no one who +would know how to describe them, and no one who could believe if he had +not seen them. And your Highnesses may believe that this island, and all +the others, are as much yours as Castile. Here there is only wanting a +settlement and the order to the people to do what is required. For I, +with the force I have under me, which is not large, could march over all +these islands without opposition. I have seen only three sailors land, +without wishing to do harm, and a multitude of Indians fled before them. +They have no arms, and are without warlike instincts; they all go naked, +and are so timid that a thousand would not stand before three of our men. +So that they are good to be ordered about, to work and sow, and do all +that may be necessary, and to build towns, and they should be taught to +go about clothed and to adopt our customs." + + +_Monday, 17th of December_ + +It blew very hard during the night from E.N.E., but there was not much +sea, as this part of the coast is enclosed and sheltered by the island +of Tortuga. The sailors were sent away to fish with nets. They had much +intercourse with the natives, who brought them certain arrows of the +Caniba or Canibales. They are made of reeds, pointed with sharp bits of +wood hardened by fire, and are very long. They pointed out two men who +wanted certain pieces of flesh on their bodies, giving to understand +that the Canibales had eaten them by mouthfuls. The Admiral did not +believe it. Some Christians were again sent to the village, and, in +exchange for glass beads, obtained some pieces of gold beaten out into +fine leaf. They saw one man, whom the Admiral supposed to be Governor +of that province, called by them Cacique,[183-1] with a piece of gold +leaf as large as a hand, and it appears that he wanted to barter with +it. He went into his house, and the other remained in the open space +outside. He cut the leaf into small pieces, and each time he came out +he brought a piece and exchanged it. When he had no more left, he said +by signs that he had sent for more, and that he would bring it another +day. The Admiral says that all these things, and the manner of doing +them, with their gentleness and the information they gave, showed these +people to be more lively and intelligent than any that had hitherto +been met with. In the afternoon a canoe arrived from the island of +Tortuga with a crew of forty men; and when they arrived on the beach, +all the people of the village sat down in sign of peace, and nearly all +the crew came on shore. The cacique rose by himself, and, with words +that appeared to be of a menacing character, made them go back to the +canoe and shove off. He took up stones from the beach and threw them +into the water, all having obediently gone back into the canoe. He +also took a stone and put it in the hands of my Alguazil,[183-2] that +he might throw it. He had been sent on shore with the Secretary[184-1] +to see if the canoe had brought anything of value. The alguazil did not +wish to throw the stone. That cacique showed that he was well disposed +to the Admiral. Presently the canoe departed, and afterwards they said +to the Admiral that there was more gold in Tortuga than in Española, +because it is nearer to Baneque. The Admiral did not think that there +were gold mines either in Española or Tortuga, but that the gold was +brought from Baneque in small quantities, there being nothing to give +in return. That land is so rich that there is no necessity to work much +to sustain life, nor to clothe themselves, as they go naked. He +believed that they were very near the source, and that our Lord would +point out where the gold has its origin. He had information that from +here to Baneque was four days' journey, about 34 leagues, which might +be traversed with a fair wind in a single day. + + +_Tuesday, 18th of December_ + +The Admiral remained at the same anchorage, because there was no wind, +and also because the cacique had said that he had sent for gold. The +Admiral did not expect much from what might be brought, but he wanted +to understand better whence it came. Presently he ordered the ship and +caravel to be adorned with arms and dressed with flags, in honor of +the feast of Santa Maria de la O,[184-2] or commemoration of the +Annunciation, which was on that day, and many rounds were fired from +the lombards. The king of that island of Española had got up very +early and left his house, which is about five leagues away, reaching +the village at three in the morning. There were several men from the +ship in the village, who had been sent by the Admiral to see if any +gold had arrived. They said that the king came with two hundred men; +that he was carried in a litter by four men; and that he was a youth, +as has already been said. To-day, when the Admiral was dining under +the poop, the king came on board with all his people. + +The Admiral says to the Sovereigns: "Without doubt, his state, and the +reverence with which he is treated by all his people, would appear good +to your Highnesses, though they all go naked. When he came on board, he +found that I was dining at a table under the poop, and, at a quick walk, +he came to sit down by me, and did not wish that I should give place by +coming to receive him or rising from the table, but that I should go on +with my dinner. I thought that he would like to eat of our viands, and +ordered them to be brought for him to eat. When he came under the poop, +he made signs with his hand that all the rest should remain outside, and +so they did, with the greatest possible promptitude and reverence. They +all sat on the deck, except the men of mature age, whom I believe to be +his councillors and tutor, who came and sat at his feet. Of the viands +which I put before him, he took of each as much as would serve to taste +it, sending the rest to his people, who all partook of the dishes. The +same thing in drinking: he just touched with his lips, giving the rest to +his followers. They were all of fine presence and very few words. What +they did say, so far as I could make out, was very clear and intelligent. +The two at his feet watched his mouth, speaking to him and for him, and +with much reverence. After dinner, an attendant brought a girdle, made +like those of Castile, but of different material, which he took and gave +to me, with pieces of worked gold, very thin. I believe they get very +little here, but they say that they are very near the place where it is +found, and where there is plenty. I saw that he was pleased with some +drapery I had over my bed, so I gave it him, with some very good amber +beads I wore on my neck, some colored shoes, and a bottle of +orange-flower water. He was marvellously well content, and both he and +his tutor and councillors were very sorry that they could not understand +me, nor I them. However, I knew that they said that, if I wanted +anything, the whole island was at my disposal. I sent for some beads of +mine, with which, as a charm, I had a gold excelente,[186-1] on which +your Highnesses were stamped. I showed it to him, and said as I had done +yesterday, that your Highnesses ruled the best part of the world, and +that there were no princes so great. I also showed him the royal +standards, and the others with a cross, of which he thought much. He said +to his councillors what great lords your Highnesses must be to have sent +me from so far, even from Heaven to this country, without fear. Many +other things passed between them which I did not understand, except that +it was easy to see that they held everything to be very wonderful." + +When it got late, and the king wanted to go, the Admiral sent him on +shore in his boat very honorably, and saluted him with many guns. Having +landed, he got into his litter, and departed with his 200 men, his son +being carried behind on the shoulders of an Indian, a man highly +respected. All the sailors and people from the ships were given to eat, +and treated with much honor wherever they liked to stop. One sailor said +that he had stopped in the road and seen all the things given by the +Admiral. A man carried each one before the king, and these men appeared +to be among those who were most respected. His son came a good distance +behind the king, with a similar number of attendants, and the same with a +brother of the king, except that the brother went on foot, supported +under the arms by two honored attendants. This brother came to the ship +after the king, and the Admiral presented him with some of the things +used for barter. It was then that the Admiral learnt that a king was +called Cacique in their language. This day little gold was got by barter, +but the Admiral heard from an old man that there were many neighboring +islands, at a distance of a hundred leagues or more, as he understood, in +which much gold is found; and there is even one island that was all gold. +In the others there was so much that it was said they gather it with +sieves, and they fuse it and make bars, and work it in a thousand ways. +They explained the work by signs. This old man pointed out to the Admiral +the direction and position, and he determined to go there, saying that if +the old man had not been a principal councillor of the king he would +detain him, and make him go, too; or if he knew the language he would ask +him, and he believed, as the old man was friendly with him and the other +Christians, that he would go of his own accord. But as these people were +now subjects of the King of Castile, and it would not be right to injure +them, he decided upon leaving him. The Admiral set up a very large cross +in the centre of the square of that village, the Indians giving much +help; they made prayers and worshipped it, and, from the feeling they +show, the Admiral trusted in our Lord that all the people of those +islands would become Christians. + + +_Wednesday, 19th of December_ + +This night the Admiral got under way to leave the gulf formed between the +islands of Tortuga and Española, but at dawn of day a breeze sprang up +from the east, against which he was unable to get clear of the strait +between the two islands during the whole day. At night he was unable to +reach a port which was in sight.[187-1] He made out four points of land, +and a great bay with a river, and beyond he saw a large bay,[187-2] where +there was a village, with a valley behind it among high mountains covered +with trees, which appeared to be pines. Over the Two Brothers there is a +very high mountain-range running N.E. and S.W., and E.S.E. from the Cabo +de Torres is a small island to which the Admiral gave the name of Santo +Tomas, because to-morrow was his vigil. The whole circuit of this island +alternates with capes and excellent harbors, so far as could be judged +from the sea. Before coming to the island on the west side, there is a +cape which runs far into the sea, in part high, the rest low; and for +this reason the Admiral named it Cabo Alto y Bajo.[188-1] From the +road[188-2] of Torres East by South 60 miles, there is a mountain higher +than any that reaches the sea,[188-3] and from a distance it looks like +an island, owing to a depression on the land side. It was named Monte +Caribata, because that province was called Caribata. It is very +beautiful, and covered with green trees, without snow or clouds. The +weather was then, as regards the air and temperature, like March in +Castile, and as regards vegetation, like May. The nights lasted 14 +hours.[188-4] + + +_Thursday, 20th of December_ + +At sunrise they entered a port between the island of Santo Tomas and the +Cabo de Carabata,[188-5] and anchored. This port is very beautiful, and +would hold all the ships in Christendom. The entrance appears impossible +from the sea to those who have never entered, owing to some reefs of +rocks which run from the mountainous cape almost to the island. They are +not placed in a row, but one here, another there, some towards the sea, +others near the land. It is therefore necessary to keep a good look-out +for the entrances, which are wide and with a depth of 7 fathoms, so that +they can be used without fear. Inside the reefs there is a depth of 12 +fathoms. A ship can lie with a cable made fast, against any wind that +blows. At the entrance of this port there is a channel on the west side +of a sandy islet with 7 fathoms, and many trees on its shore. But there +are many sunken rocks in that direction, and a look-out should be kept up +until the port is reached. Afterwards there is no need to fear the +greatest storm in the world. From this port a very beautiful cultivated +valley is in sight, descending from the S.E., surrounded by such lofty +mountains that they appear to reach the sky, and covered with green +trees. Without doubt there are mountains here which are higher than the +island of Tenerife, in the Canaries, which is held to be the highest yet +known.[189-1] On this side of the island of Santo Tomas, at a distance of +a league, there is another islet, and beyond it another, forming +wonderful harbors; though a good look-out must be kept for sunken rocks. +The Admiral also saw villages, and smoke made by them. + + +_Friday, 21st of December_ + +To-day the Admiral went with the ship's boats to examine this port, which +he found to be such that it could not be equalled by any he had yet seen; +but, having praised the others so much, he knew not how to express +himself, fearing that he will be looked upon as one who goes beyond the +truth. He therefore contents himself with saying that he had old sailors +with him who say the same. All the praises he has bestowed on the other +ports are true, and that this is better than any of them is equally true. +He further says: "I have traversed the sea for 23 years,[189-2] without +leaving it for any time worth counting, and I saw all the east and the +west, going on the route of the north, which is England, and I have been +to Guinea, but in all those parts there will not be found the perfection +of harbors ...[189-3] always found ...[189-4] better than another, that +I, with good care, saw written; and I again affirm it was well written, +that this one is better than all others, and will hold all the ships of +the world, secured with the oldest cables."[190-1] From the entrance to +the end is a distance of five leagues.[190-2] The Admiral saw some very +well cultivated lands, although they are all so, and he sent two of the +boat's crew to the top of a hill to see if any village was near, for none +could be seen from the sea. At about ten o'clock that night, certain +Indians came in a canoe to see the Admiral and the Christians, and they +were given presents, with which they were much pleased. The two men +returned, and reported that they had seen a very large village at a short +distance from the sea.[190-3] The Admiral ordered the boat to row towards +the place where the village was until they came near the land, when he +saw two Indians, who came to the shore apparently in a state of fear. So +he ordered the boats to stop, and the Indians that were with the Admiral +were told to assure the two natives that no harm whatever was intended to +them. Then they came nearer the sea, and the Admiral nearer the land. As +soon as the natives had got rid of their fear, so many came that they +covered the ground, with women and children, giving a thousand thanks. +They ran hither and thither to bring us bread made of _niames_, which +they call _ajes_, which is very white and good, and water in calabashes, +and in earthen jars made like those of Spain, and everything else they +had and that they thought the Admiral could want, and all so willingly +and cheerfully that it was wonderful. "It cannot be said that, because +what they gave was worth little, therefore they gave liberally, because +those who had pieces of gold gave as freely as those who had a calabash +of water; and it is easy to know when a thing is given with a hearty +desire to give." These are the Admiral's words. "These people have no +spears nor any other arms, nor have any of the inhabitants of the whole +island, which I believe to be very large. They go naked as when their +mothers bore them, both men and women. In Juana and the other islands the +women wear a small clout of cotton in front, with which to cover their +private parts, as large as the flap of a man's breeches, especially after +they have passed the age of twelve years, but here neither old nor young +do so. Also, the men in the other islands jealously hide their women from +the Christians, but here they do not." The women have very beautiful +bodies, and they were the first to come and give thanks to Heaven, and to +bring what they had, especially things to eat, such as bread of _ajes_, +nuts,[191-1] and four or five kinds of fruits, some of which the Admiral +ordered to be preserved, to be taken to the Sovereigns. He says that the +women did not do less in other ports before they were hidden; and he +always gave orders that none of his people should annoy them; that +nothing should be taken against their wills, and that everything that was +taken should be paid for. Finally, he says that no one could believe that +there could be such good-hearted people, so free to give, anxious to let +the Christians have all they wanted, and, when visitors arrived, running +to bring everything to them. + +Afterwards the Admiral sent six Christians to the village to see what it +was like, and the natives showed them all the honor they could devise, +and gave them all they had; for no doubt was any longer entertained that +the Admiral and all his people had come from Heaven; and the same was +believed by the Indians who were brought from the other islands, although +they had now been told what they ought to think. When the six Christians +had gone, some _canoas_ came with people to ask the Admiral to come to +their village when he left the place where he was. _Canoa_ is a boat in +which they navigate, some large and others small. Seeing that this +village of the chief was on the road, and that many people were waiting +there for him, the Admiral went there; but, before he could depart, an +enormous crowd came to the shore, men, women, and children, crying out +to him not to go, but to stay with them. The messengers from the other +chief, who had come to invite him, were waiting with their canoes, that +he might not go away, but come to see their chief, and so he did. On +arriving where the chief was waiting for him with many things to eat, he +ordered that all the people should sit down, and that the food should be +taken to the boats, where the Admiral was, on the sea-shore. When he saw +that the Admiral had received what he sent, all or most of the Indians +ran to the village, which was near, to bring more food, parrots, and +other things they had, with such frankness of heart that it was +marvellous. The Admiral gave them glass beads, brass trinkets, and bells: +not because they asked for anything in return, but because it seemed +right, and, above all, because he now looked upon them as future +Christians, and subjects of the Sovereigns, as much as the people of +Castile. He further says that they want nothing except to know the +language and be under governance; for all they may be told to do will be +done without any contradiction. The Admiral left this place to go to the +ships, and the people, men, women, and children, cried out to him not to +go, but remain with them. After the boats departed, several canoes full +of people followed after them to the ship, who were received with much +honor, and given to eat. There had also come before another chief from +the west, and many people even came swimming, the ship being over a good +half-league from the shore. I sent certain persons to the chief, who had +gone back, to ask him about these islands. He received them very well, +and took them to his village, to give them some large pieces of gold. +They arrived at a large river, which the Indians crossed by swimming. The +Christians were unable, so they turned back. In all this district there +are very high mountains which seem to reach the sky, so that the mountain +in the island of Tenerife appears as nothing in height and beauty, and +they are all green with trees. Between them there are very delicious +valleys, and at the end of this port, to the south, there is a valley so +large that the end of it is not visible, though no mountains intervene, so +that it seems to be 15 or 20 leagues long. A river flows through it, and +it is all inhabited and cultivated, and as green as Castile in May or +June; but the night contains 14 hours, the land being so far north. This +port is very good for all the winds that can blow, being enclosed and +deep, and the shores peopled by a good and gentle race without arms or +evil designs. Any ship may lie within it without fear that other ships +will enter at night to attack her, because, although the entrance is over +two leagues wide, it is protected by reefs of rocks which are barely +awash; and there is only a very narrow channel through the reef, which +looks as if it had been artificially made, leaving an open door by which +ships may enter. In the entrance there are 7 fathoms of depth up to the +shore of a small flat island, which has a beach fringed with trees. The +entrance is on the west side, and a ship can come without fear until she +is close to the rock. On the N.W. side there are three islands, and a +great river a league from the cape on one side of the port. It is the +best harbor in the world, and the Admiral gave it the name of Puerto de +la Mar de Santo Tomas, because to-day it was that Saint's day. The +Admiral called it a sea, owing to its size. + + +_Saturday, 22nd of December_ + +At dawn the Admiral made sail to shape a course in search of the +islands which the Indians had told him contained much gold, some of +them having more gold than earth. But the weather was not favorable, +so he anchored again, and sent away the boat to fish with a net. The +lord of that land,[193-1] who had a place near there, sent a large +canoe full of people, including one of his principal attendants, to +invite the Admiral to come with the ships to his land, where he would +give him all he wanted. The chief sent, by this servant, a girdle +which, instead of a purse,[194-1] had attached to it a mask with two +large ears made of beaten gold, the tongue, and the nose. These people +are very open-hearted, and whatever they are asked for they give most +willingly; while, when they themselves ask for anything, they do so as +if receiving a great favor. So says the Admiral. They brought the +canoe alongside the boat, and gave the girdle to a boy; then they came +on board with their mission. It took a good part of the day before +they could be understood. Not even the Indians who were on board +understood them well, because they have some differences of words for +the names of things. At last their invitation was understood by signs. +The Admiral determined to start to-morrow, although he did not usually +sail on a Sunday, owing to a devout feeling, and not on account of any +superstition whatever. But in the hope that these people would become +Christians through the willingness they show, and that they will be +subjects of the Sovereigns of Castile, and because he now holds them +to be so, and that they may serve with love, he wished and endeavored +to please them. Before leaving, to-day, the Admiral sent six men to a +large village three leagues to the westward, because the chief had +come the day before and said that he had some pieces of gold. When the +Christians arrived, the secretary of the Admiral, who was one of them, +took the chief by the hand. The Admiral had sent him, to prevent the +others from imposing upon the Indians. As the Indians are so simple, +and the Spaniards so avaricious and grasping, it does not suffice that +the Indians should give them all they want in exchange for a bead or a +bit of glass, but the Spaniards would take everything without any +return at all. The Admiral always prohibits this, although, with the +exception of gold, the things given by the Indians are of little +value. But the Admiral, seeing the simplicity of the Indians, and +that they will give a piece of gold in exchange for six beads, gave +the order that nothing should be received from them unless something +had been given in exchange. Thus the chief took the secretary by the +hand and led him to his house, followed by the whole village, which +was very large. He made his guests eat, and the Indians brought them +many cotton fabrics, and spun-cotton in skeins. In the afternoon the +chief gave them three very fat geese and some small pieces of gold. A +great number of people went back with them, carrying all the things +they had got by barter, and they also carried the Spaniards themselves +across streams and muddy places. The Admiral ordered some things to be +given to the chief, and both he and his people were very well +satisfied, truly believing that the Christians had come from Heaven, +so that they considered themselves fortunate in beholding them. On +this day more than 120 canoes came to the ships, all full of people, +and all bringing something, especially their bread and fish, and fresh +water in earthen jars. They also brought seeds of good kinds, and +there was a grain which they put into a porringer of water and drank +it. The Indians who were on board said that this was very wholesome. + + +_Sunday, 23rd of December_ + +The Admiral could not go with the ships to that land whither he had been +invited by the chief, because there was no wind. But he sent, with the +three messengers who were waiting for the boats, some people, including +the secretary. While they were gone, he sent two of the Indians he had on +board with him to the villages which were near the anchorage. They +returned to the ship with a chief, who brought the news that there was a +great quantity of gold in that island of Española, and that people from +other parts came to buy it. They said that here the Admiral would find as +much as he wanted. Others came, who confirmed the statement that there +was much gold in the island, and explained the way it was collected. The +Admiral understood all this with much difficulty; nevertheless, he +concluded that there was a very great quantity in those parts, and that, +if he could find the place whence it was got, there would be abundance; +and, if not, there would be nothing. He believed there must be a great +deal, because during the three days that he had been in that port, he had +got several pieces of gold, and he could not believe that it was brought +from another land. "Our Lord, who holds all things in his hands, look +upon me, and grant what shall be for his service." These are the +Admiral's words. He says that, according to his reckoning, a thousand +people had visited the ship, all of them bringing something. Before they +come alongside, at a distance of a crossbow-shot, they stand up in the +canoe with what they bring in their hands, crying out, "Take it! take +it!" He also reckoned that 500 came to the ship swimming, because they +had no canoes, the ship being near a league from the shore. Among the +visitors, five chiefs had come, sons of chiefs, with all their families +of wives and children, to see the Christians. The Admiral ordered +something to be given to all, because such gifts were all well employed. +"May our Lord favor me by his clemency, that I may find this gold, I mean +the mine of gold, which I hold to be here, many saying that they know +it." These are his words. The boats arrived at night, and said that there +was a grand road as far as they went, and they found many canoes, with +people who went to see the Admiral and the Christians, at the mountain of +Caribatan. They held it for certain that, if the Christmas festival was +kept in that port,[196-1] all the people of the island would come, which +they calculated to be larger than England.[196-2] All the people went +with them to the village,[196-3] which they said was the largest, and the +best laid out with streets, of any they had seen. The Admiral says it is +part of the Punta Santa,[196-4] almost three leagues S.E. The canoes go +very fast with paddles; so they went ahead to apprise the _Cacique_, as +they call the chief. Up to that time the Admiral had not been able to +understand whether Cacique meant king or governor. They also have another +name for a great man--_Nitayno_;[197-1] but it was not clear whether they +used it for lord, or governor, or judge. At last the cacique came to +them, and joined them in the square, which was clean-swept, as was all +the village. The population numbered over 2,000 men. This king did great +honor to the people from the ship, and every inhabitant brought them +something to eat and drink. Afterwards the king gave each of them cotton +cloths such as women wear, with parrots for the Admiral, and some pieces +of gold. The people also gave cloths and other things from their houses +to the sailors; and as for the trifles they got in return, they seemed to +look upon them as relics. When they wanted to return in the afternoon, he +asked them to stay until the next day, and all the people did the same. +When they saw that the Spaniards were determined to go, they accompanied +them most of the way, carrying the gifts of the cacique on their backs as +far as the boats, which had been left at the mouth of the river. + + +_Monday, 24th of December_ + +Before sunrise the Admiral got under way with the land-breeze. Among the +numerous Indians who had come to the ship yesterday, and had made signs +that there was gold in the island, naming the places whence it was +collected, the Admiral noticed one who seemed more fully informed, or who +spoke with more willingness, so he asked him to come with the Christians +and show them the position of the gold mines. This Indian has a companion +or relation with him, and among other places they mentioned where gold +was found, they named Cipango, which they called Civao.[197-2] Here they +said that there was a great quantity of gold, and that the cacique +carried banners of beaten gold. But they added that it was very far off +to the eastward. + +Here the Admiral addresses the following words to the Sovereigns: "Your +Highnesses may believe that there is no better nor gentler people in the +world. Your Highnesses ought to rejoice that they will soon become +Christians, and that they will be taught the good customs of your +kingdom. A better race there cannot be, and both the people and the lands +are in such quantity that I know not how to write it. I have spoken in +the superlative degree of the country and people of Juana which they call +Cuba, but there is as much difference between them and this island and +people as between day and night. I believe that no one who should see +them could say less than I have said, and I repeat that the things and +the great villages of this island of Española, which they call Bohio, are +wonderful. All here have a loving manner and gentle speech, unlike the +others, who seem to be menacing when they speak. Both men and women are +of good stature, and not black. It is true that they all paint, some with +black, others with other colors, but most with red. I know that they are +tanned by the sun, but this does not affect them much. Their houses and +villages are pretty, each with a chief, who acts as their judge, and who +is obeyed by them. All these lords use few words, and have excellent +manners. Most of their orders are given by a sign with the hand, which is +understood with surprising quickness." All these are the words of the +Admiral. + +He who would enter the sea of Santo Tomé[198-1] ought to stand for a good +league across the mouth to a flat island in the middle, which was named +La Amiga,[198-2] pointing her head towards it. When the ship is within a +stone's-throw of it the course should be altered to make for the eastern +shore, leaving the west side, and this shore, and not the other, should +be kept on board, because a great reef runs out from the west, and even +beyond that there are three sunken rocks. This reef comes within a +lombard-shot of the Amiga island. Between them there are seven fathoms at +least, with a gravelly bottom. Within, a harbor will be found large +enough for all the ships in the world, which would be there without need +of cables. There is another reef with sunken rocks, on the east side of +the island of Amiga, which are extensive and run out to sea, reaching +within two leagues of the cape. But it appeared that between them there +was an entrance, within two lombard-shots of Amiga, on the west side of +Monte Caribatan, where there was a good and very large port.[199-1] + + +_Tuesday, 25th of December. Christmas_ + +Navigating yesterday, with little wind, from Santo Tomé to Punta Santa, +and being a league from it, at about eleven o'clock at night the Admiral +went down to get some sleep, for he had not had any rest for two days and +a night. As it was calm, the sailor who steered the ship thought he would +go to sleep, leaving the tiller in charge of a boy.[199-2] The Admiral +had forbidden this throughout the voyage, whether it was blowing or +whether it was calm. The boys were never to be entrusted with the helm. +The Admiral had no anxiety respecting sand-banks and rocks, because, when +he sent the boats to that king on Sunday, they had passed to the east of +Punta Santa at least three leagues and a half, and the sailors had seen +all the coast, and the rocks there are from Punta Santa, for a distance +of three leagues to the E.S.E. They saw the course that should be taken, +which had not been the case before, during this voyage. It pleased our +Lord that, at twelve o'clock at night, when the Admiral had retired to +rest, and when all had fallen asleep, seeing that it was a dead calm and +the sea like glass, the tiller being in the hands of a boy, the current +carried the ship on one of the sand-banks. If it had not been night the +bank could have been seen, and the surf on it could be heard for a good +league. But the ship ran upon it so gently that it could scarcely be +felt. The boy, who felt the helm and heard the rush of the sea, cried +out. The Admiral at once came up, and so quickly that no one had felt +that the ship was aground. Presently the master of the ship,[200-1] whose +watch it was, came on deck. The Admiral ordered him and others to launch +the boat, which was on the poop, and lay out an anchor astern. The +master, with several others, got into the boat, and the Admiral thought +that they did so with the object of obeying his orders. But they did so +in order to take refuge with the caravel, which was half a league to +leeward. The caravel would not allow them to come on board acting +judiciously, and they therefore returned to the ship; but the caravel's +boat arrived first. When the Admiral saw that his own people fled in this +way, the water rising and the ship being across the sea, seeing no other +course, he ordered the masts to be cut away and the ship to be lightened +as much as possible, to see if she would come off. But, as the water +continued to rise, nothing more could be done. Her side fell over across +the sea, but it was nearly calm. Then the timbers opened, and the ship +was lost.[200-2] The Admiral went to the caravel to arrange about the +reception of the ship's crew, and as a light breeze was blowing from the +land, and continued during the greater part of the night, while it was +unknown how far the bank extended, he hove her to until daylight. He then +went back to the ship, inside the reef; first having sent a boat on shore +with Diego de Arana of Cordova, alguazil of the fleet, and Pedro +Gutierrez, gentleman of the king's bedchamber, to inform the king, who +had invited the ships to come on the previous Saturday. His town was +about a league and a half from the sand-bank. They reported that he wept +when he heard the news, and he sent all his people with large canoes to +unload the ship. This was done, and they landed all there was between +decks in a very short time. Such was the great promptitude and diligence +shown by that king. He himself, with brothers and relations, was actively +assisting as well in the ship as in the care of the property when it was +landed, that all might be properly guarded. Now and then he sent one of +his relations weeping to the Admiral, to console him, saying that he must +not feel sorrow or annoyance, for he would supply all that was needed. +The Admiral assured the Sovereigns that there could not have been such +good watch kept in any part of Castile, for that there was not even a +needle missing. He ordered that all the property should be placed by some +houses which the king placed at his disposal, until they were emptied, +when everything would be stowed and guarded in them. Armed men were +placed round the stores to watch all night. "The king and all his people +wept [says the Admiral]. They are a loving people, without covetousness, +and fit for anything; and I assure your Highnesses that there is no +better land nor people. They love their neighbors as themselves, and +their speech is the sweetest and gentlest in the world, and always with a +smile. Men and women go as naked as when their mothers bore them. Your +Highnesses should believe that they have very good customs among +themselves. The king is a man of remarkable presence, and with a certain +self-contained manner that is a pleasure to see. They have good memories, +wish to see everything, and ask the use of what they see." All this is +written by the Admiral. + + +_Wednesday, 26th of December_ + +To-day, at sunrise, the king of that land came to the caravel Niña where +the Admiral was, and said to him, almost weeping, that he need not be +sorry, for that he would give him all he had; that he had placed two +large houses at the disposal of the Christians who were on shore, and +that he would give more if they were required, and as many canoes as +could load from the ship and discharge on shore, with as many people as +were wanted. This had all been done yesterday, without so much as a +needle being missed. "So honest are they," says the Admiral, "without any +covetousness for the goods of others, and so above all was that virtuous +king." While the Admiral was talking to him, another canoe arrived from a +different place, bringing some pieces of gold, which the people in the +canoe wanted to exchange for a hawk's bell; for there was nothing they +desired more than these bells. They had scarcely come alongside when they +called and held up the gold, saying _Chuq chuq_ for the bells, for they +are quite mad about them. After the king had seen this, and when the +canoes which came from other places had departed, he called the Admiral +and asked him to give orders that one of the bells was to be kept for +another day, when he would bring four pieces of gold the size of a man's +hand. The Admiral rejoiced to hear this, and afterwards a sailor, who +came from the shore, told him that it was wonderful what pieces of gold +the men on shore were getting in exchange for next to nothing. For a +needle they got a piece of gold worth two _castellanos_, and that this +was nothing to what it would be within a month. The king rejoiced much +when he saw that the Admiral was pleased. He understood that his friend +wanted much gold, and he said, by signs, that he knew where there was, in +the vicinity, a very large quantity; so that he must be in good heart, +for he should have as much as he wanted. He gave some account of it, +especially saying that in Cipango, which they call Cibao,[202-1] it is so +abundant that it is of no value, and that they will bring it, although +there is also much more in the island of Española, which they call Bohio, +and in the province of Caritaba. The king dined on board the caravel with +the Admiral and afterwards went on shore, where he received the Admiral +with much honor. He gave him a collation consisting of three or four +kinds of _ajes_, with shrimps and game, and other viands they have, +besides the bread they call _cazavi_.[202-2] He then took the Admiral to +see some groves of trees near the houses, and they were accompanied by +at least a thousand people, all naked. The lord had on a shirt and a pair +of gloves, given to him by the Admiral, and he was more delighted with +the gloves than with anything else. In his manner of eating, both as +regards the high-bred air and the peculiar cleanliness he clearly showed +his nobility. After he had eaten, he remained some time at table, and +they brought him certain herbs, with which he rubbed his hands. The +Admiral thought that this was done to make them soft, and they also gave +him water for his hands. After the meal he took the Admiral to the beach. +The Admiral then sent for a Turkish bow and a quiver of arrows, and took +a shot at a man of his company, who had been warned. The chief, who knew +nothing about arms, as they neither have them nor use them, thought this +a wonderful thing. He, however, began to talk of those of Caniba, whom +they call Caribes. They come to capture the natives, and have bows and +arrows without iron, of which there is no memory in any of these lands, +nor of steel, nor any other metal except gold and copper. Of copper the +Admiral had only seen very little. The Admiral said, by signs, that the +Sovereigns of Castile would order the Caribs to be destroyed, and that +all should be taken with their hands tied together. He ordered a lombard +and a hand-gun to be fired off, and seeing the effect caused by its force +and what the shots penetrated, the king was astonished. When his people +heard the explosion they all fell on the ground. They brought the Admiral +a large mask, which had pieces of gold for the eyes and ears and in other +parts, and this they gave, with other trinkets of gold that the same king +had put on the head and round the neck of the Admiral, and of other +Christians, to whom they also gave many pieces. The Admiral received much +pleasure and consolation from these things, which tempered the anxiety +and sorrow he felt at the loss of the ship. He knew our Lord had caused +the ship to stop here, that a settlement might be formed. "From this," he +says, "originated so many things that, in truth, the disaster was really +a piece of good fortune. For it is certain that, if I had not lost the +ship, I should have gone on without anchoring in this place, which is +within a great bay, having two or three reefs of rock. I should not have +left people in the country during this voyage, nor even if I had desired +to leave them, should I have been able to obtain so much information, nor +such supplies and provisions for a fortress. And true it is that many +people had asked me to give them leave to remain. Now I have given orders +for a tower and a fort, both well built, and a large cellar, not because +I believe that such defences will be necessary. I believe that with the +force I have with me I could subjugate the whole island, which I believe +to be larger than Portugal, and the population double.[204-1] But they +are naked and without arms and hopelessly timid. Still, it is advisable +to build this tower being so far from your Highnesses. The people may +thus know the skill of the subjects of your Highnesses, and what they can +do; and will obey them with love and fear. So they make preparations to +build the fortress, with provision of bread and wine for more than a +year, with seeds for sowing, the ship's boat, a caulker and carpenter, a +gunner and cooper. Many among these men have a great desire to serve your +Highnesses and to please me, by finding out where the mine is whence the +gold is brought. Thus everything is got in readiness to begin the work. +Above all, it was so calm that there was scarcely wind or wave when the +ship ran aground." This is what the Admiral says; and he adds more to +show that it was great good luck, and the settled design of God, that the +ship should be lost in order that people might be left behind. If it had +not been for the treachery of the master and his boat's crew, who were +all or mostly his countrymen,[204-2] in neglecting to lay out the anchor +so as to haul the ship off in obedience to the Admiral's orders, she +would have been saved. In that case, the same knowledge of the land as +has been gained in these days would not have been secured, for the +Admiral always proceeded with the object of discovering, and never +intended to stop more than a day at any one place, unless he was detained +by the wind. Still the ship was very heavy and unsuited for discovery. It +was the people of Palos who obliged him to take such a ship, by not +complying "with what they had promised to the King and Queen, namely, to +supply suitable vessels for this expedition. This they did not do. Of all +that there was on board the ship, not a needle, nor a board, nor a nail +was lost, for she remained as whole as when she sailed, except that it +was necessary to cut away and level down in order to get out the jars and +merchandise, which were landed and carefully guarded." He trusted in God +that, when he returned from Spain, according to his intention, he would +find a tun of gold collected by barter by those he was to leave behind, +and that they would have found the mine, and spices in such quantities +that the Sovereigns would, in three years, be able to undertake and fit +out an expedition to go and conquer the Holy Sepulchre. "With this in +view," he says, "I protested to your Highnesses that all the profits of +this my enterprise should be spent in the conquest of Jerusalem, and your +Highnesses laughed and said that it pleased them, and that, without this, +they entertained that desire." These are the Admiral's words. + + +_Thursday, 27th of December_ + +The king of that land came alongside the caravel at sunrise, and said +that he had sent for gold, and that he would collect all he could before +the Admiral departed; but he begged him not to go. The king and one of +his brothers, with another very intimate relation, dined with the +Admiral, and the two latter said they wished to go to Castile with him. +At this time the news came that the caravel _Pinta_ was in a river at the +end of this island. Presently the cacique sent a canoe there, and the +Admiral sent a sailor in it. For it was wonderful how devoted the cacique +was to the Admiral. The necessity was now evident of hurrying on +preparations for the return to Castile. + + +_Friday, 28th of December_ + +The Admiral went on shore to give orders and hurry on the work of +building the fort, and to settle what men should remain behind.[206-1] +The king, it would seem, had watched him getting into the boat, and +quickly went into his house dissimulating, sending one of his brothers to +receive the Admiral and conduct him to one of the houses that had been +set aside for the Spaniards, which was the largest and best in the town. +In it there was a couch made of palm matting, where they sat down. +Afterward the brother sent an attendant to say that the Admiral was +there, as if the king did not know that he had come. The Admiral, +however, believed that this was a feint in order to do him honor more. +The attendant gave the message, and the cacique came in great haste, and +put a large soft piece of gold he had in his hand round the Admiral's +neck. They remained together until the evening, arranging what had to be +done. + + +_Saturday, 29th of December_ + +A very youthful nephew of the king came to the caravel at sunrise, who +showed a good understanding and disposition. As the Admiral was always +working to find out the origin of the gold, he asked everyone, for he +could now understand somewhat by signs. This youth told him that, at a +distance of four days' journey, there was an island to the eastward +called Guarionex, and others called Macorix, Mayonic, Fuma, Cibao, and +Coroay,[206-2] in which there was plenty of gold. The Admiral wrote +these names down, and now understood what had been said by a brother of +the king, who was annoyed with him, as the Admiral understood. At other +times the Admiral had suspected that the king had worked against his +knowing where the gold had its origin and was collected, that he might +not go away to barter in another part of the island. For there are such a +number of places in this same island that it is wonderful. After +nightfall the king sent a large mask of gold, and asked for a washhand +basin and jug. The Admiral thought he wanted them for patterns to copy +from, and therefore sent them. + + +_Sunday, 30th of December_ + +The Admiral went on shore to dinner, and came at a time when five kings +had arrived, all with their crowns, who were subject to this king, named +Guacanagari. They represented a very good state of affairs, and the +Admiral says to the Sovereigns that it would have given them pleasure to +see the manner of their arrival. On landing, the Admiral was received by +the king, who led him by the arms to the same house where he was +yesterday, where there were chairs, and a couch on which the Admiral sat. +Presently the king took the crown off his head and put it on the +Admiral's head, and the Admiral took from his neck a collar of beautiful +beads of several different colors, which looked very well in all its +parts, and put it on the king. He also took off a cloak of fine material, +in which he had dressed himself that day, and dressed the king in it, and +sent for some colored boots, which he put on his feet, and he put a large +silver ring on his finger, because he had heard that he had admired +greatly a silver ornament worn by one of the sailors. The king was highly +delighted and well satisfied, and two of those kings who were with him +came with him to where the Admiral was, and each gave him a piece of +gold. At this time an Indian came and reported that it was two days since +he left the caravel _Pinta_ in a port to the eastward. The Admiral +returned to the caravel and Vincent Anes,[207-1] the captain, said that +he had seen the rhubarb plant, and that they had it on the island Amiga, +which is at the entrance of the sea of Santo Tomé, six leagues off, and +that he had recognized the branches and roots. They say that rhubarb +forms small branches above ground, and fruit like green mulberries, +almost dry, and the stalk, near the root, is as yellow and delicate as +the best color for painting, and underground the root grows like a large +pear. + + +_Monday, 31st of December_ + +To-day the Admiral was occupied in seeing that water and fuel were taken +on board for the voyage to Spain, to give early notice to the Sovereigns, +that they might despatch ships to complete the discoveries. For now the +business appeared to be so great and important that the Admiral was +astonished.[208-1] He did not wish to go until he had examined all the +land to the eastward, and explored the coast, so as to know the route to +Castile, with a view to sending sheep and cattle.[208-2] But as he had +been left with only a single vessel, it did not appear prudent to +encounter the dangers that are inevitable in making discoveries. He +complained that all this inconvenience had been caused by the caravel +_Pinta_ having parted company. + + +_Tuesday, 1st of January, 1493_ + +At midnight the Admiral sent a boat to the island Amiga to bring the +rhubarb. It returned at vespers with a bundle of it. They did not bring +more because they had no spade to dig it up with; it was taken to be +shown to the Sovereigns. The king of that land said that he had sent many +canoes for gold. The canoe returned that had been sent for tidings of the +_Pinta_, without having found her. The sailor who went in the canoe said +that twenty leagues from there he had seen a king who wore two large +plates of gold on his head, but when the Indians in the canoe spoke to +him he took them off. He also saw much gold on other people. The Admiral +considered that the King Guacanagari ought to have prohibited his people +from selling gold to the Christians, in order that it might all pass +through his hands. But the king knew the places, as before stated, where +there was such a quantity that it was not valued. The supply of spices +also is extensive, and is worth more than pepper or manegueta.[209-1] He +left instructions to those who wished to remain that they were to collect +as much as they could. + + +_Wednesday, 2nd of January_ + +In the morning the Admiral went on shore to take leave of the King +Guacanagari, and to depart from him in the name of the Lord. He gave him +one of his shirts. In order to show him the force of the lombards, and +what effect they had, he ordered one to be loaded and fired into the side +of the ship that was on shore, for this was apposite to the conversation +respecting the Caribs, with whom Guacanagari was at war. The king saw +whence the lombard-shot came, and how it passed through the side of the +ship and went far away over the sea. The Admiral also ordered a skirmish +of the crews of the ships, fully armed, saying to the cacique that he +need have no fear of the Caribs even if they should come. All this was +done that the king might look upon the men who were left behind as +friends, and that he might also have a proper fear of them. The king took +the Admiral to dinner at the house where he was established, and the +others who came with him. The Admiral strongly recommended to his +friendship Diego de Arana, Pedro Gutierrez, and Rodrigo Escovedo, whom he +left jointly as his lieutenants over the people who remained behind, that +all might be well regulated and governed for service of their Highnesses. +The cacique showed much love for the Admiral, and great sorrow at his +departure, especially when he saw him go on board. A relation of that +king said to the Admiral that he had ordered a statue of pure gold to be +made, as big as the Admiral, and that it would be brought within ten +days. The Admiral embarked with the intention of sailing presently, but +there was no wind. + +He left on that island of Española, which the Indians called Bohio, 39 +men[210-1] with the fortress, and he says that they were great friends of +Guacanagari. The lieutenants placed over them were Diego de Arana of +Cordova, Pedro Gutierrez, keeper of the king's drawing-room, and servant +of the chief butler, and Rodrigo de Escovedo, a native of Segovia, nephew +of Fray Rodrigo Perez, with all the powers he himself received from the +Sovereigns. He left behind all the merchandise which had been provided +for bartering, which was much, that they might trade for gold. He also +left the ship's boat, that they, most of them being sailors, might go, +when the time seemed convenient, to discover the gold mine, in order that +the Admiral, on his return, might find much gold. They were also to find +a good site for a town, for this was not altogether a desirable port; +especially as the gold the natives brought came from the east; also, the +farther to the east the nearer to Spain. He also left seeds for sowing, +and his officers, the alguazil and secretary, as well as a ship's +carpenter, a caulker, a good gunner familiar with engineering (_que sabe +bien de ingenios_), a cooper, a physician, and a tailor, all being seamen +as well.[210-2] + + +_Thursday, 3rd of January_ + +The Admiral did not go to-day, because three of the Indians whom he had +brought from the islands, and who had staid behind, arrived, and said +that the others with their women would be there at sunrise.[211-1] The +sea also was rather rough, so that they could not land from the boat. He +determined to depart to-morrow, with the grace of God. The Admiral said +that if he had the caravel _Pinta_ with him he could make sure of +shipping a tun of gold, because he could then follow the coasts of these +islands, which he would not do alone, for fear some accident might impede +his return to Castile, and prevent him from reporting all he had +discovered to the Sovereigns. If it was certain that the caravel _Pinta_ +would arrive safely in Spain with Martin Alonso Pinzon, he would not +hesitate to act as he desired; but as he had no certain tidings of him, +and as he might return and tell lies to the Sovereigns, that he might not +receive the punishment he deserved for having done so much harm in having +parted company without permission, and impeded the good service that +might have been done, the Admiral could only trust in our Lord that he +would grant favorable weather, and remedy all things. + + +_Friday, 4th of January_ + +At sunrise the Admiral weighed the anchor, with little wind, and turned +her head N.W. to get clear of the reef, by another channel wider than the +one by which he entered, which, with others, is very good for coming in +front of the Villa de la Navidad, in all which the least depth is from 3 +to 9 fathoms. These two channels run N.W. and S.E., and the reefs are +long, extending from the Cabo Santo to the Cabo de Sierpe for more than +six leagues, and then a good three leagues out to sea. At a league +outside Cabo Santo there are not more than 8 fathoms of depth, and inside +that cape, on the east side, there are many sunken rocks, and channels to +enter between them. All this coast trends N.W. and S.E., and it is all +beach, with the land very level for about a quarter of a league inland. +After that distance there are very high mountains, and the whole is +peopled with a very good race, as they showed themselves to the +Christians. Thus the Admiral navigated to the east, shaping a course for +a very high mountain, which looked like an island, but is not one, being +joined to the mainland by a very low neck. The mountain has the shape of +a very beautiful tent. He gave it the name of Monte Cristi. It is due +east of Cabo Santo, at a distance of 18 leagues.[212-1] That day, owing +to the light wind, they could not reach within six leagues of Monte +Cristi. He discovered four very low and sandy islets,[212-2] with a reef +extending N.W. and S.E. Inside, there is a large gulf,[212-3] which +extends from this mountain to the S.E. at least twenty leagues,[212-4] +which must all be shallow, with many sandbanks, and inside numerous +rivers which are not navigable. At the same time the sailor who was sent +in the canoe to get tidings of the _Pinta_ reported that he saw a +river[212-5] into which ships might enter. The Admiral anchored at a +distance of 6 leagues[212-6] from Monte Cristi, in 19 fathoms, and so +kept clear of many rocks and reefs. Here he remained for the night. The +Admiral gives notice to those who would go to the Villa de la Navidad +that, to make Monte Cristi, he should stand off the land two leagues, +etc. (But as the coast is now known it is not given here.) The Admiral +concluded that Cipango was in that island, and that it contained much +gold, spices, mastic, and rhubarb. + + +_Saturday, 5th of January_ + +At sunrise the Admiral made sail with the land-breeze, and saw that to +the S.S.E.[212-7] of Monte Cristi, between it and an island, there +seemed to be a good port to anchor in that night. He shaped an E.S.E. +course, afterward S.S.E., for six leagues round the high land, and found +a depth of 17 fathoms, with a very clean bottom, going on for three +leagues with the same soundings. Afterwards it shallowed to 12 fathoms up +to the promontory of the mountain, and off the promontory, at one league, +the depth of 9 fathoms was found, the bottom clean, and all fine sand. +The Admiral followed the same course until he came between the mountain +and the island,[213-1] where he found 3-1/2 fathoms at low water, a very +good port, and here he anchored.[213-2] He went in the boat to the islet, +where he found remains of fire and footmarks, showing that fishermen had +been there. Here they saw many stones painted in colors, or a quarry of +such stones, very beautifully worked by nature, suited for the building +of a church or other public work, like those he found on the island of +San Salvador. On this islet he also found many plants of mastic. He says +that this Monte Cristi is very fine and high, but accessible, and of a +very beautiful shape, all the land round it being low, a very fine plain, +from which the height rises, looking at a distance like an island +disunited from other land. Beyond the mountain, to the east, he saw a +cape at a distance of 24 miles, which he named Cabo del Becerro,[213-3] +whence to the mountain for two leagues there are reefs of rocks, though +it appeared as if there were navigable channels between them. It would, +however, be advisable to approach in daylight, and to send a boat ahead +to sound. From the mountain eastward to Cabo del Becerro, for four +leagues, there is a beach, and the land is low, but the rest is very +high, with beautiful mountains and some cultivation. Inland, a chain of +mountains runs N.E. and S.W., the most beautiful he had seen, appearing +like the hills of Cordova. Some other very lofty mountains appear in the +distance toward the south and S.E., and very extensive green valleys with +large rivers: all this in such quantity that he did not believe he had +exaggerated a thousandth part. Afterwards he saw, to the eastward of the +mountain, a land which appeared like that of Monte Cristi in size and +beauty. Further to the east and N.E. there is land which is not so high, +extending for some hundred miles or near it. + + +_Sunday, 6th of January_ + +That port is sheltered from all winds, except north and N.W., and these +winds seldom blow in this region. Even when the wind is from those +quarters, shelter may be found near the islet in 3 or 4 fathoms. At +sunrise the Admiral made sail to proceed along the coast, the course +being east, except that it is necessary to look out for several reefs of +stone and sand, within which there are good anchorages, with channels +leading to them. After noon it blew fresh from the east. The Admiral +ordered a sailor to go to the mast-head to look out for reefs, and he saw +the caravel _Pinta_ coming, with the wind aft, and she joined the +Admiral.[214-1] As there was no place to anchor, owing to the rocky +bottom, the Admiral returned for ten leagues to Monte Cristi, with the +_Pinta_ in company. Martin Alonso Pinzon came on board the caravel +_Niña_, where the Admiral was, and excused himself by saying that he had +parted company against his will, giving reasons for it. But the Admiral +says that they were all false; and that on the night when Pinzon parted +company he was influenced by pride and covetousness. He could not +understand whence had come the insolence and disloyalty with which Pinzon +had treated him during the voyage. The Admiral had taken no notice, +because he did not wish to give place to the evil works of Satan, who +desired to impede the voyage. It appeared that one of the Indians, who +had been put on board the caravel by the Admiral with others, had said +that there was much gold in an island called Baneque, and, as Pinzon's +vessel was light and swift, he determined to go there, parting company +with the Admiral, who wished to remain and explore the coasts of Juana +and Española, with an easterly course. When Martin Alonso arrived at the +island of Baneque[215-1] he found no gold. He then went to the coast of +Española, on information from the Indians that there was a great quantity +of gold and many mines in that island of Española, which the Indians call +Bohio. He thus arrived near the Villa de Navidad, about 15 leagues from +it, having then been absent more than twenty days, so that the news +brought by the Indians was correct, on account of which the King +Guacanagari sent a canoe, and the Admiral put a sailor on board; but the +_Pinta_ must have gone before the canoe arrived. The Admiral says that +the _Pinta_ obtained much gold by barter, receiving large pieces the size +of two fingers in exchange for a needle. Martin Alonso took half, +dividing the other half among the crew. The Admiral then says: "Thus I am +convinced that our Lord miraculously caused that vessel to remain here, +this being the best place in the whole island to form a settlement, and +the nearest to the gold mines." He also says that he knew of another +great island, to the south of the island of Juana, in which there is more +gold than in this island, so that they collect it in bits the size of +beans, while in Española they find the pieces the size of grains of +wheat. They call that island Yamaye.[215-2] The Admiral also heard of an +island further east, in which there were only women, having been told +this by many people.[215-3] He was also informed that Yamaye and the +island of Española were ten days' journey in a canoe from the mainland, +which would be about 70 or 80 leagues, and that there the people wore +clothes.[215-4] + + +_Monday, 7th of January_ + +This day the Admiral took the opportunity of calking the caravel, and the +sailors were sent to cut wood. They found mastic and aloes in abundance. + + +_Tuesday, 8th of January_ + +As the wind was blowing fresh from the east and S.E., the Admiral did not +get under way this morning. He ordered the caravel to be filled up with +wood and water and with all other necessaries for the voyage. He wished +to explore all the coast of Española in this direction. But those he +appointed to the caravels as captains were brothers, namely, Martin +Alonso Pinzon and Vicente Anes. They also had followers who were filled +with pride and avarice, considering that all now belonged to them, and +unmindful of the honor the Admiral had done them. They had not and did +not obey his orders, but did and said many unworthy things against him; +while Martin Alonso had deserted him from the 21st of November until the +6th of January without cause or reason, but from disaffection. All these +things had been endured in silence by the Admiral in order to secure a +good end to the voyage. He determined to return as quickly as possible, +to get rid of such an evil company, with whom he thought it necessary to +dissimulate, although they were a mutinous set, and though he also had +with him many good men; for it was not a fitting time for dealing out +punishment. + +The Admiral got into the boat and went up the river[216-1] which is near, +toward the S.S.W. of Monte Cristi, a good league. This is where the +sailors went to get fresh water for the ships. He found that the sand at +the mouth of the river, which is very large and deep, was full of very +fine gold, and in astonishing quantity. The Admiral thought that it was +pulverized in the drift down the river, but in a short time he found +many grains as large as lentils, while there was a great deal of the fine +powder. + +As the fresh water mixed with the salt when it entered the sea, he +ordered the boat to go up for the distance of a stone's-throw. They +filled the casks from the boat, and when they went back to the caravel +they found small bits of gold sticking to the hoops of the casks and of +the barrel. The Admiral gave the name of Rio del Oro to the river.[217-1] +Inside the bar it is very deep, though the mouth is shallow and very +wide. The distance to the Villa de la Navidad is 17 leagues,[217-2] and +there are several large rivers on the intervening coast, especially three +which probably contain much more gold than this one, because they are +larger. This river is nearly the size of the Guadalquivir at Cordova, and +from it to the gold mines the distance is not more than 20 +leagues.[217-3] The Admiral further says that he did not care to take the +sand containing gold, because their Highnesses would have it all as their +property at their town of Navidad; and because his first object was now +to bring the news and to get rid of the evil company that was with him, +whom he had always said were a mutinous set. + + +_Wednesday, 9th of January_ + +The Admiral made sail at midnight, with the wind S.E., and shaped an +E.N.E. course, arriving at a point named Punta Roja,[217-4] which is 60 +miles[217-5] east of Monte Cristi, and anchored under its lee three hours +before nightfall. He did not venture to go out at night, because there +are many reefs, until they are known. Afterwards, if, as will probably be +the case, channels are found between them, the anchorage, which is good +and well sheltered, will be profitable. The country between Monte Cristi +and this point where the Admiral anchored is very high land, with +beautiful plains, the range running east and west, all green and +cultivated, with numerous streams of water, so that it is wonderful to +see such beauty. In all this country there are many turtles, and the +sailors took several when they came on shore to lay their eggs at Monte +Cristi, as large as a great wooden buckler. + +On the previous day, when the Admiral went to the Rio del Oro, he saw +three mermaids,[218-1] which rose well out of the sea; but they are not +so beautiful as they are painted, though to some extent they have the +form of a human face. The Admiral says that he had seen some, at other +times, in Guinea, on the coast of the Manequeta.[218-2] + +The Admiral says that this night, in the name of our Lord, he would set +out on his homeward voyage without any further delay whatever, for he had +found what he sought, and he did not wish to have further cause of +offence with Martin Alonso until their Highnesses should know the news of +the voyage and what had been done. Afterwards he says, "I will not suffer +the deeds of evil-disposed persons, with little worth, who, without +respect for him to whom they owe their positions, presume to set up their +own wills with little ceremony." + + +_Thursday, 10th of January_ + +He departed from the place where he had anchored, and at sunset he +reached a river, to which he gave the name of Rio de Gracia, three +leagues to the S.E. He came to at the mouth,[219-1] where there is good +anchorage on the east side. There is a bar with no more than two fathoms +of water, and very narrow across the entrance. It is a good and +well-sheltered port, except that there are many shipworms,[219-2] owing +to which the caravel _Pinta_, under Martin Alonso, received a good deal +of damage. He had been here bartering for 16 days, and got much gold, +which was what Martin Alonso wanted. As soon as he heard from the Indians +that the Admiral was on the coast of the same island of Española, and +that he could not avoid him, Pinzon came to him. He wanted all the people +of the ship to swear that he had not been there more than six days. But +his treachery was so public that it could not be concealed. He had made a +law that half of all the gold that was collected was his. When he left +this port he took four men and two girls by force. But the Admiral +ordered that they should be clothed and put on shore to return to their +homes. "This," the Admiral says, "is a service of your Highnesses. For +all the men and women are subjects of your Highnesses, as well in this +island as in the others. Here, where your Highnesses already have a +settlement, the people ought to be treated with honor and favor, seeing +that this island has so much gold and such good spice-yielding lands." + + +_Friday, 11th of January_ + +At midnight the Admiral left the Rio de Gracia with the land-breeze, and +steered eastward until he came to a cape named Belprado, at a distance +of four leagues. To the S.E. is the mountain to which he gave the name of +Monte de Plata,[220-1] eight leagues distant. Thence from the cape +Belprado to E.S.E. is the point named Angel, eighteen leagues distant; +and from this point to the Monte de Plata there is a gulf, with the most +beautiful lands in the world, all high and fine lands which extend far +inland. Beyond there is a range of high mountains running east and west, +very grand and beautiful. At the foot of this mountain there is a very +good port,[220-2] with 14 fathoms in the entrance. The mountain is very +high and beautiful, and all the country is well peopled. The Admiral +believed there must be fine rivers and much gold. At a distance of 4 +leagues E.S.E. of Cabo del Angel there is a cape named Punta del +Hierro,[220-3] and on the same course, 4 more leagues, a point is reached +named Punta Seca.[220-4] Thence, 6 leagues further on, is Cabo +Redondo,[220-5] and further on Cabo Frances, where a large bay[220-6] is +formed, but there did not appear to be anchorage in it. A league further +on is Cabo del Buen Tiempo, and thence, a good league S.S.E., is Cabo +Tajado.[220-7] Thence, to the south, another cape was sighted at a +distance of about 15 leagues. To-day great progress was made, as wind and +tide were favorable. The Admiral did not venture to anchor for fear of +the rocks, so he was hove-to all night. + + +_Saturday, 12th of January_ + +Towards dawn the Admiral filled and shaped a course to the east with a +fresh wind, running 20 miles before daylight, and in two hours +afterwards 24 miles. Thence he saw land to the south,[221-1] and steered +towards it, distant 48 miles. During the night he must have run 28 miles +N.N.E., to keep the vessels out of danger. When he saw the land, he named +one cape that he saw Cabo de Padre y Hijo, because at the east point +there are two rocks, one larger than the other.[221-2] Afterwards, at two +leagues to the eastward, he saw a very fine bay between two grand +mountains. He saw that it was a very large port with a very good +approach; but, as it was very early in the morning, and as the greater +part of the time it was blowing from the east, and then they had a N.N.W. +breeze, he did not wish to delay any more. He continued his course to the +east as far as a very high and beautiful cape, all of scarped rock, to +which he gave the name of Cabo del Enamorado,[221-3] which was 32 miles +to the east of the port named Puerto Sacro.[221-4] On rounding the cape, +another finer and loftier point came in sight,[221-5] like Cape St. +Vincent in Portugal, 12 miles east of Cabo del Enamorado. As soon as he +was abreast of the Cabo del Enamorado, the Admiral saw that there was a +great bay[221-6] between this and the next point, three leagues across, +and in the middle of it a small island.[221-7] The depth is great at the +entrance close to the land. He anchored here in twelve fathoms, and sent +the boat on shore for water, and to see if intercourse could be opened +with the natives, but they all fled. He also anchored to ascertain +whether this was all one land with the island of Española, and to make +sure that this was a gulf and not a channel, forming another island. He +remained astonished at the great size of Española. + + +_Sunday, 13th of January_ + +The Admiral did not leave the port, because there was no land-breeze with +which to go out. He wished to shift to another better port, because this +was rather exposed. He also wanted to wait, in that haven, the +conjunction of the sun and moon, which would take place on the 17th of +this month, and the opposition of the moon with Jupiter and conjunction +with Mercury, the sun being in opposition to Jupiter, which is the cause +of high winds. He sent the boat on shore to a beautiful beach to obtain +yams for food. They found some men with bows and arrows, with whom they +stopped to speak, buying two bows and many arrows from them. They asked +one of them to come on board the caravel and see the Admiral; who says +that he was very wanting in reverence, more so than any native he had yet +seen.[222-1] His face was all stained with charcoal,[222-2] but in all +parts there is the custom of painting the body different colors. He wore +his hair very long, brought together and fastened behind, and put into a +small net of parrots' feathers. He was naked, like all the others. The +Admiral supposed that he belonged to the Caribs, who eat men,[222-3] and +that the gulf he had seen yesterday formed this part of the land into an +island by itself. The Admiral asked about the Caribs, and he pointed to +the east, near at hand, which means that he saw the Admiral yesterday +before he entered the bay. The Indian said there was much gold to the +east, pointing to the poop of the caravel, which was a good size, meaning +that there were pieces as large. He called gold _tuob_, and did not +understand _caona_, as they call it in the first part of the island that +was visited, nor _nozay_, the name in San Salvador and the other islands. +Copper or a base gold is called _tuob_ in Española.[223-1] Of the island +of Matinino this Indian said that it was peopled by women without +men,[223-2] and that in it there was much _tuob_, which is gold or +copper, and that it is more to the east of Carib.[223-3] He also spoke of +the island of Goanin,[223-4] where there was much _tuob_. The Admiral +says that he had received notices of these islands from many persons; +that in the other islands the natives were in great fear of the Caribs, +called by some of them Caniba, but in Española Carib. He thought they +must be an audacious race, for they go to all these islands and eat the +people they can capture. He understood a few words, and the Indians who +were on board comprehended more, there being a difference in the +languages owing to the great distance between the various islands. The +Admiral ordered that the Indian should be fed, and given pieces of green +and red cloth, and glass beads, which they like very much, and then sent +on shore. He was told to bring gold if he had any, and it was believed +that he had, from some small things he brought with him. When the boat +reached the shore there were fifty-five men behind the trees, naked, and +with very long hair, as the women wear it in Castile. Behind the head +they wore plumes of feathers of parrots and other birds, and each man +carried a bow. The Indian landed, and signed to the others to put down +their bows and arrows, and a piece of a staff, which is like...,[223-5] +very heavy, carried instead of a sword.[224-1] As soon as they came to +the boat the crew landed, and began to buy the bows and arrows and other +arms, in accordance with an order of the Admiral. Having sold two bows, +they did not want to give more, but began to attack the Spaniards, and to +take hold of them. They were running back to pick up their bows and +arrows where they had laid them aside, and took cords in their hands to +bind the boat's crew. Seeing them rushing down, and being prepared--for +the Admiral always warned them to be on their guard--the Spaniards +attacked the Indians, and gave one a slash with a knife in the buttocks, +wounding another in the breast with an arrow. Seeing that they could gain +little, although the Christians were only seven and they numbered over +fifty, they fled, so that none were left, throwing bows and arrows +away.[224-2] The Christians would have killed many, if the pilot, who was +in command, had not prevented them. The Spaniards presently returned to +the caravel with the boat. The Admiral regretted the affair for one +reason, and was pleased for another. They would have fear of the +Christians, and they were no doubt an ill-conditioned people, probably +Caribs, who eat men. But the Admiral felt alarm lest they should do some +harm to the 39 men left in the fortress and town of Navidad, in the event +of their coming here in their boat. Even if they are not Caribs, they are +a neighboring people, with similar habits, and fearless, unlike the other +inhabitants of the island, who are timid, and without arms. The Admiral +says all this, and adds that he would have liked to have captured some of +them. He says that they lighted many smoke signals, as is the custom in +this island of Española. + + +_Monday, 14th of January_ + +This evening the Admiral wished to find the houses of the Indians and to +capture some of them, believing them to be Caribs. For, owing to the +strong east and north-east winds and the heavy sea, he had remained +during the day. Many Indians were seen on shore. The Admiral, therefore, +ordered the boat to be sent on shore, with the crew well armed. Presently +the Indians came to the stern of the boat, including the man who had been +on board the day before, and had received presents from the Admiral. With +him there came a king, who had given to the said Indian some beads in +token of safety and peace for the boat's crew. This king, with three of +his followers, went on board the boat and came to the caravel. The +Admiral ordered them to be given biscuit and treacle to eat, and gave the +chief a red cap, some beads, and a piece of red cloth. The others were +also given pieces of cloth. The chief said that next day he would bring a +mask made of gold, affirming that there was much here, and in +Carib[225-1] and Matinino.[225-2] They afterwards went on shore well +satisfied. + +The Admiral here says that the caravels were making much water, which +entered by the keel; and he complains of the caulkers at Palos, who +caulked the vessels very badly, and ran away when they saw that the +Admiral had detected the badness of their work, and intended to oblige +them to repair the defect. But, notwithstanding that the caravels were +making much water, he trusted in the favor and mercy of our Lord, for his +high Majesty well knew how much controversy there was before the +expedition could be despatched from Castile, that no one was in the +Admiral's favor save Him alone who knew his heart, and after God came +your Highnesses, while all others were against him without any reason. He +further says: "And this has been the cause that the royal crown of your +Highnesses has not a hundred millions of revenue more than after I +entered your service, which is seven years ago in this very month, the +20th of January.[226-1] The increase will take place from now onwards. +For the almighty God will remedy all things,"[226-2] These are his words. + + +_Tuesday, 15th of January_ + +The Admiral now wished to depart, for there was nothing to be gained by +further delay, after these occurrences and the tumult with the Indians. +To-day he had heard that all the gold was in the district of the town of +Navidad, belonging to their Highnesses; and that in the island of +Carib[226-3] there was much copper, as well as in Matinino. The +intercourse at Carib would, however, be difficult, because the natives +are said to eat human flesh. Their island would be in sight from thence, +and the Admiral determined to go there, as it was on the route, and +thence to Matinino, which was said to be entirely peopled by women, +without men.[226-4] He would thus see both islands, and might take some +of the natives. The Admiral sent the boat on shore, but the king of that +district had not come, for his village was distant. He, however, sent his +crown of gold, as he had promised; and many other natives came with +cotton, and bread made from yams, all with their bows and arrows. After +the bartering was finished, four youths came to the caravel. They +appeared to the Admiral to give such a clear account of the islands to +the eastward, on the same route as the Admiral would have to take, that +he determined to take them to Castile with him. He says that they had no +iron nor other metals; at least none was seen, but it was impossible to +know much of the land in so short a time, owing to the difficulty with +the language, which the Admiral could not understand except by guessing, +nor could they know what was said to them, in such a few days. The bows +of these people are as large as those of France or England. The arrows +are similar to the darts of the natives who have been met with +previously, which are made of young canes, which grow very straight, and +a yard and a half or two yards in length. They point them with a piece of +sharp wood, a span and a half long, and at the end some of them fix a +fish's tooth, but most of them anoint it with an herb.[227-1] They do not +shoot as in other parts, but in a certain way which cannot do much harm. +Here they have a great deal of fine and long cotton, and plenty of +mastic. The bows appeared to be of yew, and there is gold and copper. +There is also plenty of _aji_,[227-2] which is their pepper, which is +more valuable than pepper, and all the people eat nothing else, it being +very wholesome. Fifty caravels might be annually loaded with it from +Española. The Admiral says that he found a great deal of weed in this +bay, the same as was met with at sea when he came on this discovery. He +therefore supposed that there were islands to the eastward, in the +direction of the position where he began to meet with it; for he +considers it certain that this weed has its origin in shallow water near +the land, and, if this is the case, these Indies must be very near the +Canary Islands. For this reason he thought the distance must be less than +400 leagues. + + +_Wednesday, 16th of January_ + +They got under way three hours before daylight, and left the gulf, +which was named Golfo de las Flechas,[228-1] with the land-breeze. +Afterwards there was a west wind, which was fair to go to the island of +Carib on an E.N.E. course. This was where the people live of whom all +the natives of the other islands are so frightened, because they roam +over the sea in canoes without number, and eat the men they can capture. +The Admiral steered the course indicated by one of the four Indians he +took yesterday in the Puerto de las Flechas. After having sailed about +64 miles, the Indians made signs that the island was to the S.E.[228-2] +The Admiral ordered the sails to be trimmed for that course, but, after +having proceeded on it for two leagues, the wind freshened from a +quarter which was very favorable for the voyage to Spain. The Admiral +had noticed that the crew were downhearted when he deviated from the +direct route home, reflecting that both caravels were leaking badly, and +that there was no help but in God. He therefore gave up the course +leading to the islands, and shaped a direct course for Spain E.N.E. He +sailed on this course, making 48 miles, which is 12 leagues, by sunset. +The Indians said that by that route they would fall in with the island +of Matinino, peopled entirely by women without men, and the Admiral +wanted very much to take five or six of them to the Sovereigns. But he +doubted whether the Indians understood the route well, and he could not +afford to delay, by reason of the leaky condition of the caravels. He, +however, believed the story and that, at certain seasons, men came to +them from the island of Carib, distant ten or twelve leagues. If males +were born, they were sent to the island of the men; and if females, they +remained with their mothers.[229-1] The Admiral says that these two +islands cannot have been more than 15 or 20 leagues to the S.E. from +where he altered course, the Indians not understanding how to point out +the direction. After losing sight of the cape, which was named San +Theramo,[229-2] which was left 16 leagues to the west, they went for 12 +leagues E.N.E. The weather was very fine. + + +_Thursday, 17th of January_ + +The wind went down at sunset yesterday, the caravels having sailed 14 +glasses, each a little less than half-an-hour, at 4 miles an hour, making +28 miles. Afterwards the wind freshened, and they ran all that watch, +which was 10 glasses. Then another six until sunrise at 8 miles an hour, +thus making altogether 84 miles, equal to 21 leagues, to the E.N.E., and +until sunset 44 miles, or 11 leagues, to the east. Here a booby[229-3] +came to the caravel, and afterwards another. The Admiral saw a great deal +of gulf-weed. + + +_Friday, 18th of January_ + +During the night they steered E.S.E., with little wind, for 40 miles, +equal to 10 leagues, and then 30 miles, or 7-1/2 leagues, until sunrise. +All day they proceeded with little wind to E.N.E. and N.E. by E., more or +less, her head being sometimes north and at others N.N.E., and, counting +one with the other they made 60 miles, or 15 leagues. There was little +weed, but yesterday and to-day the sea appeared to be full of tunnies. +The Admiral believed that from there they must go to the tunny-fisheries +of the Duke, of Conil and Cadiz.[230-1] He also thought they were near +some islands, because a frigate-bird[230-2] flew round the caravel, and +afterwards went away to the S.S.E. He said that to the S.E. of the island +of Española were the islands of Carib, Matinino, and many others. + + +_Saturday, 19th of January_ + +During the night they made good 56 miles N.N.E., and 64 N.E. by N. After +sunrise they steered N.E. with the wind fresh from S.W., and afterwards +W.S.W. 84 miles, equal to 21 leagues. The sea was again full of small +tunnies. There were boobies, frigate-birds, and terns.[230-3] + + +_Sunday, 20th of January_ + +It was calm during the night, with occasional slants of wind, and they +only made 20 miles to the N.E. After sunrise they went 11 miles S.E., and +then 36 miles N.N.E., equal to 9 leagues. They saw an immense quantity of +small tunnies, the air very soft and pleasant, like Seville in April or +May, and the sea, for which God be given many thanks, always very +smooth. Frigate-birds, sandpipers,[231-1] and other birds were seen. + + +_Monday, 21st of January_ + +Yesterday, before sunset, they steered N.E. b. E., with the wind east, at +the rate of 8 miles an hour until midnight, equal to 56 miles. Afterwards +they steered N.N.E. 8 miles an hour, so that they made 104 miles, or 26 +leagues, during the night N.E. by N. After sunrise they steered N.N.E. +with the same wind, which at times veered to N.E., and they made good 88 +miles in the eleven hours of daylight, or 21 leagues: except one that was +lost by delay caused by closing with the _Pinta_ to communicate. The air +was colder, and it seemed to get colder as they went further north, and +also that the nights grew longer owing to the narrowing of the sphere. +Many _boatswain-birds_ and terns[231-2] were seen, as well as other birds +but not so many fish, perhaps owing to the water being colder. Much weed +was seen. + + +_Tuesday, 22nd of January_ + +Yesterday, after sunset, they steered N.N.E. with an east wind. They made +8 miles an hour during five glasses, and three before the watch began, +making eight glasses, equal to 72 miles, or 18 leagues. Afterwards they +went N.E. by N. for six glasses, which would be another 18 miles. Then, +during four glasses of the second watch N.E. at six miles an hour, or +three leagues. From that time to sunset, for eleven glasses, E.N.E. at 6 +leagues an hour,[231-3] equal to seven leagues. Then E.N.E. until 11 +o'clock, 32 miles. Then the wind fell, and they made no more during that +day. The Indians swam about. They saw boatswain-birds and much weed. + + +_Wednesday, 23rd of January_ + +To-night the wind was very changeable, but, making the allowances applied +by good sailors, they made 84 miles or 21 leagues, N.E. by N. Many times +the caravel _Niña_ had to wait for the _Pinta_, because she sailed badly +when on a bowline the mizzen being of little use owing to the weakness of +the mast. He says that if her captain, that is, Martin Alonso Pinzon, had +taken the precaution to provide her with a good mast in the Indies, where +there are so many and such excellent spars, instead of deserting his +commander from motives of avarice, he would have done better. They saw +many boatswain-birds and much weed. The heavens have been clouded over +during these last days, but there has been no rain. The sea has been as +smooth as a river, for which many thanks be given to God. After sunrise +they went free, and made 30 miles, or 7-1/2 leagues N.E. During the rest +of the day E.N.E. another 30 miles. + + +_Thursday, 24th of January_ + +They made 44 miles, or 11 leagues, during the night, allowing for many +changes in the wind, which was generally N.E. After sunrise until sunset +E.N.E. 14 leagues. + + +_Friday, 25th of January_ + +They steered during part of the night E.N.E. for 13 glasses, making 9-1/2 +leagues. Then N.N.E. 6 miles. The wind fell, and during the day they only +made 28 miles E.N.E., or 7 leagues. The sailors killed a tunny and a very +large shark, which was very welcome, as they now had nothing but bread +and wine, and some yams from the Indies. + + +_Saturday, 26th of January_ + +This night they made 56 miles, or 14 leagues, E.S.E. After sunrise they +steered E.S.E., and sometimes S.E., making 40 miles up to 11 o'clock. +Afterwards they went on another tack, and then on a bowline, 24 miles, or +6 leagues, to the north, until night. + + +_Sunday, 27th of January_ + +Yesterday, after sunset, they steered N.E. and N.E. by N. at the rate of +five miles an hour, which in thirteen hours would be 65 miles, or 16-1/2 +leagues. After sunrise they steered N.E. 24 miles, or 6 leagues, until +noon, and from that time until sunset 3 leagues E.N.E. + + +_Monday, 28th of January_ + +All night they steered E.N.E. 36 miles, or 9 leagues. After sunrise until +sunset E.N.E. 20 miles, or 5 leagues. The weather was temperate and +pleasant. They saw boatswain-birds, sandpipers,[233-1] and much weed. + + +_Tuesday, 29th of January_ + +They steered E.N.E. 39 miles, or 9-1/2 leagues, and during the whole day +8 leagues. The air was very pleasant, like April in Castile, the sea +smooth, and fish they call _dorados_[233-2] came on board. + + +_Wednesday, 30th of January_ + +All this night they made 6 leagues E.N.E., and in the day S.E. by S. +13-1/2 leagues. Boatswain-birds, much weed, and many tunnies. + + +_Thursday, 31st of January_ + +This night they steered N.E. by N. 30 miles, and afterwards N.E. 35 +miles, or 16 leagues. From sunrise to night E.N.E. 13-1/2 leagues. They +saw boatswain-birds and terns.[1] + + +_Friday, 1st of February_ + +They made 16-1/2 leagues E.N.E. during the night, and went on the same +course during the day 29-1/4 leagues. The sea very smooth, thanks be to +God. + + +_Saturday, 2nd of February_ + +They made 40 miles, or 10 leagues, E.N.E. this night. In the daytime, +with the same wind aft, they went 7 miles an hour, so that in eleven +hours they had gone 77 miles, or 9-1/4 leagues. The sea was very smooth, +thanks be to God, and the air very soft. They saw the sea so covered with +weed that, if they had not known about it before, they would have been +fearful of sunken rocks. They saw terns.[234-1] + + +_Sunday, 3rd of February_ + +This night, the wind being aft and the sea very smooth, thanks be to God, +they made 29 leagues. The North Star appeared very high, as it does off +Cape St. Vincent. The Admiral was unable to take the altitude, either +with the astrolabe or with the quadrant, because the rolling caused by +the waves prevented it. That day he steered his course E.N.E., going 10 +miles an hour, so that in eleven hours he made 27 leagues. + + +_Monday, 4th of February_ + +During the night the course was N.E. by E., going twelve miles an hour +part of the time, and the rest ten miles. Thus they made 130 miles, or 32 +leagues and a half. The sky was very threatening and rainy, and it was +rather cold, by which they knew that they had not yet reached the Azores. +After sunrise the course was altered to east. During the whole day they +made 77 miles, or 19-1/4 leagues. + + +_Tuesday, 5th of February_ + +This night they steered east, and made 55 miles, or 13-1/2 leagues. In +the day they were going ten miles an hour, and in eleven hours made 110 +miles, or 27-1/2 leagues. They saw sandpipers, and some small sticks, a +sign that they were near land. + + +_Wednesday, 6th of February_ + +They steered east during the night, going at the rate of eleven miles an +hour, so that in the thirteen hours of the night they made 143 miles, or +35-1/4 leagues. They saw many birds. In the day they went 14 miles an +hour, and made 154 miles, or 38-1/2 leagues; so that, including night and +day, they made 74 leagues, more or less. Vicente Anes[235-1] said that +they had left the island of Flores to the north and Madeira to the east. +Roldan[235-2] said that the island of Fayal, or San Gregorio, was to the +N.N.E. and Puerto Santo to east. There was much weed. + + +_Thursday, 7th of February_ + +This night they steered east, going ten miles an hour, so that in +thirteen hours they made 130 miles, or 32-1/2 leagues. In the daytime the +rate was eight miles an hour, in eleven hours 88 miles, or 22 leagues. +This morning the Admiral found himself 65 leagues south of the island of +Flores, and the pilot Pedro Alonso,[236-1] being further north, according +to his reckoning, passed between Terceira and Santa Maria to the east, +passing to windward of the island of Madeira, twelve leagues further +north. The sailors saw a new kind of weed, of which there is plenty in +the islands of the Azores. + + +_Friday, 8th of February_ + +They went three miles an hour to the eastward for some time during the +night, and afterwards E.S.E., going twelve miles an hour. From sunrise to +noon they made 27 miles, and the same distance from noon till sunset, +equal to 13 leagues S.S.E. + + +_Saturday, 9th of February_ + +For part of this night they went 3 leagues S.S.E., and afterwards S. by +E., then N.E. 5 leagues until ten o'clock in the forenoon, then 9 leagues +east until dark. + + +_Sunday, 10th of February_ + +From sunset they steered east all night, making 130 miles, or 32-1/2 +leagues. During the day they went at the rate of nine miles an hour, +making 99 miles, or 24-1/2 leagues, in eleven hours. + +In the caravel of the Admiral, Vicente Yañez and the two pilots, Sancho +Ruiz and Pedro Alonso Niño, and Roldan, charted or plotted the route. +They all made the position a good deal beyond the islands of the Azores +to the east, and, navigating to the north, none of them touched Santa +Maria, which is the last of all the Azores. They made the position five +leagues beyond it, and were in the vicinity of the islands of Madeira and +Puerto Santo. But the Admiral was very different from them in his +reckoning, finding the position very much in rear of theirs. This night +he found the island of Flores to the north, and to the east he made the +direction to be towards Nafe in Africa, passing to leeward of the island +of Madeira to the north ... leagues.[237-1] So that the pilots were +nearer to Castile than the Admiral by 150 leagues. The Admiral says that, +with the grace of God, when they reach the land they will find out whose +reckoning was most correct. He also says that he went 263 leagues from +the island of Hierro to the place where he first saw the gulf-weed. + + +_Monday, 11th of February_ + +This night they went twelve miles an hour on their course, and during the +day they ran 16-1/2 leagues. They saw many birds, from which they judged +that land was near. + + +_Tuesday, 12th of February_ + +They went six miles an hour on an east course during the night, +altogether 73 miles, or 18-1/4 leagues. At this time they began to +encounter bad weather with a heavy sea; and, if the caravel had not been +very well managed, she must have been lost. During the day they made 11 +or 12 leagues with much difficulty and danger. + + +_Wednesday, 13th of February_ + +From sunset until daylight there was great trouble with the wind, and the +high and tempestuous sea. There was lightning three times to the +N.N.E.--a sign of a great storm coming either from that quarter or its +opposite. They were lying-to most of the night, afterwards showing a +little sail, and made 52 miles, which is 13 leagues. In the day the wind +moderated a little, but it soon increased again. The sea was terrific, +the waves crossing each other, and straining the vessels. They made 55 +miles more, equal to 13-1/2 leagues. + + +_Thursday, 14th of February_ + +This night the wind increased, and the waves were terrible, rising +against each other, and so shaking and straining the vessel that she +could make no headway, and was in danger of being stove in. They carried +the mainsail very closely reefed, so as just to give her steerage-way, +and proceeded thus for three hours, making 20 miles. Meanwhile, the wind +and sea increased, and, seeing the great danger, the Admiral began to run +before it, there being nothing else to be done. The caravel _Pinta_ began +to run before the wind at the same time, and Martin Alonso ran her out of +sight,[238-1] although the Admiral kept showing lanterns all night, and +the other answered. It would seem that she could do no more, owing to the +force of the tempest, and she was taken far from the route of the +Admiral. He steered that night E.N.E., and made 54 miles, equal to 13 +leagues. At sunrise the wind blew still harder, and the cross sea was +terrific. They continued to show the closely-reefed mainsail, to enable +her to rise from between the waves, or she would otherwise have been +swamped. An E.N.E. course was steered, and afterwards N.E. by E. for six +hours, making 7-1/2 leagues. The Admiral ordered that a pilgrimage should +be made to Our Lady of Guadalupe,[239-1] carrying a candle of 6 lbs. of +weight in wax, and that all the crew should take an oath that the +pilgrimage should be made by the man on whom the lot fell. As many +chick-peas were got as there were persons on board, and on one a cross +was cut with a knife. They were then put into a cap and shaken up. The +first who put in his hand was the Admiral, and he drew out the chick-pea +with a cross, so the lot fell on him; and he was bound to go on the +pilgrimage and fulfil the vow. Another lot was drawn, to go on pilgrimage +to Our Lady of Loreto, which is in the march of Ancona, in the Papal +territory, a house where Our Lady works many and great miracles.[239-2] +The lot fell on a sailor of the port of Santa Maria, named Pedro de +Villa, and the Admiral promised to pay his travelling expenses. Another +pilgrimage was agreed upon, to watch for one night in Santa Clara at +Moguer,[239-3] and have a mass said, for which they again used the +chick-peas, including the one with a cross. The lot again fell on the +Admiral. After this the Admiral and all the crew made a vow that, on +arriving at the first land, they would all go in procession, in their +shirts, to say their prayers in a church dedicated to Our Lady. + +Besides these general vows made in common, each sailor made a special +vow; for no one expected to escape, holding themselves for lost, owing to +the fearful weather from which they were suffering. The want of ballast +increased the danger of the ship, which had become light, owing to the +consumption of the provisions and water. On account of the favorable +weather enjoyed among the islands, the Admiral had omitted to make +provision for this need, thinking that ballast might be taken on board at +the island inhabited by women, which he had intended to visit. The only +thing to do was to fill the barrels that had contained wine or fresh +water with water from the sea, and this supplied a remedy. + +Here the Admiral writes of the causes which made him fear that he would +perish, and of others that gave him hope that God would work his +salvation, in order that such news as he was bringing to the Sovereigns +might not be lost. It seemed to him that the strong desire he felt to +bring such great news, and to show that all he had said and offered to +discover had turned out true, suggested the fear that he would not be +able to do so, and that each stinging insect would be able to thwart and +impede the work. He attributes this fear to his little faith, and to his +want of confidence in Divine Providence. + +He was comforted, on the other hand, by the mercies of God in having +vouchsafed him such a victory, in the discoveries he had made, and in +that God had complied with all his desires in Castile, after much +adversity and many misfortunes. As he had before put all his trust in +God, who had heard him and granted all he sought, he ought now to believe +that God would permit the completion of what had been begun, and ordain +that he should be saved. Especially as he had freed him on the voyage +out, when he had still greater reason to fear, from the trouble caused by +the sailors and people of his company, who all with one voice declared +their intention to return, and protested that they would rise against +him.[240-1] But the eternal God gave him force and valor to withstand +them all, and in many other marvellous ways had God shown his will in +this voyage besides those known to their Highnesses. Thus he ought not to +fear the present tempest, though his weakness and anxiety prevent him +from giving tranquillity to his mind. He says further that it gave him +great sorrow to think of the two sons he left at their studies in +Cordova, who would be left orphans, without father or mother,[241-1] in +a strange land; while the Sovereigns would not know of the services he +had performed in this voyage, nor would they receive the prosperous news +which would move them to help the orphans. To remedy this, and that their +Highnesses might know how our Lord had granted a victory in all that +could be desired respecting the Indies,[241-2] and that they might +understand that there were no storms in those parts, which may be known +by the herbs and trees which grow even within the sea;[241-3] also that +the Sovereigns might still have information, even if he perished in the +storm, he took a parchment and wrote on it as good an account as he could +of all he had discovered, entreating any one who might pick it up to +deliver it to the Sovereigns. He rolled this parchment up in waxed cloth, +fastened it very securely, ordered a large wooden barrel to be brought, +and put it inside, so that no one else knew what it was. They thought +that it was some act of devotion, and so he ordered the barrel to be +thrown into the sea. Afterwards, in the showers and squalls, the wind +veered to the west, and they went before it, only with the foresail, in a +very confused sea, for five hours. They made 2-1/2 leagues N.E. They had +taken in the reefed mainsail, for fear some wave of the sea should carry +all away.[241-4] + + +_Friday, 15th of February_ + +Last night, after sunset, the sky began to clear toward the west, showing +that the wind was inclined to come from that quarter. The admiral added +the bonnet[243-1] to the mainsail. The sea was still very high, although +it had gone down slightly. They steered E.N.E., and went four miles an +hour, which made 13 leagues during the eleven hours of the night. After +sunrise they sighted land. It appeared from the bows to bear E.N.E. Some +said it was the island of Madeira, others that it was the rock of Cintra, +in Portugal, near Lisbon. Presently the wind headed to E.N.E., and a +heavy sea came from the west, the caravel being 5 leagues from the land. +The Admiral found by his reckoning that he was close to the Azores, and +believed that this was one of them. The pilots and sailors thought it was +the land of Castile.[243-2] + + +_Saturday, 16th of February_ + +All that night the Admiral was standing off and on to keep clear of the +land, which they now knew to be an island, sometimes standing N.E., at +others N.N.E., until sunrise, when they tacked to the south to reach the +island, which was now concealed by a great mist. Another island was in +sight from the poop, at a distance of eight leagues. Afterwards, from +sunrise until dark, they were tacking to reach the land against a strong +wind and head-sea. At the time of repeating the _Salve_, which is just +before dark, some of the men saw a light to leeward, and it seemed that +it must be on the island they first saw yesterday. All night they were +beating to windward, and going as near as they could, so as to see some +way to the island at sunrise. That night the Admiral got a little rest, +for he had not slept nor been able to sleep since Wednesday, and he had +lost the use of his legs from long exposure to the wet and cold. At +sunrise[244-1] he steered S.S.W., and reached the island at night, but +could not make out what island it was, owing to the thick weather. + + +_Monday, 18th of February_ + +Yesterday, after sunset, the Admiral was sailing round the island, to see +where he could anchor and open communications. He let go one anchor, which +he presently lost, and then stood off and on all night. After sunrise he +again reached the north side of the island, where he anchored, and sent +the boat on shore. They had speech with the people, and found that it was +the island of Santa Maria, one of the Azores. They pointed out the +port[244-2] to which the caravel should go. They said that they had never +seen such stormy weather as there had been for the last fifteen days, and +they wondered how the caravel could have escaped. They gave many thanks +to God, and showed great joy at the news that the Admiral had discovered +the Indies. The Admiral says that his navigation had been very certain, +and that he had laid his route down on the chart. Many thanks were due to +our Lord, although there had been some delay. But he was sure that he was +in the region of the Azores, and that this was one of them. He pretended +to have gone over more ground, to mislead the pilots and mariners who +pricked off the charts, in order that he might remain master of that +route to the Indies, as, in fact, he did. For none of the others kept an +accurate reckoning, so that no one but himself could be sure of the route +to the Indies. + + +_Tuesday, 19th of February_ + +After sunset three natives of the island came to the beach and hailed. +The Admiral sent the boat, which returned with fowls and fresh bread. It +was carnival time, and they brought other things which were sent by the +captain of the island, named Juan de Castañeda, saying that he knew the +Admiral very well, and that he did not come to see him because it was +night but that at dawn he would come with more refreshments, bringing +with him three men of the boat's crew, whom he did not send back owing to +the great pleasure he derived from hearing their account of the voyage. +The Admiral ordered much respect to be shown to the messengers, and that +they should be given beds to sleep in that night, because it was late, +and the town was far off. As on the previous Thursday, when they were in +the midst of the storm, they had made a vow to go in procession to a +church of Our Lady as soon as they came to land, the Admiral arranged +that half the crew should go to comply with their obligation to a small +chapel, like a hermitage, near the shore; and that he would himself go +afterwards with the rest. Believing that it was a peaceful land, and +confiding in the offers of the captain of the island, and in the peace +that existed between Spain and Portugal, he asked the three men to go to +the town and arrange for a priest to come and say mass. The half of the +crew then went in their shirts, in compliance with their vow. While they +were at their prayers, all the people of the town, horse and foot, with +the captain at their head, came and took them all prisoners. The Admiral, +suspecting nothing, was waiting for the boat to take him and the rest to +accomplish the vow. At 11 o'clock, seeing that they did not come back, he +feared that they had been detained, or that the boat had been swamped, +all the island being surrounded by high rocks. He could not see what had +taken place, because the hermitage was round a point. He got up the +anchor, and made sail until he was in full view of the hermitage, and he +saw many of the horsemen dismount and get into the boat with arms. They +came to the caravel to seize the Admiral. The captain stood up in the +boat, and asked for an assurance of safety from the Admiral, who replied +that he granted it; but, what outrage was this, that he saw none of his +people in the boat? The Admiral added that they might come on board, and +that he would do all that might be proper. The Admiral tried, with fair +words, to get hold of this captain, that he might recover his own people, +not considering that he broke faith by giving him security, because he +had offered peace and security, and had then broken his word. The +captain, as he came with an evil intention, would not come on board. +Seeing that he did not come alongside, the Admiral asked that he might be +told the reason for the detention of his men, an act which would +displease the King of Portugal, because the Portuguese received much +honor in the territories of the King of Castile, and were as safe as if +they were in Lisbon. He further said that the Sovereigns had given him +letters of recommendation to all the Lords and Princes of the world, +which he would show the captain if he would come on board; that he was +the Admiral of the Ocean Sea, and Viceroy of the Indies, which belonged +to their Highnesses,[246-1] and that he would show the commissions signed +with their signatures, and attested by their seals, which he held up from +a distance. He added that his Sovereigns were in friendship and amity +with the King of Portugal, and had ordered that all honor should be shown +to ships that came from Portugal. Further, that if the captain did not +surrender his people, he would still go on to Castile, as he had quite +sufficient to navigate as far as Seville, in which case the captain and +his followers would be severely punished for their offence. Then the +captain and those with him replied that they did not know the King and +Queen of Castile there, nor their letters, nor were they afraid of them, +and they would give the Admiral to understand that this was Portugal, +almost menacing him. On hearing this the Admiral was much moved, thinking +that some cause of disagreement might have arisen between the two +kingdoms during his absence, yet he could not endure that they should not +be answered reasonably. Afterwards he turned to the captain, and said +that he should go to the port with the caravel, and that all that had +been done would be reported to the King his Lord. The Admiral made those +who were in the caravel bear witness to what he said, calling to the +captain and all the others, and promising that he would not leave the +caravel until a hundred Portuguese had been taken to Castile, and all +that island had been laid waste. He then returned to anchor in the port +where he was first, the wind being very unfavorable for doing anything +else. + + +_Wednesday, 20th of February_ + +The Admiral ordered the ship to be repaired, and the casks to be filled +alongside for ballast. This was a very bad port, and he feared he might +have to cut the cables. This was so, and he made sail for the island of +San Miguel; but there is no good port in any of the Azores for the +weather they then experienced, and there was no other remedy but to go to +sea. + + +_Thursday, 21st of February_ + +Yesterday the Admiral left that island of Santa Maria for that of San +Miguel, to see if a port could be found to shelter his vessel from the +bad weather. There was much wind and a high sea, and he was sailing until +night without being able to see either one land or the other, owing to +the thick weather caused by wind and sea. The Admiral says he was in much +anxiety, because he only had three sailors who knew their business, the +rest knowing nothing of seamanship.[247-1] He was lying-to all that +night, in great danger and trouble. Our Lord showed him mercy in that the +waves came in one direction, for if there had been a cross sea they would +have suffered much more. After sunrise the island of San Miguel was not +in sight, so the Admiral determined to return to Santa Maria, to see if +he could recover his people and boat, and the anchors and cables he had +left there. + +The Admiral says that he was astonished at the bad weather he encountered +in the region of these islands. In the Indies he had navigated throughout +the winter without the necessity for anchoring, and always had fine +weather, never having seen the sea for a single hour in such a state that +it could not be navigated easily. But among these islands he had suffered +from such terrible storms. The same had happened in going out as far as +the Canary Islands, but as soon as they were passed there was always fine +weather, both in sea and air. In concluding these remarks, he observes +that the sacred theologians and wise men[248-1] said well when they +placed the terrestrial paradise in the Far East, because it is a most +temperate region. Hence these lands that he had now discovered must, he +says, be in the extreme East. + + +_Friday, 22nd of February_ + +Yesterday the Admiral anchored off Santa Maria, in the place or port +where he had first anchored. Presently a man came down to some rocks at +the edge of the beach, signalling that they were not to go away. Soon +afterwards the boat came with five sailors, two priests, and a scrivener. +They asked for safety, and when it was granted by the Admiral, they came +on board, and as it was night they slept on board, the Admiral showing +them all the civility he could. In the morning they asked to be shown the +authority of the Sovereigns of Castile, by which the voyage had been +made. The Admiral felt that they did this to give some color of right to +what they had done, and to show that they had right on their side. As +they were unable to secure the person of the Admiral, whom they intended +to get into their power when they came with the boat armed, they now +feared that their game might not turn out so well, thinking, with some +fear, of what the Admiral had threatened, and which he proposed to put +into execution. In order to get his people released, the Admiral +displayed the general letter of the Sovereigns to all Princes and Lords, +and other documents, and having given them of what he had, the Portuguese +went on shore satisfied, and presently released all the crew and the +boat. The Admiral heard from them that if he had been captured also, they +never would have been released, for the captain said that those were the +orders of the King his Lord. + + +_Saturday, 23rd of February_ + +Yesterday the weather began to improve, and the Admiral got under way to +seek a better anchorage, where he could take in wood and stones for +ballast; but he did not find one until the hour of compline.[249-1] + + +_Sunday, 24th of February_ + +He anchored yesterday in the afternoon, to take in wood and stones, but +the sea was so rough that they could not land from the boat, and during +the first watch it came on to blow from the west and S.W. He ordered sail +to be made, owing to the great danger there is off these islands in being +at anchor with a southerly gale, and as the wind was S.W. it would go +round to south. As it was a good wind for Castile, he gave up his +intention of taking in wood and stones, and shaped an easterly course +until sunset, going seven miles an hour for six hours and a half, equal +to 45-1/2 miles. After sunset he made six miles an hour, or 66 miles in +eleven hours, altogether 111 miles, equal to 28 leagues. + + +_Monday, 25th of February_ + +Yesterday, after sunset, the caravel went at the rate of five miles an +hour on an easterly course, and in the eleven hours of the night she +made 65 miles, equal to 16-1/4 leagues. From sunrise to sunset they made +another 16-1/2 leagues with a smooth sea, thanks be to God. A very large +bird, like an eagle, came to the caravel. + + +_Tuesday, 26th of February_ + +Yesterday night the caravel steered her course in a smooth sea, thanks be +to God. Most of the time she was going eight miles an hour, and made a +hundred miles, equal to 25 leagues. After sunrise there was little wind +and some rain-showers. They made about 8 leagues E.N.E. + + +_Wednesday, 27th of February_ + +During the night and day she was off her course, owing to contrary winds +and a heavy sea. She was found to be 125 leagues from Cape St. Vincent, +and 80 from the island of Madeira, 106 from Santa Maria. It was very +troublesome to have such bad weather just when they were at the very door +of their home. + + +_Thursday, 28th of February_ + +The same weather during the night, with the wind from south and S.E., +sometimes shifting to N.E. and E.N.E., and it was the same all day. + + +_Friday, 1st of March_ + +To-night the course was E.N.E., and they made twelve leagues. During the +day, 23-1/2 leagues on the same course. + + +_Saturday, 2nd of March_ + +The course was E.N.E., and distance made good 28 leagues during the +night, and 20 in the day. + + +_Sunday, 3rd of March_ + +After sunset the course was east; but a squall came down, split all the +sails, and the vessel was in great danger; but God was pleased to deliver +them. They drew lots for sending a pilgrim in a shirt to Santa Maria de +la Cinta at Huelva, and the lot fell on the Admiral. The whole crew also +made a vow to fast on bread and water during the first Saturday after +their arrival in port. They had made 60 miles before the sails were +split. Afterwards they ran under bare poles, owing to the force of the +gale and the heavy sea. They saw signs of the neighborhood of land, +finding themselves near Lisbon. + + +_Monday, 4th of March_ + +During the night they were exposed to a terrible storm, expecting to be +overwhelmed by the cross-seas, while the wind seemed to raise the caravel +into the air, and there was rain and lightning in several directions. The +Admiral prayed to our Lord to preserve them, and in the first watch it +pleased our Lord to show land, which was reported by the sailors. As it +was advisable not to reach it before it was known whether there was any +port to which he could run for shelter, the Admiral set the mainsail, as +there was no other course but to proceed, though in great danger. Thus +God preserved them until daylight, though all the time they were in +infinite fear and trouble. When it was light, the Admiral knew the land, +which was the rock of Cintra, near the river of Lisbon, and he resolved +to run in because there was nothing else to be done. So terrible was the +storm, that in the village of Cascaes, at the mouth of the river, the +people were praying for the little vessel all that morning. After they +were inside, the people came off, looking upon their escape as a miracle. +At the third hour they passed Rastelo, within the river of Lisbon, where +they were told that such a winter, with so many storms, had never before +been known, and that 25 ships had been lost in Flanders, while others +had been wind-bound in the river for four months. Presently the Admiral +wrote to the king of Portugal, who was then at a distance of nine +leagues, to state that the Sovereigns of Castile had ordered him to enter +the ports of his Highness, and ask for what he required for payment, and +requesting that the king would give permission for the caravel to come to +Lisbon, because some ruffians hearing that he had much gold on board, +might attempt a robbery in an unfrequented port, knowing that they did +not come from Guinea, but from the Indies.[252-1] + + +_Tuesday, 5th of March_ + +To-day the great ship of the King of Portugal was also at anchor off +Rastelo, with the best provision of artillery and arms that the Admiral +had ever seen. The master of her, named Bartolomé Diaz, of Lisbon, came +in an armed boat to the caravel, and ordered the Admiral to get into the +boat, to go and give an account of himself to the agents of the king and +to the captain of that ship. The Admiral replied that he was the Admiral +of the Sovereigns of Castile, and that he would not give an account to +any such persons, nor would he leave the ship except by force, as he had +not the power to resist. The master replied that he must then send the +master of the caravel. The Admiral answered that neither the master nor +any other person should go except by force, for if he allowed anyone to +go, it would be as if he went himself; and that such was the custom of +the Admirals of the Sovereigns of Castile, rather to die than to submit, +or to let any of their people submit. The master then moderated his tone, +and told the Admiral that if that was his determination he might do as he +pleased. He, however, requested that he might be shown the letters of the +Kings of Castile, if they were on board. The Admiral readily showed them, +and the master returned to the ship and reported what had happened to +the captain, named Alvaro Dama. That officer, making great festival with +trumpets and drums, came to the caravel to visit the Admiral, and offered +to do all that he might require.[253-1] + + +_Wednesday, 6th of March_ + +As soon as it was known that the Admiral came from the Indies, it was +wonderful how many people came from Lisbon to see him and the Indians, +giving thanks to our Lord, and saying that the heavenly Majesty had given +all this to the Sovereigns of Castile as a reward for their faith and +their great desire to serve God. + + +_Thursday, 7th of March_ + +To-day an immense number of people came to the caravel, including many +knights, and amongst them the agents of the king, and all gave infinite +thanks to our Lord for so wide an increase of Christianity granted by our +Lord to the Sovereigns of Castile; and they said that they received it +because their Highnesses had worked and labored for the increase of the +religion of Christ. + + +_Friday, 8th of March_ + +To-day the Admiral received a letter from the king of Portugal,[253-2] +brought by Don Martin de Noroña, asking him to visit him where he was, +as the weather was not suitable for the departure of the caravel. He +complied, to prevent suspicion, although he did not wish to go, and went +to pass the night at Sacanben. The king had given orders to his officers +that all that the Admiral, his crew, and the caravel were in need of +should be given without payment, and that all the Admiral wanted should +be complied with. + + +_Saturday, 9th of March_ + +To-day the Admiral left Sacanben, to go where the king was residing, +which was at Valparaiso, nine leagues from Lisbon. Owing to the rain, he +did not arrive until night. The king caused him to be received very +honorably by the principal officers of his household; and the king +himself received the Admiral with great favor, making him sit down, and +talking very pleasantly. He offered to give orders that everything should +be done for the service of the Sovereigns of Castile, and said that the +successful termination of the voyage had given him great pleasure. He +said further that he understood that, in the capitulation between the +Sovereigns and himself, that conquest belonged to him.[254-1] The Admiral +replied that he had not seen the capitulation, nor knew more than that +the Sovereigns had ordered him not to go either to La Mina[254-2] or to +any other port of Guinea, and that this had been ordered to be proclaimed +in all the ports of Andalusia before he sailed. The king graciously +replied that he held it for certain that there would be no necessity for +any arbitrators. The Admiral was assigned as a guest to the Prior of +Clato, who was the principal person in that place, and from whom he +received many favors and civilities. + + +_Sunday, 10th of March_ + +To-day, after mass, the king repeated that if the Admiral wanted anything +he should have it. He conversed much with the Admiral respecting his +voyage, always ordering him to sit down, and treating him with great +favor. + + +_Monday, 11th of March_ + +To-day the Admiral took leave of the king, who entrusted him with some +messages to the Sovereigns, and always treating him with much +friendliness.[255-1] He departed after dinner, Don Martin de Noroña +being sent with him, and all the knights set out with him, and went with +him some distance, to do him honor. Afterwards he came to a monastery of +San Antonio, near a place called Villafranca, where the Queen was +residing. The Admiral went to do her reverence and to kiss her hand, +because she had sent to say that he was not to go without seeing her. The +Duke[256-1] and the Marquis were with her, and the Admiral was received +with much honor. He departed at night, and went to sleep at Llandra. + + +_Tuesday, 12th of March_ + +To-day, as he was leaving Llandra to return to the caravel, an esquire of +the king arrived, with an offer that if he desired to go to Castile by +land, that he should be supplied with lodgings, and beasts, and all that +was necessary. When the Admiral took leave of him, he ordered a mule to +be supplied to him, and another for his pilot, who was with him, and he +says that the pilot received a present of twenty _espadines_.[256-2] He +said this that the Sovereigns might know all that was done. He arrived on +board the caravel that night. + + +_Wednesday, 13th of March_ + +To-day, at 8 o'clock, with the flood tide, and the wind N.N.W., the +Admiral got under way and made sail for Seville. + + +_Thursday, 14th of March_ + +Yesterday, after sunset, a southerly course was steered, and before +sunrise they were off Cape St. Vincent, which is in Portugal. Afterwards +he shaped a course to the east for Saltes, and went on all day with +little wind, "until now that the ship is off Furon." + + +_Friday, 15th of March_ + +Yesterday, after sunset, she went on her course with little wind, and at +sunrise she was off Saltes. At noon, with the tide rising, they crossed +the bar of Saltes, and reached the port which they had left on the 3rd of +August of the year before.[257-1] The Admiral says that so ends this +journal, unless it becomes necessary to go to Barcelona by sea, having +received news that their Highnesses are in that city, to give an account +of all his voyage which our Lord had permitted him to make, and saw fit +to set forth in him. For, assuredly, he held with a firm and strong +knowledge that His High Majesty made all things good, and that all is +good except sin. Nor can he value or think of anything being done without +His consent. "I know respecting this voyage," says the Admiral, "that he +has miraculously shown his will, as may be seen from this journal, +setting forth the numerous miracles that have been displayed in the +voyage, and in me who was so long at the court of your Highnesses, +working in opposition to and against the opinions of so many chief +persons of your household, who were all against me, looking upon this +enterprise as folly. But I hope in our Lord, that it will be a great +benefit to Christianity, for so it has ever appeared." These are the +final words of the Admiral Don Cristoval Colon respecting his first +voyage to the Indies and their discovery. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[89-1] The Alhambra. + +[89-2] This information Columbus is ordinarily supposed to have derived +from Toscanelli's letter which may be found in Fiske, _Discovery of +America_, I. 356 ff. and II. App. The original source of the information, +however, is Marco Polo, and Columbus summarized the passage on the margin +in his copy of Marco Polo, Lib. I., ch. IV., as follows: "Magnus Kam +misit legatos ad pontificem:" _Raccolta Colombiana_, Part I, Tomo 2, p. +446. That he read and annotated these passages before 1492 seems most +probable. See Bourne, _Spain in America_, pp. 10-15, and Vignaud, +_Toscanelli and Columbus_, p. 284. + +[90-1] It is interesting to notice the emphasis of the missionary motive +in this preamble. Nothing is said in regard to the search for a new route +to the Indies for commercial reasons. Nor is reference made to the +expectation of new discoveries which is prominent in the royal patent +granted to Columbus, see above p. 78. + +[90-2] The edict of expulsion bears the date of March 30. + +[91-1] Columbus reckoned in Italian miles, four of which make a league. +(Navarrete.) + +[93-1] On June 30, 1484, King John II. of Portugal granted to Fernam +Domimguez do Arco, "resident in the island of Madeyra, if he finds it, an +island which he is now going in search of." _Alguns Documentos do Archivo +Nacional da Torre do Tombo_, p. 56. + +[94-1] _Tres horas de noche_ means three hours after sunset. + +[94-2] "On this day [Sunday, Sept. 9] they lost sight of land; and many, +fearful of not being able to return for a long time to see it, sighed and +shed tears. But the admiral, after he had comforted all with big offers +of much land and wealth to keep them in hope and to lessen their fear +which they had of the long way, when that day the sailors reckoned the +distance 18 leagues, said he had counted only 15, having decided to +lessen the record so that the crew would not think they were as far from +Spain as in fact they were." _Historie del Signor Don Fernando Colombo_ +(London ed., 1867), pp. 61-62. + +[95-1] Las Casas in his _Historia_, I. 267, says "on that day at +nightfall the needles northwested that is to say the fleur de lis which +marks the north was not pointing directly at it but verged somewhat to +the left of north and in the morning northeasted that is to say the fleur +de lis pointed to right of the north until sunset." + +The _Historie_ agrees with the text of the Journal that the needle +declined more to the west, instead of shifting to an eastern declination. + +The author of the _Historie_ remarks: "This variation no one had ever +observed up to this time," p. 62. "Columbus had crossed the point of no +variation, which was then near the meridian of Flores, in the Azores, and +found the variation no longer easterly, but more than a point westerly. +His explanation that the pole-star, by means of which the change was +detected, was not itself stationary, is very plausible. For the pole-star +really does describe a circle round the pole of the earth, equal in +diameter to about six times that of the sun; but this is not equal to the +change observed in the direction of the needle." (Markham.) + +[96-1] _Garjao._ This word is not in the Spanish dictionaries that I have +consulted. The translator has followed the French translators MM. +Chalumeau de Verneuil and de la Roquette who accepted the opinion of the +naturalist Cuvier that the _Garjao_ was the _hirondelle de mer_, the +_Sterna maxima_ or royal tern. + +[96-2] _Rabo de junco_, literally, reedtail, is the tropic bird or +Phaethon. The name "boatswain-bird" is applied to some other kinds of +birds, besides the tropic bird. _Cf._ Alfred Newton, _Dictionary of +Birds_ (London, 1896). Ferdinand Columbus says: _rabo di giunco_, "a bird +so called because it has a long feather in its tail," p. 63. + +[96-3] This remark is, of course, not true of the tropic bird or _rabo de +junco_, as was abundantly proved on this voyage. + +[97-1] See p. 96, note 2. + +[98-1] _Alcatraz._ The rendering "booby" follows Cuvier's note to the +French translation. The "booby" is the "booby gannet." The Spanish +dictionaries give pelican as the meaning of _Alcatraz_. The gannets and +the pelicans were formerly classed together. The word _Alcatraz_ was +taken over into English and corrupted to _Albatros_. Alfred Newton, +_Dictionary of Birds_ (London, 1896), art. "Albatros." + +[98-2] More exactly, "He sailed this day toward the West a quarter +northwest and half the division [_i.e._, west by north and west by one +eighth northwest] because of the veering winds and calm that prevailed." + +[100-1] The abridger of the original journal missed the point here and +his epitome is unintelligible. Las Casas says in his _Historia_, I. 275: +"The Admiral says in this place that the adverseness of the winds and the +high sea were very necessary to him since they freed the crew of their +erroneous idea that there would be no favorable sea and winds for their +return and thereby they received some relief of mind or were not in so +great despair, yet even then some objected, saying that that wind would +not last, up to the Sunday following, when they had nothing to answer +when they saw the sea so high. By which means, Cristóbal Colon says here, +God dealt with him and with them as he dealt with Moses and the Jews when +he drew them from Egypt showing signs to favor and aid him and to their +confusion." + +[100-2] Las Casas, _Historia_, I. 275-276, here describes with detail the +discontent of the sailors and their plots to put Columbus out of the way. +The passage is translated in Thacher, _Christopher Columbus_, I. 524. The +word rendered "sandpipers" is _pardelas_, petrels. The French translation +has _petrels tachetes_, _i.e._, "pintado petrels," or cape pigeons. + +[101-1] More exactly, "On which it seems the Admiral had painted certain +islands." The Spanish reads: "_donde segun parece tenia pintadas el +Almirante ciertas islas_," etc. The question is whether Columbus made the +map or had it made. The rendering of the note is supported by the French +translators and by Harrisse. + +[101-2] Las Casas, I. 279, says: "This map is the one which Paul, the +physician, the Florentine, sent, which I have in my possession with other +articles which belonged to the Admiral himself who discovered these +Indies, and writings in his own hand which came into my possession. In it +he depicted many islands and the main land which were the beginning of +India and in that region the realms of the Grand Khan," etc. Las Casas +does not tell us how he knew that the Toscanelli map which he found in +Columbus's papers was the map that the Admiral used on the first voyage. +That is the general assumption of scholars, but there is no positive +evidence of the fact. The Toscanelli map is no longer extant, and all +reconstructions of it are based on the globe of Martin Behaim constructed +in 1492. The reconstruction by H. Wagner which may be seen in S. Ruge, +_Columbus_, 2^te aufl. (Berlin, 1902) is now accepted as the most +successful. + +According to the reckoning of the distances in the Journal, Columbus was +now about 550 leagues or 2200 Italian miles west of the Canaries. The +Toscanelli map was divided off into spaces each containing 250 miles. +Columbus was therefore nine spaces west of the Canaries. No +reconstruction of Toscanelli's map puts any islands at nine spaces from +the Canaries except so far as the reconstructors insert the island of +Antilia on the basis of Behaim's globe. The Antilia of Behaim according +to Wagner was eight spaces west of the Canaries. Again Ferdinand +Columbus, in his _Historie_ under date of October 7 (p. 72), says the +sailors "had been frequently told by him that he did not look for land +until they had gone 750 leagues west from the Canaries, at which distance +he had told them he would have found Española then called Cipango." 750 +leagues or 3000 Italian miles would be 12 spaces on the Toscanelli map. +But according to the Toscanelli letter Cipango was 10 spaces west of +Antilia, and therefore 18 spaces or 4500 miles west of the Canaries. +Columbus then seems to have expected to find Cipango some 1500 miles to +the east of where it was placed on the Toscanelli map. These +considerations justify a very strong doubt whether Columbus was shaping +his course and basing his expectations on the data of the Toscanelli +letter and map, or whether the fact that Las Casas found what he took to +be the Toscanelli map in the Admiral's papers proves that it was that map +which he had on his first voyage. + +[102-1] _Dorado_ is defined by Stevens as the dory or gilt head. + +[103-1] _Rabiforcado_, Portuguese. The Spanish form is _rabihorcado_. It +means "forked tail." The modern English equivalent is "frigate bird." It +is "the Fregata aquila of most ornithologists, the Frégate of French and +the Rabihorcado of Spanish mariners." Newton, _Dictionary of Birds_, art. +"Frigate-Bird." Newton says that the name "man-of-war bird" has generally +passed out of use in books. + +[103-2] Rather, the Guards, the name given to the two brightest stars in +the constellation of the Little Bear. The literal translation is: "the +Guards, when night comes on, are near the arm on the side to the west, +and when dawn breaks they are on the line under the arm to the +northeast," etc. What Columbus meant I cannot explain. Neither Navarrete +nor the French translators offer any suggestions. + +[105-1] Las Casas, I. 282, adds to the foregoing under date of October 3: +"He says here that it would not have been good sense to beat about and in +that way to be delayed in search of them [_i.e._, the islands] since he +had favorable weather and his chief intention was to go in search of the +Indies by way of the west, and this was what he proposed to the King and +Queen, and they had sent him for that purpose. Because he would not turn +back to beat up and down to find the islands which the pilots believed to +be there, particularly Martin Alonzo by the chart which, as was said, +Cristóbal Colon had sent to his caravel for him to see, and it was their +opinion that he ought to turn, they began to stir up a mutiny, and the +disagreement would have gone farther if God had not stretched out his arm +as he was wont, showing immediately new signs of their being near land +since now neither soft words nor entreaties nor prudent reasoning of +Cristóbal Colon availed to quiet them and to persuade them to persevere." +Ferdinand Columbus says simply, "For this reason the crew began to be +mutinous, persevering in their complaints and plots," p. 71. See page +108, note 1. + +[106-1] _Á la cuarta del Oueste, á la parte del Sudueste_, at the quarter +from the west toward the southwest, _i.e._, west by south. + +[106-2] Las Casas, in the _Historia de las Indias_, I. 283, writes, "That +night Martin Alonso said that it would be well to sail west by south for +the island of Cipango which the map that Cristóbal Colon showed him +represented." _Cf._ page 101, note 2. + +[107-1] Las Casas remarks, I. 285, "If he had kept up the direct westerly +course and the impatience of the Castilians had not hindered him, there +is no doubt that he would have struck the main land of Florida and from +there to New Spain, although the difficulties would have been +unparalleled and the losses unbearable that they would have met with, and +it would have been a divine miracle if he had ever returned to Castile." + +[107-2] A remark by the abridger who noted the inconsistency between a +total of 48 miles for a day and night and even an occasional 15 miles per +hour. + +[107-3] _Grajaos._ The translator assumed this to be the same as +_garjao_; the French translators, on the other hand, took it to be the +same as _grajos_, crows. In Portuguese dictionaries the word _grajão_ is +found as the name of "an Indian bird." + +[108-1] The trouble with the captains and the sailors is told in greatest +detail by Oviedo, _Historia de las Indias_, lib. II., cap. V. He is the +source of the story that the captains finally declared they would go on +three days longer and not another hour. Oviedo does not say that Columbus +acquiesced in this arrangement. Modern critics have been disposed to +reject Oviedo's account, but strictly interpreted, it is not inconsistent +with our other sources. Columbus recalls in his Journal, February 14, +1493, the terror of the situation which was evidently more serious than +the entry of October 10 would imply. Peter Martyr too says that the +sailors plotted to throw Columbus overboard and adds: "After the +thirtieth day roused by madness they declared they were going back," but +that Columbus pacified them. _De Rebus Oceanicis_, Dec. lib. I., fol. 2, +ed. of 1574. Oviedo says that he derived information from Vicente Yañez +Pinzon, "since with him I had a friendship up to the year 1514 when he +died." _Historia de las Indias_, II., cap. XIII. + +[108-2] _Escaramojos._ Wild roses. + +[109-1] It was full moon on October 5. On the night of the 11th the moon +rose at 11 P.M. and at 2 A.M. on the morning of the 12th it was 39° above +the horizon. It would be shining brightly on the sandy shores of an +island some miles ahead, being in its third quarter, and a little behind +Rodrigo de Triana, when he sighted land at 2 A.M. (Markham.) + +[109-2] The high decks fore and aft were called castles. The name +survives in the English forecastle. Stevens gives poop alone as the +English for _Castilla de popa_. + +[109-3] Oviedo, lib. II., cap. V., says that, as they were sailing along, +a sailor, a native of Lepe, cried out, "Light," "Land," but was +immediately told that the admiral had already seen it and remarked upon +it. + +[109-4] Columbus received this award. His claiming or accepting it under +the circumstances has been considered discreditable and a breach of faith +by many modern writers. Oviedo says the native of Lepe was so indignant +at not getting the reward that "he went over into Africa and denied the +faith," _i.e._, became a Mohammedan. Las Casas seems to have seen no +impropriety in Columbus' accepting the award. He tells us, I. 289, that +this annuity was paid to Columbus throughout his life and was levied from +the butcher shops of Seville. A maravedi was equal to two-thirds of a +cent. + +[110-1] Pronounced originally, according to Las Casas, I. 291, with the +accent on the last syllable. Guanahani is now generally accepted to have +been Watling Island. See Markham, _Christopher Columbus_, pp. 89-107, for +a lucid discussion of the landfall. + +[110-2] Fernando and Ysabel. + +[110-3] The royal inspector. + +[110-4] Las Casas adds, I. 293, "To which he gave the name Sant +Salvador." + +[110-5] We have here perhaps the original title of what in its abridged +form we now call the Journal. + +[113-1] The Portuguese _ceitil_ (pl. _ceitis_) was a small coin deriving +its name from Ceuta, opposite Gibraltar, in Africa, a Portuguese +possession. The _blanca_ was one-half a maravedi, or about one-third of a +cent. + +[113-2] Cipango. Marco Polo's name for Japan. + +[115-1] Rather, "I had lain to during the night for fear of reaching the +land," etc. + +[115-2] These lengths are exaggerated. + +[115-3] The word is _cargué_ and means "raised" or "hoisted." The same +word seven lines above was translated "made sail." Las Casas in the +corresponding passage in his _Historia_ uses _alzar_. + +[115-4] Identified as Rum Cay. + +[116-1] A line is missing in the original. The text may be restored as +follows, beginning with the end of the preceding sentence, "jumped into +the sea and got into the canoe; in the middle of the night before the +other threw [himself into the sea and swam off. The boat was lowered] and +put after the canoe which escaped since there never was a boat which +could have overtaken him, since we were far behind him." + +[117-1] Long Island. (Markham.) + +[117-2] Possibly a reference to tobacco. + +[118-1] It should be "about nine o'clock." The original is _á horas de +tercia_, which means "at the hour of tierce," _i.e._, the period between +nine and twelve. + +[119-1] _Panizo_, literally "panic grass." Here Columbus seems to use the +word as descriptive of maize or Indian corn, and later the word came to +have this meaning. On the different species of panic grass, see Candolle, +_Origin of Cultivated Plants_ (index under _panicum_.) + +[120-1] Rather, "since it is noon." + +[120-2] Port Clarence in Long Island. (Markham.) + +[121-1] Rather, "beds and hangings." The original is _paramentos de +cosas_, but in the corresponding passage in his _Historia_, I. 310, Las +Casas has _paramentos de casa_, which is almost certainly the correct +reading. + +[121-2] "These are called Hamacas in Española." Las Casas, I. 310, where +will be found an elaborate description of them. + +[121-3] For ornament. Las Casas calls them caps or crowns, I. 311. + +[121-4] Rather: "mastiffs and beagles." Las Casas, I. 311, says the +Admiral called these dogs mastiffs from the report of the sailors. "If he +had seen them, he would not have called them so but that they resembled +hounds. These and the small ones would never bark but merely a grunt in +the throat." + +[121-5] The _castellano_ was one-sixth of an ounce. Las Casas, I. 311, +remarks: "They were deceived in believing the marks to be letters since +those people are wont to work it in their fashion, since never anywhere +in all the Indies was there found any trace of money of gold or silver or +other metal." + +[123-1] Crooked Island (Markham.) + +[123-2] Cape Beautiful. + +[125-1] "The Indians of this island of Española call it _iguana_." Las +Casas I. 314. He gives a minute description of it. + +[126-1] The names in the Spanish text are Colba and Bosio, errors in +transcription for Cuba and Bohio. Las Casas, I. 315, says in regard to +the latter: "To call it Bohio was to misunderstand the interpreters, +since throughout all these islands, where the language is practically the +same, they call the huts in which they live _bohio_ and this great island +Española they called Hayti, and they must have said that in Hayti there +were great _bohios_." + +[126-2] The name is spelled Quinsay in the Latin text of Marco Polo which +Columbus annotated. + +[127-1] One or two words are missing in the original. + +[128-1] The translation here should be, "raised the anchors at the island +of Isabella at Cabo del Isleo, which is on the northern side where I +tarried to go to the island of Cuba, which I heard from this people is +very great and has gold," etc. + +[128-2] These two lines should read, "I believe that it is the island of +Cipango of which marvellous things are related." + +[128-3] The exact translation is, "On the spheres that I saw and on the +paintings of world-maps it is this region." The plural number is used in +both cases. Of the globes of this date, _i.e._, 1492 or earlier, that of +Behaim is the only one that has come down to us. Of the world maps +Toscanelli's, no longer extant, may have been one, but it is to be noted +that Columbus uses the plural. + +[129-1] Columbus's conviction that he has reached the Indies is +registered by his use from now on of the word "Indians" for the people. + +[130-1] This should be, "The mouth of the river is 12 fathoms deep and it +is wide enough," etc. + +[131-1] _Bledos._ The French translators give _cresson sauvage_, wild +cress, as the equivalent. + +[131-2] Las Casas, I. 320, says Columbus understood "that from these to +the mainland would be a sail of ten days by reason of the notion he had +derived from the chart or picture which the Florentine sent him." + +[131-3] Baracoa (Las Casas); Puerto Naranjo (Markham); Nipe (Navarrete); +Nuevitas (Thacher). + +[132-1] Punta de Mulas. (Navarrete.) + +[132-2] Punta de Cabañas. (Navarrete.) + +[132-3] Puerto de Banes. (Navarrete.) + +[132-4] Puerto de las Nuevitas del Principe. (Navarrete.) + +[132-5] Las Casas, I. 321, has "many heads well carved from wood." +Possibly these were totems. + +[133-1] Las Casas, I. 321, comments, "These must have been skulls of the +manati, a very large fish, like large calves, which has a skin with no +scales like a whale and its head is like that of a cow." + +[133-2] "I believe that this port was Baracoa, which name Diego +Velasquez, the first of the Spaniards to settle Cuba, gave to the harbor +of Asumpcion." Las Casas, I. 322. + +[133-3] Near Granada in Spain. + +[133-4] Nuevitas del Principe. (Navarrete.) + +[133-5] "Alto de Juan Dañue." (Navarrete.) + +[134-1] Rio Maximo. (Navarrete.) + +[134-2] See above, p. 91. + +[134-3] Rather, "The text here is corrupt." Las Casas, I. 324, gives the +same figures and adds, "yet I think the text is erroneous." Navarrete +says the quadrants of that period measured the altitude double and so we +should take half of forty-two as the real altitude. If so, one wonders +why there was no explanation to this effect in the original journal which +Las Casas saw or why Las Casas was not familiar with this fact and did +not make this explanation. Ruge, _Columbus_, pp. 144, 145, says there +were no such quadrants, and regards these estimates as proofs of +Columbus's ignorance as a scientific navigator. + +[134-4] In Toscanelli's letter Cathay is a province in one place and a +city in another. + +[134-5] Boca de Carabelas grandes. (Navarrete.) + +[135-1] Punta del Maternillo. (Navarrete.) + +[135-2] Las Casas says, I. 326. "I think the Christians did not +understand, for the language of all these islands is the same, and in +this island of Española gold is called _caona_." + +[136-1] The last words should be, "distant from the one and from the +other." Las Casas, I. 327, says: "Zayton and Quisay are certain cities or +provincias of the mainland which were depicted on the map of Paul the +physician as mentioned above." These Chinese cities were known from Marco +Polo's description of them. This passage in the Journal is very +perplexing if it assumes that Columbus was guided by the Toscanelli +letter. Again a few days earlier Columbus was sure that Cuba was Cipango, +and now he is equally certain that it is the mainland of Asia asserted by +Toscanelli to be 26 spaces or 6500 Italian miles west of Lisbon, but the +next day his estimate of his distance from Lisbon is 4568 miles. It would +seem as if Columbus attached no importance to the estimate of distances +on the Toscanelli map which was the only original information in it. + +[137-1] _Cf._ p. 134, note 3. + +[137-2] The true distance was 1105 leagues. (Navarrete.) + +[138-1] _Contramaestre_ is boatswain. + +[138-2] "_Bohio_ means in their language 'house,' and therefore it is to +be supposed that they did not understand the Indians, but that it was +Hayti, which is this island of Española where they made signs there was +gold." Las Casas, I. 329. + +[138-3] Columbus understood the natives to say these things because of +his strong preconceptions as to what he would find in the islands off the +coast of Asia based on his reading of the Book of Sir John Maundeville. +Cf. ch. XVIII. of that work, _e.g._, "a great and fair isle called +Nacumera.... And all the men and women have dogs' heads," and ch. XIX., +_e.g._, "In one of these isles are people of great stature, like giants, +hideous to look upon; and they have but one eye in the middle of the +forehead." + +[139-1] Las Casas, I. 329, identifies the _mames_ as _ajes_ and +_batatas_. The batatas, whence our word "potato," is the sweet potato. +_Mames_ is more commonly written _ñames_ or _ignames_. This is the Guinea +Negro name of the _Dioscorea sativa_, in English "Yam." _Ajes_ is the +native West Indies name. See Peschel, _Zeitalter der Entdeckungen_, p. +139, and Columbus's journal, Dec. 13 and Dec. 16. _Faxones_ are the +common haricot kidney beans or string beans, _Phaseolus vulgaris_. This +form of the name seems a confusion of the Spanish _fásoles_ and the +Portuguese _feijões_. That Columbus, an Italian by birth who had lived +and married in Portugal and removed to Spain in middle life, should +occasionally make slips in word-forms is not strange. More varieties of +this bean are indigenous in America than were known in Europe at the time +of the discoveries. Cf. De Candolle, _Origin of Cultivated Plants_, pp. +338 ff. + +[139-2] The word is _contramaestre_, boatswain. + +[141-1] The last line should read, "but that they did not know whether +there was any in the place where they were." + +[141-2] The last line should read, "with a brand in their hand, [and] +herbs to smoke as they are accustomed to do." This is the earliest +reference to smoking tobacco. Las Casas, I. 332, describes the process as +the natives practised it: "These two Christians found on their way many +people, men and women, going to and from their villages and always the +men with a brand in their hands and certain herbs to take their smoke, +which are dry herbs placed in a certain leaf, also dry like the paper +muskets which boys make at Easter time. Having lighted one end of it, +they suck at the other end or draw in with the breath that smoke which +they make themselves drowsy and as if drunk, and in that way, they say, +cease to feel fatigue. These muskets, or whatever we call them, they call +_tabacos_. I knew Spaniards in this island of Española who were +accustomed to take them, who, when they were rebuked for it as a vice, +replied they could not give it up. I do not know what pleasant taste or +profit they found in them." Las Casas' last remarks show that smoking was +not yet common in his later life in Spain. The paper muskets of Las Casas +are blow-pipes. Oviedo, lib. V., cap. II., gives a detailed description +of the use of tobacco. He says that the Indians smoked by inserting these +tubes in the nostrils and that after two or three inhalations they lost +consciousness. He knew some Christians who used it as an anesthetic when +in great pain. + +[142-1] On this indigenous species of dumb dogs, _cf._ Oviedo, lib. XII. +cap. V. They have long been extinct in the Antilles. Oviedo says there +were none in Española when he wrote. He left the island in 1546. + +[142-2] This last part of this sentence should read, "and is cultivated +with _mames_, kidney beans, other beans, this same panic [_i.e._, Indian +corn], etc." The corresponding passage in the _Historie_ of Ferdinand +Columbus reads, "and another grain like panic called by them _mahiz_ of +very excellent flavor cooked or roasted or pounded in porridge +(polenta)," p. 87. + +[142-3] The _arroba_ was 25 pounds and the _quintal_ one hundred weight. + +[143-1] In Las Casas, I. 339, Bohio is mentioned with Babeque, and it is +in Bohio that the people were reported to gather gold on the beach. + +[144-1] _I.e._, although the Spaniards may be only fooling with them. + +[145-1] An interesting forecast of the future which may be compared with +John Cabot's; see one of the last pages of this volume. + +[145-2] _Linaloe._ Lignaloes or agallochum, to be distinguished from the +medicinal aloes. Both were highly prized articles of mediaeval Oriental +trade. Lignaloes is mentioned by Marco Polo as one of the principal +commodities exchanged in the market of Zaitun. It is also frequently +mentioned in the Bible. _Cf._ numbers xxiv, 6, or Psalm xlv. 8. The aloes +of Columbus were probably the Barbadoes aloes of commerce, and the mastic +the produce of the _Bursera gummifera_. The last did not prove to be a +commercial resin like the mastic of Scio. See _Encyclopædia Britannica_ +under Aloes and Mastic, and Heyd, _Histoire du Commerce du Levant au +Moyen Age_, II. 581, 633. + +[145-3] The ducat being 9_s._ 2_d._ In the seventeenth century the value +of the mastic exported from Chios (Scio) was 30,000 ducats. Chios +belonged to Genoa from 1346 to 1566. (Markham.) + +[146-1] _Las Sierras del Cristal_ and _Las Sierras de Moa_. (Navarrete.) + +[147-1] Puerto de Taxamo, in Cuba. (Navarrete.) + +[148-1] _Cf._ Fra Mauro's Map (1457-1459), Bourne, _Spain in America_, +14, and Behaim's Globe, Winsor's _Columbus_, p. 186, or Fiske's +_Discovery of America_, I. 422. + +[149-1] Las Casas did not know the meaning of this word. In all +probability it is the Italian _tasso_, badger. _Cf._ p. 139, note 1. The +animal, Cuvier suggested was probably the coati. + +[149-2] Cuvier conjectured this to be the trunk fish. + +[150-1] The agouti. + +[152-1] See p. 134, note 3. The words following "Port of Mares" should be +translated "but here he says that he has the quadrant hung up (or not in +use) until he reaches land to repair it. Since it seemed to him that this +distance," etc. Las Casas omitted to insert the number of degrees in his +comment. + +[152-2] The sentences omitted are comments of Las Casas on these +reflections of Columbus. + +[153-1] See p. 138, note 3. + +[153-2] _A la hora de tercia_, about 9 A.M. See p. 118, note 1. + +[153-3] Cayo de Moa. (Navarrete.) + +[154-1] Rio de Moa. (Navarrete.) + +[154-2] Punta del Mangle or del Guarico. (Navarrete.) + +[154-3] Sierras de Moa. (Navarrete.) + +[154-4] "These must have been _margaseta_ stones which look like gold in +streams and of which there is an abundance in the rivers of these +islands." Las Casas, I. 346. + +[155-1] _Madroños._ _Arbutus unedo_ or the Strawberry tree. The +California Madroña is the _Arbutus Menziesii_. + +[155-2] Rather, "for making sawmills." + +[156-1] Among these were the Bay of Yamanique, and the ports of Jaragua, +Taco, Cayaganueque, Nava, and Maravi. (Navarrete.) + +[156-2] See p. 126, note 1. + +[157-1] The original of the words Cannibal and Carib and Caribbean. _Cf._ +also p. 138, note 3. + +[157-2] The port of Baracoa. (Navarrete.) + +[157-3] Monte del Yunque. (Navarrete.) + +[158-1] Port of Maravi. (Navarrete.) + +[158-2] Punta de Maici. (_Id._) + +[158-3] Puerto de Baracoa. (_Id._) + +[160-1] With these suggestions for a colonial policy _cf._ Columbus's +more detailed programme in his letter to Ferdinand and Isabella, pp. +273-277 below. In the Spanish policy of exclusion of foreigners from the +colonies the religious motive, as here, was quite as influential as the +spirit of trade monopoly. Las Casas, in making the same quotation from +the Journal, remarks, I. 351: "All these are his exact words, although +some of them are not perfect Castilian, since that was not the Admiral's +mother tongue." + +[161-1] The _fusta_ was a long, low boat propelled by oars or a sail. It +is represented in earlier English by "foist" and "fuste." + +[161-2] Las Casas, I. 353, remarks, "This wax was never made in the +island of Cuba, and this cake that was found came from the kingdom and +provinces of Yucatan, where there is an immense amount of very good +yellow wax." He supposes that it might have come from the wrecks of +canoes engaged in trade along the coast of Yucatan. + +[162-1] About 70 feet. Las Casas adds the words, "it was most beautiful," +and continues, "it is no wonder for there are in that island very thick +and very long and tall fragrant red cedars and commonly all their canoes +are made from these valuable trees." + +[162-2] Puerto de Baracoa. (Navarrete.) + +[163-1] This reef actually exists on the S.E. side of the entrance to +this port, which is described with great accuracy by Columbus. +(Navarrete.) + +[163-2] _Lombarda_ is the same as _bombarda_, bombard, the earliest type +of cannon. The name has nothing to do with Lombardy, but is simply the +form which was used in Castile in the fifteenth century while _bombarda_ +was used elsewhere in the peninsula and in Europe. The average-sized +bombard was a twenty-five pounder. _Diccionario Enciclopedico +Hispano-Americano_, art. _lombardo_, based on Aráutegui, _Apuntes +Históricos sobre la Artilleria Española en los Siglos XIV y XV_. + +[164-1] This line should be, "in which he saw five very large _almadias_ +[low, light boats] which the Indians call _canoas_, like _fustas_, very +beautiful and so well constructed," etc. "Canoe" is one of the few Arawak +Indian words to have become familiar English. + +[164-2] Rather, "He went up a mountain and then he found it all level and +planted with many things of the country and gourds so that it was +glorious to see it." De Candolle believes the calabash or gourd to have +been introduced into America from Africa. _Cf._ his _Origin of Cultivated +Plants_, pp. 245 ff. Oviedo, however, in his _Historia General y Natural +de Indias_, lib. VIII., cap. VIII., says that the _calabaças_ of the +Indies were the same as those in Spain and were cultivated not to eat but +to use the shells as vessels. + +[164-3] Rather, "rods." + +[166-1] Rio Boma. (Navarrete.) + +[166-2] Punta del Fraile. (_Id._) + +[166-3] Punta de los Azules. (_Id._) + +[167-1] Las Casas, I. 359, says, "This high and beautiful cape whither he +would have liked to go I believe was Point Maycí, which is the extreme +end of Cuba toward the east." According to the modern maps of Cuba it +must have been one of the capes to the southwest of Point Maicí. + +[167-2] _Cf._ note 57. Las Casas, I. 359, remarks, "Its real name was +Haytí, the last syllable long and accented." He thinks it possible that +the cape first sighted may have been called Bohio. + +[167-3] Columbus gave Cuba the name Juana "in memory of Prince Juan the +heir of Castile." _Historie_, p. 83. + +[167-4] "In leaving the cape or eastern point of Cuba he gave it the name +Alpha and Omega, which means beginning and end, for he believed that this +cape was the end of the mainland in the Orient." Las Casas, I. 360. + +[168-1] The port of St. Nicholas Mole, in Hayti. (Navarrete.) + +[168-2] Cape of St. Nicholas. (_Id._) + +[168-3] Punta Palmista. (_Id._) + +[168-4] Puerto Escudo. (_Id._) + +[168-5] The channel between Tortuga Island and the main. + +[168-6] Tortoise. + +[169-1] _Atalayas_, "watchtowers." + +[169-2] This method of giving names in honor of the saint on whose day a +new cape or river was discovered was very commonly followed during the +period of discoveries, and sometimes the date of a discovery, or the +direction of a voyage, or other data can be verified by comparing the +names given with the calender. + +[169-3] This clause should be "It extends in this manner to the +south-south-east two leagues." + +[169-4] A gap in the manuscript. + +[170-1] This is the "Carenero," within the port of St. Nicholas. +(Navarrete.) + +[171-1] Accepting Navarrete's conjecture of _abrezuela_ or _anglezuela_ +for the reading _agrezuela_ of the text. + +[171-2] It should be north 11 miles. (Navarrete.) + +[171-3] This is an error. It should be 15 miles. (Navarrete.) The +direction _al Leste cuarta del Sueste_ is East by South. + +[171-4] Puerto Escudo. (Navarrete.) + +[172-1] Bahia Mosquito. (Navarrete.) + +[172-2] Cuvier notes that neither the nightingale proper nor the Spanish +myrtle are found in America. + +[172-3] It should be 11 miles. (Navarrete.) + +[173-1] _I.e._, Spanish Isle, not "Little Spain," which is sometimes +erroneously given in explanation of the Latin Hispaniola. This last is a +Latinized form of Española and not a diminutive. Las Casas, I. 367, in +the corresponding passage, has "Seeing the greatness and beauty of this +island and its resemblance to Spain although much superior and that they +had caught fish in it like the fish of Castile and for other similar +reasons he decided on December 9 when in the harbor of Concepcion to name +this island Spanish Island." + +At a period some time later than his first voyage Columbus decided that +Española and Cipango were the same and also identical with the Ophir of +the Bible. _Cf._ his marginal note to Landino's Italian translation of +Pliny's _Natural History_, "la isola de Feyti, vel de Ofir, vel de +Cipango, a la quale habio posto nome Spagnola." _Raccolta Colombiana_, +pt. I., vol. II., p. 472. + +[174-1] The distance is 11 miles. (Navarrete.) + +[175-1] _Camarones._ + +[175-2] The proper English equivalents for these names in the original +are hard to find. The _corbina_ was a black fish and the name is found in +both Spanish and Portuguese. _Pámpanos_ is translated "giltheads," but +the name is taken over into English as "pompano." It must be remembered +that in many cases the names of European species were applied to American +species which resembled them but which were really distinct species of +the same genus. + +[177-1] Rather, "bread of _niames_." _Cf._ note, p. 139. + +[178-1] Las Casas, I. 373, says that at that season the length of the day +in Española is somewhat over eleven hours. The correct latitude is 20°. + +[179-1] Elsewhere called Babeque. (Navarrete.) + +[180-1] Paradise Valley. + +[180-2] Rather, "There are on the edges or banks of the shore many +beautiful stones and it is all suitable for walking." The Spanish text +seems to be defective. + +[181-1] Diego de Arana of Cordova, a near relation of Beatriz Henriquez, +the mother of the Admiral's son Fernando. (Markham.) Alguazil means +constable. + +[181-2] _Ajes._ The same as _mames_. _Cf._ note, p. 139. + +[183-1] This Indian word survives in modern Spanish with the meaning +political boss. + +[183-2] Diego de Arana. + +[184-1] Rodrigo de Escobedo. + +[184-2] In Spain in earlier times the Annunciation was celebrated on +December 18 to avoid having it come in Lent. When the Roman usage in +regard to Annunciation was adopted in Spain they instituted the Feast of +our Lady's Expectation on December 18. It was called "The Feast of O +because the first of the greater antiphons is said in the vespers of its +vigil." Addis and Arnold, _Catholic Dictionary_, under "Mary." The series +of anthems all begin with "O." + +[186-1] The excelente was worth two castellanos or about $6 in coin +value. + +[187-1] El Puerto de la Granja. (Navarrete.) + +[187-2] The bay of Puerto Margot. (_Id._) + +[188-1] Point and Island of Margot. (Navarrete.) + +[188-2] _Camino_ for _Cabo_ (?). (Markham.) + +[188-3] Mountain over Guarico. (Navarrete.) + +[188-4] _Cf._ p. 178, note. + +[188-5] Bahia de Acúl. (Navarrete.) + +[189-1] This conjecture proved to be wrong. The Peak of Teneriffe is over +12,000 ft. high, while 10,300 ft. (Mt. Tina) is the highest elevation in +Santo Domingo. + +[189-2] This is one of the passages used to determine the date of +Columbus's birth. By combining his statement quoted in the _Historie_ of +Ferdinand, ch. IV., that he went to sea at 14, and this assertion that he +followed the sea steadily for 23 years, we find that he was 37 years old +in 1484 or 1485, when he left Portugal and ceased sea-faring till 1492. + +[189-3] A gap of a line and a half in the manuscript. + +[189-4] Another gap in the manuscript. + +[190-1] The mutilation of the text makes this passage difficult. The +third line literally is, "and I saw all the east [or perhaps better the +Levant, _el Levante_] and the west which means the way to England," etc. +After the second gap read: "better than the other which I with proper +caution tried to describe." After "world," read: "and [is] enclosed so +that the oldest cable of the ship would hold it fast." + +[190-2] The distance is six miles. (Navarrete.) + +[190-3] Acúl. (_Id._) + +[191-1] _Gonze avellanada._ The interpretation of the French translators +is followed. The word _gonze_ is not given in the dictionaries. + +[193-1] "This king was a great lord and king Guacanagarí, one of the five +great kings and lordships of this island." Las Casas, I. 389. + +[194-1] "This girdle was of fine jewellery work, like misshapen pearls, +made of fish-bones white and colored interspersed, like embroidery, so +sewed with a thread of cotton and by such delicate skill that on the +reverse side it looked like delicate embroidery, although all white, +which it was a pleasure to see." Las Casas, I. 389. From this we learn +that wampum belts were in use among the Indians of Española. + +[196-1] Port of Guarico. (Navarrete.) + +[196-2] This estimate was far too great. The island is about one-third +the size of Great Britain and one-half the size of England. + +[196-3] Guarico. + +[196-4] It is now called San Honorato. (Navarrete.) + +[197-1] "The fact is that _Cacique_ was the word for king, and _Nitayno_ +for knight and principal lord." Las Casas, I. 394. + +[197-2] The similarity between the names and the report of gold made +Columbus particularly confident of the identification. + +[198-1] Entrance of the Bay of Acúl. (Navarrete.) + +[198-2] Isla de Ratos. (_Id._) + +[199-1] Puerto Frances. (Navarrete.) + +[199-2] Perhaps better "a young common sailor." + +[200-1] The master, who was also the owner, of the Admiral's ship was +Juan de la Cosa of Santoña, afterwards well known as a draughtsman and +Pilot. (Markham.) + +[200-2] Rather, "Then the seams opened but not the ship." That is, the +ship was not stove. The word translated "seams" is _conventos_, which Las +Casas, I. 398, defines as _los vagos que hay entre costillas y +costillas_. In this passage he is using _costillas_ not in the technical +sense of _costillas de nao_, "ribs," but in the sense of "planks," as in +_costillas de cuba_, "barrel staves." + +[202-1] In reality Cibao was a part of Española. + +[202-2] Made from the manioc roots or _ajes_. Cassava biscuit can be got +to-day at fancy grocery stores. It is rather insipid. + +[204-1] In reality, three-quarters the size of Portugal. + +[204-2] Juan de la Cosa, the master, was a native of Santoña, on the +north coast of Spain. There were two other Santoña men on board and +several from the north coast. (Markham.) + +[206-1] "He ordered then all his people to make great haste and the king +ordered his vassals to help him and as an immense number joined with the +Christians they managed so well and with such diligence that in a matter +of ten days our stronghold was well made and as far as could be then +constructed. He named it the City of Christmas (Villa de la Navidad) +because he had arrived there on that day, and so to-day that harbor is +called Navidad, although there is no memory that there even has been a +fort or any building there, since it is overgrown with trees as large and +tall as if fifty years had passed, and I have seen them." Las Casas, I. +408. + +[206-2] These were not islands, but districts whose chiefs were called by +the same names. _Cf._ Las Casas, I. 410. + +[207-1] For Yañez. Vincent Yañez Pinzon. + +[208-1] Rather, "For now the business appeared to be so great and +important that it was wonderful (said the Admiral) and he said he did not +wish," etc. + +[208-2] The first suggestion of systematic colonization in the New World. + +[209-1] See note 2 under Jan. 9, p. 218. + +[210-1] The actual number was 44, according to the official list given in +a document printed by Navarrete, which is a notice to the next of kin to +apply for wages due, dated Burgos, December 20, 1507. Markham reproduces +this list in his edition of Columbus's Journal. + +[210-2] Las Casas gives the farewell speech of the Admiral to those who +were left behind at Navidad, I. 415. It is translated in Thacher's +_Columbus_, I. 632. + +[211-1] "It is not known how many he took from this island but I believe +he took some, altogether he carried ten or twelve Indians to Castile +according to the Portuguese History [Barros] and I saw them in Seville +yet I did not notice nor do I recollect that I counted them." Las Casas, +I. 419. + +[212-1] It is N. 80° E. 70 leagues. (Navarrete.) + +[212-2] Los siete Hermanos. (_Id._) + +[212-3] Bahia de Manzanillo. (_Id._) + +[212-4] Should be S.W. three leagues. + +[212-5] Rio Tapion, in the Bahia de Manzanillo. (_Id._) + +[212-6] A mistake for three leagues. (_Id._) + +[212-7] Should be W.S.W. (_Id._) + +[213-1] Isla Cabra. (Navarrete.) + +[213-2] Anchorage of Monte Cristi. (_Id._) + +[213-3] Punta Rucia. (_Id._) + +[214-1] Martin Alonso Pinzon had slipped away during the night of +November 21. + +[215-1] Here probably the island of Iguana Grande. + +[215-2] Jamaica. + +[215-3] On this myth see below under January 15. + +[215-4] It is remarkable that this report, which refers probably to +Yucatan and to the relatively high state of culture of the Mayas, drew no +further comment from Columbus. From our point of view it ought to have +made a much greater impression than we have evidence that it did; from +his point of view that he was off Asia it was just what was to be +expected and so is recorded without comment. + +[216-1] This is the large river Yaqui, which contains much gold in its +sand. It was afterwards called the Santiago. (Navarrete.) + +[217-1] Afterwards called the Rio de Santiago. (Navarrete.) + +[217-2] This should be 8 leagues. (_Id._) + +[217-3] Las Casas, I. 429, says the distance to the mines was not 4 +leagues. + +[217-4] Punta Isabelica. (_Id._) + +[217-5] The distance is 10-1/2 leagues, or 42 of the Italian miles used +by Columbus. (_Id._) + +[218-1] The mermaids [Spanish, "sirens"] of Columbus are the _manatis_, +or sea-cows, of the Caribbean Sea and great South American rivers. They +are now scarcely ever seen out at sea. Their resemblance to human beings, +when rising in the water, must have been very striking. They have small +rounded heads, and cervical vertebrae which form a neck, enabling the +animal to turn its head about. The fore limbs also, instead of being +pectoral fins, have the character of the arm and hand of the higher +mammalia. These peculiarities, and their very human way of suckling their +young, holding it by the forearm, which is movable at the elbow-joint, +suggested the idea of mermaids. The congener of the _manati_, which had +been seen by Columbus on the coast of Guinea, is the _dugong_. (Markham.) + +[218-2] Las Casas has "on the coast of Guinea where manequeta is +gathered" (I. 430). _Amomum Melequeta_, an herbaceous, reedlike plant, +three to five feet high, is found along the coast of Africa, from Sierra +Leone to the Congo. Its seeds were called "Grains of Paradise," or +_maniguetta_, and the coast alluded to by Columbus, between Liberia and +Cape Palmas, was hence called the Grain Coast. The grains were used as a +condiment, like pepper, and in making the spiced wine called _hippocras_. +(Markham.) + +[219-1] Rio Chuzona chica. (Navarrete.) + +[219-2] Reading _broma_ ("ship worm") for _bruma_ ("mist") in the +sentence: _sino que tiene mucha bruma_. De la Roquette in the French +translation gives _bruma_ the meaning of "shipworm," supposing it to be a +variant form of _broma_. The Italian translator of the letter on the +fourth voyage took _broma_ to be _bruma_, translated it _pruina e bruma_, +and consequently had Columbus's ship injured by frost near Panama in +April! _Cf._ Thacher, _Christopher Columbus_, II. 625, 790. + +[220-1] So called because the summit is always covered with white or +silver clouds. Las Casas, I. 432. A monastery of Dominicans was +afterwards built on Monte de Plata, in which Las Casas began to write his +history of the Indies in the year 1527. Las Casas, IV. 254. (Markham.) + +[220-2] Puerto de Plata, where a flourishing seaport town was afterwards +established; founded by Ovando in 1502. It had fallen to decay in 1606. +(Markham.) + +[220-3] Punta Macuris. The distance is 3, not 4 leagues. (Navarrete.) + +[220-4] Punta Sesua. The distance is only one league. (_Id._) + +[220-5] Cabo de la Roca. It should be 5, not 6 leagues. (_Id._) + +[220-6] Bahia Escocesa. (_Id._) + +[220-7] Las Casas says that none of these names remained even in his +time. I. 432. + +[221-1] This was the Peninsula of Samana. (Navarrete.) + +[221-2] Isla Yazual. (_Id._) + +[221-3] Cabo Cabron, or Lover's Cape; the extreme N.E. point of the +island, rising nearly 2000 feet above the sea. (Markham.) + +[221-4] Puerto Yaqueron. (Navarrete.) + +[221-5] Cabo Samana; called Cabo de San Theramo afterwards by Columbus +(Markham.)[TN-3] + +[221-6] The Bay of Samana. (Navarrete.) + +[221-7] Cayo de Levantados. (_Id._) + +[222-1] This should be, "who says that he was very ugly of countenance, +more so than the others that he had seen." + +[222-2] Las Casas says, I. 433, "Not charcoal but a certain dye they make +from a certain fruit." + +[222-3] Las Casas, I. 434, says there never were any cannibals in +Española. + +[223-1] Las Casas, I. 434, says that a section in the northeastern part +of Española "was inhabited by a tribe which called themselves _Mazariges_ +and others _Ciguayos_ and that they spoke different languages from the +rest of the island. I do not remember if they differed from each other in +speech since so many years have passed, and to-day there is no one to +inquire of, although I have talked many times with both generations; but +more than fifty years have gone by." The Ciguayos, he adds, were called +so because they wore their hair long as women do in Castile. This passage +shows that Las Casas was writing this part of his history a half-century +after he went first to Española, which was in 1502, with Ovando. + +[223-2] See p. 226, note 4, under Jan. 15. + +[223-3] Porto Rico. (Navarrete.) + +[223-4] Las Casas, I. 434, says that Guanin was not the name of an +island, but the word for a kind of base gold. + +[223-5] A gap in the original manuscript. + +[224-1] Las Casas, I. 435, has, "and as word of a palm-tree board which +is very hard and very heavy, not sharp but blunt, about two fingers thick +everywhere, with which as it is hard and heavy like iron, although a man +has a helmet on his head they will crush his skull to the brain with one +blow." + +[224-2] "This was the first fight that there was in all the Indies and +when the blood of the Indians was shed." Las Casas, I. 436. + +[225-1] Porto Rico. Navarrete says it is certain that the Indians called +Porto Rico Isla de Carib. + +[225-2] Probably Martinique or Guadeloupe. (Navarrete.) + +[226-1] By this calculation the Admiral entered the service of the +Catholic Sovereigns on January 20, 1486. (Navarrete.) + +[226-2] "What would he have said if he had seen the millions and millions +(_cuentos y millones_) that the sovereigns have received from his labors +since his death?" Las Casas, I. 437. + +[226-3] Porto Rico. + +[226-4] Columbus had read in Marco Polo of the islands of MASCULIA and +FEMININA in the Indian Seas and noted the passage in his copy. See ch. +XXXIII. of pt. III. of Marco Polo. On the other hand there is evidence +for an indigenous Amazon myth in the New World. The earliest sketch of +American folk-lore ever made, that of the Friar Ramon Pane in 1497, +preserved in Ferdinand Columbus's _Historie_ and in a condensed form in +Peter Martyr's _De Rebus Oceanicis_ (Dec. I., lib. IX.), tells the story +of the culture-hero Guagugiona, who set forth from the cave, up to that +time the home of mankind, "with all the women in search of other lands +and he came to Matinino, where at once he left the women and went away to +another country," etc., _Historie_ (London ed., 1867), p. 188. Ramon's +name is erroneously given as Roman in the _Historie_. On the Amazons in +Venezuela, see Oviedo, lib. XXV., cap. XIV. It may be accepted that the +Amazon myth as given by Oviedo, from which the great river derived its +name, River of the Amazons, is a composite of an Arawak folk-tale like +that preserved by Ramon Pane overlaid with the details of the Marco Polo +myth, which in turn derives from the classical myth. + +[227-1] _Y los mas le ponen allí yerba_, "and the most of them put on +poison." The description of these arrows corresponds exactly with that +given by Sir E. im Thurn of the poisoned arrows of the Indians of Guiana, +which still have "adjustable wooden tips smeared with poison, which are +inserted in the socket at the end of a reed shaft." _Among the Indians of +Guiana_, p. 242. + +[227-2] Capsicum. (Markham.) + +[228-1] Gulf of the Arrows. This was the Bay of Samana, into which the +river Yuna flows. (Navarrete.) + +[228-2] Porto Rico. It would have been distant about 30 leagues. +(Navarrete.) + +[229-1] "The sons remain with their mothers till the age of fourteen when +they go to join their fathers in their separate abode." Marco Polo, pt. +III., ch. XXXIII. _Cf._ p. 226, note 4. + +[229-2] Now called Cabod el Engaño,[TN-4] the extreme eastern point of +Española. It had the same name when Las Casas wrote. (Markham.) + +[229-3] Alcatraz. + +[230-1] The _almadrabas_, or tunny fisheries of Rota, near Cadiz, were +inherited by the Duke, as well as those of Conil, a little fishing town 6 +leagues east of Cadiz. (Markham.) + +[230-2] _Un pescado_ (a fish), called the _rabiforcado_. For _un +pescado_, we should probably read _una ave pescadora_, and translate: a +fishing bird, called _rabiforcado_. See entry for September 29 and note. + +[230-3] _Alcatraces_, _rabos de juncos_, and _rabiforcados_: boobies, +boatswain-birds, and frigate-birds. The translator has not been +consistent in selecting English equivalents for these names. In the entry +of January 18 _rabiforcado_ is frigate-bird; in that of January 19 _rabo +de junco_ is frigate-bird; in that of January 21 _rabo de junco_ is +_boatswain-bird_. September 14 _garjao_ is the tern, while on January 19 +the _rabiforcado_ is the tern. On these birds, see notes 11, 12, 13, and +20. See also Oviedo, _Historia General y natural de las Indias_, lib. +XIV., cap. I., for descriptions of these birds. + +[231-1] _Rabiforcados y pardelas._ Las Casas, I. 440, has _aves +pardelas_. Talhausen, _Neues Spanisch-deutsches Wörterbuch_, defines +_pardelas_ as _Peters-vogel_, _i.e._, petrel. + +[231-2] _Rabos de juncos y pardelas._ The translator vacillates between +sandpipers and terns in rendering _pardelas_. _Cf._ January 28 and 31, +but as has just been noted "petrels" is the proper word. + +[231-3] An error of the transcriber for miles. Each glass being +half-an-hour, going six miles an hour, they would have made 33 miles or +8-1/4 leagues in five hours and a half. (Navarrete.) + +[233-1] Petrels. + +[233-2] The English equivalent is dory, or gilthead. + +[234-1] Petrels. + +[235-1] Vicente Yañez Pinzon. + +[235-2] Later a rich citizen of the city of Santo Domingo, Española, +where he was known as Roldan the pilot. Las Casas, I. 443. + +[236-1] The name is also written Peralonso Niño. He made one of the first +voyages to the mainland of South America after the third voyage of +Columbus. See Irving, _Companions of Columbus_. Bourne, _Spain in +America_, p. 69. + +[237-1] A gap in the original manuscript. + +[238-1] Martin Alonso Pinzon succeeded in bringing the caravel _Pinta_ +into port at Bayona in Galicia. He went thence to Palos, arriving in the +evening of the same day as the _Niña_ with the Admiral. Pinzon died very +soon afterwards. Oviedo [I. 27] says: "He went to Palos to his own house +and died after a few days since he went there very ill." (Markham.) + +[239-1] Virgin of Guadalupe was the patroness of Estremadura. As many of +the early colonists went from Estremadura there came to be a good number +of her shrines in Mexico. _Cf._ R. Ford, _Handbook for Spain_, index +under "Guadalupe." + +[239-2] A full account of the shrine at Loreto may be found in Addis and +Arnold, _Catholic Dictionary_, under "Loreto." + +[239-3] "This is the house where the sailors of the country particularly +have their devotions." Las Casas, I. 446. Moguer was a village near +Palos. + +[240-1] See page 108, note 1. and entry for October 10. + +[241-1] As Beatriz Enriquez, the mother of Ferdinand, was still living, +this passage has occasioned much perplexity. A glance at the +corresponding passage, quoted in direct discourse from this entry in the +Journal, in the _Historie_ of Ferdinand, shows that the words "orphans +without father or mother" were not in the original Journal, if we can +trust this transcript. On the other hand, Las Casas, in his _Historia_, +I. 447, where he used the original Journal and not the abridgment that +has come down to us, has the words "_huerfanos de padre y madre en tierra +estraña_." It may be that Ferdinand noted the error of the original +Journal and quietly corrected it. + +[241-2] In Ferdinand's text nothing is said explicitly about the Indies. + +[241-3] There is nothing corresponding to this in Ferdinand's extract +from the Journal. Was this omission also a case of pious revision? + +The Admiral thought that there could be no great storms in the countries +he had discovered, because trees (mangroves) actually grew with their +roots in the sea. The herbage on the beach nearly reached the waves, +which does not happen when the sea is rough. (Markham.) + +[241-4] Ferdinand Columbus has preserved in his life of his father the +exact words of the Journal for the last two pages of the entry for +February 14. The extract is given here to illustrate the character of the +work of the epitomizer who prepared the text of the Journal as it has +come down to us. "I should have borne this fortune with less distress if +my life alone had been in peril, since I am aware that I am in debt to +the Most High Creator for my life and because at other times I have found +myself so near to death that almost nothing remained but to suffer it. +But what caused me boundless grief and trouble was the reflection that, +now that Our Lord had been pleased to enlighten me with the faith and +with the certainty of this undertaking in which he had already given me +the victory, that just now, when our gainsayers were to be convinced and +your Highnesses were to receive from me glory and enlargement of your +high estate, the Divine Majesty should will to block it with my death. +This last would have been more endurable if it did not involve that of +the people I brought with me with the promise of a very prosperous issue. +They seeing themselves in such a plight not only cursed their coming but +even the fear or the restraint which after my persuasions prevented them +from turning back from the way as many times they were resolved to do. +And above all this my grief was redoubled at the vision before my eyes +and at the recollection of two little sons that I had left at their +studies in Cordova without succor in a strange land and without my having +rendered (or at least without its being made manifest) the service for +which one might trust that your Highnesses would remember them. + +"And although on the one hand I was comforted by the faith that I had +that Our Lord would never suffer a work which would highly exalt his +Church, which at length after so much opposition and such labors I had +brought to the last stage, to remain unaccomplished and that I should be +broken; on the other hand, I thought that, either on account of my +demerits or to prevent my enjoying so much glory in this world, it was +his pleasure to take it away from me, and so while thus in perplexity I +bethought myself of the venture of your Highnesses who even if I should +die and the ship be lost, might find means of not losing a victory +already achieved and that it might be possible in some way for the news +of the success of my voyage to come to your ears; wherefore I wrote on a +parchment with the brevity that the time demanded how I had discovered +the lands that I had promised to, and in how many days; and the route I +had followed; and the goodness of the countries, and the quality of their +inhabitants and how they were the vassals of your Highnesses who had +possession of all that had been found by me. This writing folded and +sealed I directed to your Highnesses with the superscription or promise +of a thousand ducats to him who should deliver it unopened, in order +that, if some foreigners should find it, the truth of superscription +might prevent them from disposing of the information which was inside. +And I straightway had a large cask brought and having wrapped the writing +in a waxed cloth and put it into a kind of tart or cake of wax I placed +it in the barrel which, stoutly hooped, I then threw into the sea. All +believed that it was some act of devotion. Then because I thought it +might not arrive safely and the ships were all the while approaching +Castile I made another package like that and placed it on the upper part +of the poop in order that if the ship should sink the barrel might float +at the will of fate." + +[243-1] The bonnet was a small sail usually cut to a third the size of +the mizzen, or a fourth of the mainsail. It was secured through +eyelet-holes to the leech of the mainsail, in the manner of a studding +sail. (Navarrete.) + +[243-2] On this day the Admiral dated the letter to Santangel, the +_escribano de racion_, which is given below on pp. 263-272. + +[244-1] This was on Sunday, 17th of February. (Navarrete.) + +[244-2] The port of San Lorenzo. (_Id._). + +[246-1] The incredulity of the Portuguese governor as to these assertions +was natural. The title Admiral of the Ocean Sea was novel and this was +the first time it was announced that Spain or any other European power +had possessions in the Indies. + +[247-1] Half the crew were still detained on shore. + +[248-1] That the site of the Garden of Eden was to be found in the Orient +was a common belief in the Middle Ages and later. _Cf._ the _Book of Sir +John Mandeville_, ch. XXX. + +[249-1] The last of the canonical hours of prayer, about nine in the +evening. + +[252-1] On this day the Admiral probably wrote the postscript to his +letter Santangel written at sea on February 15. + +[253-1] Modern scholars have too hastily identified this Bartolomé Diaz +with the discoverer of the Cape of Good Hope. There is no evidence for +this except the identity of the name. Against the supposition are the +facts that neither Columbus, Las Casas, nor Ferdinand remark upon this +meeting with the most eminent Portuguese navigator of the time, and that +this Diaz is a subordinate officer on this ship who is sent to summon +Columbus to report to the captain. That the great admiral of 1486-1487 +would in 1493 be a simple _Patron_ on a single ship is incredible. + +[253-2] João II. + +[254-1] The treaty of Alcaçovas signed by Portugal September 8, 1479, and +by Spain March 6, 1480. In it Ferdinand and Isabella relinquished all +rights to make discoveries along the coast of Africa and retained of the +African islands only the Canaries. The Spanish text is printed in _Alguns +Documentos da Torre do Tombo_ (Lisbon, 1892), pp. 45-46. See also +Vignaud, _Toscanelli and Columbus_, pp. 61-64. + +[254-2] "The Mine," more commonly El Mina, a station established on the +Gold Coast by Diogo de Azambuja in 1482. The full name in Portuguese was +S. Jorge da Mina, St. George of the Mine. + +[255-1] The Portuguese historian Ruide Pina, in his _Cronica D'El Rey +João_, gives an account of Columbus's meeting with the king which is +contemporary. From his official position as chief chronicler and head of +the national archives and from the details which he mentions it is safe +to conclude that he was an eye-witness. + +"In the following year, 1493, while the king was in the place of the Val +do Paraiso which is above the Monastery of Sancta Maria das Vertudes, on +account of the great pestilences which prevailed in the principal places +in this district, on the sixth of March there arrived at Restello in +Lisbon Christovam Colombo, an Italian who came from the discovery of the +islands of Cipango and Antilia which he had accomplished by the command +of the sovereigns of Castile from which land he brought with him the +first specimens of the people, gold and some other things that they have; +and he was entitled Admiral of them. And the king being informed of this, +commanded him to come before him and he showed that he felt disgusted and +grieved because he believed that this discovery was made within the seas +and bounds of his lordship of Guinea which was prohibited and likewise +because the said Admiral was somewhat raised from his condition and in +the account of his affairs always went beyond the bounds of the truth and +made this thing in gold, silver, and riches much greater than it was. The +king was accused of negligence in withdrawing from him for not giving him +credit and authority in regard to this discovery for which he had first +come to make request of him. And although the king was urged to consent +to have him slain there, since with his death the prosecution of this +enterprise so far as the sovereigns of Castile were concerned would cease +on account of the decease of the discoverer; and that this could be done +without suspicion if he consented and ordered it, since as he was +discourteous and greatly elated they could get involved with him in such +a way that each one of these his faults would seem to be the true cause +of his death; yet the king like a most God-fearing prince not only +forbade this but on the contrary did him honor and showed him kindness +and therewith sent him away." _Collecçaõ de Livros Ineditos de Historia +Portugueza_, II. 178-179. It will be noted that according to this account +Columbus said he had discovered Cipango and Antilia, a mythical island +which is represented on the maps of the fifteenth century, and that +Columbus is called Colombo his Italian name, and not Colom or Colon. + +[256-1] This may have been her brother, the Duke of Bejar, afterwards +King Manoel. + +[256-2] _Espadim_: a Portuguese gold piece coined by João II. Las Casas, +I. 466, says: "20 _Espadinos_, a matter of 20 ducats." The Espadim +contained 58 to 65 grains of gold. W.C. Hazlitt, _Coinage of European +Nations, sub voce_. King João II. gave Columbus's pilot almost exactly +the sum which Henry VII. gave to John Cabot, which was £10. In the French +translation and the translation in J.B. Thacher's _Christopher Columbus_ +the word _espadines_ is erroneously taken to be Spanish and rendered +"_Épées_," and "small short swords." + +[257-1] Having been absent 225 days. + + + + +LETTER FROM COLUMBUS TO LUIS DE SANTANGEL + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +This letter, the earliest published narrative of Columbus's first voyage, +was issued in Barcelona in April, 1493, not far from the time when the +discoverer was received in state by the King and Queen. The _Escribano de +Racion_, to whom it was addressed, was Luis de Santangel, who had deeply +interested himself in the project of Columbus and had advanced money to +enable Queen Isabella to meet the expenses of the voyage. He, no doubt, +placed a copy in the hands of the printer. Only two printed copies of +this Spanish letter, as it is called, have come down to us. One is a +folio of the first imprint, discovered and reproduced in 1889. Of this +the unique copy is in the Lenox Library in New York; its first page is +reproduced in facsimile in this volume, by courteous permission of the +authorities of the library. The other is a quarto of the second and +slightly corrected imprint, first made known in 1852 and first reproduced +in 1866. Facsimiles of both are given in Thacher's _Christopher +Columbus_, II. 17-20 and 33-40. + +Columbus sent a duplicate of this letter with some slight changes to +Gabriel Sanxis (Spanish form, Sanchez), the treasurer of Aragon, from +whose hands a copy came into the possession of Leander de Cosco, who +translated it into Latin, April 29, 1493. + +This Latin version was published in Rome, probably in May, 1493, and this +issue was rapidly followed by reprints in Rome, Basel, Paris, and +Antwerp. It is to this Latin version that the European world outside of +Spain was indebted for its first knowledge of the new discoveries. + +A poetical paraphrase in Italian by Giuliano Dati was published in Rome +in June, 1493. This is reprinted in Major's _Select Letters of Columbus_. +The first German edition of the letter was published in Strassburg in +1497. + +In the years 1493-1497 the Santangel letter was printed twice in Spanish, +and the duplicate of it, the Sanchez letter, was printed nine times in +Latin, five times in Dati's Italian paraphrase, and once in German. Until +the publication in 1571 of the _Historie_, the Italian translation of +Ferdinand Columbus's biography of his father, which contains an +abridgment of Columbus's _Journal_, these letters and the account in +Peter Martyr's _Decades de Rebus Oceanicis_, were the only sources of +information in regard to the first voyage accessible to the world at +large. The translation here given is that contained in Quaritch's _The +Spanish Letter of Columbus_ (London, 1893), with a few minor changes in +the wording. An English translation of the Latin or Sanchez letter may be +found in the first edition of Major's _Select Letters of Columbus_ +(London, 1847). This version is reprinted in P.L. Ford's _Writings of +Christopher Columbus_, New York, 1892. By an error in the title of the +first edition, Rome, 1493, Sanchez's Christian name is given as Raphael. + +The text of the Santangel letter published by Navarrete in 1825 was +derived from a manuscript preserved in the Spanish Archives at Simancas. +In 1858 the Brazilian scholar Varnhagen published an edition of the +Sanchez letter from a manuscript discovered by him in Valencia. Neither +of these manuscripts, however, has the authority of the first printed +editions. + +E.G.B. + +[Illustration: Facsimile of the first page of the folio (first) edition +of the Spanish text of Columbus's letter to Santangel, describing his +first voyage, dated February 15, 1493. From the original (unique) in the +New York Public Library (Lenox Building).] + + + + +LETTER FROM COLUMBUS TO LUIS DE SANTANGEL + + +SIR: As I know that you will have pleasure from the great victory which +our Lord hath given me in my voyage, I write you this, by which you +shall know that in thirty-three days I passed over to the Indies with +the fleet which the most illustrious King and Queen, our Lords, gave me; +where I found very many islands peopled with inhabitants beyond number. +And, of them all, I have taken possession for their Highnesses, with +proclamation and the royal standard displayed; and I was not gainsaid. +To the first which I found, I gave the name Sant Salvador, in +commemoration of His High Majesty, who marvellously hath given all this: +the Indians call it Guanaham.[263-1] The second I named the Island of +Santa Maria de Concepcion, the third Ferrandina, the fourth, Fair +Island,[263-2] the fifth La Isla Juana; and so for each one a new name. +When I reached Juana, I followed its coast westwardly, and found it so +large that I thought it might be mainland, the province of Cathay. And +as I did not thus find any towns and villages on the sea-coast, save +small hamlets with the people whereof I could not get speech, because +they all fled away forthwith, I went on further in the same direction, +thinking I should not miss of great cities or towns. And at the end of +many leagues, seeing that there was no change, and that the coast was +bearing me northwards, whereunto my desire was contrary, since the +winter was already confronting us, I formed the purpose of making from +thence to the South, and as the wind also blew against me, I determined +not to wait for other weather and turned back as far as a port agreed +upon; from which I sent two men into the country to learn if there were +a king, or any great cities. They travelled for three days, and found +innumerable small villages and a numberless population, but nought of +ruling authority; wherefore they returned.[264-1] I understood +sufficiently from other Indians whom I had already taken, that this +land, in its continuousness, was an island;[264-2] and so I followed its +coast eastwardly for a hundred and seven leagues as far as where it +terminated; from which headland I saw another island to the east, +eighteen leagues distant from this, to which I at once gave the name La +Spañola.[264-3] And I proceeded thither, and followed the northern +coast, as with La Juana, eastwardly for a hundred and eighty-eight great +leagues in a direct easterly course, as with La Juana. The which, and +all the others, are most fertile to an excessive degree, and this +extremely so. In it, there are many havens on the sea-coast, +incomparable with any others that I know in Christendom, and plenty of +rivers so good and great that it is a marvel. The lands thereof are +high, and in it are very many ranges of hills, and most lofty mountains +incomparably beyond the island of Tenerife,[264-4] all most beautiful in +a thousand shapes, and all accessible, and full of trees of a thousand +kinds, so lofty that they seem to reach the sky. And I am assured that +they never lose their foliage; as may be imagined, since I saw them as +green and as beautiful as they are in Spain during May. And some of them +were in flower, some in fruit, some in another stage according to their +kind. And the nightingale was singing, and other birds of a thousand +sorts, in the month of November, there where I was going. There are +palm-trees of six or eight species, wondrous to see for their beautiful +variety; but so are the other trees, and fruits, and plants therein. +There are wonderful pine-groves, and very large plains of verdure, and +there is honey, and many kinds of birds, and many various fruits. In the +earth there are many mines of metals; and there is a population of +incalculable number.[265-1] Española is a marvel; the mountains and +hills, and plains, and fields, and the soil, so beautiful and rich for +planting and sowing, for breeding cattle of all sorts, for building of +towns and villages. There could be no believing, without seeing, such +harbors as are here, as well as the many and great rivers, and excellent +waters, most of which contain gold. In the trees and fruits and plants, +there are great diversities from those of Juana. In this, there are many +spiceries, and great mines of gold and other metals. The people of this +island, and of all the others that I have found and seen, or not seen, +all go naked, men and women, just as their mothers bring them forth; +although some women cover a single place with the leaf of a plant, or a +cotton something which they make for that purpose. They have no iron or +steel, nor any weapons; nor are they fit thereunto; not because they be +not a well-formed people and of fair stature, but that they are most +wondrously timorous. They have no other weapons than the stems of reeds +in their seeding state, on the end of which they fix little sharpened +stakes. Even these, they dare not use; for many times has it happened +that I sent two or three men ashore to some village to parley, and +countless numbers of them sallied forth, but as soon as they saw those +approach, they fled away in such wise that even a father would not wait +for his son. And this was not because any hurt had ever been done to any +of them:--on the contrary, at every headland where I have gone and been +able to hold speech with them, I gave them of everything which I had, as +well cloth as many other things, without accepting aught therefor;--but +such they are, incurably timid. It is true that since they have become +more assured, and are losing that terror, they are artless and generous +with what they have, to such a degree as no one would believe but him +who had seen it. Of anything they have, if it be asked for, they never +say no, but do rather invite the person to accept it, and show as much +lovingness as though they would give their hearts. And whether it be a +thing of value, or one of little worth, they are straightways content +with whatsoever trifle of whatsoever kind may be given them in return +for it. I forbade that anything so worthless as fragments of broken +platters, and pieces of broken glass, and strap buckles,[266-1] should +be given them; although when they were able to get such things, they +seemed to think they had the best jewel in the world, for it was the hap +of a sailor to get, in exchange for a strap,[266-1] gold to the weight +of two and a half castellanos,[266-2] and others much more for other +things of far less value; while for new blancas[266-3] they gave +everything they had, even though it were [the worth of] two or three +gold castellanos, or one or two arrobas of spun[266-4] cotton. They took +even pieces of broken barrel-hoops, and gave whatever they had, like +senseless brutes; insomuch that it seemed to me bad. I forbade it, and I +gave gratuitously a thousand useful things that I carried, in order that +they may conceive affection, and furthermore may become Christians; for +they are inclined to the love and service of their Highnesses and of all +the Castilian nation, and they strive to combine in giving us things +which they have in abundance, and of which we are in need. And they knew +no sect, nor idolatry; save that they all believe that power and +goodness are in the sky, and they believed very firmly that I, with +these ships and crews, came from the sky; and in such opinion, they +received me at every place where I landed, after they had lost their +terror. And this comes not because they are ignorant: on the contrary, +they are men of very subtle wit, who navigate all those seas, and who +give a marvellously good account of everything, but because they never +saw men wearing clothes nor the like of our ships. And as soon as I +arrived in the Indies, in the first island that I found, I took some of +them by force, to the intent that they should learn [our speech] and +give me information of what there was in those parts. And so it was, +that very soon they understood [us] and we them, what by speech or what +by signs; and those [Indians] have been of much service. To this day I +carry them [with me] who are still of the opinion that I come from +Heaven [as appears] from much conversation which they have had with me. +And they were the first to proclaim it wherever I arrived; and the +others went running from house to house and to the neighboring villages, +with loud cries of "Come! come to see the people from Heaven!" Then, as +soon as their minds were reassured about us, every one came, men as well +as women, so that there remained none behind, big or little; and they +all brought something to eat and drink, which they gave with wondrous +lovingness. They have in all the islands very many _canoas_,[267-1] +after the manner of rowing-galleys,[267-2] some larger, some smaller; +and a good many are larger than a galley of eighteen benches. They are +not so wide, because they are made of a single log of timber, but a +galley could not keep up with them in rowing, for their motion is a +thing beyond belief. And with these, they navigate through all those +islands, which are numberless, and ply their traffic. I have seen some +of those _canoas_ with seventy and eighty men in them, each one with his +oar. In all those islands, I saw not much diversity in the looks of the +people, nor in their manners and language; but they all understand each +other, which is a thing of singular advantage for what I hope their +Highnesses will decide upon for converting them to our holy faith, unto +which they are well disposed. I have already told how I had gone a +hundred and seven leagues, in a straight line from West to East, along +the sea-coast of the Island of Juana; according to which itinerary, I +can declare that that island is larger than England and Scotland +combined;[268-1] as, over and above those hundred and seven leagues, +there remain for me, on the western side, two provinces whereto I did +not go--one of which they call Avan, where the people are born with +tails[268-2]--which provinces cannot be less in length than fifty or +sixty leagues, according to what may be understood from the Indians with +me, who know all the islands. This other, Española, has a greater +circumference than the whole of Spain from Col[ibre in Catal]unya, by +the sea-coast, as far as Fuente Ravia in Biscay; since, along one of its +four sides, I went for a hundred and eighty-eight great leagues in a +straight line from west to east.[268-3] This is [a land] to be +desired,--and once seen, never to be relinquished--in which (although, +indeed, I have taken possession of them all for their Highnesses, and +all are more richly endowed than I have skill and power to say, and I +hold them all in the name of their Highnesses who can dispose thereof as +much and as completely as of the kingdoms of Castile) in this Española, +in the place most suitable and best for its proximity to the gold mines, +and for traffic with the mainland both on this side and with that over +there belonging to the Great Can,[268-4] where there will be great +commerce and profit, I took possession of a large town which I named the +city of Navidad.[268-5] And I have made fortification there, and a fort +(which by this time will have been completely finished) and I have left +therein men enough for such a purpose, with arms and artillery, and +provisions for more than a year, and a boat, and a [man who is] master +of all seacraft for making others; and great friendship with the king of +that land, to such a degree that he prided himself on calling and +holding me as his brother. And even though his mind might change towards +attacking those men, neither he nor his people know what arms are, and +go naked. As I have already said, they are the most timorous creatures +there are in the world, so that the men who remain there are alone +sufficient to destroy all that land, and the island is without personal +danger for them if they know how to behave themselves. It seems to me +that in all those islands, the men are all content with a single wife; +and to their chief or king they give as many as twenty. The women, it +appears to me, do more work than the men. Nor have I been able to learn +whether they held personal property, for it seemed to me that whatever +one had, they all took share of, especially of eatable things. Down to +the present, I have not found in those islands any monstrous men, as +many expected,[269-1] but on the contrary all the people are very +comely; nor are they black like those in Guinea, but have flowing hair; +and they are not begotten where there is an excessive violence of the +rays of the sun. It is true that the sun is there very strong, although +it is twenty-six degrees distant from the equinoctial line.[269-2] In +those islands, where there are lofty mountains, the cold was very keen +there, this winter; but they endure it by being accustomed thereto, and +by the help of the meats which they eat with many and inordinately hot +spices. Thus I have not found, nor had any information of monsters, +except of an island which is here the second in the approach to the +Indies, which is inhabited by a people whom, in all the islands, they +regard as very ferocious, who eat human flesh. These have many canoes +with which they run through all the islands of India, and plunder and +take as much as they can. They are no more ill-shapen than the others, +but have the custom of wearing their hair long, like women; and they use +bows and arrows of the same reed stems, with a point of wood at the top, +for lack of iron which they have not. Amongst those other tribes who are +excessively cowardly, these are ferocious; but I hold them as nothing +more than the others. These are they who have to do with the women of +Matinino[270-1]--which is the first island that is encountered in the +passage from Spain to the Indies--in which there are no men. Those women +practise no female usages, but have bows and arrows of reed such as +above mentioned; and they arm and cover themselves with plates of copper +of which they have much. In another island, which they assure me is +larger than Española, the people have no hair. In this there is +incalculable gold; and concerning these and the rest I bring Indians +with me as witnesses. And in conclusion, to speak only of what has been +done in this voyage, which has been so hastily performed, their +Highnesses may see that I shall give them as much gold as they may need, +with very little aid which their Highnesses will give me; spices and +cotton at once, as much as their Highnesses will order to be shipped, +and as much as they shall order to be shipped of mastic,--which till now +has never been found except in Greece, in the island of Xio,[270-2] and +the Seignory sells it for what it likes; and aloe-wood as much as they +shall order to be shipped; and slaves as many as they shall order to be +shipped,--and these shall be from idolaters. And I believe that I have +discovered rhubarb and cinnamon, and I shall find that the men whom I am +leaving there will have discovered a thousand other things of value; as +I made no delay at any point, so long as the wind gave me an opportunity +of sailing, except only in the town of Navidad till I had left things +safely arranged and well established. And in truth I should have done +much more if the ships had served me as well as might reasonably have +been expected. This is enough; and [thanks to] Eternal God our Lord who +gives to all those who walk His way, victory over things which seem +impossible; and this was signally one such, for although men have talked +or written of those lands,[271-1] it was all by conjecture, without +confirmation from eyesight, amounting only to this much that the hearers +for the most part listened and judged that there was more fable in it +than anything actual, however trifling. Since thus our Redeemer has +given to our most illustrious King and Queen, and to their famous +kingdoms, this victory in so high a matter, Christendom should have +rejoicing therein and make great festivals, and give solemn thanks to +the Holy Trinity for the great exaltation they shall have by the +conversion of so many peoples to our holy faith; and next for the +temporal benefit which will bring hither refreshment and profit, not +only to Spain, but to all Christians. This briefly, in accordance with +the facts. Dated, on the caravel, off the Canary Islands,[271-2] the 15 +February of the year 1493. + +At your command, + +THE ADMIRAL. + + +POSTSCRIPT WHICH CAME WITHIN THE LETTER + +After having written this letter, and being in the sea of Castile, there +rose upon me so much wind, South and South-east,[272-1] that it has +caused me to lighten the vessels; however I ran hither to-day into this +port of Lisbon, which was the greatest wonder in the world; where I +decided to write to their Highnesses. I have always found the seasons +like May in all the Indies, whither I passed in thirty-three days, and +returned in twenty-eight, but that these storms have delayed me +twenty-three days running about this sea.[272-2] All the seamen say here +that there never has been so bad a winter nor so many shipwrecks. + +Dated the 14th of March.[272-3] + +Colom sent this letter to the Escrivano de Racion.[272-4] Of the islands +found in the Indies. Received with another for their Highnesses.[272-5] + +FOOTNOTES: + +[263-1] Guanahani in the Journal; see entry covering October 11 and 12. + +[263-2] The original text has Isla bella, which was a misprint for +Isabella. _Cf._ Journal, October 20. + +[264-1] _Cf._ Journal, November 2 and 6. + +[264-2] _Cf._ Journal, November 1, for Columbus's strong inclination to +regard Cuba as mainland. + +[264-3] _Cf._ Journal, December 9. + +[264-4] _Cf._ Journal, December 20 and note. + +[265-1] The prevalent Spanish, estimate of the population of Española at +the time of the first colonization was 1,100,000. The modern ethnologist +and critical historian, Oscar Peschel, placed it at less than 300,000 and +more than 200,000. The estimates of Indian population by the early +writers were almost invariably greatly exaggerated. _Cf._ Bourne, _Spain +in America_, pp. 213-214. and notes. + +[266-1] _Cabos de agugetas._ Rather the metallic tips of lacings or +straps. _Agugeta_ is a leather lacing or strap. The contemporary Latin +translator used _bingulae_, shoe-straps, shoe-latchets. + +[266-2] The _castellano_ was one-sixth of an ounce of gold. + +[266-3] _Blancas_ were little coins worth about one-third of a cent. + +[266-4] The _arroba_ was 25 pounds. + +[267-1] The first appearance of this West Indian word in Europe. + +[267-2] _Fustas de remo._ + +[268-1] _Cf._ Journal, December 23, and note. The reader will observe the +tone of exaggeration in the letter as compared with the Journal. + +[268-2] Marco Polo reported that in the kingdom of Lambri in Sumatra +"there are men who have tails like dogs, larger than a palm, and who are +covered with hair." Marco Polo, pt. III., ch. XIV. See Yule's note on the +legend of men with tails, Yule's _Marco Polo_, II. 284. The name Avan +(Anan in the Latin letter) does not occur in the Journal. Bernaldez, +_Historia de las Reyes Catolicos_,[TN-5] II. 19, gives Albao as one of +the provinces of Española. As this name is not found in his chief +source, Dr. Chanca's letter, he may have got it from Columbus and +through a lapse of memory transferred it from Cuba to Española. + +[268-3] The area of Spain is about 191,000 square miles; that of Española +or Hayti is 28,000. The extreme length of Hayti is 407 miles. + +[268-4] That is, with the mainland of Europe on this side of the Atlantic +and with the mainland on that side of the ocean belonging to the Great +Can, _i.e._, China. + +[268-5] _I.e._, Nativity, Christmas, because the wreck occurred on that +day. _Cf._ Journal, December 25 and January 4, and note to entry of +December 28. + +[269-1] Columbus had read in the _Imago Mundi_ of Pierre d'Ailly and +noted in the margin the passage which says that in the ends of the earth +there "were monsters of such a horrid aspect that it were hard to say +whether they were men or beasts." _Raccolta Colombiana_, pt. I., vol. +II., p. 468. _Cf._ also the stories in the _Book of Sir John Mandeville_, +chs. XXVII. and XXVIII. + +[269-2] Columbus apparently revised his estimate of the latitude on the +return, without, however, correcting his Journal; _cf._ entries for +October 30 and November 21. + +[270-1] See Journal, January 15, and note. The island is identified with +Martinique. + +[270-2] See Journal, November 12, and note. The Seignory was the +government of Genoa to which Chios [Scio] belonged at this time. + +[271-1] Such writers, for example, as Pierre d'Ailly, Marco Polo, and the +author of the _Book of Sir John Mandeville_, from whom Columbus had +derived most of his preconceptions which often biassed or misled him in +interpreting the signs of the natives. + +[271-2] According to the Journal, Columbus thought he was off the Azores, +February 15. + +[272-1] The storm of March 3d; see Journal. + +[272-2] The time of the return voyage, like that of the outgoing voyage, +is reckoned as that consumed in making the Atlantic passage from the last +island left on one side to the first one reached on the other. Just how +the twenty-three days is to be explained is not altogether clear. The +editor of Quaritch's _The Spanish Letter of Columbus_ supposed Columbus +to refer to the time which elapsed from February 16, when he arrived at +the Azores, to March 13, when he left Lisbon. + +[272-3] Columbus arrived at Lisbon March 4, and he is supposed by R.H. +Major to have written the postscript there, but not to have despatched +the letter until he reached Seville, March 15, when he redated it March +14. + +[272-4] The _Escrivano de Racion_ in the kingdom of Aragon was the high +steward or controller of the king's household expenditures. In Castile +the corresponding official was the _contador mayor_, chief auditor or +steward. Navarrete, I. 167. + +[272-5] No longer extant. These lines are a memorandum appended to the +text by Santangel or the printer, and might have been used as a title, as +the similar memorandum was used in the publication of the Latin letter. +The Admiral's name is spelled as in the Articles of Agreement "Colom." + + + + +LETTER FROM COLUMBUS TO FERDINAND AND ISABELLA CONCERNING THE +COLONIZATION AND COMMERCE OF ESPAÑOLA[273-1] + + +MOST HIGH AND POWERFUL LORDS: In obedience to what your Highnesses +command me, I shall state what occurs to me for the peopling and +management of the Spanish Island[273-2] and of all others, whether +already discovered or hereafter to be discovered, submitting myself, +however, to any better opinion. + +In the first place, in regard to the Spanish Island: that there should go +there settlers up to the number of two thousand[274-1] who may want to go +so as to render the possession of the country safer and cause it to be +more profitable and helpful in the intercourse and traffic with the +neighboring islands. + +Likewise, that in the said island three or four towns be founded at +convenient places, and the settlers be properly distributed among said +places and towns. + +Likewise, in order to secure the better and prompter settlement of the +said island, that the privilege of getting gold be granted exclusively to +those who actually settle and build dwelling-houses in the settlement +where they may be, in order that all may live close to each other and +more safely. + +Likewise, that in each place and settlement there be a mayor[274-2] or +mayors and a clerk[274-3] according to the use and custom of Castile. + +Likewise, that a church be built, and that priests or friars be sent +there for the administration of the sacraments, and for divine worship +and the conversion of the Indians. + +Likewise, that no settler be allowed to go and gather gold unless with a +permit from the governor or mayor of the town in which he lives, to be +given only upon his promising under oath to return to the place of his +residence and faithfully report all the gold which he may have gathered, +this to be done once a month, or once a week, as the time may be assigned +to him, the said report to be entered on the proper registry by the clerk +of the town in the presence of the mayor, and if so deemed advisable, in +the presence of a friar or priest selected for the purpose. + +Likewise, that all the gold so gathered be melted forthwith, and stamped +with such a stamp as the town may have devised and selected, and that it +be weighed and that the share of that gold which belongs to your +Highnesses be given and delivered to the mayor of the town, the proper +record thereof being made by the clerk and by the priest or friar, so +that it may not pass through only one hand and may so render the +concealing of the truth impossible. + +Likewise, that all the gold which may be found without the mark or seal +aforesaid in the possession of any one who formerly had reported once as +aforesaid, be forfeited and divided by halves, one for the informer and +the other for your Highnesses. + +Likewise, that one per cent. of all the gold gathered be set apart and +appropriated for building churches, and providing for their proper +furnishing and ornamentation, and to the support of the priests or friars +having them in their charge, and, if so deemed advisable, for the payment +of some compensation to the mayors and clerks of the respective towns, so +as to cause them to fulfil their duties faithfully, and that the balance +be delivered to the governor and treasurer sent there by your Highnesses. + +Likewise, in regard to the division of the gold and of the share which +belongs to your Highnesses, I am of the opinion that it should be +entrusted to the said governor and treasurer, because the amount of the +gold found may sometimes be large and sometimes small, and, if so deemed +advisable, that the share of your Highnesses be established for one year +to be one-half, the other half going to the gatherers, reserving for a +future time to make some other and better provision, if necessary. + +Likewise, that if the mayors and clerks commit any fraud or consent to +it, the proper punishment be inflicted upon them, and that a penalty be +likewise imposed upon those settlers who do not report in full the whole +amount of the gold which is in their possession. + +Likewise, that there be a treasurer[275-1] in the said island, who shall +receive all the gold belonging to your Highnesses, and shall have a clerk +to make and keep the proper record of the receipts, and that the mayors +and clerks of the respective towns be given the proper vouchers for +everything which they may deliver to the said treasurer. + +Likewise, that whereas the extreme anxiety of the colonists to gather +gold may induce them to neglect all other business and occupations, it +seems to me that prohibition should be made to them to engage in the +search of gold during some season of the year, so as to give all other +business, profitable to the island, an opportunity to be established and +carried on. + +Likewise, that as far as the business of discovering other lands is +concerned,[276-1] it is my opinion that permission to do so should be +given to everyone who desires to embark in it, and that some liberality +should be shown in reducing the fifth to be given away, so as to +encourage as many as possible for entering into such undertakings. + +And now I shall set forth my opinion as to the manner of sending vessels +to the said Spanish Island, and the regulation of this subject which must +be made, which is as follows: That no vessels should be allowed to unload +their cargoes except at one or two ports designated for that purpose, and +that a record should be made of all that they carry and unload; and that +no vessels should be allowed either to leave the island except from the +same ports, after a record has been made also of all that they have taken +on board, so that nothing can be concealed. + +Likewise, in regard to the gold to be brought from the island to Castile, +that the whole of it, whether belonging to your Highnesses or to some +private individual, must be kept in a chest, with two keys, one to be +kept by the master of the vessel and the other by some person chosen by +the governor and the treasurer, and that an official record must be made +of everything put in the said chest, in order that each one may have +what is his, and that any other gold, much or little, found outside of +the said chest in any manner be forfeited to the benefit of your +Highnesses, so as to cause the transaction to be made faithfully. + +Likewise, that all vessels coming from the said island must come to +unload to the port of Cadiz, and that no person shall be allowed to leave +the vessels or get in them until such person or persons of the said city +as may be appointed for this purpose by your Highnesses go on board the +same vessels, to whom the masters must declare all that they have +brought, and show the statement of everything they have in the cargoes, +so that it may be seen and proved whether the said ships have brought +anything hidden and not declared in the manifests at the time of +shipment. + +Likewise, that in the presence of the Justice of the said city of Cadiz +and of whosoever may be deputed for the purpose by your Highnesses, the +said chest shall be opened in which the gold is to be brought and that to +each one be given what belongs to him.[277-1] + +May your Highnesses keep me in their minds, while I, on my part, shall +ever pray to God our Lord to preserve the lives of your Highnesses and +enlarge their dominions. + +S. +S.A.S. +X.M.Y. +XPO FERENS.[277-2] + +Sent by the admiral. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[273-1] The original text of this letter will be most accessible in +Thacher, _Christopher Columbus_, III. 100-113. It is there accompanied by +a facsimile of the original manuscript and an English translation. The +translation here given is a revision of that made by Dr. José Ignacio +Rodriguez of Washington and printed in the _Report of the American +Historical Association_, 1894, pp. 452-455, as part of a paper by W.E. +Curtis on _Autographs of Christopher Columbus_. The text was first +printed by Justo Zaragoza in his _Cartas de Indias_, etc. (Madrid, 1877). +It was first translated by George Dexter in the _Proceedings of the +Massachusetts Historical Society_, Vol. XVI. This translation, which +contains some errors which seriously affect the meaning, is also to be +found in P.L. Ford, _Writings of Christopher Columbus_, pp. 67-74. +Zaragoza placed the date of this letter in 1497. It is the opinion of the +present editor that it should be placed between the first and the second +voyage. The arguments advanced by Lollis in favor of 1493 are conclusive. +See _Raccolta Colombiana_, parte I., tomo I., pp. lxxv-lxxx. + +The letter is of great importance as the first draft of a systematic +colonial policy for the newly discovered islands. Several of its +suggestions were incorporated in the letter of instructions which the +Sovereigns gave Columbus May 29, 1493, for the second voyage. See +Navarrete, _Viages_, II. 66-72. It was supplemented in 1494 by the +memorandum which the Admiral sent back to the sovereigns by Antonio de +Torres and the two together entitle Columbus to be considered the pioneer +lawgiver as well as the discoverer of the New World. _Cf._ Bourne, _Spain +in America_, pp. 204-206. + +[273-2] _La ysla Española._ So translated, for so it would sound to the +Sovereigns. There had not been time for Española to sound like a proper +name. + +[274-1] See Bourne, _Spain in America_, pp. 34-35, for the actual +equipment of the second voyage. + +[274-2] Alcalde. + +[274-3] _Escribano del pueblo._ + +[275-1] As the King and Queen on May 7, 1493, appointed Gomez Tello to go +with Columbus on the second voyage to act as receiver of the royal dues, +Thacher argues strongly, on the ground that this recommendation +presumably antedates the appointment of a treasurer, that this letter of +Columbus's was written earlier than May 7, 1493. + +[276-1] Such an authorization was given by the sovereigns, April 10, +1495, reserving Columbus's rights to one-eighth of the trade. Navarrete, +II. 166-167. The Admiral protested that this authorization led to +infringement of his rights and it was in so far revoked, June 2, 1497. + +[277-1] On the development of the fiscal and commercial regulations of +the Spanish colonial administration, see Bourne, _Spain in America_, pp. +282-301 and 337; Moses, _Establishment of Spanish Rule in America_, pp. +27-67. + +[277-2] The formal signature of Columbus which he enjoined upon his heir +in his deed of entail, February 28, 1498. See P.L. Ford, _Writings of +Christopher Columbus_, p. 90. If this letter was written, as is supposed, +in 1493, this is the earliest use of this monogram. Its meaning has never +been determined. The various conjectures are presented by Thacher, +_Christopher Columbus_, III. 454-458. + + + + +LETTER OF DR. CHANCA ON THE SECOND VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +Dr. Chanca of Seville volunteered to go to the Indies, and on May 23, +1493, the King and Queen appointed him surgeon (Navarrete, _Viages_, II. +54). This letter was written to the cabildo or town council of Seville +and is the first narrative of one of Columbus's voyages that we have +exactly as it was written by a private observer. It is also the first +description of the natives that we have from an observer of scientific +training. The original text was first printed by Navarrete in his +_Viages_ in 1825. The original manuscript or a copy came into the +possession of the historian Bernaldez, who embodied it with a few +trifling changes and omissions in his _Historia de Los Reyes Catolicos_, +chs. CXIX., CXX. (Seville ed., 1870), Vol. II., pp. 5-36. + +Columbus kept a journal on this voyage which is no longer extant. +Abridgments of it are preserved to us in the _Historie_ of Ferdinand +Columbus and in the _Historia de las Indias_ of Las Casas. There are +other contemporary narratives of the voyage from private hands, but they +are either made up from conversations with those who went on the voyage, +like the letters of Simone Verde, printed in Harrisse, _Christophe +Colomb_, II. 68-78, or the account in Books II. and III. of the first +decade of Peter Martyr's _De Rebus Oceanicis_, or a literary +embellishment of some private letters like the translation into Latin by +Nicolo Syllacio of some letters he received from Guillelmo Coma who went +on the voyage. The Syllacio-Coma letter and Peter Martyr's account in its +earliest published form, the Venetian _Libretto de tutta la Navigatione +de Re de Spagna de le Isole et Terreni novamente Trovati_, are +accessible in English in Thacher, _Christopher Columbus_, II. 243-262, +489-502. These two narratives gave the European public its first +knowledge of the second voyage. The Syllacio-Coma letter was published +late in 1494 or early in 1495, and the _Libretto_ in Venice in 1504. + +The translation of Dr. Chanca's letter given here is that of R.H. Major. +It has been carefully revised to bring it into closer conformity to the +original. Any noteworthy changes will be indicated. Attention may be +called to a somewhat important correction of the text on p. 304. + +Of Dr. Chanca personally little or nothing is known beyond what has been +mentioned except that he devoted himself with zeal and self-sacrifice to +his duties. In the report of the Second Voyage which Columbus prepared +January 30, 1494, and sent off by Antonio de Torres February 2, he +charged Torres as follows in regard to Dr. Chanca. "You will inform their +Highnesses of the labor that Dr. Chanca is performing on account of the +many that are ill and the lack of supplies and that with all this he is +conducting himself with great diligence and kindness in everything that +concerns his duties," etc. Major, _Select Letters of Columbus_, pp. 93, +94. + +E.G.B. + + + + +LETTER OF DR. CHANCA ON THE SECOND VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS + +_A letter addressed to the Town Council of Seville by Dr. Chanca, a + native of that city, and physician to the fleet of Columbus, on his + second voyage to the Indies, describing the principal events which + occurred during that voyage_ + +_Most noble Lord_:-- + +Since the occurrences which I relate in private letters to other persons +are not of such general interest as those which are contained in this +epistle, I have resolved to give you a distinct narrative of the events +of our voyage, as well as to treat of the other matters which form the +subject of my petition to your Lordship. The news I have to communicate +are as follows: The expedition which their Catholic Majesties sent, by +Divine permission, from Spain to the Indies, under the command of +Christopher Columbus, Admiral of the Ocean, left Cadiz on the +twenty-fifth of September, of the year [1493, with seventeen ships well +equipped and with 1200 fighting men or a little less,][283-1] with wind +and weather favorable for the voyage. This weather lasted two days, +during which time we managed to make nearly fifty leagues; the weather +then changing, we made little or no progress for the next two days; it +pleased God, however, after this, to restore us fine weather, so that in +two days more we reached the Great Canary. Here we put into harbor, which +we were obliged to do, to repair one of the ships which made a great deal +of water; we remained all that day, and on the following set sail again, +but were several times becalmed, so that we were four or five days +before we reached Gomera. We had to remain at Gomera some days[284-1] to +lay in our stores of meat, wood, and as much water as we could stow, +preparatory to the long voyage which we expected to make without seeing +land: thus through the delay at these two ports, and being calmed one day +after leaving Gomera, we were nineteen or twenty days before we arrived +at the island of Ferro. After this we had, by the goodness of God, a +return of fine weather, more continuous than any fleet ever enjoyed +during so long a voyage, so that leaving Ferro on the thirteenth of +October, within twenty days we came in sight of land; and we should have +seen it in fourteen or fifteen days, if the ship _Capitana_[284-2] had +been as good a sailer as the other vessels; for many times the others had +to shorten sail, because they were leaving us much behind. During all +this time we had great good fortune, for throughout the voyage we +encountered no storm, with the exception of one on St. Simon's +eve,[284-3] which for four hours put us in considerable jeopardy. + +On the first Sunday after All Saints, namely the third of November, about +dawn, a pilot of the flagship cried out, "The reward, I see the land!" + +The joy of the people was so great, that it was wonderful to hear their +cries and exclamations of pleasure; and they had good reason to be +delighted; for they had become so wearied of bad living, and of working +the water out of the ships, that all sighed most anxiously for land. The +pilots of the fleet reckoned on that day, that between leaving Ferro and +first reaching land, we had made eight hundred leagues; others said seven +hundred and eighty (so that the difference was not great), and three +hundred more between Ferro and Cadiz, making in all eleven hundred +leagues; I do not therefore feel as one who had not seen enough of the +water. On the morning of the aforesaid Sunday, we saw lying before us an +island, and soon on the right hand another appeared: the first[285-1] was +high and mountainous, on the side nearest to us; the other[285-2] flat, +and very thickly wooded. As soon as it became lighter, other islands +began to appear on both sides; so that on that day, there were six +islands to be seen lying in different directions, and most of them of +considerable size. We directed our course towards that which we had first +seen, and reaching the coast, we proceeded more than a league in search +of a port where we might anchor, but without finding one; all that part +of the island which met our view, appeared mountainous, very beautiful, +and green even up to the water, which was delightful to see, for at that +season, there is scarcely any thing green in our own country. When we +found that there was no harbor there, the Admiral decided that we should +go to the other island, which appeared on the right, and which was at +four or five leagues distance; one vessel however still remained on the +first island all that day seeking for a harbor, in case it should be +necessary to return thither. At length, having found a good one, where +they saw both people and dwellings, they returned that night to the +fleet, which had put into harbor at the other island,[285-3] and there +the Admiral, accompanied by a great number of men, landed with the royal +banner in his hands, and took formal possession on behalf of their +Majesties. This island was filled with an astonishingly thick growth of +wood; the variety of unknown trees, some bearing fruit and some flowers, +was surprising, and indeed every spot was covered with verdure. We found +there a tree whose leaf had the finest smell of cloves that I have ever +met with; it was like a laurel leaf, but not so large: but I think it was +a species of laurel. There were wild fruits of various kinds, some of +which our men, not very prudently, tasted; and upon only touching them +with their tongues, their countenances became inflamed[286-1] and such +great heat and pain followed, that they seemed to be mad, and were +obliged to resort to refrigerants to cure themselves. We found no signs +of any people in this island, and concluded it was uninhabited; we +remained only two hours, for it was very late when we landed, and on the +following morning we left for another very large island,[286-2] situated +below this at the distance of seven or eight leagues. We approached it +under the side of a great mountain, that seemed almost to reach the +skies, in the middle of which rose a peak, higher than all the rest of +the mountain, whence many streams diverged into different channels, +especially towards the part at which we arrived. At three leagues +distance, we could see a fall of water as broad as an ox, which +discharged itself from such a height that it appeared to fall from the +sky; it was seen from so great a distance that it occasioned many wagers +to be laid on board the ships, some maintaining that it was but a series +of white rocks, and others that it was water. When we came nearer to it, +it showed itself distinctly, and it was the most beautiful thing in the +world to see from how great a height and from what a small space so large +a fall of water was discharged. As soon as we neared the island the +Admiral ordered a light caravel to run along the coast to search for a +harbor; the captain put into land in a boat, and seeing some houses, +leapt on shore and went up to them, the inhabitants fleeing at sight of +our men; he then went into the houses and there found various household +articles that had been left unremoved, from which he took two parrots, +very large and quite different from any we had before seen; he found a +great quantity of cotton, both spun and prepared for spinning, and +articles of food, of all of which he brought away a portion; besides +these, he also brought away four or five bones of human arms and legs. On +seeing these we suspected that we were amongst the Caribbee islands, +whose inhabitants eat human flesh; for the Admiral, guided by the +information respecting their situation which he had received from the +Indians of the islands discovered in his former voyage, had directed his +course with a view to their discovery, both because they were the nearest +to Spain, and because this was the direct track for the island of +Española, where he had left some of his people. Thither, by the goodness +of God and the wise management of the Admiral, we came in as straight a +track as if we had sailed by a well known and frequented route. This +island is very large, and on the side where we arrived it seemed to us to +be twenty-five leagues in length. We sailed more than two leagues along +the shore in search of a harbor; on the part towards which we moved +appeared very high mountains, and on that which we left extensive plains; +on the sea-coast there were a few small villages, whose inhabitants fled +as soon as they saw the sails: at length after proceeding two leagues we +found a port late in the evening. That night the Admiral resolved that +some of the men should land at break of day in order to confer with the +natives, and learn what sort of people they were; although it was +suspected, from the appearance of those who had fled at our approach, +that they were naked, like those whom the Admiral had seen in his former +voyage. That morning certain captains started out; one of them arrived at +the dinner hour, and brought away a boy of about fourteen years of age, +as it afterwards appeared, who said that he was one of the prisoners +taken by these people. The others divided themselves, and one party took +a little boy whom a man was leading by the hand, but who left him and +fled; this boy they sent on board immediately with some of our men; +others remained, and took certain women, natives of the island, together +with other women from among the captives who came of their own accord. +One captain of this last company, not knowing that any intelligence of +the people had been obtained, advanced farther into the island and lost +himself, with the six men who accompanied him: they could not find their +way back until after four days, when they lighted upon the sea-shore, +and following the line of coast returned to the fleet.[288-1] We had +already looked upon them as killed and eaten by the people that are +called Caribbees; for we could not account for their long absence in any +other way, since they had among them some pilots who by their knowledge +of the stars could navigate either to or from Spain, so that we imagined +that they could not lose themselves in so small a space. On this first +day of our landing several men and women came on the beach up to the +water's edge, and gazed at the ships in astonishment at so novel a sight; +and when a boat pushed on shore in order to speak with them, they cried +out, "tayno, tayno,"[288-2] which is as much as to say, "good, good," and +waited for the landing of the sailors, standing by the boat in such a +manner that they might escape when they pleased. The result was, that +none of the men could be persuaded to join us, and only two were taken by +force, who were secured and led away. More than twenty women of the +captives were taken with their own consent, and other women, natives of +the island, were surprised and carried off; several of the boys, who were +captives, came to us fleeing from the natives of the island who had taken +them prisoners. We remained eight days in this port in consequence of the +loss of the aforesaid captain, and went many times on shore, passing +amongst the dwellings and villages which were on the coast; we found a +vast number of human bones and skulls hung up about the houses, like +vessels intended for holding various things.[289-1] There were very few +men to be seen here, and the women informed us that this was in +consequence of ten canoes having gone to make an attack upon other +islands. These islanders appeared to us to be more civilized than those +that we had hitherto seen; for although all the Indians have houses of +straw, yet the houses of these people are constructed in a much superior +fashion, are better stocked with provisions, and exhibit more evidences +of industry, both on the part of the men and the women. They had a +considerable quantity of cotton, both spun and prepared for spinning, and +many cotton sheets, so well woven as to be no way inferior to those of +our country. We inquired of the women, who were prisoners in the island, +what people these islanders were; they replied that they were Caribbees. +As soon as they learned that we abhorred such people,[289-2] on account +of their evil practice of eating human flesh, they were much delighted; +and, after that, if they brought forward any woman or man of the +Caribbees, they informed us (but secretly) that they were such, still +evincing by their dread of their conquerors, that they belonged to a +vanquished nation, though they knew them all to be in our power. + +We were enabled to distinguish which of the women were Caribbees, and +which were not, by the Caribbees wearing on each leg two bands of woven +cotton, the one fastened round the knee, and the other round the ankle; +by this means they make the calves of their legs large, and the +above-mentioned parts very small, which I imagine that they regard as a +mark of elegance: by this peculiarity we distinguished them.[289-3] The +habits of these Caribbees are brutal. There are three islands: this is +called Turuqueira; the other, which was the first that we saw, is called +Ceyre; the third is called Ayay:[290-1] all these are alike as if they +were of one race, who do no injury to each other; but each and all of +them wage war against the other neighboring islands, and for the purpose +of attacking them, make voyages of a hundred and fifty leagues at sea, +with their numerous canoes, which are a small kind of craft with one +mast. Their arms are arrows, in the place of iron weapons and as they +have no iron, some of them point their arrows with tortoise-shell, and +others make their arrow-heads of fish spines, which are naturally barbed +like coarse saws: these prove dangerous weapons to a naked people like +the Indians, and may cause death or severe injury, but to men of our +nation, are not very formidable. In their attacks upon the neighboring +islands, these people capture as many of the women as they can, +especially those who are young and beautiful, and keep them for servants +and to have as concubines; and so great a number do they carry off, that +in fifty houses no men were to be seen; and out of the number of the +captives, more than twenty were young girls. These women also say that +the Caribbees use them with such cruelty as would scarcely be believed; +and that they eat the children which they bear to them, and only bring up +those which they have by their native wives. Such of their male enemies +as they can take alive, they bring to their houses to slaughter them, and +those who are killed they devour at once. They say that man's flesh is so +good, that there is nothing like it in the world; and this is pretty +evident, for of the bones which we found in their houses, they had gnawed +everything that could be gnawed, so that nothing remained of them, but +what from its great hardness, could not be eaten: in one of the houses we +found the neck of a man, cooking in a pot. When they take any boys +prisoners, they cut off their member and make use of them as servants +until they grow up to manhood, and then when they wish to make a feast +they kill and eat them; for they say that the flesh of boys and women is +not good to eat. Three of these boys came fleeing to us thus mutilated. + +At the end of four days arrived the captain who had lost himself with his +companions, of whose return we had by this time given up all hope; for +other parties had been twice sent out to seek him, one of which came back +on the same day that he rejoined us, without having gained any +information respecting the wanderers; we rejoiced at their arrival, +regarding it as a new accession to our numbers. The captain and the men +who accompanied him brought back some women and boys, ten in number. +Neither this party, nor those who went out to seek them, had seen any of +the men of the island, which must have arisen either from their having +fled, or possibly from there being but very few men in that locality; +for, as the women informed us, ten canoes had gone away to make an attack +upon the neighboring islands. The wanderers had returned from the +mountains in such an emaciated condition, that it was distressing to see +them; when we asked them how it was that they lost themselves, they said +that the trees were so thick and close that they could not see the sky; +some of them who were mariners had climbed the trees to get a sight of +the stars, but could never see them, and if they had not found their way +to the sea-coast, it would have been impossible to have returned to the +fleet. We left this island eight days after our arrival.[291-1] The next +day at noon we saw another island, not very large,[291-2] at about twelve +leagues distance from the one we were leaving; the greater part of the +first day of our departure we were kept close in to the coast of this +island by a calm, but as the Indian women whom we brought with us said +that it was not inhabited, but had been dispeopled by the Caribbees, we +made no stay in it. On that evening we saw another island;[291-3] and in +the night finding there were some sandbanks near, we dropped anchor, not +venturing to proceed until the morning. On the morrow another island +appeared, of considerable size, but we touched at none of these because +we were anxious to convey consolation to our people who had been left in +Española; but it did not please God to grant us our desire, as will +hereafter appear. Another day at the dinner hour we arrived at an island +which seemed to be worth the finding, for judging by the extent of +cultivation in it, it appeared very populous. We went thither and put +into harbor, when the Admiral immediately sent on shore a well manned +barge to hold speech with the Indians, in order to ascertain what race +they were, and also because we considered it necessary to gain some +information respecting our course; although it afterwards plainly +appeared that the Admiral, who had never made that passage before, had +taken a very correct route. But as matters of doubt should always be +brought to as great a certainty as possible by inquiry, he wished that +communication should be held with the natives at once, and some of the +men who went in the barge leapt on shore and went up to a village, whence +the inhabitants had already withdrawn and hidden themselves. They took in +this island five or six women and some boys, most of whom were captives, +like those in the other island; we learned from the women whom we had +brought with us, that the natives of this place also were Caribbees. As +this barge was about to return to the ships with the capture which they +had made, a canoe came along the coast containing four men, two women, +and a boy; and when they saw the fleet they were so stupefied with +amazement, that for a good hour they remained motionless at the distance +of nearly two cannon shots from the ships. In this position they were +seen by those who were in the barge and also by all the fleet. Meanwhile +those in the barge moved towards the canoe, but so close in shore, that +the Indians, in their perplexity and astonishment as to what all this +could mean, never saw them, until they were so near that escape was +impossible; for our men pressed on them so rapidly that they could not +get away, although they made considerable effort to do so. + +When the Caribbees saw that all attempt at flight was useless, they most +courageously took to their bows, both women and men; I say most +courageously, because they were only four men and two women, and our +people were twenty-five in number. Two of our men were wounded by the +Indians, one with two arrow-shots in his breast, and another with one in +his side, and if it had not happened that they carried shields and wooden +bucklers, and that they soon got near them with the barge and upset their +canoe, most of them would have been killed with their arrows. After their +canoe was upset, they remained in the water swimming and occasionally +wading (for there were shallows in that part), still using their bows as +much as they could, so that our men had enough to do to take them; and +after all there was one of them whom they were unable to secure till he +had received a mortal wound with a lance, and whom thus wounded they took +to the ships. The difference between these Caribbees and the other +Indians, with respect to dress, consists in their wearing their hair very +long, while the latter have it clipt and paint their heads with crosses +and a hundred thousand different devices, each according to his fancy; +which they do with sharpened reeds. All of them, both the Caribbees and +the others, are beardless, so that it is a rare thing to find a man with +a beard: the Caribbees whom we took had their eyes and eyebrows stained, +which I imagine they do from ostentation and to give them a more +frightful appearance. One of these captives said, that in an island +belonging to them called Cayre[293-1] (which is the first we saw, though +we did not go to it), there is a great quantity of gold; and that if we +were to take them nails and tools with which to make their canoes, we +might bring away as much gold as we liked. On the same day we left that +island, having been there no more than six or seven hours; and steering +for another point of land[293-2] which appeared to lie in our intended +course, we reached it by night. On the morning of the following day we +coasted along it, and found it to be a large extent of country, but not +continuous for it was divided into more than forty islets.[294-1] The +land was very high and most of it barren, an appearance which we have +never observed in any of the islands visited by us before or since: the +surface of the ground seemed to suggest the probability of its containing +metals. None of us went on shore here, but a small latteen caravel went +up to one of the islets and found in it some fishermen's huts; the Indian +women whom we brought with us said they were not inhabited. We proceeded +along the coast the greater part of that day, and on the evening of the +next we discovered another island called Burenquen,[294-2] which we +judged to be thirty leagues in length, for we were coasting along it the +whole of one day. This island is very beautiful and apparently fertile; +hither the Caribbees come with the view of subduing the inhabitants, and +often carry away many of the people. These islanders have no boats nor +any knowledge of navigation; but, as our captives inform us, they use +bows as well as the Caribbees, and if by chance when they are attacked +they succeed in taking any of their invaders, they will eat them in like +manner as the Caribbees themselves in the contrary event would devour +them. We remained two days in this island, and a great number of our men +went on shore, but could never get speech of the natives, who had all +fled, from fear of the Caribbees. All the above-mentioned islands were +discovered in this voyage, the Admiral having seen nothing of them in his +former voyage; they are all very beautiful and possess a most luxuriant +soil, but this last island appeared to exceed all the others in beauty. +Here terminated the islands, which on the side towards Spain had not been +seen before by the Admiral, although we regard it as a matter of +certainty that there is land more than forty leagues beyond the foremost +of these newly discovered islands, on the side nearest to Spain. We +believe this to be the case, because two days before we saw land we +observed some birds called rabihorcados,[295-1] marine birds of prey +which do not sit or sleep upon the water, making circumvolutions in the +air at the close of evening previous to taking their flight towards land +for the night. These birds could not be going to settle at more than +twelve or fifteen leagues distance, because it was late in the evening, +and this was on our right hand on the side towards Spain; from which we +all judged that there was land there still undiscovered; but we did not +go in search of it, because it would have taken us round out of our +intended route. I hope that in a few voyages it will be discovered. It +was at dawn that we left the before-mentioned island of Burenquen,[295-2] +and on that day before nightfall we caught sight of land, which though +not recognized by any of those who had come hither in the former voyage, +we believed to be Española, from the information given us by the Indian +women whom we had with us; and in this island we remain at +present.[295-3] Between this island and Burenquen another island appeared +at a distance, but of no great size. When we reached Española the land, +at the part where we approached it, was low and very flat,[295-4] on +seeing which, a general doubt arose as to its identity; for neither the +Admiral nor his companions, on the previous voyage, had seen it on this +side. + +The island being large, is divided into provinces; the part which we +first touched at, is called Hayti; another province adjoining it, they +call Xamaná;[295-5] and the next province is named Bohio,[295-6] where we +now are. These provinces are again subdivided, for they are of great +extent. Those who have seen the length of its coast, state that it is two +hundred leagues long, and I myself should judge it not to be less than a +hundred and fifty leagues: as to its breadth, nothing is hitherto known; +it is now forty days since a caravel left us with the view of +circumnavigating it,[296-1] and is not yet returned. The country is very +remarkable, and contains a vast number of large rivers, and extensive +chains of mountains, with broad open valleys, and the mountains are very +high; it does not appear that the grass is ever cut throughout the year. +I do not think they have any winter in this part, for at Christmas were +found many birds-nests, some containing the young birds, and others +containing eggs. No four-footed animal has ever been seen in this or any +of the other islands, except some dogs of various colors, as in our own +country, but in shape like large house-dogs;[296-2] and also some little +animals, in color and fur like a rabbit, and the size of a young rabbit, +with long tails, and feet like those of a rat; these animals climb up the +trees, and many who have tasted them, say they are very good to +eat:[296-3] there are not any wild beasts. + +There are great numbers of small snakes, and some lizards, but not many; +for the Indians consider them as great a luxury as we do pheasants; they +are of the same size as ours, but different in shape. In a small adjacent +island[296-4] (close by a harbor called Monte Cristo, where we stayed +several days), our men saw an enormous kind of lizard, which they said +was as large round as a calf, with a tail as long as a lance, which they +often went out to kill: but bulky as it was, it got into the sea, so that +they could not catch it.[297-1] There are, both in this and the other +islands, an infinite number of birds like those in our own country, and +many others such as we had never seen. No kind of domestic fowl has been +seen here, with the exception of some ducks in the houses in Zuruquia; +these ducks were larger than those of Spain, though smaller than +geese,--very pretty, with flat crests on their heads, most of them as +white as snow, but some black. + +We ran along the coast of this island nearly a hundred leagues, +concluding, that within this range we should find the spot where the +Admiral had left some of his men, and which we supposed to be about the +middle of the coast. As we passed by the province called Xamaná, we sent +on shore one of the Indians, who had been taken in the previous voyage, +clothed, and carrying some trifles, which the Admiral had ordered to be +given him. On that day died one of our sailors, a Biscayan, who had been +wounded in the affray with the Caribbees, when they were captured, as I +have already described, through their want of caution. As we were +proceeding along the coast, an opportunity was afforded for a boat to go +on shore to bury him, the boat being accompanied by two caravels to +protect it. When they reached the shore, a great number of Indians came +out to the boat, some of them wearing necklaces and ear-rings of gold, +and expressed a wish to accompany the Spaniards to the ships; but our men +refused to take them, because they had not received permission from the +Admiral. When the Indians found that they would not take them, two of +them got into a small canoe, and went up to one of the caravels that had +put in to shore; they were received on board with great kindness, and +taken to the Admiral's ship, where, through the medium of an interpreter, +they related that a certain king had sent them to ascertain who we were, +and to invite us to land, adding that they had plenty of gold, and also +of provisions, to which we should be welcome. The Admiral desired that +shirts, and caps, and other trifles, should be given to each of them, and +said that as he was going to the place where Guacamari dwelt, he would +not stop then, but that another time there would be an opportunity of +seeing him, and with that they departed. We continued our route till we +came to an harbor called Monte Cristi, where we remained two days, in +order to observe the character of the land; for the Admiral had an +objection to the spot where his men had been left with the view of making +a settlement. We went on shore therefore to see the character of the +land: there was a large river of excellent water close by;[298-1] but the +ground was inundated, and very ill-calculated for habitation. As we went +on making our observations on the river and the land, some of our men +found two dead bodies by the river's side, one with a rope round his +neck, and the other with one round his foot; this was on the first day of +our landing. On the following day they found two other corpses farther +on, and one of these was observed to have a great quantity of beard; this +was regarded as a very suspicious circumstance by many of our people, +because, as I have already said, all the Indians are beardless. This +harbor is twelve leagues[298-2] from the place where the Spaniards had +been left under the protection of Guacamari,[298-3] the king of that +province, whom I suppose to be one of the chief men of the island. After +two days we set sail for that spot, but as it was late when we arrived +there,[298-4] and there were some shoals, where the Admiral's ship had +been lost, we did not venture to put in close to the shore, but remained +that night at a little less than a league from the coast, waiting until +the morning, when we might enter securely. On that evening, a canoe, +containing five or six Indians, came out at a considerable distance from +where we were, and approached us with great celerity. The Admiral +believing that he insured our safety by keeping the sails set, would not +wait for them; they, however, perseveringly rowed up to us within a +cannon shot[299-1] and then stopped to look at us; but when they saw that +we did not wait for them, they put back and went away. After we had +anchored that night at the spot in question,[299-2] the Admiral ordered +two cannons to be fired, to see if the Spaniards, who had remained with +Guacamari, would fire in return, for they also had cannons with them; but +when we received no reply, and could not perceive any fires, nor the +slightest symptom of habitations on the spot, the spirits of our people +became much depressed, and they began to entertain the suspicion which +the circumstances were naturally calculated to excite. While all were in +this desponding mood, and when four or five hours of the night had passed +away, the same canoe which we had seen in the evening, came up, and the +Indians with a loud voice addressed the captain of the caravel, which +they first approached, inquiring for the Admiral;[299-3] they were +conducted to the Admiral's vessel, but would not go on board till he had +spoken to them, and they had asked for a light, in order to assure +themselves that it was he who conversed with them. One of them was a +cousin of Guacamari, who had been sent by him once before: it appeared, +that after they had turned back the previous evening, they had been +charged by Guacamari with two masks of gold as a present; one for the +Admiral, the other for a captain who had accompanied him on the former +voyage. They remained on board for three hours, talking with the Admiral +in the presence of all of us, he showing much pleasure in their +conversation, and inquiring respecting the welfare of the Spaniards whom +he had left behind. Guacamari's cousin replied, that those who remained +were all well, but that some of them had died of disease, and others had +been killed in quarrels that had arisen amongst them; and that Guacamari +was at some distance, lying ill of a wound in his leg, which was the +occasion of his not appearing, but that he would come on the next day. He +said also that two kings named Caonabó and Mayreni, had come to fight +with him and that they had burned the village. The Indians then departed, +saying they would return on the following day with the said Guacamari, +and left us consoled for that night. On the morning of the next day, we +were expecting that Guacamari would come; and, in the meantime, some of +our men landed by command of the Admiral, and went to the spot where the +Spaniards had formerly been: they found the building which they had +inhabited, and which they had in some degree fortified with a palisade, +burnt and levelled with the ground; they found also some cloaks and +clothing which the Indians had brought to throw upon the house. They +observed too that the Indians who were seen near the spot, looked very +shy, and dared not approach, but, on the contrary, fled from them. This +appeared strange to us, for the Admiral had told us that in the former +voyage, when he arrived at this place, so many came in canoes to see us, +that there was no keeping them off; and as we now saw that they were +suspicious of us, it gave us a very unfavorable impression. We threw +trifles, such as hawk bells[300-1] and beads, towards them, in order to +conciliate them, but only four, a relation of Guacamari's and three +others, took courage to enter the boat, and were rowed on board. When +they were asked concerning the Spaniards, they replied that all of them +were dead; we had been told this already by one of the Indians whom we +had brought from Spain, and who had conversed with the two Indians that +on the former occasion came on board with their canoe, but we had not +believed it. Guacamari's kinsman was asked who had killed them; he +replied that the king of Caonabó and king Mayreni had made an attack upon +them, and burnt the buildings on the spot, that many were wounded in the +affray, and among them Guacamari, who had received a wound in his thigh, +and had retired to some distance. He also stated that he wished to go and +fetch him; upon which some trifles were given to him, and he took his +departure for the place of Guacamari's abode. All that day we remained in +expectation of them, and when we saw that they did not come, many +suspected that the Indians who had been on board the night before, had +been drowned; for they had had wine given them two or three times, and +they had come in a small canoe that might be easily upset. The next +morning the Admiral went on shore, taking some of us with him; we went to +the spot where the settlement had been, and found it utterly destroyed by +fire, and the clothes of the Spaniards lying about upon the grass, but on +that occasion we saw no dead body. There were many different opinions +amongst us; some suspecting that Guacamari himself was concerned in the +betrayal and death of the Christians; others thought not, because his own +residence was burnt: so that it remained a very doubtful question. The +Admiral ordered all the ground which had been occupied by the +fortifications of the Spaniards to be searched, for he had left orders +with them to bury all the gold that they might get. While this was being +done, the Admiral wished to examine a spot at about a league's distance, +which seemed to be suitable for building a town, for it was already time +to do so;--and some of us went thither with him, making our observations +of the land as we went along the coast, until we reached a village of +seven or eight houses, which the Indians forsook when they saw us +approach, carrying away what they could, and leaving the things which +they could not remove, hidden amongst the grass, around the houses. These +people are so like beasts that they have not even the sense to select a +fitting place to live in; those who dwell on the shore, build for +themselves the most miserable hovels that can be imagined, and all the +houses are so covered with grass and dampness, that I am amazed at the +way they live. In these houses we found many things belonging to the +Spaniards, which it could not be supposed they would have bartered; such +as a very handsome Moorish mantle which had not been unfolded since it +was brought from Spain, stockings and pieces of cloth, also an anchor +belonging to the ship which the Admiral had lost here on the previous +voyage; with other articles, which the more confirmed our suspicions. On +examining some things which had been put away to keep in a basket, +closely woven and very secure, we found a man's head kept with great +care; this we judged might be the head of a father, or mother, or of some +person whom they much regarded:[302-1] I have since heard that many were +found in the same state, which makes me believe that our first impression +was the true one. After this we returned. We went on the same day to the +site of the settlement; and when we arrived, we found many Indians, who +had regained their courage, bartering gold with our men: they had +bartered to the extent of a mark;[302-2] we also learned that they had +shown where the bodies of eleven of the dead Spaniards were laid, which +were already covered with the grass that had grown over them; and they +all with one voice asserted that Caonabó and Mayreni had killed them; but +notwithstanding all this, we began to hear complaints that one of the +Spaniards had taken three women to himself, and another four; from whence +we drew the inference that jealousy was the cause of the misfortune that +had occurred. On the next morning, as no spot in that vicinity appeared +suitable for our making a settlement, the Admiral ordered a caravel to go +in one direction to look for a convenient locality, while some of us went +with him another way. In the course of our explorations, we discovered a +harbor, of great security, and a very favorable situation for a +settlement; but as it was far from where we wanted to have the gold mine, +the Admiral decided to settle only in some spot which would give us +greater certainty of attaining that object, provided the position of the +land should prove equally convenient. On our return, we found the other +caravel arrived, in which Melchior[303-1] and four or five other +trustworthy men had been exploring with a similar object. They reported +that as they went along the coast, a canoe came out to them in which were +two Indians, one of whom was the brother of Guacamari, and was recognized +by a pilot who was in the caravel. When he asked them "who goes there," +they replied that Guacamari sent to beg the Spaniards to come on shore, +as he had his settlement near, with nearly fifty houses. The chief men of +the party then went on shore in the boat, proceeded to the place where +Guacamari was, and found him stretched on his bed, complaining of a +severe wound. They conferred with him, and inquired respecting the +Spaniards; his reply was, in accordance with the account already given by +the others, viz.--that they had been killed by Caonabó and Mayreni, who +also had wounded him in the thigh; which he showed to them bandaged up: +on seeing which, they concluded that his statement was correct. At their +departure he gave to each of them a jewel of gold, according to his +estimation of their respective merits. The Indians beat the gold into +very thin plates, in order to make masks of it, and to be able to set it +in bitumen; if it were not so prepared it could not be mounted; other +ornaments they make of it, to wear on the head and to hang in the ears +and nostrils, for these also they require it to be thin; since they set +no store by it as wealth but only for adornment. Guacamari desired them +by signs and as well as he was able, to tell the Admiral that as he was +thus wounded, he prayed him to have the goodness to come to see him. The +sailors told this to the Admiral when he arrived. The next morning he +resolved to go thither, for the spot could be reached in three hours, +being scarcely three leagues distance from the place where we were; but +as it would be the dinner-hour when we arrived, we dined before we went +on shore. After dinner, the Admiral gave orders that all the captains +should come with their barges to proceed to the shore, for already on +that morning, previous to our departure, the aforesaid brother of +Guacamari had come to speak with the Admiral to urge him to come to the +place where Guacamari was. Then the Admiral went on shore accompanied by +all the principal officers, so richly dressed that they would have made a +fine appearance even in any of our chief cities. He took with him some +articles as presents, having already received from Guacamari a certain +quantity of gold, and it was reasonable that he should make a +commensurate response to his acts and expressions of good-will: Guacamari +had also provided himself with a present. When we arrived, we found him +stretched upon his bed, which was made of cotton network, and, according +to their custom, suspended.[304-1] He did not arise, but made from his +bed the best gesture of courtesy of which he was capable. He showed much +feeling with tears in his eyes for the death of the Spaniards, and began +speaking on the subject, with explaining to the best of his power, how +some died of disease, others had gone to Caonabó in search of the mine of +gold, and had there been killed, and that the rest had been attacked and +slain in their own town. According to the appearance of the dead bodies, +it was not two months since this had happened. Then he presented the +Admiral with eight marks and a half of gold and five or six belts worked +with stones[304-2] of various colors, and a cap of similar jewel-work, +which I think they must value very highly, because in it was a jewel, +which was presented to him with great reverence. It appears to me that +these people put more value upon copper than gold. The surgeon of the +fleet and myself being present, the Admiral told Guacamari that we were +skilled in the treatment of human disorders, and wished that he would +shew us his wound; he replied that he was willing; upon which I said it +would be necessary that he should, if possible, go out of the house, +because we could not see well on account of the place being darkened by +the crowd of people; to this he consented, I think more from timidity +than inclination, and left the house leaning on the arm of the Admiral. +After he was seated, the surgeon approached him and began to untie the +bandage; then he told the Admiral that the wound was made with a _ciba_, +by which he meant with a stone. When the wound was uncovered, we went up +to examine it: it is certain that there was no more wound on that leg +than on the other, although he cunningly pretended that it pained him +much. Ignorant as we were of the facts, it was impossible to come to a +definite conclusion. There were certainly many proofs of an invasion by a +hostile people, so that the Admiral was at a loss what to do; he with +many others thought, however, that for the present, and until they could +ascertain the truth, they ought to conceal their distrust; for after +ascertaining it, they would be able to claim whatever indemnity they +thought proper. That evening Guacamari accompanied the Admiral to the +ships, and when they showed him the horses and other objects of interest, +their novelty struck him with the greatest amazement;[305-1] he took +supper on board, and returned that evening to his house. The Admiral +told him that he wished to settle there and to build houses; to which he +assented but said that the place was not wholesome, because it was very +damp: and so it most certainly was. + +All this passed through the interpretation of two of the Indians who had +gone to Spain in the last voyage, and who were the sole survivors of +seven who had embarked with us; five died on the voyage, and these but +narrowly escaped. The next day we anchored in that port: Guacamari sent +to know when the Admiral intended leaving, and was told that he would do +so on the morrow. The same day Guacamari's brother, and others with him, +came on board, bringing gold to barter: on the day of our departure also +they bartered a great quantity of gold. There were ten women on board, of +those who had been taken in the Caribbee islands, principally from +Boriquen, and it was observed that the brother of Guacamari spoke with +them; we think that he told them to make an effort to escape that night; +for certainly during our first sleep they dropped themselves quietly into +the water, and went on shore, so that by the time they were missed they +had reached such a distance that only four could be taken by the boats +which went in pursuit, and these were secured when just leaving the +water: they had to swim considerably more than half a league. The next +morning the Admiral sent to desire that Guacamari would cause search to +be made for the women who had escaped in the night, and that he would +send them back to the ships. When the messengers arrived they found the +place forsaken and not a soul there; this made many openly declare their +suspicions, but others said they might have removed to another village, +as was their custom. That day we remained quiet, because the weather was +unfavorable for our departure. On the next morning the Admiral resolved +that as the wind was adverse, it would be well to go with the boats to +inspect a harbor on the coast at two leagues distance further up,[306-1] +to see if the formation of the land was favorable for a settlement; and +we went thither with all the ship's boats, leaving the ships in the +harbor. As we moved along the coast the people manifested a sense of +insecurity, and when we reached the spot to which we were bound all the +natives had fled. While we were walking about this place we found an +Indian stretched on the hill-side, close by the houses, with a gaping +wound in his shoulder caused by a dart, so that he had been disabled from +fleeing any further. The natives of this island fight with sharp darts, +which they shoot with straps in the same manner as boys in Spain shoot +their little darts, and with these they shoot with considerable skill to +a great distance; and certainly upon an unarmed people these weapons are +calculated to do serious injury. The man told us that Caonabó and his +people had wounded him and burnt the houses of Guacamari. Thus we are +still kept in uncertainty respecting the death of our people, on account +of the paucity of information on which to form an opinion, and the +conflicting and equivocal character of the evidence we have obtained. We +did not find the position of the land in this port favorable for healthy +habitation, and the Admiral resolved upon returning along the upper coast +by which we had come from Spain, because we had had tidings of gold in +that direction. But the weather was so adverse that it cost more labor to +sail thirty leagues in a backward direction than the whole voyage from +Spain; so that, what with the contrary wind and the length of the +passage, three months had elapsed when we landed.[307-1] It pleased God, +however, that through the check upon our progress caused by contrary +winds, we succeeded in finding the best and most suitable spot that we +could have selected for a settlement, where there was an excellent +harbor[307-2] and abundance of fish, an article of which we stand in +great need from the scarcity of meat. The fish caught here are very +singular and more wholesome than those of Spain. The climate does not +allow the fish to be kept from one day to another, for it is hot and +moist, so that all animal food[308-1] spoils very quickly. The land is +very rich for all purposes; near the harbor there are two rivers: one +large,[308-2] and another of moderate breadth somewhat near it; the water +is of a very remarkable quality. On the bank of it is being built a city +called Marta,[308-3] one side of which is bounded by the water with a +ravine of cleft rock so that at that part there is no need of +fortification; the other half is girt with a plantation of trees so thick +that a rabbit could scarcely pass through it; and so green that fire will +never be able to burn it. A channel has been commenced for a branch of +the river, which the managers say they will lead through the middle of +the settlement, and will place on it grist-mills and saw-mills and mills +of other kinds requiring to be worked by water. Great quantities of +vegetables have been planted, which certainly attain a more luxuriant +growth here in eight days than they would in Spain in twenty. We are +frequently visited by numbers of Indians, among whom are some of their +_caciques_ or chiefs, and many women. They all come loaded with +_ages_,[308-4] which are like turnips, very excellent for food, which we +dressed in various ways. This food was so nutritious as to prove a great +support to all of us after the privations we endured when at sea, which +were more severe than ever were suffered by man; for as we could not tell +what weather it would please God to send us on our voyage, we were +obliged to limit ourselves most rigorously with regard to food, in order +that, at all events, we might at least have the means of supporting life. +This _age_ the Caribbees call _nabi_, and the Indians _hage_.[326-1] The +Indians barter gold, provisions, and everything they bring with them, for +tips of lacings, beads, and pins, and pieces of porringers and dishes. +They all, as I have said, go naked as they were born, except the women of +this island, who have their private parts covered, some with a covering +of cotton, which they bind round their hips, while others use grass and +leaves of trees.[326-2] When they wish to adorn themselves, both men and +women paint themselves, some black, others white, and various colors, in +so many devices that the effect is very laughable;[326-3] they shave some +parts of their heads, and in others wear long tufts of matted hair, which +have an indescribably ridiculous appearance: in short, whatever would be +looked upon in our country as characteristic of a madman, is here +regarded by the highest of the Indians as a mark of distinction. + +In our present position, we are in the neighborhood of many mines of +gold, not one of which, we are told, is more than twenty or twenty-five +leagues off: the Indians say that some of them are in Niti, in the +possession of Caonabó, who killed the Christians; the others are in +another place called Cibao, which, if it please God, we shall see with +our eyes before many days are over; indeed we should go there at once, +but that we have so many things to provide that we are not equal to it at +present. One third of our people have fallen sick within the last four or +five days, which I think has principally arisen from the toil and +privations of the journey; another cause has been the variableness of the +climate; but I hope in our Lord that all will be restored to health. My +idea of this people is, that if we could converse with them, they would +all become converted, for they do whatever they see us do, making +genuflections before the altars at the _Ave Maria_ and the other parts of +the devotional service, and making the sign of the cross. They all say +that they wish to be Christians, although in truth they are idolaters, +for in their houses they have many kinds of figures; when asked what such +a figure was, they would reply it is a thing of _Turey_, by which they +meant "of Heaven." I made a pretence of throwing them on the fire, which +grieved them so that they began to weep: they believe that everything we +bring comes from Heaven, and therefore call it _Turey_, which, as I have +already said, means heaven in their language. The first day that I went +on shore to sleep, was the Lord's day. The little time that we have spent +on land, has been so much occupied in seeking for a fitting spot for the +settlement, and in providing necessaries, that we have had little +opportunity of becoming acquainted with the products of the soil, yet +although the time has been so short, many marvellous things have been +seen. We have met with trees bearing wool, of a sufficiently fine quality +(according to the opinion of those who are acquainted with the art) to be +woven into good cloth; there are so many of these trees that we might +load the caravels with wool, although it is troublesome to collect, for +the trees are very thorny,[310-1] but some means may be easily found of +overcoming this difficulty. There are also cotton trees, perennials, as +large as peach trees, which produce cotton in the greatest +abundance.[310-2] We found trees producing wax as good both in color and +smell as bees-wax and equally useful for burning; indeed there is no +great difference between them.[310-3] There are vast numbers of trees +which yield surprisingly fine turpentine; and there is also a great +abundance of tragacanth, also very good. We found other trees which I +think bear nutmegs, because the bark tastes and smells like that spice, +but at present there is no fruit on them; I saw one root of ginger, which +an Indian wore hanging round his neck. There are also aloes; not like +those which we have hitherto seen in Spain, but no doubt they are one of +the species used by us doctors.[311-1] A sort of cinnamon also has been +found; but, to tell the truth, it is not so fine as that with which we +are already acquainted in Spain. I do not know whether this arises from +ignorance of the proper season to gather it, or whether the soil does not +produce better. We have also seen some lemon-colored myrobolans; at this +season they are all lying under the trees, and have a bitter flavor, +arising, I think, from the rottenness occasioned by the moisture of the +ground; but the taste of such parts as have remained sound, is that of +the genuine myrobolan.[311-2] There is also very good mastic.[311-3] None +of the natives of these islands, as far as we have yet seen, possess any +iron; they have, however, many tools, such as axes and adzes, made of +stone, which are so handsome and well finished, that it is wonderful how +they contrive to make them without the use of iron. Their food consists +of bread, made of the roots of a vegetable which is between a tree and a +vegetable, and the _age_,[311-4] which I have already described as being +like the turnip, and very good food; they use, to season it, a spice +called _agi_,[311-5] which they also eat with fish, and such birds as +they can catch of the many kinds which abound in the island. They have, +besides, a kind of grain like hazel-nuts very good to eat. They eat all +the snakes, and lizards, and spiders, and worms, that they find upon the +ground;[312-1] so that, to my fancy, their bestiality is greater than +that of any beast upon the face of the earth. The Admiral had at one time +determined to leave the search for the mines until he had first +despatched the ships which were to return to Spain, on account of the +great sickness which had prevailed among the men,[312-2] but afterwards +he resolved upon sending two bands under the command of two captains, the +one to Cibao, and the other to Niti, where, as I have already said, +Caonabó lived. These parties went, one of them returning on the +twentieth, and the other on the twenty-first of January. The party that +went to Cibao saw gold in so many places as to seem almost incredible, +for in truth they found it in more than fifty streamlets and rivers, as +well as upon their banks; so that, the captain said they had only to seek +throughout that province, and they would find as much as they wished. He +brought specimens from the different parts, namely, from the sand of the +rivers and small springs. It is thought, that by digging, it will be +found in greater pieces, for the Indians neither know how to dig nor have +the means of digging more than a hand's depth. The other captain, who +went to Niti, returned also with news of a great quantity of gold in +three or four places; of which he likewise brought specimens.[313-1] + +Thus, surely, their Highnesses the King and Queen may henceforth regard +themselves as the most prosperous and wealthy sovereigns in the world; +never yet, since the creation, has such a thing been seen or read of; for +on the return of the ships from their next voyage, they will be able to +carry back such a quantity of gold as will fill with amazement all who +hear of it. Here I think I shall do well to break off my narrative. I +think those who do not know me, who hear these things, may consider me +prolix, and a man who has exaggerated somewhat, but God is my witness, +that I have not exceeded, by one tittle, the bounds of truth.[313-2] + +FOOTNOTES: + +[283-1] There is a gap here in the text of the original which has been +filled by taking the corresponding words in Bernaldez's text. + +[284-1] Major here translated _algun dia_ "one day." It should be "some +days." Bernaldez has _algunos dias_, and Coma says the tarry at Gomera +was nearly six days. + +[284-2] _La nao Capitana_ means the flagship. The name of the flagship on +the second voyage was _Marigalante_. _Historie_ of Ferdinand Columbus, +cap. XLV. (London, ed. 1867), p. 137. + +[284-3] October 27. + +[285-1] The island of Dominica, which is so called from having been +discovered on a Sunday. _Historie_, p. 137. + +[285-2] The island Marigalante, which was so called from the name of the +ship in which Columbus sailed. _Historie_, _ibid._ + +[285-3] Marigalante. + +[286-1] One would infer from this that it was the fruit of the +_manzanillo_, which produces similar effects. (Navarrete.) On the +Manzanillo (Manchineel), see Oviedo, lib. IX., cap. XII. He says the +Caribs used it in making their arrow poisons. + +[286-2] Guadeloupe. + +[288-1] It was Diego Marquez, the inspector, who with eight other men +went on shore into the interior of the island, without permission from +the Admiral, who caused him to be sought for by parties of men with +trumpets, but without success. One of those who were sent out with this +object was Alonzo Ojeda, who took with him forty men, and on their return +they reported that they had found many aromatic plants, a variety of +birds, and some considerable rivers. The wanderers were not able to find +their way to the ships until the 8th of November. [Navarrete, condensed +from Las Casas, _Historia de las Indias_, II. 7-8.] + +[288-2] Tayno was also the tribal name of these people, who +differentiated themselves from the Caribs. Peter Martyr reports the +assertions of the followers of Guacamari that they were Taynos not +Caribs: "Se Tainos, id est, nobiles esse, non Canibales, inclamitant." +_De Rebus Oceanicis_, Dec. I., lib. II., p. 25. (Cologne ed. of 1574.) + +[289-1] Las Casas, _Historia de las Indias_, II. 8, remarks of these +bones, "They must have belonged to lords or persons whom they loved since +it is not probable that they belonged to those they ate, because if they +ate as many as some say, the cabins would not hold all the bones and +skulls, and it seems that after having eaten them there would be no +object in keeping the skulls and bones for relics unless they belonged to +some very notable enemies. The whole matter is a puzzle." + +[289-2] The name _Caribe_ here obviously has begun to have the meaning +"cannibal," which is in origin the same word. + +[289-3] This practice still survives among the Caribs. Im Thurn describes +it in almost the same words as Dr. Chanca. See _Among the Indians of +Guiana_, p. 192. + +[290-1] These are the native names for Dominica (Ceyre) and Guadeloupe +(Turuqueira and Ayay), which consists of two islands separated by a +narrow channel. + +[291-1] They left on Sunday, the 10th of November. Las Casas, _Historia_, +II. 9. + +[291-2] The island Montserrat. Las Casas, _ibid._ + +[291-3] The island of St. Martin. Las Casas, _ibid._ + +[293-1] Dominica. + +[293-2] Santa Cruz. November 14. Las Casas, _ibid._ + +[294-1] The Admiral named the largest of these islands St. Ursula, and +all the others The Eleven Thousand Virgins. Las Casas, _Historia_, II. +10. + +[294-2] The island of Porto Rico, to which the Admiral "gave the name of +St. John the Baptist, which we now call Sant Juan and which the Indians +called Boriquen." Las Casas, II. 10. + +[295-1] See note to Journal, September 29. Frigate-bird is the accepted +English name; a species of pelican. + +[295-2] Porto Rico. + +[295-3] On Friday, the 22d of November, the Admiral first caught sight of +the island of Española. Las Casas, II. 10. + +[295-4] Cape Engaño, in the island of Española. (Navarrete.) + +[295-5] Preserved in the Bay of Samana. + +[295-6] See Journal, October 21. and note.[TN-6] + +[296-1] Of this voyage of exploration there seems to be no record. Our +natural sources, the _Historie_ and Las Casas, are silent. Columbus +suspended his writing in his Journal from December 11, 1493, till March +12, 1494. Antonio de Torres sailed for Spain February 2, 1494, when Dr. +Chanca sent off his letter. Probably this exploration was begun about +December 20. + +[296-2] _Unos gosques grandes_. The French translation has _gros +carlins_, "large pug-dogs." Bernaldez calls these dogs, _gozcos +pequeños_, "small curs." "Cur" is the common meaning for _gozque_ or +_gosque_. See Oviedo, lib. XII., cap. V., for a description of these +native dogs which soon became extinct. + +[296-3] Bernaldez, II. 34, supplies the native name, _Utia_. Oviedo, lib. +XII., cap. I., describes the _hutia_. When he wrote it had become so +scarce as to be seen only on rare occasions. It was extinct in Du +Tertre's time, a century later. Of the four allied species described by +Oviedo, the _hutia_, the _quemi_, the _mohuy_, and the _cori_ (agouti), +only the last has survived to the present day. + +[296-4] Cabra, or Goat Island, between Puerto de Plata and Cas Rouge +Point. (Major.) + +[297-1] Apparently the cayman or South American alligator. + +[298-1] The river Yaque. + +[298-2] It is only seven leagues. (Navarrete.) + +[298-3] This chief's name is Guacanagari in Las Casas, _Historia de las +Indias_, and in the _Historie_ of Ferdinand Columbus, Goathanari in the +Syllacio-Coma letter, Guacanari in Bernaldez and Guaccanarillus in Peter +Martyr's _De Rebus Oceanicis_. + +[298-4] The admiral anchored at the entrance of the harbor of Navidad, on +Wednesday, the 27th of November, towards midnight. Las Casas, II. 11. + +[299-1] See Journal of First Voyage, December 25. + +[299-2] The Bay of Caracol, four leagues west of Fort Dauphin. (Major.) + +[299-3] "Toward midnight a canoe came full of Indians and reached the +ship of the Admiral, and they called for him saying 'Almirante, +Almirante.'" Las Casas, II. 11. + +[300-1] The hawk bell was a small open bell used in hawking. The +discoverers used hawk bells as a small measure as of gold dust. + +[302-1] See above, p. 289, note 1. + +[302-2] The mark was a weight of eight ounces, two-thirds of a Troy +pound. The mark of gold in Spain was equivalent to 50 castellanos, or in +bullion value to-day about $150. + +[303-1] Melchior Maldonado, apparently the Melchiorius from whom Peter +Martyr derived some of his material for his account of the second voyage. +See his _De Rebus Oceanicis_, ed. 1574, p. 26. + +[304-1] The familiar hammock. + +[304-2] The original reads "cinco o seiscientos labrados de pedreria," +which Major translated "five or six hundred pieces of jewellery," and +Thacher "five or six hundred cut stones." The dictionaries recognize +_labrado_ as a noun only in the plural _labrados_, "tilled lands." +Turning to Bernaldez, _Historia de los Reyes Catolicos_, in which Dr. +Chanca's letter was copied almost bodily, we find, II. 27, "cinco ó seis +labrados de pedreria," which presents the same difficulty. The omission +of _cientos_ is notable, however. I think the original text of Dr. +Chanca's letter read "cinco 6 seis cintos labrados de pedreria," _i.e._, +five or six belts worked with jewellery. _Cintos_ being written blindly +was copied _cientos_ by Antonio de Aspa, from whom our text of Dr. +Chanca's letter has come down (Navarrete, I. 224), and was omitted +perhaps accidentally in Bernaldez's copy. This conjecture is rendered +almost certain by the _Historie_, where it is recorded that "the Cacique +gave the Admiral eight belts worked with small beads made of white, +green, and red stones," p. 148, London ed. of 1867. This passage enables +us to correct the text of Las Casas, II. 14, changing "ochocientas +cuentas menudas de piedra," "eight hundred small beads of stone," to +"ocho cintos de cuentas menudas," etc., "eight belts of small beads," and +again, _ciento de oro_ to _cinto de oro_. In the Syllacio-Coma letter the +gift is _balteos duodecim_, "twelve belts." Thacher, _Columbus_, II. 235. +_Cf._ Las Casas's description of the girdle or belt that this chief wore +when Columbus first saw him, Dec. 22, above, p. 194. + +[305-1] These were not only the first horses seen in the New World since +the extinction of the prehistoric varieties, but the first large +quadrupeds the West Indians had seen. + +[306-1] Port Dauphin. (Navarrete.) + +[307-1] That is, three months from the time the fleet left Spain, +September 25, 1493. Neither the _Historie_ nor Las Casas mentions the +date of landing. In the Syllacio-Coma letter the date is given as "eight +days from Christmas." See Thacher, _Columbus_, II. 236, 257. + +[307-2] Port Isabelique, or Isabella, ten leagues to the east of Monte +Cristi. (Navarrete.) + +[308-1] _Cosas introfatibles_ in the Spanish. The translation follows the +French version. The text perhaps is corrupt. The word _introfatibles_ is +not found in any of the Spanish dictionaries nor is it a learned compound +whose meaning is apparent from its etymology. Professor H.R. Lang +suggests that _cosas corruptibles_ may be the proper reading. The +sentence is omitted in the corresponding passage in Bernaldez, II. 30. + +[308-2] The river Isabella. + +[308-3] I can offer no explanation for this name, which is found only in +Dr. Chanca's letter. Bernaldez, who copied Dr. Chanca, gives Isabela as +the name of the city, II. 30, and the _Historie_ and Las Casas, who +preserve for us the gist of Columbus's own narrative, both say that "he +named the city Isabela in memory of Queen Isabela." Las Casas, II. 21. +_Historie_, p. 150. + +[308-4] Yams, the _Dioscorea sativa_. Columbus had seen the yam in Guinea +an applied the African negro name, _igname_, _ñame_, whence the English, +yam. See note to Journal, November 4. + +[326-1] By the Indians Dr. Chanca means the Tainos, the native +inhabitants of Española. + +[326-2] "Every woman wears a tiny apron called a _queyu_, suspended by +tying its strings around her waist." Im Thurn, _Among the Indians of +Guiana_, 194. + +[326-3] On this body painting, see Im Thurn, _ibid._ + +[310-1] A species of the _N.O. Bombaceae_; perhaps the _Eriodendron +anfractuosum_. (Major.) The English name is silk-cotton tree. The fibre, +however, cannot be woven. Von Martius suggests the _Bombax ceiba_. + +[310-2] _Cf._ Hazard, _Santo Domingo_, p. 350, "the cotton plant which +instead of being a simple bush planted from the seed each year, is here a +tree, growing two or three years, which needs only to be trimmed and +pruned to produce a large yield of the finest cotton." + +[310-3] Probably the so-called Carnauba wax or perhaps palm-tree wax. +_Cf._ the _Encyclopædia Britannica_, art. "Wax." + +[311-1] The Spanish here is _linaloe_, but the reference seems to be to +the medicinal aloes and not to lign aloes. On lign aloes, see Columbus's +Journal, November 12, and note. + +[311-2] The myrobolan is an East Indian fruit with a stone, of the prune +genus. Crude or preserved myrobolans were a more important article of +commerce in the Middle Ages than now. There were five varieties, one of +which, the _Mirobalani citrini_, were so named because they were +lemon-colored. Heyd, _Histoire du Commerce du Levant au Moyen-Age_, II. +641. A species of myrobolan grows in South America. + +[311-3] The product of the _Bursera gummifera_. + +[311-4] _Cf._ Columbus's Journal, November 4, and note. + +[311-5] _Agi_, also written _Axi_, is the _Capsicum annuum_ or Spanish +pepper. Most of the cayenne or red pepper of commerce comes from the +allied species, _Capsicum frutescens_. In Mexico the name of this +indigenous pepper plant was Quauhchilli, _Chili_ tree. _Chili_ was taken +over into Spanish as the common name for capsicum and has come down in +English in the familiar Chili sauce. See Peschel, _Zeitalter der +Entdeckungen_, p. 139; De Candolle, _Origin of Cultivated Plants_, pp. +289-290. _Encyclopædia Britannica_, art. "Cayenne Pepper." + +[312-1] _Cf._ Im Thurn, _Among the Indians of Guiana_, 266. + +[312-2] The Admiral, "having described the country at length and the +condition in which he was and where he had settled for the Catholic +sovereigns and sending them the specimen of gold which Guacanagari had +given him and that which Hojeda had brought, and informing them of all +that he saw to be needed, despatched the twelve ships before mentioned, +placing in command of them all Antonio de Torres, brother of the nurse of +the prince Don Juan, to whom he intrusted the gold and all his +despatches. They made sail the 2d of February, 1494." Las Casas, +_Historia de las Indias_, II. 25-26. Columbus's letter to Ferdinand and +Isabella mentioned here has not been preserved. That part of it which +related to future needs was apparently duplicated in the "memorial" which +he gave to Torres. This document is given in English in Thacher, +_Christopher Columbus_, II. 297-308, and Major, _Select Letters of +Christopher Columbus_, ed. 1870, pp. 72-107. See p. 73, _ibid._, for a +reference to letters of the Admiral no longer extant. + +[313-1] Alonso de Hojeda was sent to explore the region of Cibao with +fifteen men. He found Cibao to be fifteen or twenty leagues from +Isabella. The other exploring party was headed by Gines de Gorbalan. +Further details of these expeditions are given in the Syllacio-Coma +letter. Thacher, _Columbus_, II. 258-260. According to Coma, or his +translator Syllacio, Cibao was identified with the Sheba of the Bible. +Columbus, on the other hand, identified Cibao and Cipango. _Cf._, _e.g._, +Peter Martyr, _De Rebus Oceanicis_, ed. 1574, p. 31. + +[313-2] "The preceding is the transcript of that part of Doctor Chanca's +letter, which refers to intelligence respecting the Indies. The remainder +of the letter does not bear upon the subject, but treats of private +matters, in which Doctor Chanca requests the interference and support of +the Town Council of Seville (of which city he was a native), in behalf of +his family and property, which he had left in the said city. This letter +reached Seville in the month of [March] in the year fourteen hundred and +ninety-three [four]." This note is no doubt from the hand of Friar +Antonio de Aspa, who formed the collection of papers in which Navarrete +found the text of Dr. Chanca's letter. The collection was made about the +middle of the sixteenth century. See Navarrete, II. 224. The returning +fleet arrived at Cadiz in March, 1494. Bernaldez, _Historia de los Reyes +Catolicos_, (ed. 1870), II. 37. + + + + +NARRATIVE OF THE THIRD VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS AS CONTAINED IN LAS CASAS'S +HISTORY + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +The narrative given here of the third voyage of Columbus in which he +discovered the mainland of South America is taken from the _Historia de +las Indias_ of Las Casas. In preparing his History Las Casas had the use +of a larger body of Columbus's papers than has come down to us. Among +these papers was a journal of this third voyage which was incorporated in +a condensed form by Las Casas in his History, just as he did in the case +of the journals of the first and second voyages. This narrative is found +in the second volume of the _Historia de las Indias_, pp. 220-317. The +translation is, as is mentioned in the preface to this volume, that given +in John Boyd Thacher's _Christopher Columbus_. + +In certain places the text differs slightly from that in the printed +edition of Las Casas, as Mr. Thacher followed the critical text of Cesare +de Lollis prepared for the _Raccolta Colombiana_ by a collation of the +manuscript in the Archives at Madrid with the recently discovered +autograph manuscript of Las Casas. Mr. Thacher, following Lollis, omitted +passages that were obviously comments on the text by Las Casas. These +have been supplied either from Mr. Thacher's notes or translated by the +editor from the printed text. The editor has gone over the whole +translation and can testify to its exceptional accuracy. A few slight +changes have been made in the wording for the sake of greater clearness +or exactness. + +Columbus described this voyage in a letter to Ferdinand and Isabella. +This letter is included in Major's _Select Letters of Columbus_ and in +P.L. Ford's _Writings of Columbus_. This letter is of great importance +in the study of Columbus's geographical ideas. Other contemporary +accounts of this voyage are contained in Ferdinand Columbus's _Historie_, +the life of his father, where the journal abridged by Las Casas is still +further condensed, in Peter Martyr's _De Rebus Oceanicis_, Dec. I., lib. +VI., and in the letter of Simone Verde and the three letters of Angelo +Trivigiano which will be found in Harrisse, _Christophe Colomb_, II. +95-98 and 119-123. + +E.G.B. + + + + +NARRATIVE OF THE THIRD VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS AS CONTAINED IN LAS CASAS'S +HISTORY + + +_May 30-August 31, 1498_ + +He started then (our First Admiral)[319-1] "in the name of the Most Holy +Trinity" (as he says and as he was always accustomed to say) from the +port of San Lucar de Barrameda, Wednesday, May 30, 1498, with the +intention of discovering new land not yet discovered, with his six ships, +"greatly fatigued," he says, "with my voyage, since as I was hoping for +some quietude, when I left the Indies, I experienced double hardships;" +they being the result of the labors, new obstacles and difficulties with +which he obtained the funds for his starting upon the expedition and the +annoyances in connection therewith received from the royal officials and +the hindrance and the evil reports the people around about the Sovereigns +gave concerning the affairs in the Indies, wherefore it appeared to him +that what he already had done was not sufficient but that he must renew +his labors to gain new credit. And because war had then broken out with +France,[319-2] he had news of a French fleet which was waiting for the +Admiral beyond the Cape of St. Vincent, to capture him. On this account +he decided to steal away as they say and make a detour, directing his +course straight to the island of Madeira. + +He arrived at the island of Puerto Sancto, Thursday, June 7, where he +stopped to take wood, water and supplies and to hear mass, and he found +all the island disturbed and all the farms, goods and flocks guarded, +fearing that the new-comers might be French; and then that night he left +for the island of Madeira and arrived there the following Sunday, June +10. He was very well received in the town[320-1] and with much rejoicing, +because he was well known there, having been a citizen thereof during +some time.[320-2] He remained there six days, providing himself fully +with water and wood and the other necessities for his journey. + +Saturday, June 16, he left the island of Madeira with his six ships and +arrived at the island of Gomera[320-3] the following Tuesday. At this +island he found a French corsair with a French vessel and two large ships +which the corsair had taken from the Castilians, and when the Frenchman +saw the six vessels of the Admiral he left his anchors and one vessel and +fled with the other vessel. The Admiral sent a ship after him and when +the six Spaniards who were being carried away on the captured ship saw +this ship coming to their aid, they attacked six Frenchmen who were +guarding them and by force they placed them below decks and thus brought +them back. + +Here in the island of Gomera the Admiral determined to send three ships +directly to the island of Española, so that, if he should be detained +here, they might give news of him and cheer and console the Christians +with the supplies: and principally that they might give joy to his +brothers, the Adelantado[321-1] and Don Diego, who were very desirous of +hearing from him. He named Pedro de Arana, a native of Cordova, as +captain of one ship,--a very honorable and prudent man, whom I knew very +well, brother of the mother of Don Ferdinand Columbus,[321-2] the second +son of the Admiral, and cousin of that Arana who remained in the fortress +with the 38 men whom the Admiral on his return found dead. The other +captain of the second ship was called Alonso Sanchez de Carvajal, +governor of the city of Baçea, an honorable gentleman. The third captain +for the remaining ship was Juan Antonio Columbo,[321-3] a Genoese, a +relation of the Admiral, a very capable and prudent man and one of +authority, with whom I had frequent conversation. + +He gave them suitable instructions, in which instructions he ordered +that, one week one captain, and another week another, each by turns +should be captain-general of all the ships, as regarded the navigation +and the placing of the night lantern, which is a lighted lantern placed +in the stern of the ship in order that the other ships may know and +follow where the captain guides. He ordered them to go to the west, +quarter south-west,[321-4] for 850 leagues and told them that then they +would arrive at the island of Dominica. From Dominica they should go +west-north-west and they would then reach the island of Sant Juan,[321-5] +and it would be the southern part of it, because that was the direct way +to go to the New Isabella,[321-6] which now is Santo Domingo. Having +passed the island of Sant Juan, they should leave the island of Mona to +the north and from there they should make for the point of this +Española,[322-1] which he called Sant Raphael, which now is the Cabo del +Engaño, from there to Saona, which he says makes a good harbor between it +and this Española. Seven leagues farther there is another island, which +is called Santa Catherina, and from there to the New Isabella, which is +the port of Santo Domingo, the distance is 25 leagues. And he told the +captains that wherever they should arrive and land they should purchase +all that they needed by barter and that for the little they might give +the Indians, although they might be the canibales,[322-2] who are said to +eat human flesh, they would obtain what they wished and the Indians would +give them all that they had; and if they should undertake to procure +things by force, the Indians would conceal themselves and remain hostile. +He says further in the instructions that he was going by the Cape Verde +Islands (which he says were called in ancient times Gorgodes[322-3] or +according to others Hesperides) and that he was going in the name of the +Holy Trinity with the intention of navigating to the south of these +islands so as to arrive below the equinoctial line and to follow the +course to the west until this island of Española should lie to the +northwest, to see if there are islands or lands. "Our Lord," he says, +"guides me and gives me things which may serve Him and the King and +Queen, our Lords, and which may be for the honor of the Christians, for I +believe that no one has ever gone this way and that this sea is entirely +unknown."[323-1] And here the Admiral finished his instructions. + +Having then taken water and wood and other provisions, especially cheese, +of which there are many and good ones there, the Admiral made sail with +his six ships on Thursday, June 21, towards the island of Hierro,[323-2] +which is distant from Gomera about fifteen leagues, and of the seven +Canaries is the one farthest to the west. Passing it, the Admiral took +his course with one ship and two caravels for the islands of Cape Verde, +and dismissed the other three ships in the name of the Holy Trinity; and +he says that he entreated the Holy Trinity to care for him and for all of +them; and at the setting of the sun they separated and the three ships +took their course for this island. Here the Admiral makes mention to the +Sovereigns of the agreement they had made with the King of Portugal that +the Portuguese should not go to the westward of the Azores and Cape Verde +Islands, and also mentions how the Sovereigns sent for him that he should +be present at the meetings in regard to the partition,[323-3] and that he +could not go on account of the grave illness which he had incurred in the +discovery of the mainland of the Indies, that is to say of Cuba, which he +always regarded as the mainland even until the present time as he could +not circumnavigate it. He adds further that then occurred the death of +Don Juan, before he could carry out the matter.[323-4] + +Then the Admiral continuing on his way arrived at the Cape Verde Islands, +which according to what he says, have a false name, because he never saw +anything green but all things dry and sterile. The first thing he saw was +the island of La Sal, Wednesday, June 27: and it is a small island. From +there he went to another which is called Buenavista and is very sterile, +where he anchored in a bay, and near it is a very small island. To this +island come all the lepers of Portugal to be cured and there are not more +than six or seven houses on it. The Admiral ordered the boats to go to +land to provide themselves with salt and flesh, because there are a great +number of goats on the island. There came to the ships a steward[324-1] +to whom that island belonged, named Roderigo Alonso, notary public of the +exchequer[324-2] of the King of Portugal, who offered to the Admiral what +there was on the island of which he might be in need. The Admiral thanked +him and ordered that he should be given some supplies from Castile, which +he enjoyed very much. + +Here he relates how the lepers came there to be cured because of the +great abundance of turtles on that island, which commonly are as large as +shields. By eating the flesh and constantly bathing in the blood of these +turtles, the lepers become cured.[324-3] The turtles in infinite number +come there three months in the year, June, July, and August, from the +mainland, which is Ethiopia,[324-4] to lay eggs in the sand and with the +claws and legs they scratch places in the sand and spawn more than five +hundred eggs, as large as those of a hen except that they have not a hard +shell but a tender membrane which covers the yolk, like the membrane +which covers the yolk of the hen's egg after taking off the hard shell. +They cover the eggs in the sand as a person would do, and there the sun +hatches them, and the little live turtles come out and then run in search +of the sea as if they had come out of it alive. They take the turtles +there in this manner: At night with lights which are torches of dry wood, +they go searching for the track of the turtle which is easily traced, and +find the turtle tired and sleeping. They come up quickly and turn it over +with the belly up and leave it, sure that it cannot turn itself back, and +go in search of another. And the Indians do the same in the sea; if they +come upon one asleep and turn it over it remains safe for them to take it +whenever they wish. The Indians, however, have another greater device for +taking them on the sea, which will be explained God willing when we give +a description of Cuba.[325-1] + +The healthy persons on that island of Buenavista who lead a laborious +life were six or seven residents who have no water except brackish water +from wells and whose employment is to kill the big goats and salt the +skins and send them to Portugal in the caravels which come there for +them, of which in one year they kill so many and send so many skins that +they are worth 2000 ducats to the notary public, to whom the island +belonged. Such a great multitude of goats, male and female, have been +grown there, from only eight original head. Those who live there neither +eat bread nor drink wine during four or five months, nor anything else +except goat flesh or fish or turtles. All this they told to the Admiral. + +He left there Saturday, June 30, at night for the island of Santiago, +where he arrived on Sunday at the hour of vespers, because it is distant +28 leagues: and this is the principal one of the Cape Verde Islands. He +wished to take from this island a herd of black cattle in order to carry +them to Española as the Sovereigns had ordered, and he was there eight +days and could not get them; and because the island is very unhealthy +since men are burned with heat there and his people commenced to fall +ill, he decided to leave it. The Admiral says again that he wishes to go +to the south, because he intends with the aid of the Most Holy Trinity, +to find islands and lands, that God may be served and their Highnesses +and Christianity may have pleasure, and that he wishes to see what was +the idea of King Don Juan of Portugal, who said that there was mainland +to the south: and because of this, he says that he had a contention with +the Sovereigns of Castile, and finally the Admiral says that it was +concluded that the King of Portugal should have 370 leagues to the west +from the islands of the Azores[326-1] and Cape Verde, from north to +south, from pole to pole. And the Admiral says further that the said King +Don Juan was certain that within those limits famous lands and things +must be found.[326-2] Certain principal inhabitants of the island of +Santiago came to see them and they said that to the south-west of the +island of Huego, which is one of the Cape Verde Islands distant 12 +leagues from this, may be seen an island, and that the King Don Juan was +greatly inclined to send to make discoveries to the south-west, and that +canoes had been found which start from the coast of Guinea and navigate +to the west with merchandise. Here the Admiral says again as if he was +speaking with the Sovereigns,--"He that is Three and One guides me by His +pity and mercy that I may serve Him and give great pleasure to your +Highnesses and to all Christianity, as was done in the discovery of the +Indies which resounded throughout all the world." + +Wednesday, July 4, he ordered sail made from that island in which he says +that since he arrived there he never saw the sun or the stars, but that +the heavens were covered with such a thick mist that it seemed they could +cut it with a knife and the heat was so very intense that they were +tormented, and he ordered the course laid to the way of the south-west, +which is the route leading from these islands to the south, in the name, +he says, of the Holy and Indivisible Trinity, because then he would be on +a parallel with the land of the sierra of Loa[327-1] and cape of Sancta +Ana in Guinea, which is below the equinoctial line, where he says that +below that line of the world are found more gold and things of value; and +that after, he would navigate, the Lord pleasing, to the west, and from +there would go to this Española, in which route he would prove the theory +of the King John aforesaid; and that he thought to investigate the report +of the Indians of this Española who said that there had come to Española +from the south and south-east, a black people who have the tops of their +spears made of a metal which they call _guanin_, of which he had sent +samples to the Sovereigns to have them assayed, when it was found that of +32 parts, 18 were of gold, 6 of silver and 8 of copper. + +Following this course to the south-west he commenced to find grasses like +those encountered in the direct way to these Indies; and the Admiral says +here that after having gone 480 miles which make 120 leagues, that at +nightfall he took the latitude and found that the North Star was in five +degrees. Yet it seems to me that he must have gone more than 200 leagues, +and that the text is in error because it is necessary to traverse more +than 200 leagues on that course from the Cape Verde Islands and Santiago +whence he started to put a ship within five degrees of the equator, as +any sailor will observe who will judge it by the map and by the latitude. +And he says that there, Friday, July 13, the wind deserted him and he +entered into heat so great and so ardent that he feared the ships would +take fire and the people perish. The ceasing of the wind and coming of +the excessive and consuming heat was so unexpected and sudden that there +was no person who dared to descend below to care for the butts of wine +and water, which swelled, breaking the hoops of the casks; the wheat +burned like fire; the pork and salted meat roasted and putrefied. This +ardent heat lasted eight days. The first day was clear with a sun which +burned them. God sent them less suffering because the seven following +days it rained and was clouded; however with all this, they could not +find any hope of saving themselves from perishing and from being burned, +and if the other seven days had been like the first, clear and with the +sun, the Admiral says here that it would have been impossible for a man +of them to have escaped alive. And thus they were divinely succored by +the coming of some showers and by the days being cloudy. He determined +from this, if God should give him wind in order to escape from this +suffering, to run to the west some days, and then if he found himself in +any moderation of temperature to return to the south, which was the way +he desired to follow. "May our Lord," says he, "guide me and give me +grace that I may serve Him, and bring pleasing news to your Highnesses." +He says he remembered, being in this burning latitude, that when he came +to the Indies in the past voyages, always when he reached 100 leagues +toward the west from the Azores Islands he found a change in the +temperature from north to south, and for this he wished to go to the west +to reach the said place. + +The Admiral must have been on that same parallel or rather meridian, on +which Hanno the Carthaginian was with his fleet, who departing from Cadiz +and going out into the Ocean to the left[328-1] of Lybia or Ethiopia +after thirty days' voyaging toward the south, among other distresses that +he suffered the heat and fire were so intense that it seemed as if they +were roasting; they heard such thundering and lightning that their ears +pained them and their eyes were blinded and it appeared no otherwise than +as if flames of fire fell from heaven. Amianus narrates this--a Greek +historian, a follower of the truth, and very famous--in the _History of +India_ near the end, and Ludovico Celio quotes it in Book I., ch. XXII., +of the _Lectiones Antiguas_.[329-1] Returning to these days of toil:-- + +Saturday, which they counted July 14, the Guards[329-2] being on the left +hand, he says the _North_ was in seven degrees: he saw black and white +jays,[329-3] which are birds that do not go far from land, and from this +he considered it a sign of land. He was sick at this point of the +journey, from gout and from not sleeping; but because of this he did not +cease to watch and work with great care and diligence. + +Sunday and Monday, they saw the same birds and more swallows, and some +fish appeared which they called _botos_,[329-4] which are little smaller +than great calves, and which have the head very blunt. The Admiral says +here incidentally that the Azores Islands which in ancient times were +called Casetérides,[329-5] were situated at the end of the fifth +clime.[329-6] + +Thursday, July 19, there was such intense and ardent heat that they +thought the men and ships would burn, but as our Lord at sight of the +afflictions which He gives is accustomed by interfering to the contrary +to alleviate them, He succored him by His mercy at the end of seven or +eight days, giving him very good weather to get away from that fire; with +which good weather he navigated towards the west 17 days, always +intending to return to the south, and place himself, as above said, in +such a region, that this Española should be to the north or +_septentrion_, where he thought he must find land before or beyond the +said place: and thus he intended to repair the ships which were already +opening from the past heat, and the supplies, of which he had a large +quantity, because of the necessity of taking them to this island and the +great difficulty in getting them from Castile, and which were becoming +worthless and damaged. + +Sunday, July 22, in the afternoon, as they were going with good weather, +they saw innumerable birds pass from the west-south-west to the +north-east: he says that they were a great sign of land. They saw the +same the Monday following and the days after, on one of which days a +pelican came to the ship of the Admiral, and many others appeared another +day, and there were other birds which are called "frigate +pelicans."[330-1] + +On the seventeenth day of the good weather which they were experiencing, +the Admiral was hoping to see land, because of the said signs of the +birds, and as he did not see it Monday, or the next day, Tuesday, July +31, as they lacked water, he decided to change his route, and this was to +the west, and to go to the right, and make for the island of Dominica, or +some of the islands of the Canibales, which to-day are called the +Caribes, and thus he ordered the course to the north, quarter north-east, +and went that way until midday. "But as His Divine Majesty," he says, +"has always used mercy with me, a sailor from Guelva,[330-2] my servant, +who was called Alonso Pérez, by chance and conjecture ascended to the +round top and saw land to the west, and he was 15 leagues from it, and +that part which appeared were three rocks or mountains." These are his +words. He named this land "The Island of the Trinity,"[331-1] because he +had determined that the first land he discovered should be named thus. +"And it pleased our Lord," he says, "by His Exalted Majesty, that the +first lands seen were three rocks all united at the base, I say three +mountains, all at one time and in one glance." "His High Power by His +pity guides me," he says, "in such a manner, that He may have much +service, and your Highnesses much pleasure: as it is certain that the +discovery of this land in this place was as great a miracle as the +discovery of the first voyage." These are his words. He gave infinite +thanks to God as was his custom, and all praised the divine goodness, and +with great rejoicings and merriment the _Salve Regina_[331-2] was sung +with other devout songs which contain praises of God and our Lady, +according to the custom of sailors, at least our sailors of Spain, who in +tribulations and rejoicings are accustomed to say them. + +Here he makes a digression and recapitulation of the services he has +rendered the Sovereigns, and of the will he always had keen to serve +them, "not as false tongues," says he, "and as false witnesses from envy +said."[331-3] And surely, I believe that such as these God took for +instruments to chasten him because he loved him since many without cause +and without object maligned him and disturbed these efforts, and brought +it about that the Sovereigns grew lukewarm and wearied of expense and of +keeping up their attachment and expectation that these Indies were likely +to be of profit, at least that it should be more than the expenses with +increase that came to them. He repeats a mention of the heat he suffered, +and how they were nevertheless now going by the same parallel, except +they had drawn near to the land when he ordered the course directed to +the west, because the land emits coolness from its fountains and rivers, +and by its waters causes moderation and softness; and because of this he +says the Portuguese who go to Guinea which is below the equinoctial line +are able to navigate because they go along the coast. He says further, +that now he was in the same parallel from which the King of Portugal +brought gold, from which he believed that whoever would search those seas +would find things of value. He confesses here that there is no man in the +world for whom God has shown so much grace, and entreats Him that He will +furnish something from which their Highnesses and Christianity may +receive great pleasure; and he says that, although he should not find any +other thing of benefit except these beautiful lands, which are so green +and full of groves and palms, that they are superior to the gardens of +Valencia in May, they would deserve to be highly valued. And in this he +speaks the truth and later on he will place a still higher value on it +with much reason. He says that it is a miraculous thing that the +Sovereigns of Castile should have lands so near the equinoctial as 6 +degrees, Ysabela being distant from the said line 24 degrees. + +Having seen the land then to the great consolation of all, he left the +course which he desired to follow in search of some of the islands of the +Canibales in order to provide himself with water, of which he was greatly +in need, and made a short excursion towards the land which he had seen, +towards a cape which appeared to be to the west, which he called "Cabo de +la Galera,"[332-1] from a great rock which it had, which from a distance +appeared like a galley sailing. They arrived there at the hour of +compline.[332-2] They saw a good harbor but it was not deep, and the +Admiral regretted that they could not enter it. He pursued his course to +the point he had seen, which was seven leagues toward the south. He did +not find a harbor. On all the coast he found that the groves reached to +the sea, the most beautiful coast that eyes ever saw. He says that this +island must be large; a canoe appeared at a distance filled with people +who must have been fishing, and made towards the land to some houses +which appeared there. The land was very cultivated and high and +beautiful. + +Wednesday, August 1, he ran down the coast toward the west, five leagues, +and arrived at a point, where he anchored with all three ships, and took +water from fountains and streams. They found signs of people, instruments +for fishing, signs of goats, but they were only of deer of which there +are many in those lands. He says that they found aloes and great groves +of palms, and very beautiful lands: "for which infinite thanks may be +given to the Holy Trinity." These are his words. He saw much tilled land +along the coast and many settlements. He saw from there towards the +south, another island, which is distant more than 20 leagues. (And he +might well say five hundred since this is the mainland which, as he saw a +part of it, seemed to him to be an island); to this he gave the name of +"Ysla Sancta." He says here that he would not take any Indians in order +not to disturb the land. From the Cape of Galera to the point where he +took the water, which I believed he named "Punta de la Playa," he says +that having been a great way, and running east-west (he should say that +he went from east to west) there was no port in all that way, but the +land was well populated and tilled, and with many trees and thick groves, +the most beautiful thing in the world, the trees reaching to the sea. +Here it may be remarked that when the trees of the country grow down to +the water's edge it indicates that such a coast is not exposed to high +seas, because when the coast is so exposed trees do not grow down to the +water, but there is an open sandy shore. The current, _surgente_, which +is that which comes down, and the _montante_, which is that which ascends +from below, he says appear to be great. The island which lies to the +south he says is very large, because he was already going along with the +mainland in sight although he did not think so, but that it was an +island. + +He says that he came to search for a harbor along the island of Trinidad, +Thursday, August 2, and arrived at the cape of the island of Trinidad, +which is a point, to which he gave the name "Punta del Arenal,"[334-1] +which is to the west: so that he had in a sense already entered in the +gulf which he called "de la Ballena,"[334-2] where he underwent great +danger of losing his ships, and he as yet did not know that he was +becoming encircled by land as will be seen. This gulf is a wonderful +thing and dangerous on account of the very great river that flows into it +which is called the Yuyapari,[334-3] the last syllable long. It comes +from more than 300 and I believe more than 400 leagues, and it has been +traversed for 300 leagues up stream partly with a ship, partly with +brigantines and partly with large canoes. And since the force of the +water is very great at all times and particularly so in this season of +July and August in which the Admiral was there, which is the season of +high water as in Castile in October and November, and since it wants +naturally to get to the sea, and the sea with its great mass under the +same natural impulse wants to break upon the land, and since this gulf is +enclosed by the mainland on one side and on the other by the island of +Trinidad, and since it is very narrow for such a violent force of +contrary waters, it must needs be that when they meet a terrific struggle +takes place and a conflict most perilous for those that find themselves +in that place. + +He says here that the island of Trinidad is large, because from the Cape +of Galera to the Point of Arenal, where he was at the present time, he +says it is 35 leagues. I say that it is more than 45, as he that desires +may see by the charts, although now those names are not written on the +charts as they have been forgotten, and to understand the matter they +must consider the course the Admiral pursued until he arrived there, and +at what point he first saw land, and from there where he went till he +stopped, and in that way, one will find out what he called the Cape of +Galera and what the Point of Arenal. It is not a matter of surprise that +the Admiral did not make an accurate estimate of the leagues of the +island because he went along it piece by piece. + +He ordered that his people should land on this Point of Arenal, the end +of the island toward the west, to enjoy themselves and obtain recreation, +because they had become wearied and fatigued; who found the land very +much trampled by deer, although they believed they were goats. This +Thursday, August 2, a large canoe came from towards the east, in which +came twenty-five men, and having arrived at the distance of a lombard +shot, they ceased to row, and cried out many words. The Admiral believed, +and I also believe, that they were asking what people they were, as the +others of the Indies were accustomed to do, to which they did not respond +in words, but by showing them certain small boxes of brass and other +shining things, in order that they should come to the ship, coaxing them +with motions of the body and signs. They approached somewhat, and +afterwards became terrified by the ship; and as they would not approach, +the Admiral ordered a tambourine player to come up to the poop deck of +the ship and that the young boys of the ship should dance, thinking to +please them. But they did not understand it thus, but rather, as they saw +dancing and playing, taking it for a signal of war, they distrusted them. +They left all their oars and laid hold of their bows and arrows; and each +one embracing his wooden shield, they commenced to shoot a great cloud of +arrows. Having seen this, the Admiral ordered the playing and dancing to +cease, and that some cross-bows should be drawn on deck and two of them +shot off at them, nothing more than to frighten them. The Indians then, +having shot the arrows, went to one of the two caravels, and suddenly, +without fear, placed themselves below the poop, and the pilot of the +caravel, also without any fear, glided down from the poop and entered +with them in the canoe with some things which he gave them; and when he +was with them he gave a smock frock and a bonnet to one of them who +appeared to be the principal man. They took them and as if in gratitude +for what had been given them, by signs said to him that he should go to +land with them, and there they would give him what they had. He accepted +and they went away to land. The pilot entered the boat and went to beg +permission of the Admiral on the ship, and when they saw that he did not +go directly with him, they did not expect him longer, and so they went +away and neither the Admiral nor any other ever saw them more. From the +sudden change in their bearing because of the playing on the tambourine +and the dancing, it appears that this must be considered among them a +sign of hostility. + +A servant of the Admiral, called Bernaldo de Ibarro, who was on this +voyage with him, told me and gave it to me in writing and I have this +writing in my possession to-day, that a cacique came to the ship of the +Admiral and was wearing upon his head a diadem of gold; and he went to +the Admiral who was wearing a scarlet cap and greeted him and kissed his +own diadem, and with the other hand he removed the cap of the Admiral and +placed upon-him the diadem, and he himself put upon his own head the +scarlet cap, appearing very content and pleased. + +The Admiral says here that these were all youths and very well shaped and +adorned, although I do not believe they wore much silk or brocade, with +which, also, I believe the Spaniards and the Admiral might be more +pleased; but they came armed with bows and arrows and wooden shields. +They were not as short as others he had seen in the Indies and they were +whiter, and of very good movements and handsome bodies, the hair long and +smooth and cut in the manner of Castile. They had the head tied with a +large handkerchief of cotton, symmetrically woven in colors, which the +Admiral believed to be the _almaiçar_;[336-1] he says that others had +this cloth around them, and they covered themselves with it in place of +trousers. He says that they are not black although they are near the +equinoctial,[337-1] but of an Indian color like all the others he has +found. They are of very fine stature, go naked, are warlike, wear the +hair very long like the women in Castile, carry bows and arrows with +plumes, and at the end of the arrows a sharp bone with a point like a +fish-hook, and they carry wooden shields, which he had not seen before; +and according to the signs and gestures which they made, he says he could +understand from them that they believed the Admiral came from the south, +from which he judged that there must be great lands toward the south, and +he said well since the mainland is so large that it occupies a large part +of the south. + +The temperature of this land, he says, is very high, and according to him +this causes the color of the people, and the hair which is all flowing, +and the very thick groves which abound everywhere. He says it must be +believed that when once the boundary is passed, 100 leagues to the west +of the Azores, that many times he has said that there is a change in the +sky and the sea and the temperature, "and this," he says, "is manifest," +because here where he was, so near to the equinoctial line, each morning, +he says, it was cool and the sun was in Leo. What he says is very true, +since I who write this have been there and required a robe nights and +mornings especially at Navidad.[337-2] + +The waters were running toward the west with a current stronger than the +river of Seville; the water of the sea rose and fell 65 paces and more, +as in Barrameda so that they are able to beach carracks;[337-3] he says +that the current flows very strongly going between these two islands, +Trinidad and that one which he called Sancta, and the land which +afterwards and farther on he called Isla de Gracia. And he calls the +mainland an island, since he was already between the two which are two +leagues apart which [_i.e._, the channel] is like a river as it appears +on the map. They found fruits[338-1] like those of this Española, and the +trees and the soil, and the temperature of the sky. In this Española they +found few fruits native to the soil. The temperature of that country is +much higher than it is in this Española, except in the mines of Cibao and +in some other districts, as has been said above. + +They found _hostias_ or oysters, very large, infinite fish, parrots as +large as hens, he says. In this land and in all the mainland the parrots +are larger than any of those in these islands and are green, the color +being very light, but those of the islands are of a green somewhat +darker. Those of the mainland have the yellow with spots and the upper +part of the wings with reddish spots, and some are of yellow plumage; +those of the islands have no yellow, the neck being red with spots. The +parrots of Española have a little white over the back; those of Cuba have +that part red and they are very pretty. Those of the island of San Juan I +believe are similar to those of this island [Española] and I have not +observed this feature in those of Jamaica. Finally it appears that those +of each island are somewhat different. In this mainland where the Admiral +is now, there is a species of parrots which I believe are found nowhere +else, very large, not much smaller than hens, reddish with blue and +black feathers in the wings. These never speak nor are attractive except +in appearance. They are called by the Indians _guacamayas_. It is +marvellous how all the other kinds can speak except the smallest, which +are called _xaxaues_. + +Being at this Point of Arenal, which is the end of the island of +Trinidad, they saw toward the north, quarter north-east,[339-1] a +distance of 15 leagues, a cape or point of the same mainland, and this is +that which is called Paria. The Admiral believing that it was another +distinct island named it "Isla de Gracia": which island he says goes to +the west [Oeste] which is the west [_poniente_], and that it is a very +high land. And he says truly, for through all that land run great chains +of very high mountains. + +Saturday, August 4, he determined to go to the said island of Gracia and +raised the anchors and made sail from the said Point of Arenal, where he +was anchored; and because that strait by which he entered into the Gulf +of Ballena was not more than two leagues wide between Trinidad on one +side and the mainland on the other, the fresh water came out very +swiftly. There came from the direction of the Arenal, on the island of +Trinidad, such a great current from the south, like a mighty flood (and +it was because of the great force of the river Yuyaparí which is toward +the south and which he had not yet seen), with such great thundering and +noise, that all were frightened and did not think to escape from it, and +when the water of the sea withstood it, coming in opposition, the sea was +raised making a great and very high swell[339-2] of water which raised +the ship and placed it on top of the swell, a thing which was never heard +of nor seen, and raised the anchors of the other ship which must have +been already cast and forced it toward the sea, and the Admiral made sail +to get away from the said slope. "It pleased God not to injure us," says +the Admiral here, and when he wrote this thing to the Sovereigns he said, +"even to-day I feel the fear in my body which I felt lest it should +upset the ship when it came under her."[340-1] For this great danger, he +named the mouth "Boca de la Sierpe."[340-2] + +Having reached that land which he saw in that direction and believed was +an island, he saw near that cape two small islands in the middle of +another channel which is made by that cape which he called Cabo de Lapa +and another cape of the Trinidad which he called Cabo Boto, because of +being thick and blunt,--the one island he named El Caracol, the other El +Delfin.[340-3] It is only five leagues in this strait between the Point +of Paria and Cape Boto of Trinidad, and the said islands are in the +middle of the strait. The impetus of the great river Yuyaparí and the +tempestuous waves of the sea make the entrance and exit by this strait +greatly dangerous, and because the Admiral experienced this difficulty +and also danger, he called that difficult entrance Boca del Drago[340-4] +and thus it is called to this day. He went along the coast of the +mainland of Paria,[340-5] which he believed to be an island, and named it +Isla de Gracia, towards the west in search of a harbor. From the point of +the Arenal, which is one cape of Trinidad as has been said, and is +towards the south, as far as the other Cape Boto, which is of the same +island and is towards the sea, the Admiral says it is 26 large leagues, +and this part appears to be the width of the island, and these two said +capes are north and south. There were great currents, the one against the +other; there came many showers as it was the rainy season, as aforesaid. +The Isla de Gracia is, as has been said, mainland. The Admiral says that +it is a very high land and all full of trees which reach to the sea; this +is because the gulf being surrounded by land, there is no surf and no +waves which break on the land as where the shores are uncovered. He says +that, being at the point or end of it, he saw an island of very high +land to the north-east, which might be 26 leagues from there. He named it +"Belaforma," because it must have looked very well from a distance, yet +all this is the mainland, which, as the ships changed their position from +one side to the other within the gulf enclosed by land, some inlets +appeared as if they separated lands which might be detached, and these +the Admiral called islands; for such was his opinion.[341-1] + +He navigated Sunday, August 5, five leagues from the point of the Cape of +Lapa, which is the eastern end of the island of Gracia. He saw very good +harbors adjacent to each other, and almost all this sea he says is a +harbor, because it is surrounded by islands and there are no waves. He +called the parts of the mainland which disclosed themselves to him +"islands," but there are only the island of Trinidad and the mainland, +which inclose the gulf which he now calls the sea. He sent the boats to +land and found fish and fire, and traces of people, and a great house +visible to the view. From there he went eight leagues where he found good +harbors. This part of this island of Gracia he says is very high land, +and there are many valleys, and "all must be populated," says he, because +he saw it all cultivated. There are many rivers because each valley has +its own from league to league; they found many fruits, and grapes like +[our] grapes and of good taste, and myrobolans[341-2] very good, and +others like apples, and others, he says, like oranges, and the inside is +like figs. They found numberless monkeys.[341-3] The waters, he says, are +the best that they saw. "This island," he says, "is all full of harbors, +this sea is fresh, although not wholly so, but brackish like that of +Carthagena"; farther down he says that it is fresh like the river of +Seville, and this was caused when it encountered some current of water +from the sea, which made that of the river salty. + +He sailed to a small port Monday, August 6, five leagues from whence he +went out and saw people, and then a canoe with four men came to the +caravel which was nearest the land and the pilot called the Indians as if +he wished to go to land with them, and in drawing near and entering he +submerged the canoe, and they commenced swimming; he caught them and +brought them to the Admiral. He says that they are of the color of all +the others of the Indies. They wear the hair (some of them) very long, +others as with us; none of them have the hair cut as in Española and in +the other lands. They are of very fine stature and all well grown; they +have the genital member tied and covered, and the women all go naked as +their mothers gave them birth. This is what the Admiral says, but I have +been, as I said above, within 30 leagues of this land yet I never saw +women that did not have their private parts, at least, covered.[342-1] +The Admiral must have meant that they went as their mothers bore them as +to the rest of the body. + +"To these Indians," says the Admiral, "as soon as they were here, I gave +hawks' bells and beads and sugar, and sent them to land, where there was +a great battle among them, and after they knew the good treatment, all +wished to come to the ships. Those who had canoes came and they were +many, and to all we gave a good welcome and held friendly conversation +with them, giving them the things which pleased them." The Admiral asked +them questions and they replied, but they did not understand each other. +They brought them bread and water and some beverage like new wine; they +are very much adorned with bows and arrows and wooden shields, and they +almost all carry arrows poisoned. + +Tuesday, August 7, there came an infinite number of Indians by land and +by sea and all brought with them bread and maize and things to eat and +pitchers of beverages, some white, like milk, tasting like wine, some +green, and some of different colors; he believes that all are made from +fruits. Most or all of it is made from maize but as the maize itself is +white or violet and reddish, it causes the wine to be of different +colors. I do not know of what the green wine is made. They all brought +their bows and poisoned arrows, very pointed;[343-1] they gave nothing +for beads, but would give as much as they had for hawks' bells, and asked +nothing else. They gave a great deal for brass. It is certain that they +hold this in high estimation and they gave in this Española for a little +brass as much gold as any one would ask, and I believe that in the +beginning it was always thus in all these Indies. They called it _turey_ +as if it came from Heaven because they called Heaven _hureyo_.[343-2] +They find in it I do not know what odor, but one which is agreeable to +them. Here the Admiral says whatever they gave them from Castile they +smelled it as soon as it was given them. They brought parrots of two or +three kinds, especially the very large ones like those in the island of +Guadeloupe, he says, with the large tail. They brought handkerchiefs of +cotton very symmetrically woven and worked in colors like those brought +from Guinea, from the rivers of the Sierra Leona and of no difference, +and he says that they cannot communicate with the latter, because from +where he now is to Guinea the distance is more than 800 leagues; below he +says that these handkerchiefs resemble _almayzars_.[343-3] He desired, he +says, to take a half-dozen Indians, in order to carry them with him, and +says that he could not take them because they all went away from the +ships before nightfall. + +But Wednesday, August 8, a canoe came with 12 men to the caravel and they +took them all, and brought them to the ship of the Admiral, and from them +he chose six and sent the others to land. From this it appears that the +Admiral did it without scruple as he did many other times in the first +navigation, it not appearing to him that it was an injustice and an +offence against God and his neighbor to take free men against their will, +separating fathers from their sons and wives from their husbands and [not +reflecting] that according to natural law they were married, and that +other men could not take these women, or those men other women, without +sin and perhaps a mortal sin of which the Admiral was the efficient +cause--and there was the further circumstance that these people came to +the ships under tacit security and promised confidence which should have +been observed toward them; and beyond this, the scandal and the hatred of +the Christians not only there, but in all the earth and among the peoples +that should hear of this. + +He made sail then towards a point which he calls "de l'Aguja,"[344-1] he +does not say when he gave it this name, and from there he says that he +discovered the most beautiful lands that have been seen and the most +populated, and arriving at one place which for its beauty he called +Jardines,[344-2] where there were an infinite number of houses and +people, and those whom he had taken told him there were people who were +clothed, for which reason he decided to anchor, and infinite canoes came +to the ships. These are his words. Each one, he says, wore his cloth so +woven in colors, that it appeared an _almayzar_, with one tied on the +head and the other covering the rest, as has been already explained. Of +these people who now came to the ships, some he says wore gold +leaf[344-3] on the breast, and one of the Indians he had taken told him +there was much gold there, and that they made large mirrors of it, and +they showed how they gathered it. He says mirrors, wherefore the Admiral +must have given some mirrors and the Indian must have said by signs that +of the gold they made those things, for they did not understand the +language. He says that, as he was going hastily along there, because he +was losing the supplies which it had cost him so much labor to obtain, +and this island Española is more than 300 leagues from there, he did not +tarry, which he would have wished very much in order to discover much +more land, and says that it is all full of very beautiful islands, much +populated, and very high lands and valleys and plains, and all are very +large. The people are much more politic than those of Española and +warlike, and there are handsome houses. If the Admiral had seen the +kingdom of Xaraguá as did his brother the Adelantado and the court of the +King Behechio[345-1] he would not have made so absolute a statement. + +Arriving at the point of Aguja, he says that he saw another island to the +south 15 leagues which ran south-east and north-west, very large, and +very high land, and he called it Sabeta, and in the afternoon he saw +another to the west, very high land. All these islands I understand to be +pieces of the mainland which by reason of the inlets and valleys that +separate them seem to be distinct islands notwithstanding that he went +clear inside the gulf which he called Ballena enclosed as is said by +land; and this seems clear since when one is, as he was, within the said +gulf no land bears off to the south, except the mainland; next, the +islands which he mentioned were not islands but pieces of the mainland +which he judged to be islands. + +He anchored at the place he had named the Jardines, and then there came +an infinite number of canoes, large and small, full of people, according +to what he says. Afterwards in the afternoon there came more from all the +territory, many of whom wore at the neck pieces of gold of the size of +horseshoes. It appeared that they had a great deal of it: but they gave +it all for hawks' bells and he did not take it. And this is strange that +a man as provident as the Admiral and desiring to make discoveries should +not have seized this opportunity for trading, as he did on his first +voyage. Yet he had some specimens from them and it was of very poor +quality so that it appeared plated. They said, as well as he could +understand by signs, that there were some islands there where there was +much of that gold, but that the people were canibales, and the Admiral +says here that this word "Canibales" every one there held as a cause for +enmity, or perhaps they said so because they did not wish the Christians +to go yonder, but that they should remain there all their life. The +Christians saw one Indian with a grain of gold as large as an apple. + +Another time there came an infinite number of canoes loaded with people, +and all wore gold and necklaces, and beads of infinite kinds, and had +handkerchiefs tied on their heads as they had hair well cut, and they +appeared very well. It rained a great deal, and for this reason the +people ceased to go and come. Some women came who wore on the arms +strings of beads, and mingled with them were pearls or _aljofars_,[346-1] +very fine, not like the colored ones which were found on the islands of +Babueca; they traded for some of them, and he says that he would send +them to their Highnesses. + +I never knew of these pearls that were found in the islands of Babueca, +which are near Puerto de Plata, in this Española; and these besides are +low under the water and not islands, and they are very dangerous to ships +that pass that way if they are not aware of them; and so they have the +name Abre el Ojo.[346-2] + +The Admiral asked the Indians where they found them or fished them, and +they showed him some mother-of-pearl where they are formed; and they +replied to him by very clear signs, that they grow and are gathered +towards the west, behind that island, which was the Cape of Lapa, the +Point of Paria and mainland, which he believed to be an island, but it +was the mainland. He sent the boats to land to know if there was any new +thing which he had not seen, and they found the people so tractable, says +the Admiral, that, "although the sailors did not go intending to land, +there came two principal persons with all the village, who induced them +to descend and who took them to a large house, built near two streams +and not round, like a camp-tent, in the manner of the houses of the +islands, where they received them very well and made them a feast and +gave them a collation, bread and fruit of many kinds; and the drink was a +white beverage which had a great value, which every one brought there, at +this time, and some of it is tinted and better than the other, as the +wine with us. The men were all together at one end of the house and the +women at the other. Having taken the collation at the house of the older +man, the younger conducted them to the other house, where they went +through the same function. It appeared that one must be the cacique and +lord, and the other must be his son. Afterwards the sailors returned to +the boats and with them went back to the ships, very pleased with this +people." These are all the words of the Admiral. He says further: "They +are of very handsome stature, and all uniformly large," and whiter than +any other he had seen in these Indies, and that yesterday he saw many as +white as we are, and with better hair and well cut, and of very good +speech. "No lands in the world can be more green and beautiful or more +populated; moreover the temperature since I have been in this island," +says he, "is, I say, cool enough each morning for a lined gown, although +it is so near the equinoctial line; the sea is however fresh. They called +the island Paria." All are the words of the Admiral. He called the +mainland an island, however, because so he believed it to be. + +Friday, August 10, he ordered sail to be made and went to the west of +that which he thought to be an island, and travelled five leagues and +anchored. For fear of not finding bottom, he went to search for an +opening [mouth] by which to get out of that gulf, within which he was +going, encircled by mainland and islands, although he did not believe it +to be mainland, and he says it is certain that that was an island, +because the Indians said thus, and thus it appears he did not understand +them. From there he saw another island facing the south, which he called +Ysabeta,[347-1] which extends from the south-east to north-west, +afterwards another which he called La Tramontana,[348-1] a high land and +very beautiful, and it seemed that it ran from north to south. It +appeared very large. This was the mainland. The Indians whom he had taken +said--according to what he understood--that the people there were +_Canibales_ and that yonder was where the gold was found and that the +pearls which they had given the Admiral they had sought and found on the +northern part of Paria toward the west. The water of that sea he says was +as fresh as that of the river of Seville and in the same manner muddy. He +would have wished to go to those islands except for turning backward +because of the haste he felt in order not to lose the supplies that he +was taking for the Christians of Española, which with so much labor, +difficulty and fatigue he had gathered for them; and as being a thing for +the sake of which he had suffered much, he repeats this about the +provisions or supplies many times. He says he believes that in those +islands he had seen, there must be things of value because they are all +large and high lands with valleys and plains and with many waters and +very well cultivated and populated and the people of very good speech, as +their gestures showed. These are the words of the Admiral. + +He says also that if the pearls are born as Pliny[348-2] says from the +dew which falls in the oysters while they are open, there is good reason +for having them there because much dew falls in that place and there are +an infinite number of oysters and very large ones and because there are +no tempests there, but the sea is always calm, a sign of which is that +the trees enter into the sea, which shows there is never a storm there, +and every branch of the trees which were in the water (and there are also +roots of certain trees in the sea, which according to the language of +this Española are called _mangles_[348-3]) was full of an infinite number +of oysters so that breaking a branch, it comes out full of oysters +attached to it. They are white within, and their flesh also, and very +savory, not salt but fresh and they require some salt, and he says that +they do not know or spring from mother-of-pearl. Wherever the pearls are +generated, he says, they are extremely fine and they pierce them as in +Venice. As for this that the Admiral says that the branches were full of +oysters there, we say that those oysters that he saw and that are on the +branches above the water and a little under the water are not those that +produce pearls, but another species; because those that bear pearls are +more careful from their natural instinct to hide themselves as much +further under water as they can than those he saw on the +branches....[349-1] + +Returning to where I dropped the thread of the history, at this place the +Admiral mentions many points of land and islands and the names he had +given them, but it does not appear when. In this and elsewhere the +Admiral shows himself to be a native of another country and of another +tongue, because he does not apprehend all the signification of the +Castilian words nor the manner of using them. He gave names to the Punta +Seca, the Ysla Ysabeta, the Ysla Tramontana, the Punta Llana, Punta Sara, +assuming them to be known, although he has said nothing of them or of any +of them. He says that all that sea is fresh, and he does not know from +whence it proceeds, because it did not appear to have the flow from great +rivers, and that, if it had them, he says it would not cease to be a +marvel. But he was mistaken in thinking there were no rivers, since the +river Yuyaparí furnished so great a flow of fresh water, as well as +others which come from near there. + +Desiring to get out of this Gulf of Ballena, where he was encircled by +mainland and La Trinidad, as already said, in going to the west by that +coast of the mainland, which he called "de Gracia" towards the point +Seca, although he does not say where it was, he found two fathoms of +water, no more. He sent the small caravel to see if there was an outlet +to the north, because, in front of the mainland and of the other which +he called Ysabeta, to the west, there appeared a very high and beautiful +island. The caravel returned, and said that they found a great gulf, and +in it four great openings which appeared small gulfs, and at the end of +each one a river. This gulf he named Golpho de las Perlas, although I +believe there are no pearls there. It appears that this was the inside +corner of all this great gulf,[350-1] in which the Admiral was going +enclosed by the mainland and the island of Trinidad; those four bays or +openings, the Admiral believed were four islands, and that there did not +appear to be a sign of a river, which would make all that gulf, of 40 +leagues, of sea, all fresh; but the sailors affirmed that those openings +were mouths of rivers. And they say true, at least in regard to two of +these openings, because by one comes the great river Yuyaparí and by the +other comes another great river which to-day is called the river of +Camarí.[350-2] + +The Admiral would have liked very much to find out the truth of this +secret, which was the cause of this great gulf being 40 leagues in length +by 26 in width, containing fresh water, which was a thing, he says, for +wonder, (and he was certainly right), and also to penetrate the secrets +of those lands, where he did not believe it to be possible that there +were not things of value, or that they were not in the Indies, especially +from having found there traces of gold and pearls and the news of them, +and discovered such lands, so many and such people in them; from which +the things there and their riches might easily be known; but because the +supplies he was carrying for the people who were in this Española, and +which he carried that they who were in the mines gathering gold might +have food, were being lost, which food and supplies he had gathered with +great difficulty and fatigue, he did not allow himself to be detained, +and he says that, if he had the hope of having more as quickly, he would +postpone delivering them, in order to discover more lands and see the +secrets of them; and finally he resolves to follow that which is most +sure, and come to this island, and send from it moneys to Castile to +bring supplies and people under hire, and at the earliest opportunity to +send also his brother, the Adelantado, to prosecute his discovery and +find great things, as he hoped they would be found, to serve our Lord and +the Sovereigns. + +Yet, just at the best time, the thread was cut, as will appear, of these +his good desires, and he says thus: "Our Lord guides me by His pity and +presents me things with which He may be served, and your Highnesses may +have great pleasure, and certainly they ought to have pleasure, because +here they have such a noble thing and so royal for great princes. And it +is a great error to believe any one who speaks evil to them of this +undertaking, but to abhor them, because there is not to be found a prince +who has had so much grace from our Lord, and so much victory from a thing +so signal and of so much honor to their high estate and realms, and by +which God may receive endlessly more services and the people of Spain +more refreshment and gains. Because it has been seen that there are +infinite things of value, and although now this that I say may not be +known, the time will come when it will be accounted of great excellence, +and to the great reproach of those persons who oppose this project to +your Highnesses; and although they may have expended something in this +matter, it has been in a cause more noble and of greater account than any +undertaking of any other prince until now, nor was it proper to withdraw +from it hastily, but to proceed and give me aid and favor; because the +Sovereigns of Portugal spent and had courage to spend in Guinea, for four +or five years, money and people, before they received any benefit, and +afterward God gave them advantages and gold. For certainly, if the people +of the kingdom of Portugal be counted, and those of them who died in this +undertaking of Guinea be enumerated, it would be found that they are more +than half of the kingdom;[352-1] and certainly, it would be the greatest +thing to have in Spain a revenue which would come from this undertaking. +Your Highnesses would leave nothing of greater memory; and they may +examine, and discover that no prince of Castile may be found, and I have +not found such by history or by tradition,--who has ever gained land +outside of Spain. And your Highnesses will gain these lands, so very +great, which are another world,[352-2] and where Christianity will have +so great pleasure, and our faith in time so great an increase.[352-3] All +this I say with very honest intention, and because I desire that Your +Highnesses may be the greatest Lords in the world,[352-4] I say Lords of +it all; and that it may all be with great service and contentment of the +Holy Trinity, for which at the end of their days they may have the glory +of Paradise, and not for that which concerns me myself, whose hope is in +His High Majesty, that Your Highnesses will soon see the truth of it, +and this is my ardent desire." All these are the actual words of the +Admiral....[353-1] + +So, in order to get out of this gulf, within which he was surrounded by +land on all parts, with the intention already told of saving the supplies +which he carried, which were being lost, in coming to this island of +Española,--Saturday, August 11, at the appearance of the moon, he raised +the anchors, spread the sails, and navigated toward the east (_el +leste_), that is towards the place where the sun rises,[353-2] because he +was in the corner of the gulf where was the river Yuyaparí as was said +above, in order to go out between the Point of Paria and the mainland, +which he called the Punta or Cabo de Lapa, and the land he named Ysla de +Gracia, and between the cape which he called Cabo Boto of the island of +Trinidad. + +He arrived at a very good harbor, which he called Puerto de Gatos,[353-3] +which is connected with the mouth where are the two little islands of the +Caracol and Delfin, between the capes of Lapa and Cape Boto. And this +occurred Sunday, August 12. + +He anchored near the said harbor, in order to go out by the said mouth in +the morning. He found another port near there, to examine which he sent a +boat. It was very good. They found certain houses of fishermen, and much +water and very fresh. He named it Puerto de las Cabañas.[353-4] They +found, he says, myrobolans on the land: near the sea, infinite oysters +attached to the branches of the trees which enter into the sea, the +mouths open to receive the dew which drops from the leaves and which +engenders the pearls, as Pliny says and as is alleged in the vocabulary +which is called _Catholicon_.[353-5] + +Monday, August 13, at the rising of the moon, he weighed anchor from +where he was, and came towards the Cape of Lapa, which is Paria, in order +to go to the north by the mouth called Del Drago, for the following cause +and danger in which he saw himself there; the Mouth of the Dragon, he +says, is a strait which is between the Point of Lapa, the end of the +island of Gracia, which is at the east end of the land of Paria and +between Cape Boto which is the western end of the island of Trinidad. He +says it is about a league and a half between the two capes. This must be +after having passed four little islands which he says lie in the centre +of the channel, although now we do not really see more than two, by which +he could not go out, and there remained of the strait only a league and a +half in the passage. From the Punta de la Lapa to the Cabo de Boto it is +five leagues. Arriving at the said mouth at the hour of tierce,[354-1] he +found a great struggle between the fresh water striving to go out to the +sea and the salt water of the sea striving to enter into the gulf, and it +was so strong and fearful, that it raised a great swell, like a very high +hill, and with this, both waters made a noise and thundering, from east +to west, very great and fearful, with currents of water, and after one +came four great waves one after the other, which made contending +currents; here they thought to perish, no less than in the other mouth of +the Sierpe by the Cape of Arenal when they entered into the gulf. This +danger was doubly more than the other, because the wind with which they +hoped to get out died away, and they wished to anchor, because there was +no remedy other than that, although it was not without danger from the +fierceness of the waters, but they did not find bottom, because the sea +was very deep there. They feared that the wind having calmed, the fresh +or salt water might throw them on the rocks with their currents, when +there would be no help. It is related that the Admiral here said, +although I did not find it written with his own hand as I found the +above, that if they escaped from that place they could report that they +escaped from the mouth of the dragon, and for this reason that name was +given to it and with reason. + +It pleased the goodness of God that from the same danger safety and +deliverance came to them and the current of the fresh water overcame the +current of the salt water and carried the ships safely out, and thus they +were placed in security; because when God wills that one or many shall be +kept alive, water is a remedy for them.[355-1] Thus they went out, +Monday, August 13, from the said dangerous Gulf and Mouth of the Dragon. +He says that there are 48 leagues from the first land of La Trinidad to +the gulf which the sailors discovered whom he sent in the caravel, where +they saw the rivers and he did not believe them, which gulf he called "de +las Perlas," and this is the interior angle of all the large gulf, which +he called "de la Ballena," where he travelled so many days encircled by +land. I add that it is a good 50 leagues, as appears from the chart. + +Having gone out of the gulf and the Boca del Drago and having passed his +danger, he decides to go to the west by the coast below[355-2] of the +mainland, believing yet that it was the island of Gracia, in order to get +abreast, on the right, of the said Gulf of the Pearls, north and south, +and to go around it,[355-3] and see whence comes so great abundance of +water, and to see if it proceeded from rivers, as the sailors affirmed +and which he says he did not believe because he had not heard that either +the Ganges, the Nile or the Euphrates[355-4] carried so much fresh +water. The reason which moved him was because he did not see lands large +enough to give birth to such great rivers, "unless indeed," he says, +"that this is mainland." These are his words. So that he was already +beginning to suspect that the land of Gracia which he believed to be an +island is mainland, which it certainly was and is, and the sailors had +been right, from which land there came such a quantity of water from the +rivers, Yuyaparí and the other which flows out near it, which we now call +Camarí, and others which must empty there, so that, going in search of +that Gulf of the Pearls, where the said rivers empty, thinking to find it +surrounded by land, considering it an island and to see if there was an +entrance there, or an outlet to the south, and if he did not find it, he +says he would affirm then that it was a river, and that both were a great +wonder,--he went down the coast that Monday until the setting of the sun. + +He saw that the coast was filled with good harbors and a very high land; +by that lower coast he saw many islands toward the north and many capes +on the mainland, to all of which he gave names: to one, Cabo de Conchas; +to another, Cabo Luengo; to another, Cabo de Sabor; to another, Cabo +Rico. A high and very beautiful land. He says that on that way there are +many harbors and very large gulfs which must be populated, and the +farther he went to the west he saw the land more level and more +beautiful. On going out of the mouth, he saw an island to the north, +which might be 26 leagues from the north, and named it La Isla de la +Asuncion; he saw another island and named it La Concepcion, and three +other small islands together he called Los Testigos.[356-1] They are +called this to-day. Another near them he called El Romero, and three +other little small islands he called Las Guardias. Afterwards he arrived +near the Isla Margarita, and called it Margarita, and another near it he +named El Martinet. + +This Margarita is an island 15 leagues long, and 5 or 6 wide, and is very +green and beautiful on the coast and is very good within, for which +reason it is inhabited; it has near it extending lengthwise east and +west, three small islands, and two behind them extending north and south. +The Admiral did not see more than the three, as he was going along the +southern part of Margarita. It is six or seven leagues from the mainland, +and this makes a small gulf between it and the mainland, and in the +middle of the gulf are two small islands, east and west, beside each +other: the one is called Coche, which means deer, and the other Cubagua, +which is the one we have described in chapter 136, and said that there +are an infinite quantity of pearls gathered there. So that the Admiral, +although he did not know that the pearls were formed in this gulf, +appears to have divined that fact in naming it Margarita; he was very +near it, although he does not express it, because he says he was nine +leagues from the island of Martinet, which he says was near Margarita, on +the northern part, and he says near it, because as he was going along the +southern part of Margarita, it appeared to be near, although it was eight +or nine leagues away; and this is the small island to the north, near +Margarita, which is now called Blanca, and is distant eight or nine +leagues from Margarita as I said. For here it seems that the Admiral must +have been close to or near Margarita and I believe that he anchored +because the wind failed him. Finally of all the names that he gave to the +islands and capes of the mainland which he took for the island of Gracia +none have lasted or are used to-day except Trinidad, Boca del Drago, Los +Testigos, and Margarita. + +There the eyes of the Admiral became very bad from not sleeping. Because +always, as he was in so many dangers sailing among islands, it was his +custom himself to watch on deck, and whoever takes ships with cargo +should for the most part do that very thing, like the pilots, and he says +that he found himself more fatigued here than when he discovered the +other mainland, which is the island of Cuba, (which he regarded as +mainland even until now), because his eyes were bloodshot; and thus his +labors on the sea were incomparable. For this reason he was in bed this +night, and therefore he found himself farther out in the sea than he +would have been if he had himself watched, from which he did not trust +himself to the sailors, nor should any one who is a diligent and perfect +pilot trust to anybody, because dependent on him and on his head are all +those who go in the ship, and that which is most necessary and proper to +his office is to watch and not sleep all the time while he navigates. + +The Admiral appears to have gone down the coast after he came out of the +Mouth of the Dragon, yesterday Monday and to-day Tuesday, 30 or 40 +leagues at least, although he does not say so, as he complains that he +did not write all that he had to write, as he could not on account of his +being so ill here. And as he saw that the land was becoming very extended +below to the west, and appeared more level and more beautiful, and the +Gulf of the Pearls which was in the back part of the gulf, or fresh-water +sea, whence the river of Yuyaparí flowed, in the search of which he was +going, had no outlet, which he hoped to see, believing that this mainland +was an island, he now became conscious that a land so great was not an +island, but mainland, and as if speaking with the Sovereigns, he says +here: "I believe that this is mainland, very great, which until to-day +has not been known. And reason aids me greatly because of this being such +a great river and because of this sea which is fresh, and next the saying +of Esdras aids me, in the 4th book, chapter 6th, which says that the six +parts of the world are of dry land and the one of water.[358-1] Which +book St. Ambrose approves in his Examenon[358-2] and St. Augustine on the +passage, 'Morietur filius meus Christus,' as Francisco de Mayrones +alleges.[359-1] And further, I am supported by the sayings of many +Canibales Indians, whom I took at other times, who said that to the south +of them was mainland, and at that time I was on the island of Guadeloupe, +and also I heard it from others of the island of Sancta Cruz and of Sant +Juan, and they said that in it there was much gold, and, as your +Highnesses know, a very short time ago, there was no other land known +than that which Ptolemy wrote of, and there was not in my time any one +who would believe that one could navigate from Spain to the Indies; about +which matter I was seven years in your Court, and there were few who +understood it; and finally the very great courage of your Highnesses +caused it to be tried, against the opinion of those who contradicted it. +And now the truth appears, and it will appear before long, much greater; +and if this is mainland, it is a thing of wonder, and it will be so among +all the learned, since so great a river flows out that it makes a +fresh-water sea of 48 leagues." These are his words....[359-2] + +Having finished this digression let us return then to our history and to +what the Admiral resolved to do in the place where he was, and that is, +going as fast as possible, he wished to come to this Española, for some +reasons which impelled him greatly: one, because he was going with great +anxiety and affliction, as he had not had news of the condition of this +island for so many days; and it would seem that he had some, premonition +of the disorder and the losses and the travail which with the rising of +Francisco Roldan[360-1] all this land and his brothers were suffering; +the other in order to despatch immediately the Adelantado, his brother, +with three ships, to continue his discovery of the mainland which he had +already begun to explore; and it is certain that if Francisco Roldan with +his rebellion and shamelessness had not prevented him, the Admiral or his +brother for him would have discovered the mainland as far as New Spain; +but, according to the decree of Divine Providence, the hour of its +discovery had not come, nor was the permission recalled[360-2] by which +many were being enabled to distinguish themselves in unjust works under +color of making discoveries. + +The third cause which hastened him in coming to this island, was from +seeing that the supplies were spoiling and being lost, of which he had +such great need for the relief of those who were here, which made him +weep again, considering that he had obtained them with great difficulties +and fatigues, and he says that, if they are lost, he has no hope of +getting others, from the great opposition he always encountered from +those who counselled the Sovereigns, "who," he says here, "are not +friends nor desire the honor of the high condition of their Highnesses, +the persons who have spoken evil to them of such a noble undertaking. Nor +was the cost so great that it should not be expended, although benefits +might not be had quickly to recompense it, since the service was very +great which was rendered our Lord in spreading His Holy Name through +unknown lands. And besides this, it would be a much greater memorial +than any Prince had left, spiritual and temporal." And the Admiral says +further, "And for this the revenue of a good bishopric or archbishopric +would be well secured, and I say," says he, "as good as the best in +Spain, since there are here so many resources and as yet no priesthood. +They may have heard that here there are infinite peoples, which may have +determined the sending here of learned and intelligent persons and +friends of Christ to try and make them Christians and commence the work; +the establishment of which bishopric I am very sure will be made, please +our Lord, and the revenues will soon come from here and be carried +there." These are his words. How much truth he spoke and how clear a case +there was of inattention and remissness and lukewarmness of charity in +the men of that day, spiritual or ecclesiastical and temporal, who held +the power and resources, not to make provision for the healing and +conversion of these peoples, so disposed and ready to receive the faith, +the day of universal judgment will reveal. + +The fourth cause for coming to this island and not stopping to discover +more, which he would have very much wished, as he says, was because the +seamen did not come prepared to make discoveries, since he says that he +did not dare to say in Castile that he came with intention to make +discoveries, because they would have placed some impediments in his way, +or would have demanded more money of him than he had, and he says that +the people were becoming very tired. The fifth cause, was because the +ships he had were large for making discoveries, as the one was of more +than 100 tons and the other more than 70, and only smaller ones are +needed to make discoveries; and because of the ship which he took on his +first voyage being large, he lost it in the harbor of Navidad, kingdom of +the King Guacanagarí.[361-1] Also the sixth reason which very much +constrained him to leave the discoveries and come to this island, was +because of having his eyes almost lost from not sleeping, from the long +and continued watches or vigils he had had; and in this place he says +thus: "May it please our Lord to free me from this malady," he says. "He +well knows that I did not suffer these fatigues in order to find +treasures for myself, since surely I recognize that all is vanity which +is done in this age, save that which is for the honor and service of God, +which is not to amass pomps or riches, nor the many other things we use +in this world, in which we are more inclined than to the things which can +save us." These are his words. + +Truly this man had a good Christian purpose and was very contented with +his own estate and desired in a moderate degree to maintain himself in +it, and to rest from such sore travail, which he fully merited; yet the +result of his sweat and toil was to impose a greater burden on the +Sovereigns, and I do not know what greater was necessary than had already +fallen to them, and even he had imposed obligations on them, except that +he kept seeing that little importance was made of his distinguished +services that he had performed, and that all at once the estimation of +these Indies which was held at first was declining and coming to naught, +through those that had the ears of the Sovereigns, so that he feared each +day greater disfavors and that the Sovereigns might give up the whole +business and thus his sweat and travail be entirely lost. + +Having determined, then, to come as quickly as he could to this island, +Wednesday, August 15, which was the day of the Assumption of Our Lady, +after the rising of the sun, he ordered the anchors weighed from where he +was anchored, which must have been within the small gulf which Margarita +and the other islands make with the mainland (and he must have been near +Margarita as we said above, ch. 139), and sailed on the way to this +island; and, pursuing his way, he saw very clearly Margarita and the +little islands which were there, and also, the farther away he went, he +discovered more high land of the continent. And he went that day from +sunrise to sunset 63 leagues, because of the great currents which +supplemented the wind....[362-1] + +Let us return to the voyage of the Admiral, whom we left started from the +neighborhood of the island of Margarita, and he went that day, Wednesday, +63 leagues from sun to sun, as they say. The next day, Thursday, August +16, he navigated to the north-west, quarter of the north,[363-1] 26 +leagues, with the sea calm, "thanks be to God," as he always said. He +tells here a wonderful thing, that when he left the Canaries for this +Española, having gone 300 leagues to the west, then the needles declined +to the north-west[363-2] one quarter, and the North Star did not rise but +5 degrees, and now in this voyage it has not declined to the +north-west[363-2] until last night, when it declined more than a quarter +and a half, and some needles declined a half wind which are two +quarters;[363-3] and this happened suddenly last night. And he says each +night he was marvelling at such a change in the heavens, and of the +temperature there, so near the equinoctial line, which he experienced in +all this voyage, after having found land; especially the sun being in +Leo, where, as has been told, in the mornings a loose gown was worn, and +where the people of that place--Gracia--were actually whiter than the +people who have been seen in the Indies. He also found in the place where +he now came, that the North Star was in 14 degrees when the +Guardians[363-4] had passed from the head after two hours and a half. +Here he again exhorted the Sovereigns to esteem this affair highly, since +he had shown them that there was in this land gold, and he had seen in it +minerals without number, which will have to be extracted with +intelligence, industry and labor, since even the iron, as much as there +is, cannot be taken out without these sacrifices; and he has taken them a +nugget of 20 ounces and many others, and where this is, it must be +believed there is plenty, and he took their Highnesses a lump of copper +originally of six _arrobas_,[364-1] lapis-lazuli, gum-lac, amber, cotton, +pepper, cinnamon, a great quantity of Brazil-wood, aromatic gum,[364-2] +white and yellow sandalwood, flax, aloes, ginger, incense, myrobolans of +all kinds, very fine pearls and pearls of a reddish color, which Marco +Polo says are worth more than the white ones,[364-3] and that may well be +so in some parts just as it is the case with the shells that are gathered +in Canaria and are sold for so great a price in the Mine of Portugal. +"There are infinite kinds of spices which have been seen of which I do +not care to speak for fear of prolixity." All these are his words. + +As to what he says of cinnamon, and aloes and ginger, incense, +myrobolans, sandal woods, I never saw them in this island, at least I did +not recognize them; what he says of flax must mean _cabuya_[364-4] which +are leaves like the _cavila_ from which thread is made and cloth or linen +can be made from it, but it is more like hemp cloth than linen. There are +two sorts of it, _cabuya_ and _nequen_; _cabuya_ is coarse and rough and +_nequen_ is soft and delicate. Both are words of this island Española. +Storax gum I never smelled except in the island of Cuba, but I did not +see it, and this is certain that in Cuba there must be trees of it, or of +a gum that smells like it, because we never smelled it except in the +fires that the Indians make of wood that they burn in their houses. It is +a most perfect perfume, certainly. I never knew of incense being found in +these islands. + +Returning to the journey, Friday, August 17, he went 37 leagues, the sea +being smooth, "to God our Lord," he says, "may infinite thanks be given." +He says that not finding islands now, assures him that that land from +whence he came is a vast mainland, or where the Earthly Paradise is, +"because all say that it is at the end of the east, and this is the +Earthly Paradise,"[365-1] says he. + +Saturday, between day and night, he went 39 leagues. + +Sunday, August 19, he went in the day and the night 33 leagues, and +reached land; and this was a very small island which he called Madama +Beata, and which is now commonly so called. This is a small island of a +matter of a league and a half close by this island of Española, and +distant from this port of Sancto Domingo about 50 leagues and distant 15 +leagues from the port of Yaquino, which is more to the west. There is +next to it another smaller one which has a small but somewhat high +mountain, which from a distance looks like a sail, and he named it Alto +Velo.[365-2] He believed that the Beata was a small island which he +called Sancta Catherina when he came by this southern coast, from the +discovery of the island of Cuba, and distant from this port of Sancto +Domingo 25 leagues, and is next to this island. It weighed upon him to +have fallen off in his course so much, and he says it should not be +counted strange, since during the nights he was from caution beating +about to windward, for fear of running against some islands or shoals; +there was therefore reason for this error, and thus in not following a +straight course, the currents, which are very strong here, and which flow +down towards the mainland and the west, must have carried the ships, +without realizing it, so low. They run so violently there toward La Beata +that it has happened that a ship has been eight months in those waters +without being able to reach this port and that much of delay in coming +from there here, has happened many times. + +Therefore he anchored now between the Beata and this island, between +which there are two leagues of sea, Monday, August 20. He then sent the +boats to land to call Indians, as there were villages there, in order to +write of his arrival to the Adelantado; having come at midday, he +despatched them. Twice there came to the ship six Indians, and one of +them carried a crossbow with its cord, and nut and rack,[366-1] which +caused him no small surprise, and he said, "May it please God that no one +is dead." And because from Sancto Domingo the three ships must have been +seen to pass downward, and concluding that it certainly was the Admiral +as he was expecting him each day, the Adelantado started then in a +caravel and overtook the Admiral here. They both were very much pleased +to see each other. The Admiral having asked him about the condition of +the country, the Adelantado recounted to him how Francisco Roldan had +arisen with 80 men, with all the rest of the occurrences which had passed +in this island, since he left it. What he felt on hearing such news, +there is small need to recite. + +He left there, Wednesday, August 22, and finally with some difficulty +because of the many currents and the north-east breezes which are +continuous and contrary there he arrived at this port of Sancto Domingo, +Friday, the last day of August of the said year 1498, having set out from +Isabela for Castile, Thursday the tenth day of March, 1496, so that he +delayed in returning to this island two years and a half less nine days. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[319-1] _I.e._, the first Admiral of the Ocean and the Indies where Las +Casas was when he was writing. + +[319-2] This clause is probably an explanatory remark by Las Casas. It is +misleading. The war in Naples growing out of the invasion of Italy by +Charles VIII. of France, in which Ferdinand had taken an active part +against the French, had been brought to a close so far as concerned +France and Spain by a truce in March, 1497. The treaty of peace was +signed August 5, 1498. + +[320-1] Funchal. + +[320-2] This positive assertion that Columbus had lived in Funchal, +Madeira, has been overlooked by Vignaud and Harrisse. Vignaud, _Études +Critiques sur la Vie de Colomb avant ses Découvertes_ (Paris, 1905), p. +443, note 9, rejects as unauthenticated the tradition that Columbus lived +in Madeira, without adequate grounds it seems to me. Diego Columbus told +Las Casas in 1519 that he was born in the neighboring island of Puerto +Santo and that his father had lived there. Las Casas, _Historia de las +Indias_, I. 54. This passage is not noted by Vignaud. + +[320-3] One of the Canary Islands. + +[321-1] The Adelantado was Bartholomew Columbus. The title Adelantado was +given in Spain to the military and political governors of border +provinces. In this use it was transplanted to America in the earlier +days. _Cf._ Moses, _The Establishment of Spanish Rule in America_, pp. +68-69. + +[321-2] Beatrix Enriquez. + +[321-3] This Juan Antonio Columbo seems to have been a first cousin of +the admiral. _Cf._ Markham, _Christopher Columbus_, pp. 2 and 187. It is +to be noted that he retained in Spain his family name and did not follow +the discoverer in changing his name to Colon. On this change of name, see +above, p. 77, note 2. + +[321-4] _I.e._, west by south. + +[321-5] Porto Rico. + +[321-6] Founded in the summer of 1496 by Bartholomew Columbus in +accordance with the directions of the Admiral to establish a new +settlement on the south side of the island. Las Casas, II. 136. + +[322-1] "This Española," so frequently repeated, is one of the +indications that Las Casas was writing in Española. + +[322-2] _Canibales_, here used still as a tribal name equivalent to +Caribbees. + +[322-3] The correct form of this name is Gargades. Columbus's knowledge +of them was derived indirectly from Pliny's _Natural History_, book VI., +XXXVII., through Cardinal d'Ailly's _Imago Mundi_. _Cf._ Columbus's +marginal note to ch. XXXXI. of that work: "_De situ Gorgodum insule nunc +de Capite Viride vel Antonii dicitur." Raccolta Colombiana_, parte I., +vol. II., p. 395. According to Pliny's location of them they were +probably the Canaries. Pliny's knowledge of the location of the +Hesperides is naturally vague, but his text would support their +identification with the Cape Verde Islands. + +[323-1] In this Columbus was mistaken, although he had no means of +knowing it in 1498. Vasco da Gama had sailed in that sea the preceding +summer. _Cf._ Bourne, _Spain in America_, p. 72. + +[323-2] Ferro. + +[323-3] August 16, 1494, the sovereigns included in the letter despatched +to Columbus by Torres the essential articles of the Treaty of +Tordesillas, signed June 7, 1494, and asked him if he could not +co-operate in locating the Demarcation Line. Navarrete, _Coleccion de +Viages_, II. 155; Harrisse, _Diplomatic History of America_, pp. 80-81. + +[323-4] Columbus's illness began in September, 1494, and it was five +months before he was fully recovered. Ferdinand Columbus, _Historie_, ed. +1867, p. 177. The death of Prince John took place October 4, 1497. No +actual scientific conference to locate the line took place till that at +Badajoz in 1524. See Bourne, _Essays in Historical Criticism_, pp. +205-211. + +[324-1] _Mayordomo._ + +[324-2] _Escribano de la hacienda._ In 1497 Rodrigo Affonso, a member of +the king's council, was granted the northern of the two captaincies into +which São Thiago was divided and also the wild cattle on the island of +Boavista (Buenavista in Spanish). D'Avezac, _Ils de l'Afrique_ (Paris, +1848), p. 218. The word _mayordomo_, translated "steward," here stands +for the high Portuguese title of honor _Mordomo môr da Casa Real_, a +title in its origin similar to the _majores domus_ or mayors of the +palace of the early French kings. _Escribano de la hacienda del Rey_ +means rather the king's treasurer. + +[324-3] This account of Boavista and its lepers is not noticed in the +histories of the Cape Verde Islands so far as I know. + +[324-4] From Pliny's time through the Middle Ages the name Ethiopia +embraced all tropical Africa. He calls the Atlantic in the tropics the +"Ethiopian Sea." Pliny's _Natural History_, book VI., chs. XXXV. and +XXXVI. + +[325-1] A remark by Las Casas, of which many are interspersed with the +material from Columbus's Journal of this voyage. + +[326-1] The Tordesillas line was 370 leagues west of the Cape Verde +Islands alone. + +[326-2] This reason for the desire of King John of Portugal to have the +Demarcation Line moved further west has escaped all the writers on the +subject. If Columbus reported the king's ideas correctly, we may have +here a clew to one of the reasons why Cabral went so far to the southwest +in 1500 that he discovered Brazil when on his voyage to India, and +perhaps also one of the reasons why Vasco da Gama struck off so boldly +into the South Atlantic. _Cf._ Bourne, _Spain in America_, pp. 72, 74. + +[327-1] Sierra Leone. + +[328-1] As one faces north. + +[329-1] On Hanno's voyage see _Encyclopædia Britannica_ under his name. +There was no Greek historian Amianus; the name should be Arrianus, who +wrote the history of Alexander the Great's expedition to India and a +history of India. The reference is to the latter work, ch. XLIII., sects. +11, 12. + +Ludovico Celio: Ludovico Ricchieri, born about 1450. He was for a time a +professor in the Academy at Milan. He took the Latin name Rhodiginus from +his birthplace Rovigo, and sometimes his name appears in full as +Ludovicus Coelius Richerius Rhodiginus. His _Antiquarum Lectionum Libri +XVI._ was published at Venice in 1516, at Paris in 1517, and in an +extended form at Basel, 1542. It is a collection of passages from the +classical authors relating to all branches of knowledge, with a critical +commentary. + +[329-2] The Guards, "the two brightest stars in Ursa Minor." (Tolhausen.) + +[329-3] _Grajos._ The meaning given in the dictionaries for _grajo_ is +"daw." + +[329-4] This word, as a name of a fish, is Portuguese. It means +"blunted." + +[329-5] See Pliny, _Natural History_, book IV., ch. XXXVI. The +Cassiterides are commonly identified with the Scilly Islands. + +[329-6] The fifth clime or climate is a term in Ptolemy's geographical +system. The fifth climate was a strip 255 Roman miles in width lying +between 41° and 45° north latitude. _Cf._ _Raccolta Columbiana_,[TN-7] +Parte I., Tomo 2, p. 293. The latitude of the Azores is about 37°-40°. + +[330-1] The names are _alcatraz_ and _rabihorcado_. See above, note to +Journal of First Voyage, p. 98, note 1, and p. 103, note 1. + +[330-2] Huelva, near Palos. + +[331-1] Trinidad. + +[331-2] Salve Regina, one of the great hymns to the Virgin in the +Catholic service. "The antiphon said after Lauds and Compline from +Trinity Sunday to Advent." Addis and Arnold, _Catholic Dictionary_. + +[331-3] _I.e._, that his will was not to serve the sovereigns but to +advance himself. + +[332-1] Cape of the Galley. To-day, Cape Galeota. + +[332-2] The last of the canonical hours of prayer, after sunset or early +evening. + +[334-1] Sandy Point. + +[334-2] Of the whale. + +[334-3] One of the native names of the Orinoco, here referring to one of +the northern branch mouths. A detailed map of the region is given +Winsor's _Columbus_, p. 353. + +[336-1] "A sort of veil, or head attire used by the Moorish women, made +of thin silk, striped of several colors, and shagged at the ends, which +hangs down on the back." John Stevens, _A New Dictionary, Spanish and +English_, etc. (London. 1726.) + +[337-1] The exploration of the west coast of Africa, the only equatorial +regions then known to Europeans, had led to the conclusion that black was +the natural color of the inhabitants of the tropics. + +[337-2] The Navidad referred to by Las Casas was near the Gulf of Paria. +(Thacher.) + +[337-3] _Poner á monte carracas._ _Poner á monte_ is not given in the +Spanish dictionaries, and is apparently a sea phrase identical with the +Portuguese "pôr um navio a monte," to beach or ground a vessel. The +translator went entirely astray in this passage. See Thacher's +_Columbus_, II. 388. The figure here given and the use of word _pasos_, +normally, a land measure of length, instead of _braza_, "fathom," would +seem to indicate that the 65 paces refers to the extent of shore laid +bare, and not to the height of the tide. The corresponding passage in the +_Historie_ reads: "so that it seemed a rapid river both day and night and +at all hours, notwithstanding the fact that the water rose and fell along +the shore (_per la spiaggia_) more than sixty paces between the waves +(_alle marette_) as it is wont to do in San Lucar di Barrameda where the +waters [of the river] are high since although the water rises and falls +it never ceases to run toward the sea," _Historie_ (London ed.), p. 229. +In this passage _maree_, "tides," should be read instead of _marette_. + +[338-1] Accepting the emendation of de Lollis which substitutes _fructas_ +for _fuentes_, "springs." + +[339-1] _I.e._, north by east. + +[339-2] _Loma._ + +[340-1] Las Casas here quotes Columbus's letter to Ferdinand and Isabella +on this voyage. See Major, _Select Letters of Columbus_, p. 123. + +[340-2] Serpent's mouth. The name is still retained. + +[340-3] _Lapa_ means barnacle; _caracol_, periwinkle; and _delfin_, +dolphin. + +[340-4] Dragon's mouth. The name is still retained. + +[340-5] _I.e._, along the south shore of the peninsula of Paria in the +Gulf of Paria. + +[341-1] The grammatical form of this sentence follows the original, which +is irregular. + +[341-2] See p. 311, note 2. + +[341-3] _Galos paules_ (Cat-Pauls). A species of African monkey was so +called in Spain. The name occurs in Marco Polo. On its history and +meaning, see Yule's _Marco Polo_, II. 372. + +[342-1] Im Thurn, _Among the Indians of Guiana_, p. 193, says, "Indians +after babyhood are never seen perfectly naked." + +[343-1] _Flechas con hierba muy á punto_, literally, arrows with grass +very sharp. Gaffarel, _Histoire de la Découverte de l'Amérique_, II. 196, +interprets this to mean arrows feathered with grass; but _hierba_ used in +connection with arrows usually means poison. _Cf._ Oviedo, lib. IX., +title of cap. XII., "_Del árbol ó mançanillo con cuya fructa los indios +caribes flecheros haçen la hierba con que tiran é pélean_." + +[343-2] _Hureyos_ is _Tureyos_ in the printed edition of Las Casas, an +obvious correction of the manuscript reading. On _turey_, see above, p. +310. + +[343-3] See above, p. 336, note 1. + +[344-1] Needle. Alcatrazes, to-day. (Navarrete.) + +[344-2] Gardens. + +[344-3] _Ojas de oro._ The translator took _ojas_ (_hojas_) for _ojos_ +and rendered it "eyes of gold." See Thacher, _Columbus_, II. 393. + +[345-1] _I.e._, in Española. + +[346-1] Irregularly shaped pearls, seed pearls. + +[346-2] "Keep your eyes open." + +[347-1] Isabela in the printed text. + +[348-1] The north wind. + +[348-2] Pliny, _Natural History_, book IX., ch. LIV. + +[348-3] The name is still used. It is the _Rhicopharia mangle_. See the +description of it in Thompson's Alcedo's _Geographical and Historical +Dictionary of America and the West Indies_, Appendix. + +[349-1] Las Casas here inserts a long disquisition on pearls which is +omitted. It covers pp. 246-252 of the printed edition, Vol. II. + +[350-1] _I.e._, the western end of the Gulf of Paria. + +[350-2] These mouths of the Orinoco supplied the fresh water, but they +can hardly be the streams referred to by the sailors who explored the +western end of the Gulf of Paria. Las Casas had no good map of this +region. + +[352-1] Columbus elaborated this point in his letter to Ferdinand and +Isabella. Major, _Select Letters of Columbus_, p. 113. Columbus's +estimate of the sacrifice of lives in the exploration of the west coast +of Africa must be considered a most gross exaggeration. The contemporary +narratives of those explorations give no such impression. + +[352-2] _Cf._ Columbus's letter to the sovereigns, "Your Highnesses have +here another world." Major, _Select Letters of Columbus_, p. 148, and the +letter to the nurse of Prince John, p. 381, _post_. "I have placed under +the dominion of the King and Queen our sovereigns another world." These +passages clearly show that Columbus during and after this voyage realized +that he accomplished something quite different from merely reaching Asia +by a western route. He had found a hitherto unknown portion of the world, +unknown to the ancients or to Marco Polo, but not for that reason +necessarily physically detached from the known Asia. For a fuller +discussion of the meaning of the phrase "_another world_," "_New World_," +and of Columbus's ideas of what he had done, see Bourne, _Spain in +America_, pp. 94-98, and the facsimile of the Bartholomew Columbus map, +opposite p. 96. + +[352-3] A noteworthy prediction. In fact the discovery of the New World +has effected a most momentous change in the relative strength and range +of Christianity among the world-religions. During the Middle Ages +Christianity lost more ground territorially than it gained. Since the +discovery of America its gain has been steady. + +[352-4] Such in fact their Highnesses' grandson, Charles I. (V. as +Emperor), was during his long reign, and such during a part of his reign +if not the whole, was their great-grandson Philip II. See Oviedo's +reflections upon Columbus's career. Bourne, _Spain in America_, p. 82. + +[353-1] Las Casas here comments at some length on these remarks of +Columbus and the great significance of his discoveries. The passage +omitted takes up pp. 255 (line six from bottom) to 258. + +[353-2] Las Casas explains _leste_, which would seem to have been either +peculiar to sailors or at least not in common usage then for "east." + +[353-3] Probably _gatos_ in the sense of _gatos paules_, monkeys, noted +above, p. 341, as very plentiful. + +[353-4] Port of the Cabins. + +[353-5] The _Catholicon_ was one of the earliest Latin lexicons of modern +times and the first to be printed. It was compiled by Johannes de Janua +(Giovanni Balbi of Genoa) toward the end of the thirteenth century and +first printed at Mainz in 1460, and very frequently later. + +[354-1] The third of the canonical hours of prayer, about nine o'clock in +the morning. + +[355-1] _El agua les es medicina_, _i.e._, a means of curing the ill. + +[355-2] _Abajo._ Las Casas views the mainland as extending up from the +sea. Columbus was going west along the north shore of the peninsula of +Paria. + +[355-3] _I.e._, to go west along the north shore of this supposed island +until looking south he was to the right of it and abreast of the Gulf of +Pearls. + +[355-4] Three of the greatest known rivers, each of which drained a vast +range of territory. This narrative reveals the gradual dawning upon +Columbus of the fact that he had discovered a hitherto unknown +continental mass. In his letter to the sovereigns his conviction is +settled and his efforts to adjust it with previous knowledge and the +geographical traditions of the ages are most interesting. See Major, +_Select Letters of Columbus_, pp. 134 _et seqq._ "Ptolemy," he says, on +p. 136, "and the others who have written upon the globe had no +information respecting this part of the world, for it was most unknown." + +[356-1] The Witnesses. + +[358-1] The reference is to _II. Esdras_, VI. 42, in the Apocrypha of the +English Bible. The Apocryphal books of I. and II. Esdras were known as +III. and IV. Esdras in the Middle Ages, and the canonical books in the +Vulgate called I. and II. Esdras are called Ezra and Nehemiah in the +English Bible. II. Esdras is an apocalyptic work and dates from the close +of the first century A.D. The passage to which Columbus referred reads as +follows: "Upon the third day thou didst command that the waters should be +gathered in the seventh part of the earth; six parts hast thou dried up, +and kept them, to the intent that of these some being planted of God and +tilled might serve thee." + +[358-2] The reference is wrong, as Las Casas points out two or three +pages further on (II. 266); it should be to the treatise _De Bono +Mortis_, cap. 10 + +[359-1] Francis de Mayrones was an eminent Scotist philosopher. He died +in 1327. Columbus here quotes from his _Theologicae Veritates_ (Venice, +1493). See _Raccolta Colombiana_, Parte I., tomo II., p. 377. Las Casas +(II. 266) was unable to verify the citation from St. Augustine. + +[359-2] The passage omitted, Las Casas, II. 265-307, consists first, pp. +265-267, of his comments on these words of Columbus, and second, pp. +268-274, of a criticism of Vespucci's claim to have made a voyage in 1497 +to this region of Paria, and of his narratives and the naming of America +from him. This criticism is translated with Las Casas's other trenchant +criticisms of Vespucci's work and claims by Sir Clements R. Markham in +his _Letters of Amerigo Vespucci_ (London, 1894), pp. 68 _et seq._[TN-8] +These passages are very interesting as perhaps the earliest piece of +detailed critical work relating to the discoveries, and they still +constitute the cornerstone of the case against Vespucci. The third +portion of the omitted passage, pp. 275-306, is a long essay on the +location of the earthly paradise which Columbus placed in this new +mainland he had just discovered. _Cf._ Columbus's letter on the Third +Voyage. Major, _Select Letters of Columbus_, pp. 140-146. + +[360-1] On the Roldan revolt, see Irving, _Christopher Columbus_, II. 199 +_et seqq._ + +[360-2] April 10, 1495, the sovereigns authorized independent exploring +expeditions. Columbus protested that such expeditions infringed upon his +rights, and so, June 2, 1497, the sovereigns modified their ordinance and +prohibited any infringements. Apparently Las Casas is in error in saying +the permission had not been recalled in 1498, but the independent voyages +of Hojeda and Pinzon, who first explored the northern coast of South +America (Paria) in 1499-1500, may have led him to conclude that the +authorization had not been recalled. + +[361-1] See Journal of First Voyage, December 25. + +[362-1] The passage omitted, II. 309-313, of the printed edition, gives +an account of the voyage and arrival of the vessels which came to +Española directly from the Canaries. + +[363-1] Northwest by north. + +[363-2] Northeast in the printed text. + +[363-3] The circle of the horizon, represented by the compass card, was +conceived of as divided into eight winds and each wind into halves and +quarters, the quarters corresponding to the modern points of the compass, +which are thirty-two in number. The declination observed was two points +of the compass, or 22° 30'. + +[363-4] See above, p. 329, note 2. + +[364-1] An arroba was twenty-five pounds. + +[364-2] _Estoraque_, officinal storax, a gum used for incense. + +[364-3] _Cf._ Marco Polo, bk. III., ch. II. + +[364-4] Pita, the fibre of the American agave. + +[365-1] _Cf._ the letter on the Third Voyage, Major, _Select Letters of +Columbus_, p. 140, for Columbus's reasoning and beliefs about the Earthly +Paradise or Garden of Eden; for Las Casas's discussion of the question, +see _Historia de las Indias_, II. 275-306. + +[365-2] High sail. + +[366-1] The rack was used to bend the crossbow. + + + + +LETTER OF COLUMBUS TO THE NURSE OF PRINCE JOHN + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +This letter was addressed by Columbus to Doña Juana de Torres, who had +been a nurse of the lately deceased royal prince John, the son of +Ferdinand and Isabella, and who was the sister of Antonio de Torres, who +had accompanied Columbus on his second voyage and was subsequently a +commander in other voyages to the New World. It was probably written on +shipboard when Columbus was sent back to Spain in irons in the autumn of +the year 1500. It is at once a cry of distress and an impassioned +self-defence, and is one of the most important of the Admiral's writings +for the student of his career and character. + +In the letter to Santangel the discoverer announces his success in his +long projected undertaking; in the letter to the nurse he is at the +lowest point in the startling reverse of fortune that befell him because +of the troubles in Santo Domingo, and in the letter on the fourth voyage +he appears as one struggling against the most adverse circumstances to +vindicate his career, and to demonstrate the value of what he had +previously accomplished, and to crown those achievements by actually +attaining the coast of Asia. Columbus regarded his defence as set forth +in this letter as of such importance that he included it in the four +codices or collections of documents and papers prepared in duplicate +before his last voyage to authenticate his titles and honors and to +secure their inheritance by his son. The text of the letter from which +the present translation was made is that of the Paris Codex of the _Book +of Privileges_, as it is called. This is regarded by Harrisse as the +best. The translation is by George F. Barwick of the British Museum, and +was originally published in _Christopher Columbus, Facsimile of his Own +Book of Privileges_, 1502, edited by B.F. Stevens (London, 1903). The +letter remained unpublished until it was printed in Spotorno's _Codice +Diplomatico_ in 1822. In 1825 it appeared again in Navarrete's _Viages_, +in a slightly varying text. It was first published in English in the +translation of the _Codice Diplomatico_ issued in London in 1823 under +the title of _Memorials of Columbus_, etc. + +E.G.B. + + + + +TRANSCRIPT OF A LETTER WHICH THE ADMIRAL OF THE INDIES SENT TO THE NURSE +OF PRINCE DON JOHN OF CASTILE + + +IN THE YEAR 1500 WHEN HE WAS RETURNING FROM THE INDIES AS A PRISONER + +_Most virtuous Lady_:-- + +Though my complaint of the world is new, its habit of ill-using is very +ancient. I have had a thousand struggles with it, and have thus far +withstood them all, but now neither arms nor counsels avail me, and it +cruelly keeps me under water. Hope in the Creator of all men sustains me; +His help was always very ready; on another occasion, and not long ago, +when I was still more overwhelmed, he raised me with his right arm, +saying, O man of little faith, arise, it is I; be not afraid.[371-1] + +I came with so much cordial affection to serve these Princes, and have +served them with such service, as has never been heard of or seen. + +Of the new heaven and earth which our Lord made, when Saint John was +writing the Apocalypse,[371-2] after what was spoken by the mouth of +Isaiah,[371-3] he made me the messenger, and showed me where it lay. In +all men there was disbelief, but to the Queen my Lady He gave the spirit +of understanding, and great courage, and made her heiress of all, as a +dear and much loved daughter. I went to take possession of all this in +her royal name. They sought to make amends to her for the ignorance they +had all shown by passing over their little knowledge, and talking of +obstacles and expenses. Her Highness, on the other hand, approved of it, +and supported it as far as she was able. + +Seven years passed in discussion, and nine in execution.[372-1] During +this time very remarkable and noteworthy things occurred whereof no idea +at all had been formed. I have arrived at, and am in such a condition +that there is no person so vile but thinks he may insult me; he shall be +reckoned in the world as valor itself who is courageous enough not to +consent to it. + +If I were to steal the Indies or the land which lies towards them,[372-2] +of which I am now speaking, from the altar of Saint Peter, and give them +to the Moors, they could not show greater enmity towards me in Spain. Who +would believe such a thing where there was always so much magnanimity? + +I should have much desired to free myself from this affair had it been +honorable towards my Queen to do so. The support of Our Lord and of Her +Highness made me persevere; and to alleviate in some measure the sorrows +which death had caused her,[372-3] I undertook a fresh voyage to the new +heaven and earth which up to that time had remained hidden; and if it is +not held there in esteem like the other voyages to the Indies, that is no +wonder because it came to be looked upon as my work. + +The Holy Spirit inflamed Saint Peter and twelve others with him, and they +all fought here below, and their toils and hardships were many, but last +of all they gained the victory. + +This voyage to Paria[373-1] I thought would somewhat appease them on +account of the pearls, and of the discovery of gold in Española. I +ordered the pearls to be collected and fished for by people with whom an +arrangement was made that I should return for them, and, as I understood, +they were to be measured by the bushel.[373-2] If I did not write about +this to their Highnesses, it was because I wished to have first of all +done the same thing with the gold. The result to me in this has been the +same as in many other things; I should not have lost them nor my honor, +if I had sought my own advantage, and had allowed Española to be ruined, +or if my privileges and contracts had been observed. And I say just the +same about the gold which I had then collected, and [for] which with such +great afflictions and toils I have, by divine power, almost perfected +[the arrangements]. + +When I went from Paria I found almost half the people of Española in +revolt,[373-3] and they have waged war against me until now, as against a +Moor; and the Indians on the other side grievously [harassed me]. At this +time Hojeda arrived[373-4] and tried to put the finishing stroke: he said +that their Highnesses had sent him with promises of gifts, franchises and +pay; he gathered together a great band, for in the whole of Española +there are very few save vagabonds, and not one with wife and children. +This Hojeda gave me great trouble; he was obliged to depart, and left +word that he would soon return with more ships and people, and that he +had left the royal person of the Queen our Lady at the point of death. +Then Vincent Yañez[373-5] arrived with four caravels; there was +disturbance and mistrust, but no mischief; the Indians talked of many +others at the Canibales [Caribbee Islands] and in Paria; and afterwards +spread the news of six other caravels, which were brought by a brother of +the Alcalde,[374-1] but it was with malicious intent. This occurred at +the very last, when the hope that their Highnesses would ever send any +ships to the Indies was almost abandoned, nor did we expect them; and it +was commonly reported that her Highness was dead. + +A certain Adrian about this time endeavored to rise in rebellion again, +as he had done previously, but Our Lord did not permit his evil purpose +to succeed. I had purposed in myself never to touch a hair of anybody's +head, but I lament to say that with this man, owing to his ingratitude, +it was not possible to keep that resolve as I had intended; I should not +have done less to my brother, if he had sought to kill me, and steal the +dominion which my King and Queen had given me in trust.[374-2] This +Adrian, as it appears, had sent Don Ferdinand[374-3] to Xaragua to +collect some of his followers, and there a dispute arose with the Alcalde +from which a deadly contest ensued, but he [Adrian] did not effect his +purpose. The Alcalde seized him and a part of his band, and the fact was +that he would have executed them if I had not prevented it; they were +kept prisoners awaiting a caravel in which they might depart. The news of +Hojeda which I told them, made them lose the hope that he would now come +again. + +For six months I had been prepared to return to their Highnesses with the +good news of the gold, and to escape from governing a dissolute people, +who fear neither God, nor their King and Queen, being full of vices and +wickedness. I could have paid the people in full with six hundred +thousand,[374-4] and for this purpose I had four millions of tenths and +somewhat more, besides the third of the gold. Before my departure I many +times begged their Highnesses to send there, at my expense, some one to +take charge of the administration of justice; and after finding the +Alcalde in arms I renewed my supplications to have either some troops or +at least some servant of theirs with letters patent; for my reputation is +such that even if I build churches and hospitals, they will always be +called dens of thieves. They did indeed make provision at last, but it +was the very contrary of what the matter demanded: may it be successful, +since it was according to their good pleasure. + +I was there for two years without being able to gain a decree of favor +for myself or for those who went there, yet this man[375-1] brought a +coffer full; whether they will all redound to their [Highnesses'] +service, God knows. Indeed, to begin with, there are exemptions for +twenty years, which is a man's lifetime; and gold is collected to such an +extent that there was one person who became worth five marks[375-2] in +four hours; whereof I will speak more fully later on. + +If it would please their Highnesses to remove the grounds of a common +saying of those who know my labors, that the calumny of the people has +done me more harm than much service and the maintenance of their +[Highnesses'] property and dominion has done me good, it would be a +charity, and I should be re-established in my honor, and it would be +talked about all over the world; for the undertaking is of such a nature +that it must daily become more famous and in higher esteem. + +When the commander Bobadilla came to Santo Domingo,[375-3] I was at La +Vega, and the Adelantado[375-4] at Xaragua, where that Adrian had made a +stand, but then all was quiet, and the land rich and all men at peace. +On the second day after his arrival he created himself Governor, and +appointed officers and made executions, and proclaimed immunities of gold +and tenths and in general of everything else for twenty years, which is a +man's lifetime, and that he came to pay everybody in full up to that day, +even though they had not rendered service; and he publicly notified that, +as for me, he had charge to send me in irons, and my brothers likewise, +as he has done, and that I should nevermore return thither, nor any other +of my family; alleging a thousand disgraceful and discourteous things +about me. All this took place on the second day after his arrival, as I +have said, and while I was absent at a distance, without my knowing +either of him or of his arrival. + +Some letters of their Highnesses signed in blank, of which he brought a +number, he filled up and sent to the Alcalde and to his company, with +favors and commendations; to me he never sent either letter or messenger, +nor has he done so to this day. Imagine what any one holding my office +would think when one who endeavored to rob their Highnesses, and who has +done so much evil and mischief, is honored and favored, while he who +maintained it at such risks is degraded. + +When I heard this, I thought that this affair would be like that of +Hojeda or one of the others, but I restrained myself when I learnt for +certain from the friars that their Highnesses had sent him. I wrote to +him that his arrival was welcome, and that I was prepared to go to the +Court and had sold all I possessed by auction; and that with respect to +the immunities he should not be hasty, for both that matter and the +government I would hand over to him immediately as smooth as my palm. And +I wrote to the same effect to the friars, but neither he nor they gave me +any answer. On the contrary, he put himself in a warlike attitude, and +compelled all who went there to take an oath to him as Governor; and they +told me that it was for twenty years. + +Directly I knew of those immunities, I thought that I would repair such a +great error and that he would be pleased, for he gave them without the +need or occasion necessary in so vast a matter; and he gave to vagabond +people what would have been excessive for a man who had brought wife and +children. So I announced by word and letters that he could not use his +patents because mine were those in force; and I showed them the +immunities which Juan Aguado[377-1] brought. All this was done by me in +order to gain time, so that their Highnesses might be informed of the +condition of the country, and that they might have an opportunity of +issuing fresh commands as to what would best promote their service in +that respect. + +It is useless to publish such immunities in the Indies; to the settlers +who have taken up residence it is a pure gain, for the best lands are +given to them, and at a low valuation they will be worth two hundred +thousand at the end of the four years when the period of residence is +ended, without their digging a spadeful in them. I would not speak thus +if the settlers were married, but there are not six among them all who +are not on the lookout to gather what they can and depart speedily. It +would be a good thing if people should go from Castile, and also if it +were known who and what they are, and if the country could be settled +with honest people. + +I had agreed with those settlers that they should pay the third of the +gold, and the tenths, and this at their own request; and they received it +as a great favor from their Highnesses. I reproved them when I heard that +they ceased to do this, and hoped that the Commander would do likewise, +but he did the contrary. He incensed them against me by saying that I +wanted to deprive them of what their Highnesses had given them; and he +endeavored to set them at variance with me, and did so; and he induced +them to write to their Highnesses that they should never again send me +back to the government, and I likewise make the same supplication to them +for myself and for my whole family, as long as there are not different +inhabitants. And he together with them ordered inquisitions concerning me +for wickednesses the like whereof were never known in hell. Our Lord, +who rescued Daniel and the three children,[378-1] is present with the +same wisdom and power as he had then, and with the same means, if it +should please him and be in accordance with his will. + +I should know how to remedy all this, and the rest of what has been said +and has taken place since I have been in the Indies, if my disposition +would allow me to seek my own advantage, and if it seemed honorable to me +to do so, but the maintenance of justice and the extension of the +dominion of Her Highness has hitherto kept me down. Now that so much gold +is found, a dispute arises as to which brings more profit, whether to go +about robbing or to go to the mines. A hundred castellanos[378-2] are as +easily obtained for a woman as for a farm, and it is very general, and +there are plenty of dealers who go about looking for girls; those from +nine to ten are now in demand, and for all ages a good price must be +paid. + +I assert that the violence of the calumny of turbulent persons has +injured me more than my services have profited me; which is a bad example +for the present and for the future. I take my oath that a number of men +have gone to the Indies who did not deserve water in the sight of God and +of the world; and now they are returning thither, and leave is granted +them.[378-3] + +I assert that when I declared that the Commander[378-4] could not grant +immunities, I did what he desired, although I told him that it was to +cause delay until their Highnesses should receive information from the +country, and should command anew what might be for their service. He +excited their enmity against me, and he seems, from what took place and +from his behavior, to have come as my enemy and as a very vehement one; +or else the report is true that he has spent much to obtain this +employment. I do not know more about it than what I hear. I never heard +of an inquisitor gathering rebels together and accepting them, and others +devoid of credit and unworthy of it, as witnesses against their governor. + +If their Highnesses were to make a general inquisition there, I assure +you that they would look upon it as a great wonder that the island does +not founder. + +I think your Ladyship will remember that when, after losing my sails, I +was driven into Lisbon by a tempest, I was falsely accused of having gone +there to the King in order to give him the Indies. Their Highnesses +afterwards learned the contrary, and that it was entirely malicious. +Although I may know but little, I do not think anyone considers me so +stupid as not to know that even if the Indies were mine I could not +uphold myself without the help of some prince. If this be so, where could +I find better support and security than in the King and Queen our Lords, +who have raised me from nothing to such great honor, and are the most +exalted princes of the world on sea and on land, and who consider that I +have rendered them service, and preserve to me my privileges and rewards; +and if anyone infringes them, their Highnesses increase them still more, +as was seen in the case of Juan Aguado; and they order great honor to be +conferred upon me, and, as I have already said, their Highnesses have +received service from me, and keep my sons in their household;[379-1] all +which could by no means happen with another prince, for where there is no +affection, everything else fails. + +I have now spoken thus in reply to a malicious slander, but against my +will, as it is a thing which should not recur to memory even in dreams; +for the Commander Bobadilla maliciously seeks in this way to set his own +conduct and actions in a brighter light; but I shall easily show him that +his small knowledge and great cowardice, together with his inordinate +cupidity, have caused him to fail therein. + +I have already said that I wrote to him and to the friars, and +immediately set out, as I told him, almost alone, because all the people +were with the Adelantado, and likewise in order to prevent suspicion on +his part. When he heard this, he seized Don Diego[380-1] and sent him on +board a caravel loaded with irons, and did the same to me upon my +arrival, and afterwards to the Adelantado when he came; nor did I speak +to him any more, nor to this day has he allowed anyone to speak to me; +and I take my oath that I cannot understand why I am made a prisoner. He +made it his first business to seize the gold, which he did without +measuring or weighing it, and in my absence; he said that he wanted it to +pay the people, and according to what I hear he assigned the chief part +to himself and sent fresh exchangers for the exchanges. Of this gold I +had put aside certain specimens, very big lumps, like the eggs of geese, +hens, and pullets, and of many other shapes, which some persons had +collected in a short space of time, in order that their Highnesses might +be gladdened, and might comprehend the business upon seeing a quantity of +large stones full of gold. This collection was the first to be given +away, with malicious intent, so that their Highnesses should not hold the +matter in any account until he has feathered his nest, which he is in +great haste to do. Gold which is for melting diminishes at the fire; some +chains which would weigh about twenty marks have never been seen again. I +have been more distressed about this matter of the gold than even about +the pearls, because I have not brought it to Her Highness. + +The Commander at once set to work upon anything which he thought would +injure me. I have already said that with six hundred thousand I could pay +everyone without defrauding anybody, and that I had more than four +millions of tenths and constabulary [dues], without touching the gold. He +made some free gifts which are ridiculous, though I believe that he began +by assigning the chief part to himself. Their Highnesses will find it out +when they order an account to be obtained from him, especially if I +should be present thereat. He does nothing but reiterate that a large +sum is owing, and it is what I have said, and even less. I have been much +distressed that there should be sent concerning me an inquisitor who is +aware that if the inquisition which he returns is very grave he will +remain in possession of the government. + +Would that it had pleased our Lord that their Highnesses had sent him or +some one else two years ago, for I know that I should now be free from +scandal and infamy, and that my honor would not be taken from me, nor +should I lose it. God is just, and will make known the why and the +wherefore. + +They judge me over there as they would a governor who had gone to Sicily, +or to a city or town placed under regular government, and where the laws +can be observed in their entirety without fear of ruining everything; and +I am greatly injured thereby. I ought to be judged as a captain who went +from Spain to the Indies to conquer a numerous and warlike people, whose +customs and religion are very contrary to ours; who live in rocks and +mountains, without fixed settlements, and not like ourselves; and where, +by the divine will, I have placed under the dominion of the King and +Queen, our sovereigns, another world,[381-1] through which Spain, which +was reckoned a poor country, has become the richest. I ought to be judged +as a captain who for such a long time up to this day has borne arms +without laying them aside for an hour, and by gentlemen adventurers and +by customs and not by letters,[381-2] unless they were Greeks or Romans, +or others of modern times of whom there are so many and such noble +examples in Spain;[381-3] or otherwise I receive great injury, because in +the Indies there is neither town nor settlement. + +The gate to the gold and pearls is now open, and plenty of +everything--precious stones, spices, and a thousand other things--may be +surely expected, and never could a worse misfortune befall me; for by the +name of our Lord the first voyage would yield them just as much as would +the traffic of Arabia Felix as far as Mecca, as I wrote to their +Highnesses by Antonio de Torres in my reply respecting the repartition of +the sea and land with the Portuguese; and afterwards it would equal that +of Calicut, as I told them and put in writing at the monastery of +Mejorada. + +The news of the gold that I said I would give is, that on the day of the +Nativity, while I was much tormented, being harassed by wicked Christians +and by Indians, and when I was on the point of giving up everything and, +if possible, escaping from life, our Lord miraculously comforted me and +said, "Fear not violence, I will provide for all things; the seven years +of the term of the gold have not elapsed, and in that and in everything +else I will afford thee a remedy." On that day I learned that there were +eighty leagues of land with mines at every point thereof. The opinion now +is that it is all one. Some have collected a hundred and twenty +castellanos in one day, and others ninety, and even the number of two +hundred and fifty has been reached. From fifty to seventy, and in many +more cases from fifteen to fifty, is considered a good day's work, and +many carry it on. The usual quantity is from six to twelve, and any one +obtaining less than this is not satisfied. It seems too that these mines +are like others, and do not yield equally every day. The mines are new, +and so are the workers: it is the opinion of everybody that even if all +Castile were to go there, every individual, however inexpert he might be, +would not obtain less than one or two castellanos daily, and now it is +only commencing. It is true that they keep Indians, but the business is +in the hands of the Christians. Behold what discernment Bobadilla had, +when he gave up everything for nothing, and four millions of tenths, +without any reason or even being requested, and without first notifying +it to their Highnesses. And this is not the only loss. + +I know that my errors have not been committed with the intention of doing +evil, and I believe that their Highnesses regard the matter just as I +state it; and I know and see that they deal mercifully even with those +who maliciously act to their disservice. I believe and consider it very +certain that their clemency will be both greater and more abundant +towards me, for I fell therein through ignorance and the force of +circumstances, as they will know fully hereafter; and I indeed am their +creature, and they will look upon my services, and will acknowledge day +by day that they are much profited. They will place everything in the +balance, even as Holy Scripture tells us good and evil will be at the day +of judgment. If, however, they command that another person do judge me, +which I cannot believe, and that it be by inquisition in the Indies, I +very humbly beseech them to send thither two conscientious and honorable +persons at my expense, who I believe will easily, now that gold is +discovered, find five marks in four hours. In either case it is needful +for them to provide for this matter. + +The Commander on his arrival at Santo Domingo took up his abode in my +house, and just as he found it so he appropriated everything to himself. +Well and good; perhaps he was in want of it. A pirate never acted thus +towards a merchant. About my papers I have a greater grievance, for he +has so completely deprived me of them that I have never been able to +obtain a single one from him; and those that would have been most useful +in my exculpation are precisely those which he has kept most concealed. +Behold the just and honest inquisitor! Whatever he may have done, they +tell me that there has been an end to justice, except in an arbitrary +form. God our Lord is present with his strength and wisdom, as of old, +and always punishes in the end, especially ingratitude and injuries. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[371-1] An echo of the words of Jesus to Peter when he began to sink, "O +thou of little faith, wherefore didst thou doubt?" _Matthew_, XIV. 31. + +[371-2] _Revelation_, XXI. 1. "And I saw a new heaven and a new earth; +for the first heaven and the first earth were passed away." + +[371-3] "For, behold, I create new heavens and a new earth." _Isaiah_, +LXV. 17. + +[372-1] 1485-1491 inc. and 1492-1500 inc. + +[372-2] _Sy yo robara las Yndias o tierra que jaz fase ellas_, etc. In +the translation _jaz fase_ is taken to stand for _yace hacia_. This +supposition makes sense and is probably correct. The reading of the other +text is "_que san face ellas_." Navarrete says that neither one is +intelligible. + +[372-3] The death of Prince John, October 4, 1497. + +[373-1] The name given to that part of the mainland of South America +which Columbus discovered on his third voyage. + +[373-2] _I.e._ so great was their abundance. + +[373-3] On this revolt, see Bourne, _Spain in America_, p. 49 _et seqq._, +and in greater detail, Irving, _Columbus_, ed. 1868, II. 109 _et seqq._ + +[373-4] Hojeda sailed in May 1499. Las Casa's account of his voyage is +translated by Markham in his _Letters of Amerigo Vespucci_, Hakluyt +Society (London, 1894), p. 78 _et seqq._ See also Irving, _Columbus_, +III. 23-42[TN-9] He was accompanied on this voyage by Amerigo Vespucci. + +[373-5] Vicente Yañez Pinzon set sail from Palos, November 18, 1499. For +his voyage, see Irving, _Columbus_, III. 49-58. + +[374-1] The Alcalde was Roldan, the leader of the revolt. He was alcalde +mayor of the city of Isabela and of the whole island, _i.e._, the chief +justice. Las Casas, _Historia de las Indias_, II. 124. + +[374-2] On the career in Española of Adrian de Muxica and his execution, +see Irving, _Columbus_, II. 283 _et seqq._ + +[374-3] Ferdinand de Guevara. See Irving, _Columbus_, II. 283 _et seqq._ + +[374-4] _I.e._, maravedis, equivalent to about $4000. + +[375-1] Bobadilla, the successor of Columbus as governor, who sent him +back in chains. + +[375-2] A mark was eight ounces or two-thirds of a Troy pound. Here it is +probably the silver mark as a measure of value, which was about $3.25. If +the word is used as a measure of weight of gold, it would be about $150. + +[375-3] Bobadilla arrived at Santo Domingo August 23, 1500. + +[375-4] Bartholomew Columbus. + +[377-1] Juan Aguado arrived from Spain in October, 1495. Las Casas, +_Historia de las Indias_, II. 109 _et seqq._, gives a full account of his +mission. See also Irving, _Columbus_, ed. 1868, II. 77 _et seqq._ + +[378-1] Cf. _Daniel_, chs. III. and VI. + +[378-2] The castellano was one-sixth of an ounce, or in value about $3. + +[378-3] See Bourne, _Spain in America_, p. 50, for Columbus's bitter +characterization of the Spaniards in Española in 1498, and p. 46 for the +royal authorization in June, 1497, to transport criminals to the island. +The terrible consequences of this policy led the Spanish government later +to adopt the strictest regulations controlling emigration to the New +World. _Cf._ _Spain in America_, ch. XVI. + +[378-4] Bobadilla was a knight commander of the military order of +Calatrava. + +[379-1] Diego Columbus had been appointed a page to Prince John in 1492. +Navarrete, _Viages_, II. 17. At this time, 1500, both Diego and Ferdinand +were pages in the Queen's household. _Historie_, ed. 1867, p. 276. + +[380-1] The younger brother of the Admiral. + +[381-1] _Un otro mundo._ See note, p. 352 above. + +[381-2] _Caballeros de conquistas y del uso, y no de letras._ This should +be: "Knights of Conquests and by profession and not of letters." _I.e._, +by nobles that have actually been conquerors and had conquered territory +awarded to them and who are knights by practice or profession and not +gentlemen of letters. + +[381-3] What this means is not altogether clear. Apparently Columbus +means that men of letters or lawyers in Greece and Rome, great conquering +nations, would know what standards to apply in his case, and that there +were some such men of breadth in Spain. + + + + +LETTER OF COLUMBUS ON THE FOURTH VOYAGE + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +The letter on Columbus's last voyage when he explored the coast of +Central America and of the Isthmus of Panama was written when he was +shipwrecked on the island of Jamaica, 1503. It is his last important +writing and one of great significance in understanding his geographical +conceptions. + +The Spanish text of this letter is not older than the sixteenth century +and perhaps not older than the seventeenth. The Spanish text was first +published by Navarrete in his _Coleccion de los Viages y +Descubrimientos_, 1825. An Italian translation, however, was published in +1505 and is commonly known as the _Lettera Rarissima_. Mr. John Boyd +Thacher has reproduced this early Italian translation in facsimile in his +_Christopher Columbus_, accompanied by a translation into English. Cesare +de Lollis prepared a critical edition of the Spanish text for the +_Raccolta Colombiana_, which was carefully collated with and in some +instances corrected by this contemporary translation. Most of his changes +in punctuation and textual emendations have been adopted in the present +edition, and attention is called to them in the notes. + +The translation is that of R.H. Major as published in the revised edition +of his _Select Letters of Columbus_. It has been carefully revised by the +present editor, and some important changes have been made. As hitherto +published in English a good many passages in this letter have been so +confused and obscure and some so absolutely unintelligible, that the late +Justin Winsor characterized this last of the important writings of +Columbus as "a sorrowful index of his wandering reason."[388-1] Almost +every one of these passages has yielded up the secret of its meaning +either through a more exact translation or in the light of the textual +emendations suggested by de Lollis or proposed by the present editor. +Among such revisions and textual emendations attention may be called to +those discussed on pp. 392, 396, 397. As here published this letter of +Columbus is as coherent and intelligible as his other writings. + +The editor wishes here to acknowledge his obligations to Professor Henry +R. Lang of Yale University, whom he has consulted in regard to perplexing +passages or possible emendations, and from whom he has received valuable +assistance. + +The other important accounts of this voyage, or of the part of it covered +by this letter, are the brief report by Diego de Porras, of which a +translation is given in Thacher's _Columbus_, and those by Ferdinand +Columbus in the _Historie_ and Peter Martyr in his _De Rebus Oceanicis_. +On this voyage Las Casas's source was the account of Ferdinand Columbus. +Lollis presents some striking evidence to show that the accounts of +Ferdinand Columbus and Peter Martyr were based upon the same original, a +lost narrative of the Admiral. It will be remembered, however, that +Ferdinand accompanied his father on this voyage, and although only a boy +of thirteen his narrative contains several passages of vivid personal +recollection. The editor has carefully compared Ferdinand's narrative +with the account in this letter and noted the important differences. + +E.G.B. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[388-1] _Christopher Columbus_, p 459; _cf._ also the passages quoted on +p. 460. + + + + +THE FOURTH VOYAGE OF COLUMBUS + +_A Letter written by Don Christóbal Colon, Viceroy and Admiral of the + Indies, to the most Christian and mighty King and Queen of Spain, + our Sovereigns, in which are described the events of his voyage, and + the countries, provinces, cities, rivers and other marvellous + matters therein discovered, as well as the places where gold and + other substances of great richness and value are to be found_ + + +_Most Serene, and very high and mighty Princes, the King and Queen our +Sovereigns_:-- + +My passage from Cadiz to the Canary occupied four days, and thence to the +Indies sixteen days. From which I wrote, that my intention was to +expedite my voyage as much as possible while I had good vessels, good +crews and stores, and that Jamaica was the place to which I was bound. I +wrote this in Dominica:[389-1]-- + +Up to the period of my reaching these shores I experienced most excellent +weather, but the night of my arrival came on with a dreadful tempest, and +the same bad weather has continued ever since. On reaching the island of +Española[389-2] I despatched a packet of letters, by which I begged as a +favor that a ship should be supplied me at my own cost in lieu of one of +those that I had brought with me, which had become unseaworthy, and could +no longer carry sail. The letters were taken, and your Highnesses will +know if a reply has been given to them. For my part I was forbidden to go +on shore;[390-1] the hearts of my people failed them lest I should take +them further, and they said that if any danger were to befall them, they +should receive no succor, but, on the contrary, in all probability have +some great affront offered them. Moreover every man had it in his power +to tell me that the new Governor would have the superintendence of the +countries that I might acquire.[390-2] + +The tempest was terrible throughout the night, all the ships were +separated, and each one driven to the last extremity, without hope of +anything but death; each of them also looked upon the loss of the rest as +a matter of certainty. What man was ever born, not even excepting Job, +who would not have been ready to die of despair at finding himself as I +then was, in anxious fear for my own safety, and that of my son, my +brother[390-3] and my friends, and yet refused permission either to land +or to put into harbor on the shores which by God's mercy I had gained for +Spain sweating blood? + +But to return to the ships: although the tempest had so completely +separated them from me as to leave me single, yet the Lord restored them +to me in His own good time. The ship which we had the greatest fear for, +had put out to sea to escape [being blown] toward the island. The +_Gallega_[390-4] lost her boat and a great part of her provisions, which +latter loss indeed all the ships suffered. The vessel in which I was, +though dreadfully buffeted, was saved by our Lord's mercy from any injury +whatever; my brother went in the ship that was unsound, and he under God +was the cause of its being saved. With this tempest I struggled on till +I reached Jamaica, and there the sea became calm, but there was a strong +current which carried me as far as the Queen's Garden[391-1] without +seeing land. Hence as opportunity afforded I pushed on for the mainland, +in spite of the wind and a fearful contrary current, against which I +contended for sixty days, and after all only made seventy leagues. All +this time I was unable to get into harbor, nor was there any cessation of +the tempest, which was one continuation of rain, thunder and lightning; +indeed it seemed as if it were the end of the world. I at length reached +the Cape of Gracias á Dios, and after that the Lord granted me fair wind +and tide; this was on the twelfth of September.[391-2] Eighty-eight days +did this fearful tempest continue, during which I was at sea, and saw +neither sun nor stars; my ships lay exposed, with sails torn, and +anchors, rigging, cables, boats and a great quantity of provisions lost; +my people were very weak and humbled in spirit, many of them promising to +lead a religious life, and all making vows and promising to perform +pilgrimages, while some of them would frequently go to their messmates to +make confession.[392-1] Other tempests have been experienced, but never +of so long a duration or so fearful as this: many whom we looked upon as +brave men, on several occasions showed considerable trepidation; but the +distress of my son who was with me grieved me to the soul, and the more +when I considered his tender age, for he was but thirteen years old, and +he enduring so much toil for so long a time. Our Lord, however, gave him +strength even to enable him to encourage the rest, and he worked as if he +had been eighty years at sea, and all this was a consolation to me. I +myself had fallen sick, and was many times at the point of death, but +from a little cabin that I had caused to be constructed on deck, I +directed our course. My brother was in the ship that was in the worst +condition and the most exposed to danger; and my grief on this account +was the greater that I brought him with me against his will. + +Such is my fate, that the twenty years of service[393-1] through which I +have passed with so much toil and danger, have profited me nothing, and +at this very day I do not possess a roof in Spain that I can call my own; +if I wish to eat or sleep, I have nowhere to go but to the inn or tavern, +and most times lack wherewith to pay the bill. Another anxiety wrung my +very heartstrings, which was the thought of my son Diego, whom I had left +an orphan in Spain, and dispossessed of my honor and property, although I +had looked upon it as a certainty, that your Majesties, as just and +grateful Princes, would restore it to him in all respects with +increase.[393-2] + +I reached the land of Cariay,[393-3] where I stopped to repair my vessels +and take in provisions, as well as to afford relaxation to the men, who +had become very weak. I myself (who, as I said before, had been several +times at the point of death) gained information respecting the gold mines +of which I was in search, in the province of Ciamba;[393-4] and two +Indians conducted me to Carambaru,[393-5] where the people (who go +naked) wear golden mirrors round their necks, which they will neither +sell, give, nor part with for any consideration. They named to me many +places on the sea-coast where there were both gold and mines. The last +that they mentioned was Veragua,[394-1] which was five-and-twenty leagues +distant from the place where we then were. I started with the intention +of visiting all of them, but when I had reached the middle of my journey +I learned that there were other mines at so short a distance that they +might be reached in two days. I determined on sending to see them. It was +on the eve of St. Simon and St. Jude,[394-2] which was the day fixed for +our departure; but that night there arose so violent a storm, that we +were forced to go wherever it drove us, and the Indian who was to conduct +us to the mines was with us all the time. As I had found every thing true +that had been told me in the different places which I had visited, I felt +satisfied it would be the same with respect to Ciguare,[394-3] which +according to their account, is nine days journey across the country +westward: they tell me there is a great quantity of gold there, and that +the inhabitants wear coral ornaments on their heads, and very large coral +bracelets and anklets, with which article also they adorn and inlay their +seats, boxes, and tables. They also said that the women there wore +necklaces hanging down to their shoulders. All the people agree in the +report I now repeat, and their account is so favorable that I should be +content with the tithe of the advantages that their description holds +out. They are all likewise acquainted with the pepper-plant;[395-1] +according to the account of these people, the inhabitants of Ciguare are +accustomed to hold fairs and markets for carrying on their commerce, and +they showed me also the mode and form in which they transact their +various exchanges; others assert that their ships carry cannon, and that +the men go clothed and use bows and arrows, swords and cuirasses, and +that on shore they have horses which they use in battle, and that they +wear rich clothes and have good things.[395-2] They also say that the sea +surrounds Ciguare, and that at ten days' journey from thence is the river +Ganges; these lands appear to hold the same relation to Veragua, as +Tortosa to Fontarabia, or Pisa to Venice.[395-3] When I left Carambaru +and reached the places in its neighborhood, which I have mentioned above +as being spoken of by the Indians, I found the customs of the people +correspond with the accounts that had been given of them, except as +regarded the golden mirrors: any man who had one of them would willingly +part with it for three hawks'-bells,[395-4] although they were equivalent +in weight to ten or fifteen ducats. These people resemble the natives of +Española in all their habits. They have various modes of collecting the +gold, none of which will bear comparison with the plans adopted by the +Christians. + +All that I have here stated is from hearsay. This, however, I know, that +in the year ninety-four I sailed twenty-four degrees to the westward in +nine hours,[396-1] and there can be no mistake upon the subject, because +there was an eclipse; the sun was in Libra and the moon in Aries.[396-2] +What I had learned by the mouth of these people I already knew in detail +from books. Ptolemy thought that he had satisfactorily corrected[396-3] +Marinus, and yet this latter appears to have come very near to the truth. +Ptolemy placed Catigara[396-4] at a distance of twelve lines to the west +of his meridian, which he fixes at two degrees and a third beyond Cape +St. Vincent, in Portugal. Marinus comprised the earth and its limits in +fifteen lines.[396-5] Marinus on Ethiopia gives a description covering +more than twenty-four degrees beyond the equinoctial line, and now that +the Portuguese have sailed there they find it correct.[397-1] Ptolemy +says also that the most southern land is the first boundary, and that it +does not go lower down than fifteen degrees and a third.[397-2] The world +is but small; out of seven divisions of it the dry part occupies six, +and the seventh is entirely covered by water.[398-1] Experience has shown +it, and I have written it with quotations from the Holy Scripture, in +other letters, where I have treated of the situation of the terrestrial +paradise, as approved by the Holy Church;[398-2] and I say that the world +is not so large as vulgar opinion makes it, and that one degree of the +equinoctial line measures fifty-six miles and two-thirds; and this may be +proved to a nicety.[398-3] + +But I leave this subject, which it is not my intention now to treat upon, +but simply to give a narrative of my laborious and painful voyage, +although of all my voyages it is the most honorable and advantageous. I +have said that on the eve of St. Simon and St. Jude I ran before the wind +wherever it took me, without power to resist it; at length I found +shelter for ten days from the roughness of the sea and the tempest +overhead, and resolved not to attempt to go back to the mines, which I +regarded as already in our possession.[398-4] When I started in pursuance +of my voyage it was under a heavy rain, and reaching the harbor of +Bastimentos I put in, though much against my will.[399-1] The storm and +a rapid current kept me in for fourteen days, when I again set sail, but +not with favorable weather. After I had made fifteen leagues with great +exertions, the wind and the current drove me back[399-2] again with great +fury, but in again making for the port which I had quitted, I found on +the way another port, which I named Retrete, where I put in for shelter +with as much risk as regret, the ships being in sad condition, and my +crews and myself exceedingly fatigued.[399-3] I remained there fifteen +days, kept in by stress of weather, and when I fancied my troubles were +at an end, I found them only begun. It was then that I changed my +resolution with respect to proceeding to the mines, and proposed doing +something in the interim, until the weather should prove more favorable +for my voyage.[399-4] I had already made four leagues when the storm +recommenced, and wearied me to such a degree that I absolutely knew not +what to do; my wound reopened, and for nine days my life was despaired +of; never was the sea seen so high, so terrific, and so covered with +foam; not only did the wind oppose our proceeding onward, but it also +rendered it highly dangerous to run in for any headland, and kept me in +that sea which seemed to me as a sea of blood, seething like a cauldron +on a mighty fire. Never did the sky look more fearful; during one day and +one night it burned like a furnace, and every instant I looked to see if +my masts and my sails were not destroyed; these flashes came with such +alarming fury that we all thought the ships must have been consumed. All +this time the waters from heaven never ceased, not to say that it rained, +for it was like a repetition of the deluge. The men were at this time so +crushed in spirit that they longed for death as a deliverance from so +many martyrdoms. Twice already had the ships suffered loss in boats, +anchors, and rigging, and were now lying bare without sails. + +When it pleased our Lord, I returned to Puerto Gordo,[400-1] where I +recruited my condition as well as I could. I then once more turned +towards Veragua; for my voyage, although I was [ready] for it, the wind +and current were still contrary.[400-2] I arrived at nearly the same spot +as before, and there again the wind and currents still opposed my +progress; and once again I was compelled to put into port, not daring to +await the opposition of Saturn[400-3] with Mars so tossed on an exposed +coast; for it almost always brings on a tempest or severe weather. This +was on Christmas-day, about the hour of mass. + +Thus, after all these fatigues, I had once more to return to the spot +from whence I started; and when the new year had set in, I returned again +to my task: but although I had fine weather for my voyage, the ships were +no longer in a sailing condition, and my people were either dying or very +sick. On the day of the Epiphany,[400-4] I reached Veragua in a state of +exhaustion; there, by our Lord's goodness, I found a river and a safe +harbor, although at the entrance there were only ten spans of water. I +succeeded in making an entry, but with great difficulty; and on the +following day the storm recommenced, and had I been still on the outside +at that time, I should have been unable to enter on account of the reef. +It rained without ceasing until the fourteenth of February, so that I +could find no opportunity of penetrating into the interior, nor of +recruiting my condition in any respect whatever; and on the twenty-fourth +of January, when I considered myself in perfect safety, the river +suddenly rose with great violence to a considerable height, breaking my +cables and the breastfasts,[401-1] and nearly carrying away my ships +altogether, which certainly appeared to me to be in greater danger than +ever. Our Lord, however, brought a remedy as He has always done. I do not +know if any one else ever suffered greater trials. + +On the sixth of February, while it was still raining, I sent seventy men +on shore to go into the interior, and at five leagues' distance they +found several mines. The Indians who went with them conducted them to a +very lofty mountain, and thence showing them the country all around, as +far as the eye could reach, told them there was gold in every part, and +that, towards the west, the mines extended twenty days' journey; they +also recounted the names of the towns and villages where there was more +or less of it. I afterwards learned that the Quibian,[402-1] who had +lent these Indians, had ordered them to show the distant mines, and which +belonged to an enemy of his; but that in his own territory one man might, +if he would, collect in ten days as much as a child could carry.[402-2] I +bring with me some Indians, his servants, who are witnesses of this fact. +The boats went up to the spot where the dwellings of these people are +situated; and, after four hours, my brother returned with the guides, all +of them bringing back gold which they had collected at that place. The +gold must be abundant, and of good quality, for none of these men had +ever seen mines before; very many of them had never seen pure gold, and +most of them were seamen and lads. Having building materials in +abundance, I established a settlement, and made many presents to the +Quibian, which is the name they gave to the lord of the country. I +plainly saw that harmony would not last long, for the natives are of a +very rough disposition, and the Spaniards very encroaching; and, +moreover, I had taken possession of land belonging to the Quibian. When +he saw what we did, and found the traffic increasing, he resolved upon +burning the houses, and putting us all to death; but his project did not +succeed, for we took him prisoner, together with his wives, his children, +and his servants. His captivity, it is true, lasted but a short time, for +he eluded the custody of a trustworthy man, into whose charge he had been +given, with a guard of men; and his sons escaped from a ship, in which +they had been placed under the special charge of the master. + +In the month of January the mouth of the river was entirely closed +up,[403-1] and in April the vessels were so eaten by the shipworm,[403-2] +that they could scarcely be kept above water. At this time the river +forced a channel for itself, by which I managed, with great difficulty, +to extricate three of them after I had unloaded them. The boats were then +sent back into the river for water and salt, but the sea became so high +and furious, that it afforded them no chance of exit; upon which the +Indians collected themselves together in great numbers, and made an +attack upon the boats, and at length massacred the men.[403-3] My +brother, and all the rest of our people, were in a ship which remained +inside; I was alone, outside, upon that dangerous coast, suffering from a +severe fever and worn with fatigue. All hope of escape was gone. I toiled +up to the highest part of the ship, and, with a voice of fear crying, and +very urgently, I called upon your Highnesses' war-captains in every +direction for help, but there was no reply. At length, groaning with +exhaustion, I fell asleep, and heard a compassionate voice address me +thus: "O fool, and slow to believe and to serve thy God, the God of all! +what did He do more for Moses, or for David his servant, than He has done +for thee? From thine infancy He has kept thee under His constant and +watchful care. When He saw thee arrived at an age which suited His +designs respecting thee, He brought wonderful renown to thy name +throughout all the land. He gave thee for thine own the Indies, which +form so rich a portion of the world, and thou hast divided them as it +pleased thee, for He gave thee power to do so. He gave thee also the keys +of those barriers of the ocean sea which were closed with such mighty +chains;[404-1] and thou wast obeyed through many lands, and gained an +honorable fame throughout Christendom. What did he more for the people of +Israel, when he brought them out of Egypt?[404-2] or for David, whom from +a shepherd He made to be king in Judea? Turn to Him, and acknowledge +thine error--His mercy is infinite. Thine old age shall not prevent thee +from accomplishing any great undertaking. He holds under His sway many +very great possessions. Abraham had exceeded a hundred years of age when +he begat Isaac; nor was Sarah young. Thou criest out for uncertain help: +answer, who has afflicted thee so much and so often, God or the world? +The privileges promised by God, He never fails in bestowing; nor does He +ever declare, after a service has been rendered Him, that such was not +agreeable with His intention, or that He had regarded the matter in +another light; nor does he inflict suffering, in order to give effect to +the manifestation of His power. His word goes according to the letter; +and He performs all his promises with interest. This is [his] custom. +Thus I have told thee what thy Creator has done for thee, and what He +does for all men. Just now He gave me a specimen of the reward of so many +toils and dangers incurred by thee in the service of others."[404-2] + +I heard all this, as it were, in a trance; but I had no answer to give in +definite words, and could but weep for my errors. He who spoke to me, +whoever it was, concluded by saying,--"Fear not, but trust; all these +tribulations are recorded on marble, and not without cause." I arose as +soon as I could; and at the end of nine days there came fine weather, but +not sufficiently so to allow of drawing the vessels out of the river. I +collected the men who were on land, and, in fact, all of them that I +could, because there were not enough to admit of one party remaining on +shore while another stayed on board to work the vessels. I myself should +have remained with my men to defend the settlement, had your Highnesses +known of it; but the fear that ships might never reach the spot where we +were, as well as the thought, that when provision is to be made for +bringing help, everything will be provided,[405-1] made me decide upon +leaving. I departed, in the name of the Holy Trinity, on Easter +night,[405-2] with the ships rotten, worm-eaten and full of holes. One of +them I left at Belen, with a supply of necessaries; I did the same at +Belpuerto. I then had only two left, and they in the same state as the +others. I was without boats or provisions, and in this condition I had to +cross seven thousand miles of sea; or, as an alternative, to die on the +passage with my son, my brother, and so many of my people. Let those who +are accustomed to finding fault and censuring ask, while they sit in +security at home, "Why did you not do so and so under such +circumstances?" I wish they now had this voyage to make. I verily believe +that another journey of another kind awaits them, or our faith is +nothing. + +On the thirteenth of May I reached the province of Mago [Mango],[405-3] +which borders on Cathay, and thence I started for the island of +Española. I sailed two days with a good wind, after which it became +contrary. The route that I followed called forth all my care to avoid the +numerous islands, that I might not be stranded on the shoals that lie in +their neighborhood. The sea was very tempestuous, and I was driven +backward under bare poles. I anchored at an island, where I lost, at one +stroke, three anchors; and, at midnight, when the weather was such that +the world appeared to be coming to an end, the cables of the other ship +broke, and it came down upon my vessel with such force that it was a +wonder we were not dashed to pieces; the single anchor that remained to +me was, next to the Lord, our only preservation. After six days, when the +weather became calm, I resumed my journey, having already lost all my +tackle; my ships were pierced by borers more than a honey-comb and the +crew entirely paralyzed with fear and in despair. I reached the island a +little beyond the point at which I first arrived at it, and there I +turned in to recover myself after the storm;[406-1] but I afterwards put +into a much safer port in the same island. After eight days I put to sea +again, and reached Jamaica by the end of June;[406-2] but always beating +against contrary winds, and with the ships in the worst possible +condition. With three pumps, and the use of pots and kettles, we could +scarcely clear the water that came into the ship, there being no remedy +but this for the mischief done by the ship-worm. I steered in such a +manner as to come as near as possible to Española, from which we were +twenty-eight leagues distant, but I afterwards wished I had not done so, +for the other ship which was half under water was obliged to run in for a +port. I determined on keeping the sea in spite of the weather, and my +vessel was on the very point of sinking when our Lord miraculously +brought us upon land. Who will believe what I now write? I assert that in +this letter I have not related one hundredth part of the wonderful events +that occurred in this voyage; those who were with the Admiral can bear +witness to it. If your Highnesses would be graciously pleased to send to +my help a ship of above sixty-four tons, with two hundred quintals of +biscuits and other provisions, there would then be sufficient to carry me +and my crew from Española to Spain. I have already said that there are +not twenty-eight leagues between Jamaica and Española; and I should not +have gone there, even if the ships had been in a fit condition for so +doing, because your Highnesses ordered me not to land there. God knows if +this command has proved of any service. I send this letter by means of +and by the hands of Indians; it will be a miracle if it reaches its +destination. + +This is the account I have to give of my voyage. The men who accompanied +me were a hundred and fifty in number, among whom were many calculated +for pilots and good sailors, but none of them can explain whither I went +nor whence I came;[407-1] the reason is very simple: I started from a +point above the port of Brazil[407-2] in Española. The storm prevented me +from following my intended route, for I was obliged to go wherever the +wind drove me; at the same time I fell very sick, and there was no one +who had navigated in these parts before. However, after some days, the +wind and sea became tranquil, and the storm was succeeded by a calm, but +accompanied with rapid currents. I put into harbor at an island called +Isla de las Pozas, and then steered for mainland;[408-1] but it is +impossible to give a correct account of all our movements, because I was +carried away by the current so many days without seeing land. I +ascertained, however, by the compass and by observation, that I moved +parallel with the coast of the mainland. No one could tell under what +part of the heavens we were, and when I set out from there to come to the +island of Española, the pilots thought we had come to the island of St. +John, whereas it was the land of Mango, four hundred leagues to the +westward of where they said.[408-2] Let them answer and say if they know +where Veragua is situated. I assert that they can give no other account +than that they went to lands, where there was an abundance of gold, and +this they can certify surely enough; but they do not know the way to +return thither for such a purpose; they would be obliged to go on a +voyage of discovery as much as if they had never been there before. + +There is a mode of reckoning derived from astronomy which is sure and +safe, and a sufficient guide to any one who understands it. This +resembles a prophetic vision.[408-3] The Indies ships[408-4] do not sail +except with the wind abaft, but this is not because they are badly built +or clumsy, but because the strong currents in those parts, together with +the wind, render it impossible to sail with the bowline,[408-5] for in +one day they would lose as much way as they might have made in seven; for +the same reason I could make no use of caravels, even though they were +Portuguese lateens.[409-1] This is the cause that they do not sail unless +with a regular breeze, and they will sometimes stay in harbor waiting for +this seven or eight months at a time; nor is this anything wonderful, for +the same very often occurs in Spain. + +The nation of which Pope Pius II. describes the situation and +characteristics has now been found,[409-2] excepting the horses with the +saddles and poitrels and bridles of gold; but this is not to be wondered +at, for the lands on the sea-coast are only inhabited by fishermen, and +moreover I made no stay there, because I was in haste to proceed on my +voyage. In Cariay[409-3] and the neighboring country there are great +enchanters of a very fearful character. They would have given the world +to prevent my remaining there an hour. When I arrived they sent me +immediately two girls very showily dressed; the eldest could not be more +than eleven years of age and the other seven, and both exhibited so much +immodesty, that more could not be expected from public women; they +carried concealed about them a magic powder; when they came I gave them +some articles to dress themselves out with, and directly sent them back +to the shore.[409-4] I saw here, built on a mountain, a sepulchre as +large as a house, and elaborately sculptured; the body lay uncovered and +embalmed in it. They also spoke to me of other very excellent works of +art.[410-1] There are many species of animals both small and large, and +very different from those of our country. I had a present of two pigs, +and an Irish dog was afraid to face them. A cross-bowman had wounded an +animal like a monkey,[410-2] except that it was larger, and had a face +like a man's; the arrow had pierced it from the neck to the tail, and +since it was fierce he was obliged to cut off an arm and a leg; the pig +bristled up on seeing it and tried to get away. I, when I saw this, +ordered the _begare_[410-3] as it is called to be thrown to the pig where +he was, and though the animal was nearly dead, and the arrow had passed +quite through his body, yet he threw his tail round the snout of the +boar, and then holding him firmly, seized him by the nape of the neck +with his remaining hand, as if he were engaged with an enemy. This action +was so novel and so extraordinary, that I have thought it worth while to +describe it here. There is a great variety of animals here, but they all +die of _barra_.[410-4] I saw some very large fowls (the feathers of which +resemble wool),[410-5] lions, stags, fallow-deer and birds. + +When we were so harassed with our troubles at sea, some of our men +imagined that we were under the influence of sorcery, and even to this +day entertain the same notion. Some of the people whom I discovered eat +men, as was evidenced by the brutality of their countenances. They say +that there are great mines of copper in the country, of which they make +hatchets[411-1] and other elaborate articles both cast and soldered; they +also make of it forges, with all the apparatus of the goldsmith, and +crucibles. The inhabitants go clothed; and in that province I saw some +large sheets of cotton very elaborately and cleverly worked, and others +very delicately painted in colors.[411-2] They tell me that more inland +towards Cathay they have them interwoven with gold. For want of an +interpreter we were able to learn but very little respecting these +countries, or what they contain. Although the country is very thickly +peopled, yet each nation has a very different language; indeed so much +so, that they can no more understand each other than we understand the +Arabs. I think, however, that this applies to the barbarians on the +sea-coast, and not to the people who live more inland. When I discovered +the Indies, I said that they composed the richest lordship in the world; +I spoke of gold and pearls and precious stones, of spices and the traffic +that might be carried on in them; and because all these things were not +forthcoming at once I was abused. This punishment causes me to refrain +from relating anything but what the natives tell me. One thing I can +venture upon stating, because there are so many witnesses of it, viz., +that in this land of Veragua I saw more signs of gold in the first two +days than I saw in Española during fours years,[TN-10] and that there is +not a more fertile or better cultivated country in all the world, nor +one whose inhabitants are more timid; added to which there is a good +harbor, a beautiful river, and the whole place is capable of being +easily put into a state of defence. All this tends to the security of +the Christians and the permanency of their sovereignty, while it +affords the hope of great increase and honor to the Christian religion; +moreover the road hither will be as short as that to Española, because +there is a certainty of a fair wind for the passage. Your Highnesses are +as much lords of this country as of Xerez or Toledo; your ships if they +should go there, go to your own house. From there they will take gold; +in other lands to have what there is in them, they will have to take it +by force or retire empty-handed, and on the land they will have to trust +their persons in the hands of a savage.[412-1] + +Of the other [matter] that I refrain from saying, I have already said why +I kept silent. I do not speak so, neither [do I say] that I make a +threefold affirmation in all that I have ever said or written nor that I +am at the source.[412-2] The Genoese, Venetians and all other nations +that possess pearls, precious stones, and other articles of value, take +them to the ends of the world to exchange them for gold. Gold is most +excellent; gold is treasure, and he who possesses it does all he wishes +to in this world, and succeeds in helping souls into paradise. They say +that when one of the lords of the country of Veragua dies, they bury all +the gold he possessed with his body. There were brought to Solomon at one +journey[412-3] six hundred and sixty-six quintals of gold, besides what +the merchants and sailors brought, and that which was paid in Arabia. Of +this gold he made two hundred lances[412-4] and three hundred shields, +and the flooring[412-5] which was to be above them was also of gold, and +ornamented with precious stones; many other things he made likewise of +gold, and a great number of vessels of great size, which he enriched with +precious stones. This is related by Josephus in his Chronicle _De +Antiquitatibus_; mention is also made of it in the Chronicles and in the +Book of Kings.[413-1] Josephus thinks that this gold was found in the +Aurea;[413-2] if it were so, I contend that these mines of the Aurea are +identical with those of Veragua, which, as I have said before, extends +westward twenty days' journey, and they are at an equal distance from the +Pole and the Line.[413-3] Solomon bought all of it,--gold, precious +stones, and silver,--but your Majesties need only send to seek them to +have them at your pleasure. David, in his will, left three thousand +quintals of Indian gold to Solomon, to assist in building the Temple; +and, according to Josephus, it came from these lands.[413-4] Jerusalem +and Mount Sion are to be rebuilt by the hands of Christians, who it is to +be God told by the mouth of His prophet in the fourteenth Psalm.[413-5] +The Abbot Joaquim said that he who should do this was to come from +Spain;[414-1] Saint Jerome showed the holy woman the way to accomplish +it;[414-2] and the emperor of Cathay, a long time ago, sent for wise men +to instruct him in the faith of Christ.[414-3] Who will offer himself for +this work?[414-4] Should any one do so, I pledge myself, in the name of +God, to convey him safely thither, provided the Lord permits me to return +to Spain. + +The people who have sailed with me have passed through incredible toil +and danger, and I beseech your Highnesses, since they are poor, to pay +them promptly, and to be gracious to each of them according to their +respective merits; for I can safely assert, that to my belief they are +the bearers of the best news that ever was carried to Spain. With respect +to the gold which belongs to the Quibian of Veragua, and other chiefs in +the neighboring country, although it appears by the accounts we have +received of it to be very abundant, I do not think it would be well or +desirable, on the part of your Highnesses, to take possession of it in +the way of plunder; by fair dealing, scandal and disrepute will be +avoided, and all the gold will thus reach your Highnesses' treasury +without the loss of a grain. + +With one month of fair weather I shall complete my voyage. As I was +deficient in ships, I did not persist in delaying my course; but in +everything that concerns your Highnesses' service, I trust in Him who +made me, and I hope also that my health will be re-established. I think +your Highnesses will remember that I had intended to build some ships in +a new manner, but the shortness of the time did not permit it. I had +certainly foreseen how things would be. I think more of this opening for +commerce, and of the lordship over such extensive mines, than of all that +has been done in the Indies.[415-1] This is not a child to be left to the +care of a stepmother. + +I never think of Española, and Paria, and the other countries, without +shedding tears. I thought that what had occurred there would have been an +example for others; on the contrary, these settlements are now in a +languid state, although not dead, and the malady is incurable, or at +least very extensive. Let him who brought the evil come now and cure it, +if he knows the remedy, or how to apply it; but when a disturbance is on +foot, every one is ready to take the lead. It used to be the custom to +give thanks and promotion to him who placed his person in jeopardy; but +there is no justice in allowing the man who opposed this undertaking, to +enjoy the fruits of it with his children. Those who left the Indies, +avoiding the toils consequent upon the enterprise, and speaking evil of +it and me, have since returned with official appointments,--such is the +case now in Veragua: it is an evil example, and profitless both as +regards the business in which we are embarked, and as respects the +general maintenance of justice. The fear of this, with other sufficient +considerations, which I clearly foresaw, caused me to beg your +Highnesses, previously to my coming to discover these islands and +mainland, to grant me permission to govern in your royal name. Your +Highnesses granted my request; and it was a privilege and treaty granted +under the royal seal and oath, by which I was nominated viceroy, and +admiral, and governor-general of all: and your Highnesses limited the +extent of my government to a hundred leagues beyond the Azores and Cape +Verde islands, by a line passing from one pole to the other, and gave me +ample power over all that I might discover beyond this line; all which is +more fully described in the official document.[416-1] + +But the most important affair of all, and that which cries most loudly +for redress, remains inexplicable to this moment. For seven years was I +at your royal court, where every one to whom the enterprise was mentioned +treated it as ridiculous; but now there is not a man, down to the very +tailors, who does not beg to be allowed to become a discoverer. There is +reason to believe, that they make the voyage only for plunder, and that +they are permitted to do so, to the great disparagement of my honor, and +the detriment of the undertaking itself.[416-2] It is right to give God +His own,--and to Caesar[416-3] that which belongs to him.[416-4] This is +a just sentiment, and proceeds from just feelings. The lands in this part +of the world, which are now under your Highnesses' sway, are richer and +more extensive than those of any other Christian power, and yet, after +that I had, by the Divine will, placed them under your high and royal +sovereignty, and was on the point of bringing your majesties into the +receipt of a very great and unexpected revenue; and while I was waiting +for ships, to convey me in safety, and with a heart full of joy, to your +royal presence, victoriously to announce the news of the gold that I had +discovered, I was arrested and thrown, with my two brothers, loaded with +irons, into a ship, stripped, and very ill-treated, without being allowed +any appeal to justice.[417-1] + +Who could believe, that a poor foreigner would have risen against your +Highnesses, in such a place, without any motive or argument on his side; +without even the assistance of any other prince upon which to rely; but +on the contrary, amongst your own vassals and natural subjects, and with +my sons staying at your royal court? I was twenty-eight years old when I +came into your Highnesses' service,[417-2] and now I have not a hair upon +me that is not gray; my body is infirm, and all that was left to me, as +well as to my brothers, has been taken away and sold, even to the frock +that I wore, to my great dishonor. I cannot but believe that this was +done without your royal permission. The restitution of my honor, the +reparation of my losses, and the punishment of those who have inflicted +them, will redound to the honor of your royal character; a similar +punishment also is due to those who plundered me of my pearls, and who +have brought a disparagement upon the privileges of my admiralty. Great +and unexampled will be the glory and fame of your Highnesses, if you do +this; and the memory of your Highnesses, as just and grateful sovereigns, +will survive as a bright example to Spain in future ages. The honest +devotedness I have always shown to your Majesties' service, and the so +unmerited outrage with which it has been repaid, will not allow my soul +to keep silence, however much I may wish it: I implore your Highnesses to +forgive my complaints. I am indeed in as ruined a condition as I have +related; hitherto I have wept over others;--may Heaven now have mercy +upon me, and may the earth weep for me. With regard to temporal things, I +have not even a blanca,[418-1] for an offering; and in spiritual things, +I have ceased here in the Indies from observing the prescribed forms of +religion. Solitary in my trouble, sick, and in daily expectation of +death, surrounded by a million of hostile savages full of cruelty, and +thus separated from the blessed sacraments of our holy Church, how will +my soul be forgotten if it be separated from the body in this foreign +land? Weep for me, whoever has charity, truth, and justice! I did not +come out on this voyage to gain to myself honor or wealth; this is a +certain fact, for at that time all hope of such a thing was dead. I do +not lie when I say, that I went to your Highnesses with honest purpose of +heart, and sincere zeal in your cause. I humbly beseech your Highnesses, +that if it please God to rescue me from this place, you will graciously +sanction my pilgrimage to Rome and other holy places. May the Holy +Trinity protect your Highnesses' lives, and add to the prosperity of your +exalted position. + +Done in the Indies, in the island of Jamaica, on the seventh of July, in +the year one thousand five hundred and three. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[389-1] The punctuation of this first paragraph has been changed in the +light of the contemporary Italian translation known as the _Lettera +Rarissima_, which is given in facsimile and English translation in +Thacher's _Christopher Columbus_, II. 671 _et seqq._ + +[389-2] June 29. Las Casas, III. 29. + +[390-1] By the letter of the King and Queen, March 14, 1502, Columbus had +been forbidden to call at Española on the outward voyage. Las Casas, +_Historia de las Indias_, III. 26. + +[390-2] The new governor, Ovando, who had been sent out to supersede +Bobadilla, had reached Santo Domingo in April of this year, 1502. + +[390-3] Columbus was accompanied by his younger son Ferdinand and his +elder brother Bartholomew. Las Casas, III. 25. + +[390-4] The translation here follows Lollis's emendation of the text +which changed the printed text, "_habia, echado á la mar, por escapar, +fasta la isola la Gallega; perdio la barca_," etc., to "_habia echado á +la mar, por escapar fasta la isla; la Gallega perdio la barca_." One of +the ships was named _La Gallega_, and there is no island of that name in +that region. + +[391-1] Columbus set forth from the harbor of Santo Domingo in the storm, +Friday, July 1. The ships found refuge in the harbor of Azua on the +following Sunday, July 3. (Ferdinand Columbus in the _Historie_, ed. +1867, pp. 286-287.) Azua is about 50 miles west of Santo Domingo in a +straight line, but much farther by water. After a rest and repairs the +Admiral sailed to Yaquimo, the present Jacmel in the territory of Hayti, +into which port he went to escape another storm. He left Yaquimo, July +14. (Las Casas, III. 108; Ferdinand Columbus, _Historie_, p. 289.) He +then passed south of Jamaica, and was carried by the currents northwest +till he reached the Queen's Garden, a group of many small islands south +of Cuba and east of the Isle of Pines, so named by him in 1494 on his +exploration of the coast of Cuba. + +[391-2] From the Queen's Garden he sailed south July 27 (the Porras +narrative of this voyage, Navarrete, II. 283; in English in Thacher, +_Columbus_, II. 640 _et seqq._), and after a passage of ninety leagues +sighted an island Saturday, July 30. (Porras in Thacher, II. 643.) This +was the island of Guanaja about twelve leagues north of Trujillo, +Honduras. (Las Casas, III. 109.) Here a landing was made and a canoe was +encountered which was covered with an awning and contained Indians well +clothed and a load of merchandise. Notwithstanding these indications of a +more advanced culture than had hitherto been found, the Admiral decided +not to explore the country of these Indians, which would have led him +into Yucatan and possibly Mexico, but to search for the strait which he +supposed separated Asia from the continental mass he had discovered on +his third voyage (Paria, South America). He struck the mainland near +Trujillo, naming the point Caxinas. At or near this place they landed +Sunday, August 14, to say mass. (Las Casas, III. 112; Ferdinand Columbus, +_Historie_, p. 295.) From this point he coasted very slowly, sailing in +sight of land by day and anchoring at night, distressed by storms and +headwinds, some days losing as much ground as could be gained in two, +till September 12, when he reached Cape Gracias á Dios. (Las Casas, III. +113; _Historie_, p. 297; Porras narrative in Thacher, _Columbus_, II. +644.) It will be seen from this collation of the sources that the +statements in our text are far from exact, that they are in fact a very +general and greatly exaggerated recollection of a most trying experience. +It will be remembered that Ferdinand was on this voyage, but his +narrative says nothing of any storm between July 14 when he left the +Queen's Gardens and the arrival at Guanaja, a passage which Porras says +took three days. This passage, however, Las Casas describes apparently on +the basis of this letter as having taken sixty days (_Historia_, III. +108). Next the text of the _Historie_ presents a difficulty, for it +places the tedious stormy voyage of _sixty_ leagues and _seventy_ days +between Caxinas (Trujillo) and Cape Gracias á Dios (_Historie_, p. 296), +although in another place it gives the beginning of this coasting as +after August 14 and the date of arrival at the Cape as September 12. This +last chronological difficulty may perhaps be accounted for in this way: +The original manuscript of the _Historie_ may have had "XXX dias," which +a copyist or the Italian translator may have taken for "LXX dias." + +[392-1] A review of the chronology of the voyage in the preceding note +will show that no such storm of eighty-eight days' duration could have +occurred in the first part of this voyage. Columbus was only seventy-four +days in going from Santo Domingo to Cabo Gracias á Dios. Either the text +is wrong or his memory was at fault. The most probable conclusion is that +in copying either LXXXVIII got substituted for XXVIII or _Ochenta y ocho_ +for _Veinte y ocho_. In that case we should have almost exactly the time +spent in going from Trujillo to Cape Gracias á Dios, August 14 to +September 12, and exact agreement between our text, the _Historie_, and +the Porras narrative. + +[393-1] Twenty years, speaking approximately. This letter was written in +1503, and Columbus entered the service of Spain in 1485. + +[393-2] Diego was the heir of his father's titles. He was appointed +governor of the Indies in 1508, but a prolonged lawsuit was necessary to +establish his claims to inherit his father's rights. + +[393-3] Their course was down the Mosquito coast. Cariay was near the +mouth of the San Juan River of Nicaragua. Las Casas gives the date of the +arrival at Cariarí, as he gives the name, as September 17 (III. 114). The +_Historie_ gives the date as September 5 and the name as Cariai (p. 297). + +[393-4] Peter Martyr, _De Rebus Oceanicis_ (ed. 1574), p. 239, says that +Columbus called Ciamba the region which the inhabitants called +Quiriquetana, a name which it would seem still survives in Chiriqui +Lagoon just east of Almirante Bay. The name "Ciamba" appears on Martin +Behaim's globe, 1492, as a province corresponding to Cochin-China. It is +described in Marco Polo under the name "Chamba"; see Yule's _Marco Polo_, +II. 248-252 (bk. III., ch. V.). + +[393-5] Carambaru is the present Almirante Bay, about on the border +between Costa Rica and Panama. Las Casas describes the bay as six leagues +long and over three broad with many islands and coves. He gives the name +as Caravaró (III. 118). Ferdinand Columbus's account is practically +identical. + +[394-1] Veragua in this letter includes practically all of the present +republic of Panama. The western quarter of it was granted to Luis Colon, +the Admiral's grandson, in 1537, as a dukedom in partial compensation for +his renouncing his hereditary rights. Hence the title Dukes of Veragua +borne by the Admiral's descendants. The name still survives in geography +in that of the little island Escudo de Veragua, which lies off the +northern coast. + +[394-2] The eve or vigil of St. Simon and St. Jude is October 27. +According to the narrative in the _Historie_, on October 7, they went +ashore at the channel of Cerabora (Carambaru). A few days later they went +on to Aburema. October 17 they left Aburema and went twelve leagues to +Guaigo, where they landed. Thence they went to Cateva (Catiba, Las Casas) +and cast anchor in a large river (the Chagres). Thence easterly to +Cobrava; thence to five towns, among which was Beragua (Veragua); the +next day to Cubiga. The distance from Cerabora to Cubiga was fifty +leagues. Without landing, the Admiral went on to Belporto (Puerto Bello), +which he so named. ("Puerto Bello, which was a matter of six leagues from +what we now call El Nombre de Dios." Las Casas, III. 121.) He arrived at +Puerto Bello November 2, and remained there seven days on account of the +rains and bad weather. (_Historie_, pp. 302-306.) Apparently Columbus put +this period of bad weather a few days too early in his recollection of +it. + +[394-3] Ciguare. An outlying province of the Mayas lying on the Pacific +side of southern Costa Rica. Peter Martyr, _De Rebus Oceanicis_, p. 240, +says, "In this great tract (_i.e._, where the Admiral was) are two +districts, the near one called Taia, and the further one Maia." + +[395-1] See p. 311, note 5. + +[395-2] Probably _casas_, houses, should be the reading here. In the +corresponding passage of the contemporary Italian version the word is +"houses." This information, mixed as it is with Columbus's +misinterpretations of the Indian signs and distorted by his +preconceptions, was first made public in the Italian translation of this +letter in 1505 and then gave Europe its first intimations of the culture +of the Mayas. + +[395-3] _I.e._, in being on either side of a peninsula, Tortosa and +Fontarabia being on opposite sides of the narrowest part of the Spanish +peninsula. + +[395-4] See p. 300, note 1. + +[396-1] The Spanish reads, "Lo que yo sé es que el año de noventa y +cuatro en veinte y cuatros grados al Poniente en termino de nueve horas." +The translation in the text and that in Thacher (II. 687) of the Italian +makes nonsense. The translation should be "what I know is that in the +year '94 (1494) I sailed westward on the 24th parallel (lit. on 24 +degrees) a total of nine hours (lit. to a limit of nine hours)." That is, +he reckoned that he had gone 9/24 round the world on the 24th parallel, +and he knew it because there was an eclipse by which he found out the +difference in time between Europe and where he was. The "termino" of nine +hours refers to the western limit of his exploration of the southern +coast of Cuba when he concluded it was a projection of the mainland of +Asia. After reaching the conclusion that this is the correct +interpretation of this passage, I discovered that it had been given by +Humboldt in his _Kritische Untersuchungen über die historische +Entwickelung der geographischen Kenntnisse von der Neuen Welt_, I. 553, +and by Peschel in his _Zeitalter der Entdeckungen_, p. 97, note 2. It may +be objected to this explanation that in reality Columbus had only gone +about 75 degrees west of Cape St. Vincent in Portugal. The accurate +calculation of longitude at that time, however, was impossible, and as +will be seen in the following note Columbus's calculation was biassed by +powerful preconceptions. + +[396-2] In his _Libro de Profecias_ Columbus recorded the data of this +eclipse which took place February 29, 1494, from which he drew the +conclusion, "The difference between the middle of the island Jamaica in +the Indies and the island of Cadiz in Spain is seven hours and fifteen +minutes." Navarrete, _Viages_, II. 272. + +[396-3] Reading _remendiado_ or _remendado_ instead of _remedado_. + +[396-4] Catigara was in China on the east side of the Gulf of Tonquin. + +[396-5] Marinus of Tyre divided the earth into 24 meridians, 15 degrees +or one hour apart. His first meridian passed the Fortunate Isles, which +he supposed to be 2-1/2 degrees west of Cape St. Vincent, and his +fifteenth through Catigara, southeastern China. The inhabited world +embraced fifteen of these lines, 225 degrees, and the unknown portion +east of India and west of Spain, nine lines, or hours, or 135 degrees. +_Cf._ Vignaud, _Toscanelli and Columbus_, p. 74; Bunbury, _History of +Ancient Geography_, II. 519 _et seqq._ Columbus, therefore, according to +his calculations, had in 1494 completely covered this unknown section and +reached India (or China), and so had demonstrated the correctness of +Marinus's views. In reality his strong preconceptions as to where he was +distorted his calculations of the longitude. Ptolemy corrected Marinus's +estimate of 225 degrees from Cape St. Vincent to Sera in China, and, as +noted in Columbus's letter, placed Catigara in China (on the east side of +the Gulf of Tonquin) at twelve lines or 180 degrees west of his meridian +(2-1/2 degrees west of Cape St. Vincent). If Ptolemy was right, Columbus +had not reached India (or more exactly China) or come, on his own +calculation, within 45 degrees or 2700 geographical miles of it measured +on the equator. The outline reproduction of the map of Bartholomew +Columbus made after his return from this voyage given in Channing's +_Student's History of the United States_, p. 27 (photographic +reproduction in Bourne, _Spain in America_, p. 96) illustrates the +Admiral's ideas and conclusions. This region (_i.e._, Costa Rica and +Panama) is a southern extension of Cochin-China and Cambodia and is +connected with _Mondo Novo_, _i.e._, South America. + +[397-1] The translation here adopts the emended text of Lollis, +substituting "ali[e]nde" for "al Indo" in the sentence "Marino en +Ethiopía escribe al Indo la línea equinoçial." _Raccolta Colombiana_, +parte I., tomo II., p. 184. The translation of the unamended text as +printed by Major was "the same author describes the Indus in Ethiopia as +being more than four and twenty degrees from the equinoctial line." +Apparently the 24 should be 44. With these changes the statements in the +text agree with Columbus's marginalia to the _Imago Mundi_, where he +notes that the Cape of Good Hope is Agesinba and that Bartholomew Diaz +found it to be 45 degrees south of the equator. "This," he goes on, +"agrees with the dictum of Marinus, whom Ptolemy corrects, in regard to +the expedition to the Garamantes, who said it traversed 27,500 stadia +beyond the equinoctial." _Raccolta Colombiana_, parte II., tomo II., p. +377. On Marinus's exaggerated estimate of the distance covered by the +Romans in tropical Africa, see Bunbury, _History of Ancient Geography_, +II. 524. + +[397-2] This is unintelligible. The Spanish is, "Tolomeo diz que la +tierra mas austral es el plazo primero." The meaning of _plazo_ is not +"boundary" but "term" (allotted time). The reading should be: "la tierra +mas austral es el praso promontorio," and the translation should be, +"Ptolemy says that the most southern land is the promontory of Prasum," +etc. Prasum promontorium was Ptolemy's southern limit of the world. He +placed it at about 16 degrees south latitude. See Bunbury, _History of +Ancient Geography_, II. 572, and Smith's _Dictionary of Greek and Roman +Geography_, art. "Prasum Promontorium"; also Ptolemy's _Geography_, bk. +IV., ch. IX., the descriptive matter relating to Map 4 on Africa. + +[398-1] _II. Esdras_, VI. 42, see p. 358, note 1. + +[398-2] See the Letter of Columbus on his Third Voyage. Major, _Select +Letters of Columbus_, p. 141. + +[398-3] Ptolemy reckoned the length of the degree on the equator at +62-1/2 miles. The shorter measurement of 56-2/3 was the estimate adopted +by the Arab astronomer Alfragan in the ninth century and known to +Columbus through Cardinal d'Ailly's _Imago Mundi_, the source of much if +not most of his information on the geographical knowledge and opinions of +former times. Cardinal d'Ailly's source of information about Alfragan was +Roger Bacon's _Opus Majus_. Columbus was deeply impressed with Alfragan's +estimate of the length of the degree and annotated the passages in the +_Imago Mundi_. _Cf._ _Raccolta Colombiana_, Parte I., tomo II., pp. 378, +407, and frequently. See this whole question in Vignaud, _Toscanelli and +Columbus_, p. 79 _et seqq._ + +[398-4] In Puerto Bello. See p. 394, note 2. Porto Bello, to use the +Anglicized form, became the great shipping port on the north side of the +isthmus for the trade with Peru. _Cf._ Bourne, _Spain in America_, p. +292. + +[399-1] Columbus left Porto Bello November 9 and went eight leagues, but +the next day he turned back four and took refuge at what is now Nombre de +Dios. From the abundance of maize fields he named it Port of Provisions +(Puerto de Bastimentos). _Historie_, p. 306. + +[399-2] _Me reposó atrás il viento_, etc. For _reposó_ the text +apparently should be either _repuso_, "put back," or _rempujó_, "drove +back," and the translation is based on this supposition. + +[399-3] They remained at Bastimentos till November 23, when they went on +to Guiga, but did not tarry but pushed on to a little harbor (November +26), which the Admiral called Retrete (Closet) because it was so small +that it could hold only five or six vessels and the entrance was only +fifteen or twenty paces wide. _Historie_, p. 306. + +[399-4] That is, Columbus turns back to explore the mines on account of +the violence of the east and northeast winds. This was December 5. +_Historie_, p. 309. + +[400-1] Not mentioned in the _Historie_ by name. It was the place where +they stayed from December 26 to January 3 to repair the ship _Gallega_ as +appears in the _Probanzas del Almirante_. Navarrete, _Viages_, III. 600. +It was between Rio de los Lagartos and Puerto Bello. Lollis, _Raccolta +Colombiana_, Parte I., tomo II., p. 187. + +[400-2] Adopting de Lollis's text and punctuation. + +[400-3] _La oposicion de Saturno con Marte tan desvaratado en costa +brava_, adopting de Lollis's text following the suggestion of the +contemporary Italian translation. According to the doctrines of astrology +the influence of Saturn was malign. "When Saturn is in the first degree +of Aries, and any other Planet in the first degree of Libra, they being +now an hundred and eighty degrees each from other, are said to be in +Opposition: A bad Aspect." William Lilly, _Christian Astrology_ (London, +1647), p. 27. + +[400-4] Epiphany, January 6. It will be remembered that Columbus had +passed Veragua the previous October when working eastward. See p. 394, +note 2. He now found he could enter the river of Veragua, but found +another near by called by the Indians Yebra, but which Columbus named +Belem in memory of the coming of the three kings (the wise men of the +East) to Bethlehem. (Las Casas, III. 128; Porras in Thacher, II. 645.) +The name is still preserved attached to the river. + +[401-1] _Proeses._ In nautical Spanish _prois_ or _proiza_ is a +breastfast or headfast, that is a large cable for fastening a ship to a +wharf or another ship. In Portuguese _proiz_ is a stone or tree on shore +to which the hawsers are fastened. Major interpreted it in this sense, +translating the words _las amarras y proeses_, "the cables and the +supports to which they were fastened." The interpretation given first +seems to me the correct one, especially as Ferdinand says that the flood +came so suddenly that they could not get the cables on land. _Historie_, +p. 315. + +[402-1] _Quibian_ is a title, as indicated a few lines further on, and +not a proper name as Major, Irving, Markham, and others following Las +Casas have taken it to be. The Spanish is uniformly "El Quibian." Peter +Martyr says: "They call a kinglet (_regulus_) Cacicus, as we have said +elsewhere, in other places Quebi, in some places also Tiba. A chief, in +some places Sacchus, in others Jurá." _De Rebus Oceanicis_, p. 241. + +[402-2] "_Una mozada de oro._" _Mozada_ is not given in any of the +Spanish dictionaries I have consulted. The Academy dictionary gives +_mojoda_ as a square measure, deriving it from the low Latin _modiata_ +from _modius_. Perhaps one should read _mojada_ instead of _mozada_ and +give it a meaning similar to that of _modius_ or about a peck. Major's +translation follows the explanation of De Verneuil, who says: "_Mozada +signifie la mesure que peut porter un jeune garçon_." + +[403-1] The mouth of the river was closed by sand thrown up by the +violent storms outside. _Historie_, p. 321. + +[403-2] The teredo. + +[403-3] During the weeks that he was shut in the River Belem Columbus had +his brother explore the country. The prospects for a successful colony +led him to build a small settlement and to plan to return to Spain for +re-enforcements and supplies. The story is told in detail in the +_Historie_ and by Irving, _Columbus_, II. 425-450, and more briefly by +Markham, _Columbus_, pp. 259-207. This was the first settlement projected +on the American Continent. The hostility of the Indians culminating in +this attack rendered the execution of the project impracticable. In the +manuscript copy of Las Casas's _Historia de las Indias_ Las Casas noted +on the margin of the passage containing the account of this incident, +"This was the first settlement that the Spaniards made on the mainland, +although in a short time it came to naught." See Thacher, _Columbus_, II. +608. + +[404-1] De Lollis points out that these striking words are a paraphrase +of the famous lines in Seneca's _Medea_, Chorus, Act II.:-- + +Venient annis saecula seris Quibus Oceanus vincula rerum Laxet, et ingens +pateat tellus, Tethysque novos detegat orbes Nec sit terris ultima Thule. + +Columbus copied these verses into his _Libro de las Profecias_ and +translated them. Navarrete, _Viages_, II. 272. + +[404-2] Accepting de Lollis's emended text. + +[405-1] "Quando se aia de proveer de socorro, se proveera de todo." + +[405-2] April 16, 1503. + +[405-3] Cuba. According to Ferdinand Columbus the course was as follows: +The Admiral followed the coast of the isthmus eastward beyond El Retrete +to a place he named Marmoro (near Punto de Mosquitos) somewhat west of +the entrance to the Gulf of Darien; then May 1 in response to the urgency +of the pilots he turned north. May 10 they sighted two little islands, +Caymanos Chicos, and the 12th they reached the Queen's Garden just south +of Cuba (see p. 301, note 1). The next day they landed in Cuba and +secured supplies. It is significant of the tenacity of Columbus's +conviction that Cuba was a part of the mainland of Asia that he here +calls it Mago (_i.e._, Mango). June 12, 1494, when he had explored the +southern coast of Cuba, he reached this conviction and compelled his +officers and crew to take oath that "it (_i.e._, Cuba) is mainland and in +particular the province of Mango." Navarrete, _Viages_, II. 144. (The +affidavits are translated in Thacher, _Columbus_, II. 327.) Mangi +(southern China) is described by Marco Polo at great length. In the +second Toscanelli letter Quinsay is said to be "in the province of Mangi, +_i.e._, near the province of Cathay." It is noted several times in +Columbus's marginalia to Marco Polo. + +[406-1] _Allí me torné á reposar atrás la fortuna._ De Lollis, following +the Italian translation, reads: _Allí me torné á reposar atrás la +fortuna_, etc. "There the storm returned to drive me back; I stopped in +the same island in a safer port." As this gives an unknown meaning to +_reposar_, he suggests that Columbus may have written _repujar_, "to +drive." + +[406-2] June 23. _Historie_, p. 334. + +[407-1] On the contrary the narrative of Diego de Porras, which he +prepared after his return to Spain in November, 1504, is a much clearer +account of the voyage in most respects than this letter of Columbus's. +For it, see Thacher, _Columbus_, II. 640-646. Porras relates that during +this voyage the Admiral took all the charts away that the seamen had had. +Thacher, _Columbus_, II. 646. + +[407-2] "_El puerto de Jaquimo_ [Jacmel], which he called the port of +Brasil." Las Casas, _Historia_, III. 108. + +[408-1] Cuba. + +[408-2] The pilots thought that they were east of Española when Columbus +turned north, and consequently thought that Cuba (Mango) was Porto Rico +(San Juan). _Cf._ _Historie_, p. 333. + +[408-3] _I.e._, in that it is clear to one who understands it, and blind +to one who does not. + +[408-4] _Las naos de las Indias_, _i.e._, the large ships for the Indies, +_i.e._, Española. + +[408-5] Bow-lines are ropes employed to keep the windward edges of the +principal sails steady, and are only used when the wind is so unfavorable +that the sails must be all braced sideways, or close hauled to the wind. +(Major.) + +[409-1] _I.e._, rigged with lateen sails in the Portuguese fashion. + +[409-2] Columbus, in his marginal notes to his copy of the _Historia +Rerum ubique Gestarum_ of Pope Pius II. (Aeneas Sylvius Piccolomini; +Venice, 1477), summarized the description of the Massagetae in ch. XII. +in part as follows: they "use golden girths and golden bridles and silver +breast-pieces and have no iron but plenty of copper and gold." _Raccolta +Colombiana_, parte I., tomo II., p. 300. This description of the +Massagetae goes back to Herodotus. While some habits ascribed to the +Massagetae were like what Columbus observed in Veragua, their home was +nowhere near eastern China. + +[409-3] See p. 393, note 3. + +[409-4] The account in the _Historie_ is radically at variance with this. +The girls were brought on board and "showed themselves very brave since +although the Christians in looks, acts, and race were very strange, they +gave no signs of distress or sadness, but maintained a cheerful and +modest (_honesto_) bearing, wherefore they were very well treated by the +Admiral who gave them clothes and something to eat and then sent them +back." _Historie_, p. 299. Ferdinand gives the ages as eight and fourteen +and says nothing of witchcraft except that the Indians were frightened +and thought they were being bewitched when Bartholomew the next day +ordered the ships' clerks to write down the replies he got to his +questions; _ibid._ + +[410-1] A specimen of the Maya sculptures, of which such imposing remains +are found in Yucatan. The translation follows Lollis's emendation, which +substitutes _mirrado_ for _mirando_. + +[410-2] _Gato paulo_. On this name, see p. 341, note 3. Ferdinand, in the +_Historie_, relates this incident in more detail, from which it is clear +that the pigs were peccaries which had been captured by the men. On the +other hand, Ulloa, the Italian translator of the _Historie_, +mistranslated _gato paulo_ by "gatto," "cat." + +[410-3] _Begare._ Columbus in recollecting this incident transferred to +the monkey the Indian name of the wild pigs. The _begare_ is the +"peccary," a native of America. Oviedo, lib. XII., cap. XX, gives +_baquira_ as the name of wild pigs in Nicaragua, and _baquira_ and +_begare_ are obviously identical. + +[410-4] For the word _barra_ no explanation can be offered except what is +derived from the context. As the Italian has _diverse malattie_, "divers +diseases," de Lollis suggests that _barra_ should be _varias_ and that +_maladias_ was somehow dropped from the text. + +[410-5] _Leones._ The American lion or puma. + +[411-1] A misunderstanding. The Mayas made no metal tools. Brinton, _The +American Race_, p. 156. + +[411-2] Possibly Columbus may have seen some Maya codices, of which such +remarkable specimens have been preserved. + +[412-1] Considering Columbus's experience at Veragua this account +exhibits boundless optimism. Still it is not to be forgotten that through +the conquest of Mexico to the north this prediction was rather strikingly +fulfilled. + +[412-2] It is not clear to what Columbus refers in this sentence. + +[412-3] _De un camino._ The texts to which Columbus refers just below +show that this should read _de un año_, in one year. + +[412-4] In the Latin version of Josephus used by Columbus the Greek +θυρεὁς, a target, was rendered _lancea_. See _Raccolta Colombiana_, +parte I., tomo II., p. 367. + +[412-5] _Tablado._ In the Italian translation _tavolato_, a "partition +wall," "wainscoting," also "floor." _Tablado_ also means "scaffold" and +"stage" or "staging." We have here a curious series of mistakes. The +Greek text of Josephus has ἐκπώματα, "cups." The old Latin translator, +perhaps having a defective text, took ἐκπώματα apparently to be +equivalent to πώματα, which has as its secondary meaning, "lids," and +translated it by the uncommon word _coopercula_, "lids" (_cf._ Georges, +_Lateinischdeutsches Handwörterbuch, sub voce cooperculum_). The meaning +of this word Columbus guessed at, not having the text before him to see +the connection, and from its derivation from _cooperio_, "to cover," +took it to be a "covering" in the sense of flooring, or perhaps ceiling, +above where the shields were hung "in the house of the forest of +Lebanon," and rendered it _tablado_. The whole passage from the old +Latin version (published in 1470 and frequently later), Columbus copied +into a fly-leaf of his copy of the _Historia Rerum ubique Gestarum_ of +Pope Pius II. See _Raccolta Colombiana_, parte I., tomo II., pp. +366-367. + +[413-1] Josephus, _Antiquities of the Jews_, bk. VIII., ch. VII., sect. +4; _I. Kings_, X. 14, 15; _II. Chronicles_, IX. 13, 14. + +[413-2] The Chersonesus Aurea of Ptolemy, or the Malay Peninsula. + +[413-3] That is, Veragua and the Golden Chersonese are in the same +latitude. + +[413-4] Josephus wrote that the gold came from the "Land of Gold," "_a +terra que vocatur aurea_," as the passage in the Latin version reads. +The Greek is, ἀπὸ τῆς χρυσῆς καλουμένης γῆς. Josephus gives no further +identification of the location. + +[413-5] I have not been able to verify this reference. There is nothing +in the fourteenth Psalm relating to this matter, nor is the fourteenth +Psalm mentioned among the many citations from the Psalms in the _Libro de +las Profecias_. + +[414-1] In his _Libro de las Profecias_ Columbus wrote, "El abad +Johachín, calabrés, diso que habia de salir de España quien havía de +redificar la Casa del Monte Sion." "The abbot Joachim, the Calabrian, +said that he who was destined to rebuild the House of Mount Sion was to +come from Spain." Lollis remarks that Columbus interpreted in his own way +the "Oraculum Turcicum," which concludes the thirty prophecies of Joachim +of Flora in regard to the popes. In the edition (Venice, 1589) which +Lollis had seen, this prophecy was interpreted to mean Charles VIII. of +France. _Raccolta Colombiana_, parte II., tomo II., p. 83. + +[414-2] The reference to St. Jerome I have not found in Columbus's +marginalia. + +[414-3] The father and uncle of Marco Polo had been given this mission by +Cublay Kaan. See Marco Polo, bk. I., ch. VII. Opposite the passage in his +copy of the Latin Marco Polo which he had, Columbus wrote, "magnus kam +misit legatos ad pontificem." _Raccolta Colombiana_, parte II., tomo II., +p. 446. + +[414-4] The recovery of the Holy Sepulchre had been long a cherished +object with Columbus. See the Journal of the First Voyage, December 26; +the letter to Pope Alexander VI., February, 1502 (Navarrete, _Viages_, +II. 280), and his _Libra de Profecias_, a collection of Scripture texts +compiled under his supervision relating to the restoration of Zion, etc. +_Raccolta Colombiana_, parte I., tomo II., pp. 77-160. + +[415-1] An opinion abundantly justified through the conquest of Mexico +and the establishment of the kingdom of New Spain. + +[416-1] See the Capitulation, pp. 77, 78 above. The limit mentioned was +fixed by the Papal Demarcation line; the limit agreed upon by Spain and +Portugal was 370 leagues west of the Cape Verde Islands. + +[416-2] A reference to such voyages as those of Vicente Yañez Pinzon, +Hojeda, Diego de Lepe, and Rodrigo de Bastidas which occurred in +1499-1502. _Cf._ Bourne, _Spain in America_, pp. 67-71, and for details +Irving, _Columbus_, III. 15-62. + +[416-3] Accepting de Lollis's emendation _á César_ instead of the MS. +reading _açetar_ which Navarrete printed _aceptar_. The Italian has _a +Cesaro_. + +[416-4] "Render therefore unto Caesar the things which are Caesar's; and +unto God, the things which are God's." _Matthew_, XXII. 21. + +[417-1] At Española in 1500 by Bobadilla. _Cf._ the letter to the nurse +above, p. 380. + +[417-2] This is one of the most important passages bearing upon the age +of Columbus. As he came to Spain at the end of 1484 according to +Ferdinand Columbus, _Historie_, ch. XII., Peschel fixed his birth in +1456, _Zeitalter der Entdeckungen_, p. 76. The majority of modern +critics, however, have agreed upon the basis of notarial documents in +Genoa that 1446 was the date of his birth and propose therefore to emend +the text here by substituting "treinta y ocho" for "veinte y ocho." On +the various dates set for his birth see Vignaud, _The Real Birth-date of +Christopher Columbus_. Vignaud fixes upon 1451. + +[418-1] _Blanca_, a copper coin worth about one-third of a cent. + +[Illustration: The New World in the Cantino Chart of 1502, showing the +state of geographical knowledge at the time of the death of Columbus.] + + + + +ORIGINAL NARRATIVES OF THE VOYAGES OF JOHN CABOT + + + + +INTRODUCTION + + +John Cabot, the Venetian sailor who took the first English ship across +the Atlantic, was not a writer like Columbus, and consequently our +knowledge of his projects and his achievements is limited to what is +derived from the reports of other men who knew him or his son and from +certain official documents. In general our material may be classified +into: (_a_) English official documents, (_b_) reports derived from John +Cabot himself, and (_c_) reports or records derived more or less directly +from Sebastian Cabot. The materials in _a_ and _b_ are harmonious; those +in classes _b_ and _c_, on the other hand, are practically +irreconcilable. The result of this conflict of testimony has been to +discredit Sebastian Cabot and to lead many scholars to believe that he +tried to ascribe to himself what his father did. Other critics reluctant +to bring so serious a charge against a man who held honorable positions +in Spain and later in England believe that the material in class _c_ +relates to the second voyage--that of 1498, and that by a mistake it was +in the minds of the narrators confused with the voyage of 1497. For a +presentation of all the original material the reader may be referred to +H. Harrisse, _John Cabot the Discoverer of North America, and Sebastian +his Son_ (London, 1896), and to G.E. Weare, _Cabot's Discovery of North +America_ (London, 1897). G.P. Winship, _Cabot Bibliography_ (London, +1900), gives a complete guide to the Cabot literature. For a brief +account of the voyages and of the Cabot question see E.G. Bourne, _Spain +in America_ (New York, 1904), pp. 54-63. The most important recent +monograph is H.P. Biggar, _The Voyages of the Cabots and of the +Corte-Reals_, in _Revue Hispanique_, tome X. (Paris, 1903). + +The material presented here consists of the private letters of two +Italians sojourning in London in 1497-1498, and the official despatch of +the junior Spanish ambassador at the English court. + +E.G.B. + + + + +THE VOYAGES OF JOHN CABOT + +LETTER OF LORENZO PASQUALIGO TO HIS BROTHERS ALVISE AND FRANCESCO, + MERCHANTS IN VENICE[423-1] + + +The Venetian, our countryman, who went with a ship from Bristol to find +new islands, has returned, and says that 700 leagues hence he discovered +mainland, the territory of the Grand Cham (_Gram Cam_).[423-2] He coasted +for 300 leagues and landed; he did not see any person, but he has brought +hither to the King certain snares which had been set to catch game, and a +needle for making nets; he also found some cut trees, wherefore he +supposed there were inhabitants. Being in doubt he returned to his ship. + +He was three months on the voyage, and this is certain, and on his return +he saw two islands[423-3] but would not land, so as not to lose time, as +he was short of provisions. The King is much pleased with this. He says +that the tides are slack and do not flow as they do here. + +The King has promised that in the spring our countryman shall have ten +ships, armed to his order, and at his request has conceded him all the +prisoners, except traitors, to go with him as he has requested. The King +has also given him money wherewith to amuse himself till then,[424-1] and +he is now at Bristol with his wife, who is also Venetian, and with his +sons; his name is Zuam Talbot,[424-2] and he is styled the great admiral. +Vast honor is paid him; he dresses in silk, and these English run after +him like mad people, so that he can enlist as many of them as he pleases, +and a number of our own rogues besides. + +The discoverer of these things planted on his new-found land a large +cross, with one flag of England and another of St. Mark, by reason of his +being a Venetian, so that our banner has floated very far afield. + +London, 23 August 1497. + + +FIRST LETTER OF RAIMONDO DE SONCINO, AGENT OF THE DUKE OF MILAN, TO THE +DUKE[424-3] + +... Also some months ago his Majesty sent out a Venetian, who is a very +good mariner, and has good skill in discovering new islands, and he has +returned safe, and has found two very large and fertile new islands; +having likewise discovered the Seven Cities,[425-1] 400 leagues from +England, on the western passage. This next spring his Majesty means to +send him with fifteen or twenty ships. + + +SECOND LETTER OF RAIMONDO DE SONCINO TO THE DUKE OF MILAN[425-2] + +_Most Illustrious and Excellent My Lord_:-- + +Perhaps among your Excellency's many occupations, it may not displease +you to learn how his Majesty here has won a part of Asia without a stroke +of the sword. There is in this kingdom a Venetian fellow, Master John +Caboto by name, of fine mind, greatly skilled in navigation, who seeing +that those most serene kings, first he of Portugal, and then the one of +Spain, have occupied unknown islands, determined to make a like +acquisition for his Majesty aforesaid.[425-3] And having obtained royal +grants that he should have the usufruct of all that he should discover, +provided that the ownership of the same is reserved to the crown, with a +small ship and eighteen persons he committed himself to fortune; and +having set out from Bristol, a western port of this kingdom, and passed +the western limits of Ireland, and then standing to the northward he +began to sail toward the Oriental regions, leaving (after a few days) the +North Star on his right hand; and, having wandered about considerably, +at last he struck mainland, where, having planted the royal banner and +taken possession on behalf of this King, and taken certain tokens, he has +returned thence. The said Master John, as being foreign-born and poor, +would not be believed if his comrades, who are almost all Englishmen and +from Bristol, did not testify that what he says is true. This Master John +has the description of the world in a chart, and also in a solid globe +which he has made, and he shows where he landed, and that going toward +the east he passed considerably beyond the country of the Tanais.[426-1] +And they say that it is a very good and temperate country, and they think +that Brazil-wood[426-2] and silk grow there; and they affirm that that +sea is covered with fishes, which are caught not only with the net but +with baskets, a stone being tied to them in order that the baskets may +sink in the water. And this I heard the said Master John relate. + +And the aforesaid Englishmen, his comrades, say that they will bring so +many fishes that this kingdom will no longer have need of Iceland, from +which country there comes a very great store of fish which are called +stock-fish.[427-1] But Master John has set his mind on something greater; +for he expects to go farther on toward the East[427-2] from that place +already occupied, constantly hugging the shore, until he shall be over +against an island, by him called Cipango, situated in the equinoctial +region, where he thinks all the spices of the world, and also the +precious stones, originate;[427-3] and he says that in former times he +was at Mecca, whither spices are brought by caravans from distant +countries,[427-4] and that those who brought them, on being asked where +the said spices grow, answered that they do not know, but that other +caravans come to their homes with this merchandise from distant +countries, and these [caravans] again say that they are brought to them +from other remote regions. And he argues thus,--that if the Orientals +affirmed to the Southerners that these things come from a distance from +them, and so from hand to hand, presupposing the rotundity of the earth, +it must be that the last ones get them at the North toward the +West;[428-1] and he said it in such a way, that, having nothing to gain +or lose by it, I too believe it: and what is more, the King here, who is +wise and not lavish, likewise puts some faith in him; for (ever) since +his return he has made good provision for him, as the same Master John +tells me. And it is said that, in the spring, his Majesty aforenamed will +fit out some ships, and will besides give him all the convicts, and they +will go to that country to make a colony, by means of which they hope to +establish in London a greater emporium of spices than there is in +Alexandria; and the chief men of the enterprise are of Bristol, great +sailors, who, now that they know where to go, say that it is not a voyage +of more than fifteen days, nor do they ever have storms after they get +away from Hibernia. I have also talked with a Burgundian, a comrade of +Master John's, who confirms everything, and wishes to return thither +because the Admiral (for so Master John already entitles himself)[428-2] +has given him an island; and he has given another one to a barber of his +from Castiglione-of-Genoa, and both of them regard themselves as Counts, +nor does my Lord the Admiral esteem himself anything less than a Prince. +I think that with this expedition there will go several poor Italian +monks, who have all been promised bishoprics. And, as I have become a +friend of the Admiral's, if I wished to go thither I should get an +archbishopric. But I have thought that the benefices which your +Excellency has in store for me are a surer thing; and therefore I beg +that if these should fall vacant in my absence, you will cause possession +to be given to me, taking measures to do this rather where it is needed, +in order that they be not taken from me by others, who because they are +present can be more diligent than I, who in this country have been +brought to the pass of eating ten or twelve dishes at every meal, and +sitting at table three hours at a time twice a day,[429-1] for the sake +of your Excellency, to whom I humbly commend myself. + +Your Excellency's +Very humble servant, +RAIMONDO. + +London, Dec. 18, 1497. + + +DESPATCH TO FERDINAND AND ISABELLA FROM PEDRO DE AYALA JUNIOR AMBASSADOR + AT THE COURT OF ENGLAND, JULY 25, 1498[429-2] + +I think your Majesties have already heard that the King of England has +equipped a fleet in order to discover certain islands and mainland which +he was informed some people from Bristol, who manned a few ships[430-1] +for the same purpose last year, had found. I have seen the map which the +discoverer has made, who is another Genoese, like Colon [and?][430-2] who +has been in Seville and in Lisbon, asking assistance for this discovery. +The people of Bristol have, for the last seven years, sent out every year +two, three, or four light ships (_caravelas_), in search of the island of +Brazil and the seven cities,[430-3] according to the fancy of this +Genoese. The King determined to send out [ships], because, the year +before, they brought certain news that they had found land. The fleet +consisted of five vessels, which carried provisions for one year. It is +said that one of them, in which another Fai [Friar?] Buil[430-4] went, +has returned to Ireland in great distress, the ship being much damaged. +The Genoese continued his voyage. I, having seen the route which they +took, and the distance they sailed, find that what they have found, or +what they are in search of, is what your Highnesses already possess since +it is, in fine, what fell to your Highnesses by the treaty with +Portugal.[430-5] It is expected that they will be back in the month of +September. I inform your Highnesses in regard to it. The king of England +has often spoken to me on this subject. He hoped to derive great +advantage from it. I think it is not further distant than four hundred +leagues. I told him that, in my opinion, the land was already in the +possession of your Majesties; but, though I gave him my reasons, he did +not like it. Because I believe that your Highnesses will presently +receive information in regard to all this matter, and the chart or map +which this man has made, I do not now send it; it is here and it, +according to my opinion, is false, in order to make it appear that they +are not the said islands. + +FOOTNOTES: + +[423-1] This letter was received in Venice on September 23, 1497, and a +copy of it was incorporated by Marino Sanuto in his diary. It was first +brought to light by Rawdon Brown in his _Ragguagli sulla Vita e sulle +Opere di Marin Sanuto_, etc. (Venezia, 1837). It was published in English +in a generally accessible form in 1864 in the _Calendar of State Papers_, +_Venetian Series_, I. 262, edited by Rawdon Brown. The translation here +given is a revision of Brown's version. Another translation is printed in +Markham, _The Journal of Columbus_ (London, 1893). + +[423-2] This reference to the Grand Cham probably indicates familiarity +with Columbus's views of what he had discovered as expressed in his +letters to Santangel and to Sanchez; see above, p. 268. + +The landfall of John Cabot has been the subject of prolonged discussion. +Labrador, Newfoundland, and Cape Breton are the principal places +advocated. Of late years, owing to the vigorous and learned arguments of +Dr. S.E. Dawson there has been an increasing disposition to accept Cape +Breton on Cape Breton Island as the most probable location. See Winship, +_Cabot Bibliography_, for the literature. + +[423-3] The words "to starboard" have been inserted at this point in all +English translations. Biggar has pointed out that the words _al dreto_ so +translated are Venetian dialect for _addietro_, which is an alternate +form for the more common _indietro_, back. The earlier translators +thought _al dreto_ equivalent to _al dritto_, on the right. _Al tornar al +dreto_ means simply "in going back." + +[424-1] "August 10, 1497: To hym that founde the New Isle, 10£." British +Museum, Add. MSS. No. 7099, 12 Henry VII., fol. 41. From Weare, _Cabot's +Discovery of North America_, 124. + +[424-2] So in Sanuto's text. This form indicates perhaps that Pasqualigo +had only heard the name and not seen it written. + +[424-3] This letter was found in the archives of the Sforza family in +Milan. The manuscript is apparently no longer extant. There are two +somewhat divergent texts. The one translated here is the one sent by +Rawdon Brown to the Public Record Office in London. Both are printed in +Weare, _Cabot's Discovery_, pp. 142-143. The translation given here is by +Rawdon Brown as printed in the _Calendar of State Papers, Venetian +Series_, I. 259-260. + +[425-1] The Seven Cities was a legendary island in the Atlantic. They are +all placed and named on the legendary island of Antilia on the map of +Grazioso Benincasa in 1482. See E.G. Bourne, _Spain in America_, pp. 6 +and 7, and Kretschmer, _Die Entdeckung Amerikas_, Atlas, plate 4. +Columbus reported in Portugal that he had discovered Antilia (see p. 225, +note 1); hence the deduction either of John Cabot or of Raimondo that the +region explored by Cabot, being far to the west in the ocean, was the +same as that visited by Columbus. _Cf._ also art. "Brazil, Island of," +_Encyclopaedia Britannica_. + +[425-2] This letter is preserved in the Archivio di Stato in Milan. It +was first published in the _Annuario Scientifico del 1865_ (Milan, 1866). +It was first printed in English in Winsor, _Narrative and Critical +History of America_, III. 54-55 (Boston, 1884), in the chapter by Charles +Deane, entitled "The Voyages of the Cabots." This translation was revised +by Professor B.H. Nash of Harvard University and is given here with only +one or two slight changes. + +[425-3] In this passage Cabot's immediate impulse is attributed to the +voyages of Columbus and their results. + +[426-1] No satisfactory explanation of this can be given. Bellemo, in the +_Raccolta Colombiana_, pt. III., vol. I., p. 197, interprets this +sentence to mean that Cabot showed on the globe the place he had reached +on the voyage and then to that statement the remark is added, referring +to earlier journeys, "and going toward the east he has passed +considerably beyond the land of the Tanais." Tanais is the Latin name for +the Don, and at the mouth of the Don was the important Venetian trading +station of La Tana. _Cf._ Biggar, _Voyages of the Cabots and +Corte-Reals_, pp. 33-34, note. Biggar dissents from this interpretation. +I would offer the conjecture that "the land of the Tanais" stands for the +land of Tana. In Marco Polo the kingdom of Tana, on the western side of +India, is described as powerful and having an extensive commerce. See +Marco Polo, pt. III., ch. XXX. Raimondo, if unfamiliar with Marco Polo, +would understand La Tana by Tana and then naturally assume that "the +country of Tana" was a slip for "country of the Tanais." Cabot on the +other hand might have heard of Tana when in Mecca without getting any +very definite idea of its location except that it was far to the East in +India. The phrase "toward the East," like the one earlier in the letter +"toward the Oriental regions," is used of the ultimate destination, not +the direction, and of the destination as a known spot always thought of +in Europe as "the East." + +[426-2] _El brasilio_ for _el legno brasilio_. Brazil wood was an East +Indian red wood imported into Europe. It is the _Caesalpina sappan_. Its +bright color led to its being compared to glowing coals, _brazia_, +_brascia_, etc., Eng. brazier, and then to its being called, as it were, +"glowing coals wood," _lignum brasile_, _lignum brasilium_, etc., and in +Italian most commonly _brasile_ and _verzino_, a popular corruption. +Heyd, _Histoire du Commerce du Levant au Moyen-Age_, II. 587. On the +transference of the name of this wood to a mythical island in the +Atlantic and then, after the discoveries, to the present country of +Brazil which produced dye-woods similar to _Brasilio_, see Yule's art. +"Brazil, Island of," _Encyclopaedia Britannica_, and Winsor, _Narrative +and Critical History_, I. 49-51. + +[427-1] _Stochfissi._ The English word "stockfish" Italianized. Of the +English fish trade with Iceland, Biggar gives a full account, _Voyages of +the Cabots_, pp. 53-62, making frequent citations from G.W. Dasent, +_Icelandic Annals_, IV. 427-437. He quotes also a passage from the +_Libell of English Policy_, 1436, beginning: + +"Of Yseland to wryte is lytille nede Save of stokfische;" etc. + + + +[427-2] _El Levante_, here again as a known place, oriented from Europe. +His destination, not the direction of his route. + +[427-3] In Cabot's mind the Cipango of Marco Polo is confused with the +Spice Islands. Marco Polo says nothing of the production of spices in his +account of Cipango. The confusion is probably to be traced to Columbus's +reports that he had discovered Cipango and that the islands he had +discovered produced spices. + +[427-4] From 1425 Jiddah on the east shore of the Red Sea rapidly +displaced Aden as an emporium of the spice trade where the cargoes were +transshipped from Indian to Egyptian vessels. Jiddah is the port of entry +for Mecca, distant about forty-five miles, and Mecca became a great spice +market. See Heyd, _Histoire du Commerce du Levant au Moyen-Age_, II. 445 +_et seqq._, and Biggar, _Voyages of the Cabots and Corte-Reals_, pp. +31-36. Biggar quotes interesting passages on the Mecca trade from _The +Travels of Ludovico di Varthema_, Hakluyt Society (London, 1863). + +[428-1] _I.e._, a place far enough east from Arabia to be thought of as +west from Europe. After making all due allowances one may be excused for +feeling some misgiving whether John Cabot actually ever was in Mecca. +While some of the spices and eastern commodities were brought overland by +caravan from Ormuz or Bassora, the greater part came by water to Jiddah. +At Jiddah he could hardly have failed to get fairly accurate information +as to where the spices came from. That one who had seen that great +commerce should have remained so much in the dark as to conclude that +spices came from northeastern Asia is strange enough. + +[428-2] In imitation of Columbus. + +[429-1] English social joys in the fifteenth century did not appeal to +the more refined Italians. An interesting parallel to this comment of +Raimondo de Soncino is to be found in Vespasiano's life of Poggio. "Pope +Martin sent him with letters to England. He strongly condemned their +life, consuming the time in eating and drinking. He was used to say in +pleasantry that oftentimes being invited by those prelates or English +gentlemen to dinner or to supper and staying four hours at the table he +must needs rise from the table many times to wash his eyes with cold +water so as not to fall asleep." Vespasiano da Bisticci, _Vite di Uomini +Illustri del Secolo XV._ (Florence, 1859), p. 420. + +[429-2] The original is in the archives at Simancas partly in cipher. It +was discovered and deciphered by Bergenroth and published in the +_Calendar of State Papers, Spanish Series_, I., pp. 176-177. The Spanish +text was published by Harrisse, _Jean et Sébastien Cabot_, pp. 329-330, +and in Weare, _Cabot's Discovery_, pp. 160-161. Bergenroth's translation +is given here, carefully revised. The contents of this letter were +briefly summarized in a despatch to the Catholic sovereigns by Dr. +Puebla, their senior ambassador, which was transmitted at or about the +same time with that of Ayala. The Puebla despatch, which contains nothing +not in the Ayala despatch, can be seen in Weare, p. 159. + +[430-1] In this Ayala would seem to have been misinformed. _Cf._ pp. 423, +425. + +[430-2] The "and" is not in the original, but is supplied by all the +editors. It is not absolutely certain that it belongs there. If it does, +the passage implies that Cabot had recently been in Seville and Lisbon to +enlist interest in his second voyage. + +[430-3] This information is not elsewhere confirmed. On Brazil and the +Seven Cities, see p. 426, note 2, and p. 425, note 1. + +[430-4] One Friar Buil went with Columbus on his second voyage. + +[430-5] The treaty of Tordesillas, June 7, 1494; see p. 323, note 3. + + + + +INDEX + + +Aburema, 394 n. + +Acúl, Bay of, 188 n., 197, 198 n. + +Adam of Bremen, and reliability of Vinland tradition, 13; + _Descriptio Insularum Aquilonis_, extract, 67-68. + +Aden, decline of spice trade, 427 n. + +Admiral, office of, 78 n., 79. + +Affonso, Rodrigo, and Columbus, 324. + +Agesinba, identified by Columbus with Cape of Good Hope, 397 n. + +Aguado, Juan, 377, 379. + +Aguja, Point of, 344, 345. + +Alcaçovas, Treaty of, 254 n. + +Alexander VI., pope, letter concerning projected voyage of newly +appointed Bishop of Gardar, 73-74. + +Almirante Bay, 393 n. + +Alonso, Roderigo, _see_ Affonso, Rodrigo. + +"Alto de Juan Dañue," 133 n. + +Alto Velo, mountain, 365. + +Alto y Bajo, Cabo, 188. + +America and Vinland voyages, 7-13; + and Asia, 126, 131, 134, 135, 136, 145, 157, 174, 268; + mainland discovered by John Cabot, 423; + mainland discovered by Columbus, 333. + +Amianus, _see_ Arrianus. + +Amiga, La, island, 198, 199, 208. + +Angel, Cabo del, 220. + +Antilia, legendary island, 101 n., 425 n. + +Arana, Diego de, 183 n.; + sent ashore, 200; + remains in Española, 209-210; + mentioned, 321. + +Arana, Pedro de, despatched to Española, 321. + +Arena, Las Islas de, 130. + +Arenal, Punta del, 334. + +Arnarstapi, Gudrid in, 18. + +Arnlaug, settles in Greenland, 47. + +Arnold, Bishop of Greenland, 69 n. + +Arrianus, history of India, 329 n. + +Asia, Columbus believes Cuba to be part of, 396 n.; + and John Cabot's landfall, 425. + +Aslak of Langadal, 16. + +Asuncion, Isla de la, 356. + +Aud the Wealthy, 14; + in Iceland, 15. + +Avalldamon, reported to be a king of the Skrellings, 41. + +Ayala, Pedro de, despatch to Ferdinand and Isabella, 429-430. + +Ayay, _see_ Guadeloupe. + +Azores, reports of land to westward, 93; + mentioned, 236, 237, 329; + Columbus at, 243-249; + and Demarcation Line, 323, 326, 416. + +Azua, Columbus in, 391 n. + +Azules, Punta de los, 166 n. + + +Babeque, Columbus sails towards, 143, 147; + reports of gold, 181, 184, 214-215; + sighted, 150-151; + Martin Alonso Pinzon seeks, 152, 214-215; + Columbus seeks, 167, 179; + described by Indians, 174. + +Babueca, island, 346. + +Bafan, 136. + +Ballena, Gulf of, 334, 339, 345, 349, 355. + +Baneque, _see_ Babeque. + +Banes, Puerto de, 132 n. + +Baracoa, Puerto de, 131 n.-133 n.; + Columbus enters, 158 n.-159; + inland explorations, 161-162; + Columbus sets up cross, 162; + Columbus sails from, 166. + +Bardsen, Ivar, account of Greenland, 11, 71 n. + +Bassora, spice caravans, 428 n. + +Bastidas, Rodrigo de, voyage, 416 n. + +Bastimentos, harbor of, Columbus in, 398-399. + +Becerro, Cabo del, 213. + +Behechio, an Indian ruler, 345. + +Belem, river, 401 n.; + settlement near, 403 n. + +Belprado, Cape, 220. + +Belpuerto, 394 n., 399 n., 405. + +Beothuk Indians, 41 n. + +Biarney, 32. + +Biarni, Grimolf's son, 30; + accompanies expedition to Vinland, 31-32, 35; + fate, 39, 42-43. + +Biarni Herjulfson, and discovery of America, 8-9, 12; + voyage, 48-50. + +Blacksark, discovered, 17, 46. + +Boavista, Columbus at, 324-325. + +Bobadilla, Francisco de, 375; + governor, 376; + and Columbus, 376-383, 417 n.; + proclaims immunities, 376; + takes Columbus prisoner, 380; + distributes gold, 380; + appropriates Columbus's house, 383. + +Bohio, 126, 146, 147; + inhabitants, 153, 156, 167; + sighted, 167; + size, 174; + reports of gold, 202; + Columbus in, 295. + +Boma, Rio, 166 n. + +Boto, Cape, 340, 353, 354. + +Brand of Alptafirth, sons of, 45. + +Brand, Bishop, the Elder, and chronology of Vinland voyages, 6-7, 43 n. + +Brattahlid, Eric in, 23, 27, 46, 48, 50; + Biarni and Thorfinn Karlsefni in, 30-31; + Leif arrives, 54; + Gudrid comes to, 59. + +Brazil, discovery, 326 n. + +Brazil, mythical island, 426 n., 430. + +Brazil, port of, Española, 407. + +Breidabolstad, 16. + +Breidafirth, Eric goes to, 17, 45, 46. + +Bristol, and expedition of John Cabot, 423, 425, 428, 430; + and search for the Seven Cities, 430. + +Brokey, Eric takes possession, 16. + +Buen Tiempo, Cabo del, 220. + +Buil, Friar, 430. + +Burenquen, 294-295. + _See also_ Porto Rico. + + +Cabañas, Puerto de las, 353. + +Cabañas, Punta de, 132 n. + +Cabo Rico, 356. + +Cabo Santo, 211, 212. + +Cabot, John, sources of information, 421-422; + letter of Lorenzo Pasqualigo, 423-424; + voyage of 1497, 423-424; + landfall, 423 n., 426; + reception, 424, 428; + new voyage proposed, 428; + and title admiral, 428; + map, 426, 430. + +Cabot, Sebastian, and father's voyages, 421. + +Cabra, 213 n., 296 n. + +Cabral, route of, 326 n. + +Cabron, Cabo, 221 n. + +Cadiz, and proposed inspection of ships from Indies, 277; + Columbus's departure, 283. + +Caithness, conquered by Thorstein the Red and Earl Sigurd the Mighty, 14. + +Cambodia, supposed connection of Costa Rica and Panama with, 397 n. + +Campana, Cabo de, Columbus approaches, 156-158. + +Canaries, Columbus at, 92-94, 283-284, 320-323; + French ship at, 320; + pearls, 364. + +Caonabó, King, and fate of first settlement in Española, 300, 303, 304, +307; + mentioned, 312. + +Cape Breton Island, and Karlsefni's voyages, 40 n.; + and landfall of John Cabot, 423 n. + +Cape Verde Islands, 103; + and Hesperides, 322; + and Demarcation Line, 323, 326, 416; + Columbus at, 324-326. + +Carabelas grandes, Boca de, 134 n. + +Caracol, Bay of, Columbus anchors in, 299 n. + +Caracol, El, island, 340, 353. + +Carambaru, 393, 394 n. + +Cariay, 393; + Indians of, 409. + +Carib, island of, 223, 225, 226, 229, 230. + _See also_ Porto Rico. + +Caribata, Cabo de, 188. + +Caribata, Monte, described, 188; + mentioned, 196, 199. + +Caribs, 203; + houses, 286, 289; + reported cannibalism, 286, 288-290; + industry, 289; + appearance, 289, 293; + treatment of captives, 290-291; + several captured, 292, 293; + fight with Spaniards, 293; + and natives of Porto Rico, 294; + mentioned, 322, 330, 348, 359. + +Caritaba, province of, reports of gold, 202. + +Carvajal, Alonso Sanchez de, despatched to Española, 321. + +Cascaes, Columbus at, 251. + +Cassiterides, Columbus identifies with Azores, 329. + +Castañeda, Juan de, attempt to seize Columbus, 245-248. + +Cateva, 394 n. + +Cathay, Columbus's desire to reach, 134; + supposed proximity to Cuba, 405; + emperor's embassy to Rome, 414. + +Catholicism, in Greenland, 70-74; + Columbus urges its establishment in Española, 274-275, 361. + +Catiba, Columbus in, 394 n. + +Catigara, location, 396-397. + +Caxinas, Point, named, 391 n.; + mentioned, 392 n. + +Caymanos Chicos, islands, sighted, 405 n. + +Cayre, 293. _See also_ Dominica. + +Central America, exploration of coast, 387. + +Cerabora, _see_ Carambaru. + +Ceyre, 290. _See also_ Dominica. + +Chanca, Dr., letter to Cabildo of Seville, 280-313. + +China, Columbus's belief that he had reached, 397 n. + +Christianity, introduced into Greenland, 23-26; + in Greenland, 29, 56, 57, 71-74; + in Iceland, 46; + and New World, 352. + +Chuzona chica, Rio, 219 n. + +Ciamba, province of, 393. + +Cibao, 197; + reports of gold, 202; + mentioned, 206; + explored, 312-313; + mines, 338. + +Ciguare, described by natives, 394-395. + +Cinquin, Cabo de, 168; + Columbus approaches, 171, 174. + +Cipango, 101 n.; + Columbus desires to find, 113; + Cuba mistaken for, 126, 127, 128, 130; + mentioned, 197, 202, 212. + +Clato, Prior of, entertains Columbus, 254. + +Cobrava, 394 n. + +Coche, 357. + +Cochin-China, Costa Rica and Panama believed to be southern extension of, +397 n. + +Colon, _see_ Columbus. + +Colonization, plan of Columbus for Española, 273-277. + +Columbo, Juan Antonio, despatched to Española, 321. + +Columbus, Bartholomew, in Española, 321; + mentioned, 345; + projected exploring expedition, 360; + meets admiral, 366; + in Paragua, 375; + taken prisoner, 380; + map, 397 n. + +Columbus, Christopher, contract, 77-80; + patent, 81-84; + first voyage, 89-258; + departure, 90; + at Canaries, 92-94; + signs of land, 96-100; + landfall, 108-109; + takes possession, 110; + desire to reach Cipango, 113; + at Santa Maria de la Concepcion, 115; + at Fernandina, 120; + believes Cuba to be Cipango, 126; + discovers Cuba, 130; + along coast, 144-168; + Martin Alonso Pinzon deserts, 152; + at Española, 169-228; + reappearance of Pinzon, 214; + and disaffection of Pinzons, 216-219; + homeward voyage, 228-258; + storm, 241; + at Azores, 244-249; + puts in at Portugal, 251-256; + reception by King of Portugal, 251-256; + arrival, 257; + letter to Santangel, 263-272; + and Cuba, 263; + and Española, 264; + duration of first voyage, 272; + plan for colonization and commerce of Española, 273-277; + second voyage, 278-313; + sources of information, 281-282; + at Canaries, 283-284; + at Dominica, 284-285; + at Guadeloupe, 286-291; + at Porto Rico, 294-295; + at Española, 295-313; + finds settlement destroyed, 300; + visits Cacique, 304; + building of city, 308; + sickness, 309, 312; + third voyage, 314-366; + sources of information, 317-318; + preparations, 319; + reception in Madeira, 320; + at Canaries, 320; + at Cape Verde Islands, 324-326; + sends ships ahead to Española, 320-323; + instructions concerning treatment of Indians, 322; + proposed route, 322, 326, 327; + and Demarcation Line, 326, 382; + signs of land, 329-330; + Trinidad sighted, 331; + mainland of South America discovered, 333; + at Trinidad, 335-339; + along coast, 331-351, 353-358, 362; + and a New World, 352, 355, 356; + in Boca del Drago, 354; + near Margarita, 356-357, 362; + anxiety about Española, 359-360; + reasons for hastening to Española, 359-362; + and Earthly Paradise, 364-365; + arrival in Española, 365, 366; + misfortunes, 371; + aid of Isabella, 371-372; + in disfavor, 372, 375, 378-379; + revolt in Española, 374; + and Bobadilla, 376-383; + letter on fourth voyage, significance, 387; + fourth voyage, 389-418; + outward voyage, 389; + arrival at Española, 389; + forbidden to land, 390; + storm, 390-392; + at Queen's Garden, 391; + along coast of Central America, 391-403, 405; + search for strait, 391 n.; + illness, 392-393, 399; + geographical conceptions, 396-398; + and Earthly Paradise, 398; + illness, 399; + tempest, 399-400; + sends out exploring party, 401; + trouble with Indians, 402-403; + establishes settlement, 402; + reaches Cuba, 406; + in Jamaica, 406; + one ship puts into a port of Española, 407; + urges colonization of Veragua, 411-413; + deplores condition of Spanish settlements, 415; + complains of ill-treatment, 416-418. + +Columbus, Diego, brother of Columbus, in Española, 321; + taken prisoner, 380. + +Columbus, Diego, son of Columbus, page to Prince John, 379; + mentioned, 393. + +Columbus, Ferdinand, 241 n., 321; + page in Queen's household, 379; + account of fourth voyage, 318, 388, 392 n. + +Commerce, plan of Columbus for Española, 273-277; + value of Spanish colonies predicted, 415. + +Concepcion, La, island, 356. + +Concepcion, Puerto de la, Columbus in, 172-179. + +Conchas, Cabo de, 356. + +Coroay, 206. + +Cosa, Juan de la, master of _Santa María_, 200; + mentioned, 204. + +Costa Rica, supposed connection with Cambodia, 397 n. + +Crooked Island, 123. + +Cuba, mistaken for Cipango, 126-130; + described by Indians, 130-136; + discovered, 136; + mistaken for mainland of Asia, 134, 263, 323, 405, 406; + explorations, 136-148; + Columbus returns, 153; + Columbus leaves, 167; + mentioned, 176, 263-264, 267, 364, 391 n.; + Columbus lands on fourth voyage, 405. + +Cuba, Cabo de, 146, 147. + +Cubagua, reports of pearls, 357. + +Cubiga, 394 n. + + +Dama, Alvaro, 253. + +Darien, Gulf of, 405 n. + +Davis, John, voyage to Greenland, 74 n. + +Delfin, El, 340, 353. + +Demarcation Line, and Columbus, 326; + Papal, 416; + agreement between Spain and Portugal, 416. + +Diaz, Bartolomé, 252, 397 n. + +Dimunarvag, 16. + +Dögurdar River, country between, and Skraumuhlaups River, occupied by +Aud, 15. + +Dominica, discovered, 285; + described 285; + mentioned, 290, 321; + report of gold, 293; + Columbus heads for, 330. + +Drago, Boca del, named, 340; + Columbus's ships in peril in, 354-355. + +Drangar, 16, 45. + +Drepstokk, Heriulf at, 47. + +Drontheim, Leif arrives in, 47. + +Drontheim, Archbishop of, papal letter to, 70 n.; + jurisdiction, 71. + +Drontheim, Archbishop Valkendorf of, 74 n. + +Dublin, captured by King Olaf, 14. + +Duelling-Hrafn, killed by Eric the Red, 16, 45. + + +Earthly Paradise, Columbus and, 364-365. + +Einar of Laugarbrekka, 18. + +Einar, of Einarsfirth, settles in Greenland, 47. + +Einar, son of Thorgeir, 18; + sues for Gudrid's hand, 19. + +Elefante, Cabo del, 168, 171. + +Enamorado, Cabo del, 221. + +Engaño, Cabo del, 229 n., 295 n., 322. + +Enriquez, Beatrix, 321. + +Eric, Earl, visited by Biarni Herjulfson, 150. + +Eric the Red, saga of, 3-5, 14-43; + goes to Iceland, 14, 45; + in Drangar and Haukadal, 15-16, 45; + voyage, 16-17, 45-46; + discovers Greenland, 16, 17, 46; + return to Iceland, 17, 46; + fight with Thorgest, 17; + names and colonizes Greenland, 17, 46; + mentioned, 20; + welcomes Thorbiorn to Eastern Settlement, 23; + unwilling to embrace Christianity, 26; + and expedition to land discovered by Leif, 26-27, 50; + receives Gudrid, 29; + welcomes Biarni and Thorfinn Karlsefni, 30, 42; + mentioned, 31, 33, 56; + at Brattahlid, 48; + death, 54. + +Eric Gnupson, Bishop of Greenland, expedition, 69. + +Eric Uppsi, _see_ Eric Gnupson. + +Ericsey, Eric the Red at, 17, 46. + +Ericsfirth, Eric the Red at, 17, 46; + mentioned, 26, 27, 29, 30, 54, 55, 59, 64. + +Ericsholms, Eric in, 17. + +Ericsstad, Eric at, 16. + +Ericsstadir, Eric the Red in, 15, 45. + +Ericsvag, 16, 45. + +Escocesa, Bahia, 220 n. + +Escobedo, Rodrigo de, 110, 184; + remains in Española, 209, 210. + +Escudo, Puerto, 168 n., 171 n. + +Eskimos, and Vinland, 10, 41 n.; + and Greenlanders, 71 n.-72 n. + +Española discovered, 168; + named, 173, 264; + natives, 175-177, 180-187, 190-196, 198, 201-203, 205-210, 222-225, + 265-269, 297-307; + products, 177, 178; + climate, 178; + description, 181-182, 192-193, 264-268; + Columbus praises land and people, 198, 201, 202; + first settlement, 204, 206, 268; + reports of gold, 215; + coast explored, 215-228; + recommendations of Columbus for colonization and commerce, 273-277; + return of Columbus, 295; + scenery, 296; + fate of first settlement, 300-304; + building of city Isabella, 308; + products, 310-312; + ships despatched to, 320-323; + supplies for, 348-350, 353; + revolts, 360, 366, 373; + colonists, 373, 374-377; + arrival of Bobadilla, 375-378; + Columbus taken prisoner, 380; + mining, 382; + Columbus forbidden to land, 390; + and Columbus's fourth voyage, 406-408; + condition, 415. + +Estrella, Cabo de la, 168, 171. + +Exploring expeditions, independent, authorized by Ferdinand and Isabella, +360. + +Eyiulf of Sviney, 16, 45. + +Eyiulf the Foul, 15, 16, 45. + +Eyrar, Biarni arrives at, 48. + +Eyxney, 16, 45. + + +Fava, 134. + +Fayal, mentioned, 235. + +Ferdinand and Isabella, contract with Columbus, 77-80; + and route to Indies, 78; + patent to Columbus, 81-84; + war with Moors, 89; + and Demarcation Line, 323, 326; + and Columbus, 331; + authorize independent exploring expeditions, 360; + and Hojeda, 373; + and Bobadilla, 376; + and Columbus's fourth voyage, 389-418. + +Fernandina, discovered, 116-117, 263; + Columbus approaches, 118; + natives, 119; + described, 119; + coast explored, 120-122; + sighted, 129. + +Ferro, island of, 93, 104, 112, 137, 237, 284, 323. + +Finnbogi, voyage to Wineland, 62, 63; + death, 64. + +Flat Island Book, 3; + composition, 4; + "The Vinland History," and collateral sources, 8-9; + reliability of "Vinland History" questioned, 8-10, 12. + +Flechas, Golfo de las, 228. + +Flechas, Puerto de las, Columbus in, 222-228. + +Flores, island, 235-237. + +Fortunate Isles, and first meridian of Marinus, 396 n. + +Fraile, Punta del, 166 n. + +Frances, Cabo, 220. + +Frances, Puerto, 199 n. + +Frederick, Bishop, in Iceland, 46. + +Freydis, 32; + drives off Skrellings, 38; + fate, 39; + marriage, 48; + voyage to Vinland, 62-64; + and death of Helgi and Finnbogi, 63-64; + return, 64-65. + +Froda-wonder, 24. + +Fuma, 206. + +Funchal, Columbus in, 320. + +Furdustrandir, _see_ Wonder-strands. + + +Galeota, Cape, Columbus sees, 332 n. + +Galera, Cabo de la, 332. + +_Gallega, La_, ship of Columbus on fourth voyage, 390. + +Gama, Vasco da, 323 n.; + in south Atlantic, 323 n., 326 n. + +Gard, overseer at Lysufirth, death, 27, 29. + +Gardar, Freydis at, 48; + Freydis leaves, 62; + bishopric of, in fifteenth century, 70-74. + +Gatos, Puerto de, 353. + +Geirstein, 16. + +Geography, Columbus's conceptions of world, 387, 396-398. + +Glaumbœiar-land, Thorfinn Karlsefni in, 65. + +Glaumbœr, church in, 66. + +Gomera, Columbus at, 93, 284, 320; + mentioned, 94. + +Gomera, Count of, _see_ Peraza, Guillen. + +Good Hope, Cape of, 397 n. + +Gordo, Puerto, 400. + +Gottskalk, Annals of, quoted, 69 n. + +Government of Española, Columbus's plan, 274; + Columbus's desire to be relieved, 375; + Bobadilla's arrival, 375-376; + immunities proclaimed, 376-378. + +Gracia, Isla de, 338-341. + +Gracia, Rio de, 219. + +Gracias á Dios, Cape, 391, 392 n. + +Gran Can, 89; + embassy to Rome, 89; + and Columbus's belief that he has reached Asia, 126, 131, 134, 135, + 136, 145, 157, 174, 268; + and Cabot's landfall, 423. + +Gran Canaria, Columbus at, 92, 283. + +Granja, Puerto de la, 187 n. + +Greenland, Norse colonists, 10; + discovery, 17; + explored, 17; + named, 17; + colonization, 17; + Thorbiorn in Western Settlement, 20-23; + introduction of Christianity, 23-26; + sickness in Western Settlement, 27-29, 57-59; + Biarni and Thorfinn Karlsefni in, 30-32, 59; + return of Thorfinn Karlsefni, 62; + Helgi and Finnbogi in, 62; + mentioned, 67 n.; + bishopric of Gardar, 71-74; + conditions in colony, 71-74. + +Grimhild, death and burial, 57, 58. + +Guacamari, _see_ Guacanagarí. + +Guacanagarí, Indian cacique, 193 n., 207; + Columbus takes leave of, 209-210; + mentioned, 298-300, 303, 361; + suspected of treachery, 301, 305-307; + receives Columbus, 304-305. + +Guadalquivir River, 180. + +Guadeloupe, 225 n., 290 n.; + Columbus at, 286; + mentioned, 343; + natives report mainland to south, 359. + +Guaigo, 394 n. + +Guanahani, discovered, 110, 263; + Columbus takes possession of, 110; + natives, 111-113; + mentioned, 131, 134, 151. + +Guanaja, Columbus at, 391 n., 392 n. + +Guarico, 188 n., 196 n. + +Guarionex, 206. + +Gudrid, ancestry, 15 n., 18; + in Arnarstapi, 18; + return to Laugarbrekka, 19; + and prophecy of Thorbiorg, 22-23; + marries Thorstein Ericson, 27, 56; + in Western Settlement, Greenland, 27-29, 57-59; + goes to Eastern Settlement, 29, 59; + marries Thorfinn Karlsefni, 31, 59; + goes to Iceland, 43; + descendants, 43-44, 66; + accompanies Thorfinn Karlsefni to Vinland, 60-61; + in Iceland, 66. + +Guevara, Ferdinand de, in Xaragua, 374. + +Guiga, 399 n. + +Guinea, 145; + and reported trade of canoes with land to west, 326; + navigation of Portuguese, 332; + exploration, 351-352. + +Guisay, _see_ Quinsay. + +Gunnbiorn, son of Ulf the Crow, voyage, 16, 46. + +Gunnbiorns-skerries, discovered, 16, 46. + +Gutierrez, Pedro, 109; + sent ashore, 200; + remains in Española, 209-210. + + +Haekia, in Vinland, 33. + +Hafgrim, settles in Greenland, 47. + +Haki, in Vinland, 33. + +Halldis, 18; + death, 20; + mentioned, 22. + +Hallveig, daughter of Einar, 18. + +Hanno, voyage, 328. + +Harold, the Stern-ruler, King of Norway, voyage, 68. + +Haukadal, Eric the Red in, 15; + Eric banished, 16, 45. + +Hauk Erlendsson, book, 3-5; + reliability, 8. + +Hayti, 168 n., 295, 391 n. + +Hebrides, Aud and Thorstein go to, 14; + Leif in, 24-25. + +Helgi, voyage to Wineland, 62-63; + death, 64. + +Helgi Thorbrandsson, settles in Greenland, 47. + +Helluland, identification, 10; + named, 51; + explored, 32. + +Henry VII., of England, reception of John Cabot, 424; + plan of second voyage, 425, 428; + preparations for second voyage, 429. + +Heriulf, accompanies Eric the Red to Greenland, 46-47; + at Heriulfsness, 48-49. + +Heriulfsness, Thorbiorn arrives in, 20; + Heriulf at, 46, 48-49. + +Hermoso, Cabo, 123, 124. + +Hesperides, and Cape Verde Islands, 322 n. + +Hierro, island, _see_ Ferro. + +Hierro, Punta del, 220. + +Hojeda, Alonso de, 312 n.; + explores Cibao, 313 n.; + voyage, 360, 416 n.; + arrival in Española, 373; + mentioned, 376. + +Holar, Bishop of, ordered to inquire into affairs of Gardar bishopric, +73. + +Holmar, Eric winters at, 46. + +Holmlatr, Eric spends winter in, 17. + +Hop, Karlsefni at, 36, 39, 40-41. + +Horn-Strands, 45. + +Hrafn, settles in Greenland, 47. + +Hrafnsfirth, Eric enters, 17, 46. + +Hrafnsgnipa, 46. + +Huego, reports of land to the southwest, 326. + +Hvamm, Aud in, 15. + +Hvarfsgnipa, 17. + +Hvitramanna-land, 42. + + +Ibarro, Bernaldo de, quoted, 336. + +Iceland, saga-telling period, 7; + Eric and Thorvald in, 15, 45; + mentioned, 17, 18; + the Froda-wonder, 24; + Thorfinn Karlsefni sails to, 43, 65; + Biarni Herjulfson in, 48; + extracts from _Annales regii_, 69; + English fish trade, 427. + +Iguana Grande, island, 215 n. + +Illugi, son of Aslak, 16. + +Indians, trade with Columbus, 111-113, 119, 121, 127, 135, 142, 165, +194-195; + enslaved, 112, 144, 145, 267, 287, 292, 293, 343-344; + Columbus's policy towards, 110, 116-118, 126, 192, 194, 195, 322; + named, 110; + and tobacco-smoking, 141; + signal fires, 180, 224; + fight with Spaniards, 224, 292-293; + weapons, 307; + of Guanahani, 110-112; + of Santa Maria de la Concepcion, 115-116; + of Fernandina, 119-122; + of Cuba, 139-142; + of Española, 175-177, 180-187, 190-196, 198, 201-203, 205-210, 222-225, + 265-269, 297-307; + at Trinidad, 335-336; + of mainland of South America, 342-344, 347; + of Veragua, 402. + _See also_ Caribs and Mayas. + +Ingolf, colonist of Iceland, 17, 47. + +Innocent VIII., pope, elects Matthias Bishop of Gardar, 74. + +Ireland, Thorhall driven ashore on, 35. + +Ireland the Great, _see_ Hvitramanna-land. + +Isabelica, Punta, 217 n. + +Isabella, aids Columbus, 371-372; + reports of illness, 373. + _See also_ Ferdinand and Isabella. + +Isabella, in Española, preparations for city, 308; + Columbus's departure, 366; + mentioned, 321, 322. + +Isabella, island, discovered by Columbus, 123, 124, 263; + Columbus leaves 128; + mentioned, 151. + +Isleo, Cabo del, 127, 128. + + +Jacmel, 407 n. + +Jaederen, Thorvald and Eric the Red leave, 15, 45. + +Jamaica, 215, 338; + Columbus's shipwreck, 387; + Columbus bound for, 389; + Columbus reaches, 406. + +Jardines, described, 344; + natives, 345-346. + +Jerez, Rodrigo de, 136. + +Jerome, St., 414. + +Jews, expulsion from Spain, 90. + +Jiddah, spice trade, 427 n. + +Joachim, Abbot, prophecy, 413-414. + +John II., of Portugal, grant to Fernam Dominguez do Arco, 93 n.; + receives Columbus, 253-255; + and Demarcation Line, 323, 326. + +John, prince of Castile, 323, 369. + +Jon Thordsson, and Flat Island Book, 4. + +Juana, _see_ Cuba. + + +Karlsefni, _see_ Thorfinn Karlsefni. + +Keelness, 33, 35, 39, 55. + +Ketil, settles in Greenland, 46. + +Kialarnes, _see_ Keelness. + + +Labrador, and John Cabot's first voyage, 423 n. + +Lagartos, Rio de los, 400 n. + +Lanzada, Punta, 179. + +Lanzarote, 92. + +Lapa, Cape of, 340; + pearl fisheries near, 346; + Columbus near, 353, 354. + +La Vega, Columbus at, 375. + +Leif Ericson, and discovery of America, 8, 11; + date of voyage, 12, 43 n.; + in Norway, 24-25, 47; + discovery, 25, 50-54; + introduces Christianity in Greenland, 26; + mentioned, 33, 59, 62, 63; + displeasure at Freydis, 65. + +Leif's-booths in Vinland, Thorvald reaches, 54-55; + Thorfinn Karlsefni's arrival, 60. + +Leikskalar, Eric at, 16. + +Lepe, Diego de, voyage, 416 n. + +Levantados, Cayo de, 221 n. + +Lindo, Cabo, 166. + +Lisbon, Columbus driven into river by tempest, 251, 379; + John Cabot's presence in, alleged, 430. + +Llana, Punta, 349. + +Llandra, Columbus at, 256. + +Long Island, 117 n. + +Lucayos, discovered, 110. + +Luengo, Cabo, 356. + +Luna, Rio de la, 132. + +Lybia, voyage of Hanno from, 328. + +Lysufirth, 27, 57. + + +Macorix, 206. + +Macuris, Punta, 220 n. + +Madama Beata, island, named, 365. + +Madeira, 236, 243, 250; + Columbus at, 320. + +Magnus Thorhallsson, and Flat Island Book, 4. + +Mago, _see_ Mango. + +Maici, Punta de, 158 n. + +Maldonado, Melchior, explores Española, 302-303. + +Mango, Cuba mistaken for, 405, 408. + +Manzanillo, Bahia de, 212 n. + +Maravi, Port of, 158 n. + +Mares, Puerto de, advantages for settlement, 140; + Columbus leaves, 143. + +Mares, Rio de, Columbus in, 132, 133, 135, 144; + mentioned, 147, 160, 176. + +Margarita, discovered, 356; + Columbus leaves vicinity, 362-363. + +Margot, Puerto, 187 n., 188 n. + +Maria, Puerto, 168. + +_Marigalante_, ship, 284 n. + +Marigalante, island, 285. + +Marinus, conception of world, 396-397. + +Markland, identification, 10; + natives, 11; + expedition of Thorfinn Karlsefni, 32, 41; + named by Leif, 51; + mentioned, 69. + +Marmoro, 405 n. + +Marquez, Diego, 288. + +Martian, quoted, 67. + +Martinet, El, island, 356-357. + +Martinique, 225 n. + +Martyr, Peter, account of Columbus's fourth voyage, 388. + +Maternillo, Punta del, 135 n. + +Matinino, island, inhabitants, 223, 225, 270; + copper reported, 226; + Columbus desires to see, 228-229; + mentioned, 230. + +Matthias, elected Bishop of Gardar, 74. + +Mayas, 215 n.; + culture, 394 n.; + sculptures, 409-410; + animals, 410; + language, 411. + +Mayonic, 206. + +Mayreni, King, reported to have killed Spaniards, 300, 302, 303. + +Mayrones, Francis de, quoted, 359. + +Mecca, Cabot in, 426 n., 427; + spice trade of, 427 n. + +Micmac Indians, appearance, 36 n. + +Midiokul, 46. + +Mines, Española, 382; + of Spanish colonies, value predicted, 415. + +Missions, need in New World, 274, 361. + +Moa, Rio de, 154 n. + +Moa, Sierras de, 154 n. + +Mogens Heinesen, 74 n. + +Mona, island of, 322. + +Monte, Cabo del, 166. + +Monte Cristi, 212; + described, 213; + mentioned, 216, 218, 296; + harbor described, 298. + +Montserrat, 291 n. + +Moray, conquered by Thorstein the Red and Earl Sigurd the Mighty, 14. + +Mosquito, Bahia, 172 n. + +Mosquito Coast, Columbus on, 393 n. + +Mosquitos, Punto de, 405 n. + +Moya, Cayo de, 153. + +Mulas, Punta de, 132 n. + +Muxica, Adrian de, revolt, 374. + + +Navidad, fort built, 206; + Columbus leaves settlement, 209-211, 268-269, 271; + gold, 217; + anxiety of Columbus about, 224; + Columbus finds settlement destroyed, 298-304; + mentioned, 361. + +Navigation, between Spain and Española, recommendations of Columbus, + 276-277; + compass, 363 n.; + difficulties due to strong currents, 408-409. + +New Spain, discovery postponed by Roldan's revolt, 360. + +Nicholas V., letter to Bishops of Skalholt and Holar, 70-73. + +Nidaros, Leif reaches, 47. + +_Niña_, ship, 96, 97, 102; + crew report land, 106; + mentioned, 108, 116, 122, 139; + Indians escape from, 115-116, 150; + new fittings, 155; + Columbus on, 201. + +Niño, Pedro Alonso, 236. + +Nipe, 131 n. + +Niti, 309, 312; + reports of gold, 313. + +Nombre de Dios, 394 n., 399. + +Noroña, D. Martin de, 253; + escorts Columbus, 256. + +North America, voyages of Northmen, 25, 50-54, 47-49; 54-56, 31-42, + 59-62, 62-64, 67, 69; + Cabot's landfall, 422. + +Northmen in America, sources, 3-13; + identification of localities, 10; + dates, 12, 43 n. + +Norway, Eric the Red and Thorvald leave, 15, 45; + Leif in, 25, 47; + Thorfinn Karlsefni sails from, 59; + Thorfinn Karlsefni in, 65. + +Nova Scotia, and Northmen, 10; + Indians, 36 n.; + climate, 37 n.; + and voyage of Thorfinn Karlsefni, 40 n., 41 n. + +Nuestra Señora, Mar de, 148; + Columbus re-enters, 153; + mentioned, 160. + +Nuevitas del Principe, Puerto de las, 131 n., 132 n. + + +Odd, of Jorva, 16. + +Olaf the White, King, in Ireland, 14. + +Olaf Tryggvason, King of Norway, 24; + and Christianity in Greenland, 25-26, 71; + and Leif Ericson, 25, 33, 47. + +Orinoco, Columbus near mouth, 334 n. + +Orkneys, Aud the Wealthy sails to, 14. + +Orm of Arnarstapi, 18; + entertains Gudrid, 18-19; + starts with Thorbiorn to Greenland, 20; + death, 20. + +Oro, Rio del, 217, 218. + +Ovando, and Columbus, 390. + + +Padre y Hijo, Cabo de, 221. + +Palmas, Cabo de, 133. + +Palmista, Punta, 168 n. + +Panama, coast explored, 387, 394 n.; + supposed connection with Cambodia, 397 n. + +Paria, discovery, 339, 373; + described, 340, 341; + pearls, 346, 348, 373; + natives, 346-347; + Columbus near, 353, 354; + explored by Hojeda and Pinzon, 360 n.; + condition, 415. + +Paria, Gulf of, 337 n., 340 n., 350 n. + +Peraza, Doña Ines, 93. + +Peraza, Guillen, 93. + +Pérez, Alonso, sights land, 330. + +Perlas, Golpho de las, 350; + Columbus explores, 355, 356, 358. + +Pico, Cabo de, 156. + +Pierna, Punta, 178. + +_Pinta_, ship, rudder disabled, 92; + repaired, 92-93; + sails ahead of Admiral's ship, 97-98; + crew sights land, 108-109; + mentioned, 120, 122, 133, 138, 211; + leaves other ships, 152; + news, 205, 207; + reappearance, 214; + on coast of Española, 215, 219; + weakness of mast, 232; + leaves _Niña_, 238. + +Pinzon, Martin Alonso, at the Canaries, 92; + sails ahead of Columbus, 97-98; + and Columbus, 100-101; + claims to see land, 102; + advises course, 106, 120; + at Guanahani, 110; + mentioned, 120, 127, 134, 138, 211, 232; + leaves Admiral's fleet, 152; + rejoins _Niña_, 214; + on coast of Española, 215, 219; + Columbus disapproves of, 214, 216; + runs _Pinta_ ahead of _Niña_, 238. + +Pinzon, Vicente Yañez, 108 n.; + at Guanahani, 110; + at Española, 207; + disaffection, 216; + quoted, 235; + charts route, 237; + voyage, 360 n., 373, 416 n. + +Plata, Monte de, 220. + +Plata, Puerto de, 220 n., 296 n., 346. + +Playa, Punta de la, 333. + +Pliny, quoted, 324, 348, 353. + +Polo, Marco, 364, 393 n., 406 n., 426 n. + +Porras, Diego de, report of fourth voyage of Columbus, 388, 407 n. + +Port Clarence, Long Island, 120 n. + +Porto Rico, 223, 225; + reports of gold, 225; + copper reported, 226; + location, 230; + Columbus at, 294-295; + mentioned, 321, 338, 359, 408. + +Portugal, relations with Spain, 246. + Columbus received in, 253-256; + and Demarcation Line, 323, 416 n., 430; + and treaty of Tordesillas, 430. + +Pozas, Isla de las, 408. + +Principe, Puerto del, 148; + Columbus leaves, 150; + Columbus returns towards, 151. + +Ptolemy, geographical system, 329 n., 396-397. + +Puerto Sancto, Columbus at, 320. + +Puerto Santo, in Cuba, Columbus at, 162-166; + natives, 164-165. + +Punta Santa, 196, 199. + + +Queen's Garden, islands, 391, 405 n. + +Quinsay, and Columbus's belief in Asian landfall, 126, 136 n., 406 n. + +Quintero, Cristóbal, and the _Pinta_, 92. + + +Rascon, Gomes, and the _Pinta_, 92. + +Rastelo, Columbus passes, 251; + ship of King of Portugal near, 252. + +Ratos, Isla de, 198 n. + +Redondo, Cabo, 220. + +Retrete, harbor, 399, 405 n. + +Reyniness, Thorfinn Karlsefni in, 43. + +Ricchieri, Ludovico, _Antiquarum Lectionum Libri XVI._, 329 n. + +Rico, Cabo, 356. + +Roca, Cabo de la, 220 n. + +Roja, Punta, 217. + +Roldan, the pilot, 235; + charts route, 237. + +Roldan, Francisco, revolt, 360, 366, 373-374; + and Bobadilla, 376. + +Romero, El, island, 356. + +Ross, conquered by Thorstein the Red and Earl Sigurd the Mighty, 14. + +Rucia, Punta, 213 n. + +Ruiz, Sancho, charts route, 237. + +Rum Cay, 115. + + +Sabeta, 345. + +Sabor, Cabo de, 356. + +Sacro, Puerto, 221. + +Saga-age, in Iceland, 7. + +St. Martin, island, 291 n. + +St. Nicholas Mole, Hayti, 168 n. + +St. Ursula, island, 294 n. + +Sal, La, island, Columbus near, 324. + +Saltes, bar of, 91; + Columbus crosses, 257. + +Samana, Bay of, described, 221; + Columbus leaves, 228; + mentioned, 295 n. + +Samana, peninsula, 221 n. + +Samaot, 119, 120, 122. + +San Honorato, 196 n. + +San Juan, _see_ Porto Rico. + +San Juan River, Nicaragua, 393 n. + +San Miguel, Columbus approaches, 247. + +San Nicolas, Puerto de, described, 169-170. + +San Salvador, name given by Columbus to landfall, 114, 115, 151, 263; + natives, 116-117. + +San Salvador, name given by Columbus to river and port in Cuba, 131, 133. + +San Theramo, Cape, 229. + +Sanchez, Rodrigo, 109; + at Guanahani, 110; + in Cuba, 140. + +Sancta Ana, Cape, 327. + +Santa Catalina, harbor, 156. + +Santa Catherina, island, 322, 365. + +Santa Cruz, island, 293 n.; + reported proximity of mainland, 359. + +Santa Maria de la Concepcion, discovered, 115, 263; + mentioned, 117; + Columbus sails from, 118. + +Santa Maria, Azores, Columbus reaches, 236; + attempted seizure of Columbus at, 245-249; + mentioned, 250. + +Santangel, Luis de, Columbus's letter to, 243 n., 252 n., 259-272, 369. + +Santo Domingo, 321-322, 365; + Columbus's arrival, 366; + revolts, 369; + Bobadilla's arrival, 375-383; + departure of Columbus, 391 n. + +Santo Tomas, island, 187, 188, 189, 198, 199, 208. + +São Thiago, Columbus at, 324 n., 325-326. + +Saometo, _see_ Isabella, island. + +Saona, 322. + +Sara, Punta, 349. + +Scotland, and Thorstein the Red, 14. + +Seca, Punta, 220, 349. + +Sera, distance from Cape St. Vincent, estimated by Ptolemy, 397 n. + +Sesua, Punta, 220 n. + +Seven Cities, myth, and John Cabot's voyage, 425. + +Seville, letter of Dr. Chanca to Cabildo of, 280-313. + +Sierpe, Boca de la, named, 340; + mentioned, 354. + +Sierpe, Cabo de, 211. + +Siete Hermanos, Los, 212 n. + +Sigrid, wife of Thorstein of Lysufirth, death, 27, 28. + +Sigurd the Mighty, Earl, 14. + +Skagafirth, Karlsefni arrives at, 65. + +Skalholt, Bishop of, ordered to inquire into affairs of Gardar bishopric, +73. + +Skalholt annals, extract, 69. + +Skrellings, 11; + appearance, 36; + trade with Northmen, 37; + attack Northmen, 38-39; + of Markland, 41; + attack Thorvald, 55; + trade with Thorfinn Karlsefni, 60; + attack Thorfinn Karlsefni, 61-62. + +Slave-trade, Indian, 378. + +Slavery, Indian, and Columbus, 344. + +Snaefell, Eric sails to, 17, 46. + +Snaefells-iokul, Eric sails from, 17, 46. + +Snaefellsness, 18. + +Snorri, son of Thorfinn Karlsefni, 41, 43, 60, 66. + +Snorri, Thorbrand's son, 30; + accompanies Thorfinn Karlsefni to Greenland, 30; + accompanies Thorfinn Karlsefni to Vinland, 31, 35-36, 38-39. + +Snorri Thorbrandsson, saga of Thorfinn Karlsefni and, _see_ Eric the Red, +saga of. + +Social life in Greenland in tenth century, soothsaying, 21-23; + Yule feast, 31. + +Sol, Rio del, 143. + +Solvi, settles in Greenland, 47. + +Soncino, Raimondo de, first letter to Duke of Milan, 424-425; + second letter, 425-429. + +Soothsaying, an exhibition in Greenland, 21-23. + +South America, Columbus on coast, 331-363; + explorations of Hojeda and Pinzon, 360 n.; + Earthly Paradise, 364-365; + first settlement of Spaniards, 403 n.; + and Asia, 397 n. + +Spain, Columbus's suggestions of colonial policy for, 160, 273-277; + and Demarcation Line, 323, 416 n., 430; + and Columbus's discoveries, 351, 352, 360-361, 363-364, 390. + +Spice Islands, Cipango confused by Cabot with, 427 n. + +Spice trade of the East, 427 n. + +Stokkaness, Thorbiorn settles at, 23. + +Straumey, 33. + +Straumfiord, 34. _See_ Streamfirth. + +Streamfirth, arrival of Thorfinn Karlsefni and Snorri, 39; + Thorfinn Karlsefni in, 41; + arrival of ship from Greenland, 69. + +Styr Thorgrimsson, 16, 45; + accompanies Eric on voyage, 45. + +Sudrey, 16. + +Sutherland, conquered by Thorstein the Red and Earl Sigurd the Mighty, 14. + +Svend Estridson, king of Denmark, 67, 68. + + +Tajado, Cabo, 220. + +Tanais, country of, 426. + +Tapion, Rio, 212 n. + +Taxamo, Puerto de, 147 n. + +Tello, Gomez, appointed receiver of royal dues, 275 n. + +Tenerife, Columbus near, 93. + +Terceira, Pedro Alonso Niño near, 236. + +Testigos, Los, discovered, 356. + +Thiodhild, _see_ Thorhild. + +Thorbiorg, called Little Sibyl, prophesies, 21-23. + +Thorbiorn, Vifil's son, 15, 16; + gives feasts, 19, 20; + goes to Greenland, 20; + sails to Brattahlid, 23; + mentioned, 26, 27, 45; + death, 29. + +Thorbiorn Gleamer, settles in Greenland, 47. + +Thorbrand, of Alptafirth, sons of, 16. + +Thorbrand, son of Snorri, 38. + +Thord of Höfdi, descendants, 30. + +Thord the Yeller, sons of, 16, 45. + +Thorfinn Karlsefni, and Hauk's book, 5; + and North America, 11; + date of voyages, 12, 43 n.; + in Greenland, 30-31; + marries Gudrid, 31, 59; + voyage, 31-42, 59-62; + in Norway, 65; + in Iceland, 43, 65; + descendants, 43-44, 66. + +Thorfinn Karlsefni, saga of, _see_ Eric the Red, saga of. + +Thorgeir of Hitardal, 16, 45. + +Thorgeir of Thorgeirsfell, 18. + +Thorgeir, Vifil's son, in Iceland, 15; + marriage, 18. + +Thorgest, quarrels with Eric the Red, 16, 45; + defeats Eric, 17. + +Thorgils, son of Leif, 24. + +Thorgunna, 24. + +Thorhall the Huntsman, 30; + accompanies expedition of Thorfinn Karlsefni, 32; + asks aid of Thor, 34; + sails in search of Vinland, 34-35; + fate, 35; + Thorstein Karlsefni goes in search of, 39. + +Thorhild, wife of Eric, 15, 23, 45; + embraces Christianity, 26. + +Thori Eastman, in Greenland, 54; + death, 54. + +Thorkel, entertains Thorbiorn, 20-21. + +Thorlak, Bishop, 43 n. + +Thorsnessthing, 16, 45. + +Thorstein Ericson, 23; + leads expedition towards land discovered by Leif, 26, 56; + failure, 27, 56-57; + weds Gudrid, 27, 56; + in Western Settlement, 27, 57; + death, 28-58; + prophecy of Gudrid's fate, 29, 58, 59; + mentioned, 48. + +Thorstein of Lysufirth, entertains Thorstein Ericson and Gudrid, 27-28, +57-58; + accompanies Gudrid to Ericsfirth, 59. + +Thorstein the Red, and Scots, 14. + +Thorvald, father of Eric, goes to Iceland, 15, 45. + +Thorvald, son of Eric, and the Uniped, 40; + mentioned, 48; + voyage to Wineland, 54-56; + death, 56. + +Thorvald Kodransson, 46. + +Thorvard, accompanies expedition of Karlsefni, 32; + marriage, 48; + and death of Helgi and Finnbogi, 64. + +Thurid, daughter of Eyvind Easterling, 14. + +Thurid, daughter of Thorbiorn Vifilson, _see_ Gudrid. + +Tobacco-smoking, earliest reference, 141 n. + +Tordesillas, Treaty of, 323 n., 326 n., 430. + +Torres, Antonio de, sent back to Spain, 312 n.; + mentioned, 369; + and Columbus's letter to sovereigns concerning Demarcation Line, 382. + +Torres, Doña Juana de, Columbus's letter to, 369-383. + +Torres, Luis de, sent ashore at Cuba, 136. + +Torres, Cabo de, 187, 188. + +Tortuga Island, 168, 172, 174; + Columbus reaches, 178; + described, 179; + natives, 180, 183; + reports of gold, 184. + +Toscanelli map, 101 n. + +Tradir, Eric at, 16. + +Tramontana, La, island, 348, 349. + +Triana, Rodrigo de, sights land, 109. + +Trinidad, discovered, 331; + Columbus seeks harbor, 333; + size, 334, 340; + Columbus's crew lands, 335; + Indians, 335-336; + climate, 337; + fruits, 338; + animals, 338-339. + +Trivigliano, Angelo, letters of, mentioned, 318. + +Trujillo, Columbus near, 391 n., 392 n. + +Turuqueira, 290. + +Tyrker, accompanies Leif on voyage of discovery, 50; +in Vinland, 52-53. + + +"Uniped" episode, 40. + +Uvægi, 41. + + +Vætilldi, 41. + +Valldidida, reported to be a king of the Skrellings, 41. + +Valle del Paraiso, 180. + +Valparaiso, Portugal, Columbus at, 254. + +Valthiof, and Eric the Red, 16. + +Valthiofsstadir, landslide caused by Eric's thralls at, 15. + +Vatnshorn, 15, 16, 45. + +Veragua, report of mines, 394; + Columbus reaches, 400-401; + explored, 401; + mines found, 401; + natives, 401-402; + signs of gold, 411; + advantages for settlement, 411-412; + and Columbus's mythological geography, 413; + gold of Quibian, 414; + official appointments, 415. + +Verde, Cabo, 129. + +Verde, Simone, letter of, mentioned, 318. + +Vespucci, Amerigo, and naming of America, 359 n. + +Vifil, freed by Aud, 15. + +Vifilsdal, given by Aud to Vifil, 15. + +Vinland, and Northmen, sources, 3-13; + verity of tradition, 4, 7-8, 11, 13; + location, 10, 37 n., 67 n.; + natives, 10-11; + chronology of voyages, 12, 43 n.; + Leif's discovery, 25, 50-54; + Thorstein Ericson's attempt, 26-27; + voyage of Biarni Herjulfson, 47-49; + Thorvald's voyage, 54-56; + Thorfinn Karlsefni's expedition, 31-42, 59-62; + expedition of Finnbogi and Freydis, 62-64; + described by Adam of Bremen, 67; + Bishop Eric's expedition, 69. + +Voyages, Gunnbiorn, 16, 46; + Eric the Red, 16-17, 45-46; + Leif Ericson, 25, 50-54; + Thorstein Ericson, 26-27; + Biarni Herjulfson, 47-49; + Thorvald, 54-56; + Thorfinn Karlsefni, 31-42, 59-62; + Finnbogi and Freydis, 62-64; + Bishop Eric, 69; + Columbus's first, 89-258, 263-272; + second, 278-313; + third, 314-366; + fourth, 389-418; + John Cabot (1497), 423-424. + + +Watling Island, 110 n. + +Wonder-strands, 33, 34, 35. + + +Xamaná, 295, 297. + +Xaraguá, 345; + and Adrian de Muxica's revolt, 374, 375. + + +Yamaye, _see_ Jamaica. + +Yaqui River, 216 n., 298 n. + +Yaquino, port, 365, 391 n. + +Yazual, Isla, _see_ Padre y Hijo, Cabo de. + +Yebra, river, 401 n. + +Ysabeta, island, 347, 349, 350. + +Yucatan, and the Mayas, 215 n., 410 n. + +Yuyapari, 334, 339, 340, 349, 350, 353. + + +Zayto, and Columbus's belief that he had reached Asia, 136. + +Zuruquia, 297. + + + + +Transcriber's Note: + +The following typographical errors have been maintained in this version +of the text: + + Note Page Error + TN-1 101 "certainis lands" for "certain islands" + TN-2 173 'circumference of 200 leagues. All .... like a people at + war."' Close quotes misplaced, should follow "200 leagues" + TN-3 221, fn. 5 A . was omitted after "by Columbus" + TN-4 229, fn. 2 "Cabod el Engaño" should read "Cabo del Engaño" (258) + TN-5 268, fn. 2 "Historia de las Reyes Catolicos" should read + "Historia de los Reyes Catolicos" + TN-6 295, fn. 6 "October 21. and note" should have a comma after 21 + TN-7 329, fn. 6 Columbiana for Colombiana + TN-8 359, fn. 2 "et seq." for "et seqq." + TN-9 373, fn. 4 "III. 23-42 He was" Period missing after 42 + TN-10 411 "during fours years" for "during four years" + +The following words were inconsistently spelled: + + Acul / Acúl + Arna-Magnæan / Arne-Magnæan + Christóbal / Cristóbal + Encyclopædia / Encyclopaedia + Ericson / Ericsson + Guacanagari / Guacanagarí + Maicí / Maici + mother-of-pearl / mother-o'-pearl + Pinzon / Pinzón + Santa Maria / Santa María + Skalholt / Skálholt + Snaefell / Snæfell + Tenerife / Teneriffe + Xaragua / Xaraguá + Yuyapari / Yuyaparí + + +The following words had inconsistent hyphenation: + + bedchamber / bed-chamber + crossbow / cross-bow + flood tide / flood-tide + highborn / high-born + Horsehead / Horse-head + housewife / house-wife + landslide / land-slide + lookout / look-out + nightfall / night-fall + northeast / north-east + northwest / north-west + sandbanks / sand-banks + sawmills / saw-mills + shipmates / ship-mates + shipworm / ship-worm + southwest / south-west + stockfish / stock-fish + Streamfirth / Stream-firth + Thorsnessthing / Thorsness-thing + Wonderstrands / Wonder-strands + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Northmen, Columbus and Cabot, +985-1503, by Various + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE NORTHMEN *** + +***** This file should be named 18571-0.txt or 18571-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/1/8/5/7/18571/ + +Produced by Jason Isbell, Julia Miller, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |